SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Writing Analytically
This page intentionally left blank
iii
Writing Analytically
FIFTH EDITION
David Rosenwasser
Muhlenberg College
Jill Stephen
Muhlenberg College
Australia • Brazil • Mexico • Singapore
Spain • United Kingdom • United States
Publisher: Lyn Uhl
Development Editor: Mary Beth Walden
Assistant Editor: Lindsey Veautour
Technology Project Manager: Stephanie Gregoire
Marketing Manager: Mandee Eckersley
Marketing Assistant: Kathleen Remsberg
Marketing Communications Manager:
Stacey Purviance
Senior Content Project Manager: Michael Lepera
Senior Art Director: Cate Barr
Print Buyer: Mary Beth Hennebury
Text Permissions Editor: Mardell Glinski Schultz
Photo Permissions Editor: Sheri Blaney
Production Service: Graphic World Publishing
Services
Text Designer: John Ritland
Compositor: Graphic World Inc.
Cover Designer: Maxine Ressler
Cover Image: © Thinkstock/RF/Ron Chapple/
Jupiter Images
Writing Analytically, Fifth Edition
David Rosenwasser
Jill Stephen
© 2009, 2006 Thomson Wadsworth, a part of
The Thomson Corporation. Thomson, the Star
logo, and Wadsworth are trademarks used herein
under license.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this
work covered by the copyright hereon may
be reproduced or used in any form or by any
means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
including photocopying, recording, taping, Web
distribution, information storage and retrieval
systems, or in any other manner—without the
written permission of the publisher.
Printed in Canada
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 10 09 08 07
Library of Congress Control Number:
2007939138
ISBN-13: 978-1-413-03310-6
ISBN-10: 1-413-03310-5
Thomson Higher Education
25 Thomson Place
Boston, MA 02210
USA
For more information about our products, contact
us at:
Thomson Learning Academic Resource Center
1-800-423-0563
For permission to use material from this text or
product, submit a request online at
http://www.thomsonrights.com.
Any additional questions about permissions
can be submitted by e-mail to
[email protected]
v
UNIT I THE ANALYTICAL FRAME OF MIND:
INTRODUCTION TO
ANALYTICAL METHODS 1
CHAPTER 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does 3
CHAPTER 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind 17
CHAPTER 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods 31
CHAPTER 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t,
and How to Do It 49
CHAPTER 5 Analyzing Arguments 73
CHAPTER 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis 93
UNIT II WRITING THE ANALYTICAL ESSAY 107
CHAPTER 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works 109
CHAPTER 8 Using Evidence to Build a Paper:
10 on 1 versus 1 on 10 123
CHAPTER 9 Making a Thesis Evolve 139
CHAPTER 10 Structuring the Paper: Forms and Formats 159
CHAPTER 11 Introductions and Conclusions 179
CHAPTER 12 Recognizing and Fixing Weak Thesis Statements
193
BRIEF CONTENTS
UNIT III WRITING THE RESEARCHED PAPER 203
CHAPTER 13 Reading Analytically 205
CHAPTER 14 Using Sources Analytically: The Conversation
Model 215
CHAPTER 15 Organizing and Revising the Research Paper:
Two
Sample Essays 227
CHAPTER 16 Finding, Citing, and Integrating Sources 241
UNIT IV GRAMMAR AND STYLE 269
CHAPTER 17 Style: Choosing Words for Precision, Accuracy,
and Tone 271
CHAPTER 18 Style: Shaping Sentences for Precision
and Emphasis 287
CHAPTER 19 Common Grammatical Errors and How
to Fix Them 305
vi Brief Contents
vii
Preface xvii
UNIT I THE ANALYTICAL FRAME OF MIND:
INTRODUCTION TO
ANALYTICAL METHODS 1
CHAPTER 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does 3
First Principles 3
Analysis Defined 3
The Five Analytical Moves 4
Move 1: Suspend Judgment 5
Move 2: Define Significant Parts and How They’re Related 5
Move 3: Make the Implicit Explicit 6
Move 4: Look for Patterns 8
Move 5: Keep Reformulating Questions and Explanations 9
Analysis at Work: A Sample Paper 10
Distinguishing Analysis from Argument, Summary, and
Expressive
Writing 11
Applying the Five Analytical Moves: The Example of
Whistler’s Mother 13
Analysis and Personal Associations 15
CHAPTER 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind 17
Fear of Uncertainty 17
Prejudging 18
Blinded by Habit 19
The Judgment Reflex 20
Generalizing 21
Overpersonalizing (Naturalizing Our Assumptions) 23
Opinions (versus Ideas) 25
What It Means to Have an Idea 26
Rules of Thumb for Handling Complexity 28
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods 31
The Toolkit 32
Paraphrase ! 3 33
Notice and Focus (Ranking) 35
Prompts: Interesting and Strange 35
10 on 1 36
The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast
37
Thinking Recursively with Strands and Binaries 39
Generating Ideas with The Method: An Example 40
Doing The Method on a Poem: Our Analysis 40
A Procedure for Finding and Querying Binaries 43
Freewriting 44
Passage-Based Focused Freewriting 45
Writers’ Notebooks 46
Passage-Based Focused Freewriting: An Example 47
CHAPTER 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t,
and How to Do It 49
Pushing Observations to Conclusions: Asking So What? 50
Asking So What?: An Example 51
Implications versus Hidden Meanings 54
The Limits on Interpretation 56
Plausible versus Implausible Interpretations 57
Interpretive Contexts and Multiple Meanings 58
Specifying an Interpretive Context: An Example 58
Intention as an Interpretive Context 59
What Is and Isn’t “Meant” to Be Analyzed 60
The Fortune Cookie School of Interpretation 61
The Anything Goes School of Interpretation 62
Seems to Be about X but Could Also Be (Is Really) about Y 63
Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover
65
Description of a New Yorker Cover, Dated October 9, 2000 65
Using The Method to Identify Patterns of Repetition and
Contrast 67
viii Contents
Pushing Observations to Conclusions: Selecting an Interpretive
Context 68
Making the Interpretation Plausible 69
Arriving at an Interpretive Conclusion: Making Choices 70
CHAPTER 5 Analyzing Arguments 73
The Role of Binaries in Argument 73
A Procedure for Reformulating Binaries in Argument 74
Strategy 1: Locate a Range of Opposing Categories 74
Strategy 2: Analyze and Define the Key Terms 74
Strategy 3: Question the Accuracy of the Binary 75
Strategy 4: Substitute “To What Extent?” for “Either/Or” 75
Uncovering Assumptions (Reasoning Back to Premises) 76
Uncovering Assumptions: A Brief Example 78
A Procedure for Uncovering Assumptions 78
Analyzing an Argument: The Example of “Playing by the
Antioch Rules” 79
Strategies for Developing an Argument by Reasoning Back to
Premises 82
The Problems with Debate-Style Argument 84
Seeing the Trees as Well as the Forest: Toulmin and the Rules
of Argument 85
Refining Categorical Thinking: Two Examples 88
A Brief Glossary of Common Logical Errors 90
CHAPTER 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis 93
Rhetorical Analysis 93
Rhetorical Analysis of a Place: A Brief Example 94
Rhetorical Analysis of an Advertisement: A Student Paper 94
Summary 96
Strategies for Making Summaries More Analytical 96
Personal Response: The Reaction Paper 98
Strategies for Making Personal Responses More Analytical 98
Agree/Disagree 100
Comparison/Contrast 100
Strategies for Making Comparison/Contrast More Analytical
100
Contents ix
Definition 102
Strategies for Making Definition More Analytical 102
UNIT II WRITING THE ANALYTICAL ESSAY 107
CHAPTER 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works 109
The Function of Evidence 110
The Missing Connection: Linking Evidence and Claims 110
“Because I Say So”: Unsubstantiated Claims 111
Distinguishing Evidence from Claims 111
Giving Evidence a Point: Making Details Speak 112
How to Make Details Speak: A Brief Example 113
What Counts as Evidence? 114
Kinds of Evidence 116
Statistical Evidence 116
Anecdotal Evidence 117
Authorities as Evidence 117
Empirical Evidence 118
Experimental Evidence 118
Textual Evidence 118
Using What You Have 119
CHAPTER 8 Using Evidence to Build a Paper:
10 on 1 versus 1 on 10 123
Developing a Thesis Is More Than Repeating an Idea (1 on 10)
123
What’s Wrong with Five-Paragraph Form? 124
Analyzing Evidence in Depth: 10 on 1 127
Demonstrating the Representativeness of Your Example 128
10 on 1 and Disciplinary Conventions 128
Pan, Track, and Zoom: Using 10 on 1 to Build a Paper 128
Doing 10 on 1: A Brief Example (Tiananmen Square) 129
Converting 1 on 10 into 10 on 1: A Student Paper (Flood
Stories) 131
Revising the Draft Using 10 on 1 and Difference within
Similarity 133
Doing 10 on 1: A Student Paper (Good Bye Lenin!) 136
x Contents
Contents xi
A Template for Organizing Papers Using 10 on 1: An
Alternative to Five-
Paragraph Form 138
CHAPTER 9 Making a Thesis Evolve 139
What a Strong Thesis Does 139
Making a Thesis Evolve: A Brief Example (Tax Laws) 140
The Reciprocal Relationship between Thesis and Evidence: The
Thesis
as Lens 142
What a Good Thesis Statement Looks Like 143
Six Steps for Making a Thesis Evolve 144
Evolving a Thesis in an Exploratory Draft: A Student Draft
on Las Meninas 145
Evolving a Thesis in a Later-Stage Draft: The Example of
Educating Rita 153
Locating the Evolving Thesis in the Final Draft 156
CHAPTER 10 Structuring the Paper: Forms and Formats 159
Romantics versus Formalists 159
The Two Functions of Formats: Product and Process 160
Using Formats Heuristically: A Brief Example 161
Classical Forms and Formats 162
Writing Analytically’s Forms and Formats 162
Pan, Track, and Zoom: Using 10 on 1 to Build a Paper 163
Constellating 163
A Template for Organizing Papers Using 10 on 1 163
Six Steps for Making a Thesis Evolve 164
The Toolkit as Template 164
The Shaping Force of Thesis Statements 165
The Shaping Force of Transitions 166
The Shaping Force of Common Thought Patterns: Deduction
and Induction 167
Thesis Slots 169
Negotiating Disciplinary Formats 169
Three Common Organizing Strategies 171
Climactic Order 171
xii Contents
Comparison/Contrast 172
Concessions and Refutations 173
Structuring the Paragraph 173
The Topic Sentence Controversy 174
Some Theories on Paragraph Structure 174
Finding the Skeleton of an Essay: An Example (September 11th:
A National Tragedy?) 175
CHAPTER 11 Introductions and Conclusions 179
Introductions and Conclusions as Social Sites 179
What Introductions Do: “Why What I’m Saying Matters” 180
Putting an Issue or Question in Context 181
How Much to Introduce Up-Front: Typical Problems 182
Digression 182
Incoherence 183
Prejudgment 183
Using Procedural Openings 184
Good Ways to Begin 185
What Conclusions Do: The Final So What? 186
Solving Typical Problems in Conclusions 188
Redundancy 188
Raising a Totally New Point 188
Overstatement 189
Anticlimax 189
Introductions in the Sciences 189
Conclusions in the Sciences: The Discussion Section 191
CHAPTER 12 Recognizing and Fixing Weak Thesis Statements
193
Five Kinds of Weak Thesis Statements and How to Fix Them
193
Weak Thesis Type 1: The Thesis Makes No Claim 194
Weak Thesis Type 2: The Thesis Is Obviously True or Is a
Statement of Fact 195
Weak Thesis Type 3: The Thesis Restates Conventional Wisdom
195
Weak Thesis Type 4: The Thesis Bases Its Claim on Personal
Conviction 196
Weak Thesis Type 5: The Thesis Makes an Overly Broad Claim
198
Contents xiii
How to Rephrase Thesis Statements: Specify and Subordinate
199
Is It Okay to Phrase a Thesis as a Question? 201
UNIT III WRITING THE RESEARCHED PAPER 203
CHAPTER 13 Reading Analytically 205
How to Read: Words Matter 206
Becoming Conversant Instead of Reading for the Gist 207
Three Tools to Improve Your Reading: A Review 207
The Pitch, the Complaint, and the Moment 208
Uncovering the Assumptions in a Reading 209
Reading with and against the Grain 210
Using a Reading as a Model 212
Applying a Reading as a Lens 213
CHAPTER 14 Using Sources Analytically: The Conversation
Model 215
Six Strategies for Analyzing Sources 215
“Source Anxiety” and What to Do about It 216
The Conversation Analogy 216
Ways to Use a Source as a Point of Departure 217
Six Strategies for Analyzing Sources 219
Make Your Sources Speak 219
Attend Carefully to the Language of Your Sources by Quoting
or Paraphrasing 220
Supply Ongoing Analysis of Sources (Don’t Wait Until the End)
221
Use Your Sources to Ask Questions, Not Just to Provide
Answers 221
Put Your Sources into Conversation with One Another 223
Find Your Own Role in the Conversation 225
CHAPTER 15 Organizing and Revising the Research Paper:
Two
Sample Essays 227
A Sample Research Paper and How to Revise It: The Flight
from Teaching 227
Strategies for Writing and Revising Research Papers 230
Be Sure to Make Clear Who Is Talking 230
xiv Contents
Analyze as You Go Along Rather Than Saving Analysis for the
End (Disciplinary
Conventions Permitting) 230
Quote in Order to Analyze: Make Your Sources Speak 231
Try Converting Key Assertions in the Source into Questions 231
Get Your Sources to Converse with One Another, and Actively
Referee the Conflicts
among Them 232
A Good Sample Research Paper: Horizontal and Vertical
Mergers within
the Healthcare Industry 233
Guidelines for Writing the Researched Paper 238
CHAPTER 16 Finding, Citing, and Integrating Sources 241
Getting Started 242
Three Rules of Thumb for Getting Started 244
Electronic Research: Finding Quality on the Web 244
Understanding Domain Names 245
Print Corollaries 246
Web Classics 246
Wikipedia, Google, and Blogs 246
Asking the Right Questions 247
Subscriber-Only Databases 248
Indexes of Scholarly Journals 249
Who’s Behind That Website? 250
A Foolproof Recipe for Great Research—Every Time 252
Citation Guides on the Web 254
A Librarian’s Brief Guidelines to Successful Research 254
Plagiarism and the Logic of Citation 254
Why Does Plagiarism Matter? 255
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) about Plagiarism 256
How to Cite Sources 257
Single Author, MLA Style 258
Single Author, APA Style 259
How to Integrate Quotations into Your Paper 260
How to Prepare an Abstract 262
Guidelines for Finding, Citing, and Integrating Sources 264
Contents xv
UNIT IV GRAMMAR AND STYLE 269
CHAPTER 17 Style: Choosing Words for Precision, Accuracy,
and Tone 271
Not Just Icing on the Cake: Style Is Meaning 272
How Style Shapes Thought: A Brief Example 273
Making Distinctions: Shades of Meaning 273
Word Histories and the OED 274
What’s Bad about “Good” and “Bad” 275
Concrete and Abstract Diction 276
Latinate Diction 277
Choosing Words: Some Rhetorical Considerations 278
Tone 278
Formal and Colloquial Styles: Who’s Writing to Whom, and
Why Does It Matter? 279
The Person Question 281
The First Person Pronoun “I”: Pro and Con 281
The Second Person Pronoun “You”: Pro and Con 282
Using and Avoiding Jargon 283
CHAPTER 18 Style: Shaping Sentences for Precision
and Emphasis 287
How to Recognize the Four Basic Sentence Types 287
The Simple Sentence 288
The Compound Sentence 288
The Complex Sentence 289
The Compound-Complex Sentence 289
So Why Do the Four Sentence Types Matter? 290
Coordination, Subordination, and Emphasis 290
Coordination 290
Reversing the Order of Coordinate Clauses for Emphasis 291
So Why Does the Order of Coordinate Clauses Matter? 291
Subordination 292
Reversing Main and Subordinate Clauses 292
So Why Does It Matter What Goes in the Subordinate Clause?
293
Parallel Structure 293
So Why Does Parallel Structure Matter? 295
xvi Contents
Periodic and Cumulative Sentences: Two Effective Sentence
Shapes 295
The Periodic Sentence: Delaying Closure for Emphasis 295
The Cumulative Sentence: Starting Fast 297
So Why Do Periodic and Cumulative Sentences Matter? 298
Cutting the Fat 298
Expletive Constructions 299
Static versus Active Verbs: “To Be” or “Not to Be” 299
Active and Passive Voices: Doing and Being Done To 301
About Prescriptive Style Manuals 302
Experiment! 303
CHAPTER 19 Common Grammatical Errors and How
to Fix Them 305
Why Correctness Matters 306
The Concept of Basic Writing Errors (BWEs) 306
What Punctuation Marks Say: A Quick-Hit Guide 307
Nine Basic Writing Errors and How to Fix Them 309
BWE 1: Sentence Fragments 309
A Further Note on Dashes and Colons 311
BWE 2: Comma Splices and Fused (or Run-On) Sentences 311
BWE 3: Errors in Subject–Verb Agreement 314
A Note on Nonstandard English 315
BWE 4: Shifts in Sentence Structure (Faulty Predication) 316
BWE 5: Errors in Pronoun Reference 316
Ambiguous Reference 317
A Note on Sexism and Pronoun Usage 319
BWE 6: Misplaced Modifiers and Dangling Participles 319
BWE 7: Errors in Using Possessive Apostrophes 320
BWE 8: Comma Errors 321
BWE 9: Spelling/Diction Errors That Interfere with Meaning
323
Glossary of Grammatical Terms 325
CHAPTER 19 APPENDIX Answer Key (with Discussion) 330
CREDITS 339
INDEX 341
xvii
Writing Analytically focuses on ways of using writing to
discover and develop ideas.
That is, the book treats writing as a tool of thought—a means of
undertaking sus-
tained acts of inquiry and reflection.
For some people, learning to write is associated less with
thinking than with ar-
ranging words, sentences, and ideas in clear and appropriate
form. The achievement
of good writing does, of course, require attention to form, but
writing is also a mental
activity. Through writing we figure out what things mean
(which is our definition
of analysis). The act of writing allows us to discover and,
importantly, to interrogate
what we think and believe.
All the editions of Writing Analytically have evolved from what
we learned while
establishing and directing a cross-curricular writing program at
a four-year liberal
arts college (a program we began in 1989 and continue to
direct). The clearest con-
sensus we’ve found among faculty is on the kind of writing that
they say they want
from their students: not issue-based argument, not personal
reflection (the “reaction”
paper), not passive summary, but analysis, with its patient and
methodical inquiry
into the meaning of information. Yet most books of writing
instruction devote only
a chapter, if that, to analysis.
The main discovery we made when we first wrote this book was
that none of the
reading we’d done about thesis statements seemed to match
either our own practice
as writers and teachers or the practice of published writers.
Textbooks about writing
tend to present thesis statements as the finished products of an
act of thinking—as
inert statements that writers should march through their papers
from beginning
to end. In practice, the relationship between thesis and evidence
is far more fluid
and dynamic.
In most good writing, the thesis grows and changes in response
to evidence, even
in final drafts. In other words, the relationship between thesis
and evidence is recip-
rocal: the thesis acts as a lens for focusing what we see in the
evidence, but the evi-
dence, in turn, creates pressure to refocus the lens. The root
issue here is the writer’s
attitude toward evidence. The ability of writers to discover
ideas and improve on
them in revision depends largely on their ability to use evidence
as a means of testing
and developing ideas rather than just supporting them.
By the time we came to writing the third edition, we had begun
to focus on ob-
servation skills. We recognized that students’ lack of these
skills is as much a prob-
lem as thought-strangling formats like five-paragraph form or a
too-rigid notion of
thesis. We began to understand that observation doesn’t come
naturally; it needs to
be taught. The book advocates locating observation as a
separate phase of thinking
before the writer becomes committed to a thesis. Much weak
writing is prematurely
and too narrowly thesis driven precisely because people try to
formulate the thesis
before they have done much (or any) analyzing.
PREFACE
The solution to this problem sounds easy to accomplish, but it
isn’t. As
writers and thinkers, we all need to slow down—to dwell longer
in the open-
ended, exploratory, information-gathering stage. This requires
specific tasks
that will reduce the anxiety for answers, impede the reflex move
to judgments,
and encourage a more hands-on engagement with materials.
Writing Analytically
supplies these tasks for each phase of the writing and idea-
generating process:
making observations, inferring implications, and making the
leap to possible
conclusions.
WHAT’S NEW IN THIS EDITION
This edition of Writing Analytically marks the fourth time
we’ve had the chance to
revisit the book’s initial thinking on writing. The difficult but
also exciting thing about
repeatedly revising the same book is that the writer must keep
learning how to see
the logic of the book as a whole, even as new thinking rises
from earlier thinking and
threatens to displace it. We believe that we have now succeeded
at what we couldn’t
quite manage to do in the fourth edition—to integrate the early
versions of the book,
oriented largely toward thesis and evidence, with the later
editions of the book,
oriented toward observation and interpretation.
Here in brief (and in boldface) are the suggestions and
criticisms to which this
extensively rewritten and reorganized version of the book
responds:
• Put back the definition-of-analysis chapter containing the five
analytical
moves, which disappeared in the third edition. This edition
starts with a revised
version of the older chapter, now called Analysis: What It Is
and What It Does.
• Make things easier to find! Make core ideas stand out more
clearly.
And so . . . :
1. We have organized the book into four units to make the
book’s arguments
and advice clearer and more clearly incremental. These units
are:
I. The Analytical Frame of Mind: Introduction to Analytical
Methods
II. Writing the Analytical Essay
III. Writing the Researched Paper
IV. Grammar and Style
2. We have created separate chapters on matters that were not
adequately
pulled together and foregrounded in previous editions.
• The book’s observational strategies, such as 10 on 1 and The
Method,
now appear prominently in a single chapter called A Toolkit of
Analytical
Methods (Chapter 3).
• A revised chapter called Interpretation: What It Is, What It
Isn’t, and How
to Do It (Chapter 4) reunites materials on interpretation that
were split
up in the fourth edition.
• The book’s advice on analyzing and producing arguments now
appears
in a single chapter called Analyzing Arguments (Chapter 5).
xviii Preface
• A new chapter called Topics and Modes of Analysis (Chapter
6) adds
explicit discussion of rhetorical analysis, acknowledging it as
an ongoing
topic of the book, and restores attention to ways of making the
traditional
rhetorical modes, such as comparison and contrast, more
analytical.
• The book’s advice on organizing papers is now pulled
together in a
largely new chapter on organization called Structuring the
Paper: Forms
and Formats (Chapter 10), which also includes a new section on
para-
graphing. Readers will now know where to look for alternatives
to five-
paragraph form. The chapter invites readers to think of
organization in
terms of movement of mind at both the paper and paragraph
levels.
• Get rid of the overstuffed first chapter and restore the
unexpurgated version
of counterproductive habits of mind as a separate chapter. Done.
We recognize
that in the fourth edition we attempted to do what all writers,
not just our stu-
dents, too often do—pack everything into the opening. The parts
of this opening
chapter have now been broken up and redistributed more
logically. We have also
reorganized and rewritten our chapter on counterproductive
habits of mind,
which now appears as Chapter 2. We continue to believe, as the
chapter argues,
that it is hard to develop new thinking skills without first
becoming aware of
what’s wrong with our customary modes of response.
• Put the book’s advice on reading with the chapters on
researched writing. A
pared-down chapter called Reading Analytically (Chapter 13)
now opens the
book’s unit on research-based writing. In this chapter, we make
it clear that all of
the book’s strategies can be applied to reading, but we now
foreground some that
are particular to writing about reading—such as using a reading
as a lens—in this
revised reading chapter.
• Make the book shorter and less repetitive. We have tried to
prune every
sentence—in fact, every clause, phrase, and word—wherein we
had succumbed
to the temptation to say something twice when once would do.
We think we have
made the book more readable in both clarity and tone and
lighter to carry.
We continue to believe that the book’s schematic way of
describing the analytical
thought process will make students more confident thinkers,
better able to contend
with complexity and to move beyond the simplistic
agree/disagree response and pas-
sive assembling of downloaded information. We have faith in
the book’s various for-
mulae and verbal prompts for their ability to spur more
thoughtful writing and also
for the role they can play in making the classroom a more
genuinely engaging and
collaborative space. When students and teachers can share the
means of idea produc-
tion, class discussion and writing become better connected, and
students can more
easily learn that good ideas don’t just happen—they’re made.
HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
Writing Analytically is designed to be used in first-year writing
courses or seminars,
as well as in more advanced writing-intensive courses in a
variety of subject areas.
Preface xix
Though the book’s chapters form a logical sequence, each can
also stand alone and be
used in different sequences.
We assume that most professors will want to supply their own
subject matter for
students to write about. The book does, however, contain
writing exercises through-
out that can be applied to a wide range of materials—print and
visual, text-based
(reading), and experiential (writing from direct observation). In
the text itself we
suggest using newspapers, magazines, films, primary texts (both
fiction and nonfic-
tion), academic articles, textbooks, television, historical
documents, places, advertis-
ing, photographs, political campaigns, and so on.
There is, by the way, an edition of this book that contains
readings—Writing
Analytically with Readings. It includes writing assignments that
call on students to apply
the skills in the original book to writing about the readings and
to using the readings as
lenses for analyzing other material.
The book’s writing exercises take two forms: end-of-chapter
assignments that
could produce papers and informal writing exercises called “Try
This” that are em-
bedded inside the chapters near the particular skills they
employ. Many of the Try
This exercises could generate papers, but usually they are more
limited in scope,
asking readers to experiment with various kinds of data-
gathering and analysis.
The book acknowledges that various academic disciplines differ
in their expecta-
tions of student writing. Interspersed throughout the text are
boxes labeled Voices
from across the Curriculum. These were written for the book by
professors in various
disciplines who offer their disciplinary perspective on such
matters as reasoning
back to premises and determining what counts as evidence.
Overall, however, the
text concentrates on the many values and expectations that the
disciplines share
about writing.
THEORETICAL ORIENTATIONS
We have had the good fortune to interest others enough in our
work to stimulate
attack, much of it, we think, the result of misunderstanding. In
an effort to clarify
our own premises and origins, we offer the following disclosure
of our influences
and orientations.
The book is aligned with the thinking of Carl Rogers and others
on the goal of
making argument less combative, less inflected by a vocabulary
of military strategiz-
ing that discourages negotiation among competing points of
view and the evolution
of new ideas from the pressure of one idea against another.
The book is also heavily influenced by the early proponents of
the process move-
ment in writing pedagogy. Books such as Peter Elbow’s Writing
Without Teachers and
Ken Macrorie’s Telling Writing were standard fare in graduate
programs when we began
to teach. We came of age, so to speak, accepting that writing
instruction should focus on
writers’ process and not just on ways of shaping finished
products. As is now generally
recognized, the inherent romanticism and expressivist bias of
the process approach to
writing limited its usefulness for people who were interested in
teaching students how
to write for academic audiences. Despite the social scientific
approach that researchers
such as Janet Emig, James Britton, and Linda Flower (to name a
few) brought to the
xx Preface
understanding of students’ writing process, the process
approach to writing instruction
suffered a decline in status as trends in college writing
programs took up other causes.
(See, for example, the arguments of Patricia Bizzell, David
Bartholomae, Charles
Bazerman, and others, who reoriented compositionists toward
discourse analysis and
ethnographic research on the writing practices of other
disciplines.)
We continue to believe that attention to process and attention to
the stylistic and
epistemological norms of writing in the disciplines can and
should be brought into
accord. We think, further, that a relatively straightforward and
teachable set of strate-
gies can go a long way toward achieving this goal. The process
approach is not neces-
sarily expressivist, at least not exclusively so. Analytical
strategies with the power to
enrich students’ writing process can be taught, and they shed
light on the otherwise
mysterious-seeming nature of individuals’ creativity as thinkers.
The book has drawn some interesting critiques, based on
people’s assumptions
about our connection to particular theoretical orientations. One
such critique comes
from people who think the book invites students to think in a
“New Critical” vacuum—
that it is uncritically aligned with an unreformed, unself-
conscious and old-fashioned
New Critical mind-set. The midcentury interpretive movement
known as the New
Criticism has come to be misunderstood as rigidly materialist,
deriving meaning only
from the physical details that one can see on the page, on the
screen, on the sidewalk,
and so on. This is not the place to take up a comprehensive
assessment of the ideas and
impact of the New Criticism, but, as the best of the New Critics
clearly knew, things al-
ways mean (as our book explicitly argues) in context.
Interpretive contexts, which we dis-
cuss extensively in Chapter 4 and elsewhere, are determined by
the thing being observed;
but, in turn, they also determine what the observer sees. Ideas
are always the products of
assumptions about how best to situate observations in a frame
of reference. Only when
these interpretive frames, these ways of seeing and their
ideological underpinnings, are
made clear do the details begin to meaningfully and plausibly
“speak.”
We are aware that the language of binary oppositions, patterns
of repetition, and
organizing contrasts suggests not just the methods of the New
Critics but those of
their immediate successors, structuralists. Without embarking
here on an extended
foray into the evolution of theory in the latter half of the
twentieth century, we will
just say that the value assumptions of both the New Criticism
(with its faith in irony,
tension, and ambiguity) and structuralism (with its search for
universal structures
of mind and culture) do not automatically accompany their
methods. Any approach
to thinking and writing that values complexity will subscribe to
some extent to the
necessity of recognizing tension and irony and paradox and
ambiguity. As for finding
universal structures of mind and culture, we haven’t so grand a
goal, but we do think
that there is value in trying to state simply and clearly in
nontechnical language some
of the characteristic moves of mind that make some people
better thinkers than others
and better able to arrive at ideas.
Here are some other ways in which Writing Analytically might
lend itself to mis-
understandings. Its employment of verbal prompts like So what?
and its recom-
mendation of step-by-step procedures, such as the procedure for
making a thesis
evolve, should not be confused with prescriptive slot-filler
formulae for writing. Our
book does not prescribe a fill-in-the-blank grid for analyzing
data, but it does try to
Preface xxi
describe systematically what good thinkers do—as acts of
mind—when they are
confronted with data.
Our focus on words has also attracted critique. The theoretical
orientation that
has come to be called performance theory has emphasized the
idea that words alone
don’t adequately account for the meanings we make of them.
Words exist—their in-
terpretations exist—in how and why they are spoken in
particular circumstances,
genres, and traditions. Our view is that this essential emphasis
on the significance
of context does not diminish the importance of attending to
words. The situation is
rather like the one we addressed earlier in reference to the New
Criticism. Words mean
in particular contexts. It is reductive to assume that attention to
language means that
only words matter or that words matter in some context-less
vacuum. The methods
we define in Writing Analytically can be applied to nonverbal
and verbal data.
Interestingly, we were aware of, but had not actually studied,
the work of John Dewey
as we evolved our thinking for this book. Looking more closely
at his writing now, we
are struck by the number of key terms and assumptions our
thinking shares with his.
In his book How We Think, Dewey speaks, for example, of
“systematic reflection” as a
goal. He was interested, as are we, in what goes on in the
production of actual thinking,
rather than “setting forth the results of thinking” after the fact,
in the manner of formal
logic. On this subject Dewey writes, “When you are only
seeking the truth and of neces-
sity seeking somewhat blindly, you are in a radically different
position from the one you
are in when you are already in possession of the truth” (revised
edition 1933, 74–75).
Dewey thought, as do we, that habits of mind can be trained, but
first people have
to be made more conscious of them. This is what Writing
Analytically tries to accom-
plish. It begins with some of the same premises that Dewey and
others have offered:
• The importance of being able to dwell in and tolerate
uncertainty
• The importance of curiosity and knowing how to cultivate it
• The importance of being conscious of language
• The importance of observation
Dewey also said that people cannot make themselves have ideas.
This we believe
is not true. People can make themselves have ideas, and it is
possible to describe the
processes through which individuals enable themselves to make
interpretive leaps. It is
also possible (and necessary) for people to learn how to
differentiate ideas from other
things that are often mistaken for ideas, such as clichés and
opinions—products of
the deadening effect of habit (about which we have much to say
in the book’s opening
unit). Although the interpretive leaps from observation to idea
can probably never be
fully explained, we are not thus required to relegate the
meaning-making process to
the category of imponderable mystery.
ABOUT THE AUTHORS
David Rosenwasser and Jill Stephen are Professors of English at
Muhlenberg
College in Allentown, Pennsylvania, where they have co-
directed a Writing Across
the Curriculum (WAC) program since 1987. They began
teaching writing to college
xxii Preface
students in the 1970s—David at the University of Virginia and
then at the College of
William and Mary, and Jill at New York University and then at
Hunter College (CUNY).
Writing Analytically has grown out of their undergraduate
teaching and the seminars
on writing and writing instruction that they have offered to
faculty at Muhlenberg
and at other colleges and universities across the country.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Our greatest debt in this edition of the book is to Kenny
Marotta, who helped us
rethink the book. Like all great teachers, he let us see more
clearly the shape and im-
plications of our own thinking. Those of you unaware of his
gifts as a fiction writer are
missing a rare pleasure. Major thanks also go to developmental
editor extraordinaire
Mary Beth Walden for her tireless efforts on our behalf—her
understanding of how
we work; her ability to help us hide from distractions; her sound
advice, patience, and
good cheer. We are also very grateful to departing acquisitions
editor Aron Keesbury
for his frank talk and occasional flights of poetry.
We have over the years been fortunate to work with a range of
talented and dedi-
cated editors: Dickson Musslewhite, who saw us through the
third and fourth edi-
tions; Julie McBurney and John Meyers, who nurtured the book
in its early days;
and Michell Phifer and Karen R. Smith, who looked over our
shoulders with acuity
and wit. And we remain grateful to Karl Yambert, our original
developmental editor,
whose insight and patience first brought this book into being.
Christine Farris at Indiana University has been a great friend of
the book since
its early days; we heard her voice often in our heads as we
revised this edition. She
and her colleagues John Schilb and Ted Leahey gave us what
every writer needs—
a discerning audience. Similar thanks are due to Wendy Hesford
and Eddie Singleton
of Ohio State University, as well as their graduate students,
whom we have had
the pleasure of working with over the past few years. The book
has enabled us to
make many new friends just starting their college teaching
careers in rhetoric and
composition—Matthew Johnson and Matt Hollrah, to name two.
Our friend Dean
Ward at Calvin College has been a source of inspiration and
good conversation on
writing for many years. So have two old friends, Richard Louth
and Lin Spence, who
offer the benefit of their long experience with the National
Writing Project. And we
always learn something about writing whenever we run into
Mary Ann Cain and
George Kalamaras, inspiring teachers and writers both. We have
also benefited from
stimulating conversations about writing with Chidsey Dickson.
Among our colleagues at Muhlenberg College, we are especially
grateful to
reference librarian Kelly Cannon for his section on library and
Internet research in
Chapter 16. For writing the Voices from across the Curriculum
boxes that appear
throughout the book, thanks to Karen Dearborn, Laura Edelman,
Jack Gambino,
James Marshall, Rich Niesenbaum, Fred Norling, Mark Sciutto,
Alan Tjeltveit, and
Bruce Wightman. For their good counsel and their teaching
materials, thanks to Anna
Adams, Jim Bloom, Chris Borick, Ted Conner, Joseph Elliot,
Barri Gold, Mary Lawlor,
Jim Peck, Jeremy Teissere, and Alec Marsh, with whom we
argue endlessly about writing.
Carol Proctor in the English Department looks out for us. We
also thank Muhlenberg
Preface xxiii
College, especially its provost, Marjorie Hass, for continuing to
support our participa-
tion at national conferences.
We are indebted to our students at Muhlenberg College, who
have shared their
writing and their thinking about writing with us. Chief among
these (of late) are
Sarah Kersh, Robbie Saenz di Viteri, Laura Sutherland, Andrew
Brown, Meghan
Sweeney, Jen Epting, Jessica Skrocki, and Jake McNamara.
Thanks also go to the
following students who have allowed us to use their writing in
our book (most
recently): Jen Axe, Wendy Eichler, Theresa Leinker, and Kim
Schmidt.
Finally, thanks to our spouses (Deborah and Mark) and our
children (Lizzie,
Lesley, and Sarah) for their love and support during the many
hours that we sit
immobile at our computers.
We would also like to thank the many colleagues who reviewed
the book; we are grate-
ful for their insight:
Diann Ainsworth, Weatherford College
Jeanette Adkins, Tarrant County College
Joan Anderson, California State University–San Marcos
Candace Barrington, Central Connecticut State University
Maria Bates, Pierce College
Karin Becker, Fort Lewis College
Laura Behling, Gustavus Adolphus College
Stephanie Bennett, Monmouth University
Tom Bowie, Regis University
Roland Eric Boys, Oxnard College
David Brantley, College of Southern Maryland
Jessica Brown, City College of San Francisco
Christine Bryant Cohen, University of Illinois–Urbana-
Champaign
Alexandria Casey, Graceland University
Anthony Cavaluzzi, Adirondack Community College
Johnson Cheu, Michigan State University
Jeff Cofer, Bellevue Community College
Helen Connell, Barry University
Cara Crandall, Emerson College
Rose Day, Central New Mexico Community College
Susan de Ghize, University of Denver
Virginia Dumont-Poston, Lander University
David Eggebrecht, Concordia University
Karen Feldman, University of California
Dan Ferguson, Amarillo College
Gina Franco, Knox College
Sue Frankson, College of DuPage
Anne Friedman, Borough of Manhattan Community College
Tessa Garcia, University of Texas–Pan American
xxiv Preface
Susan Garrett, Goucher College
Edward Geisweidt, University of Alabama
Nate Gordon, Kishwaukee College
Glenn Hutchinson, University of North Carolina–Charlotte
Habiba Ibrahim, University of Washington
Charlene Keeler, California State University–Fullerton
Douglas King, Gannon University
Constance Koepfinger, Duquesne University
Anne Langendorfer, The Ohio State University
Kim Long, Shippensburg University
Laine Lubar, Broome Community College
Phoenix Lundstrom, Kapi`olani Community College
Cynthia Martin, James Madison University
Andrea Mason, Pacific Lutheran University
Darin Merrill, Brigham Young University–Idaho
Sarah Newlands, Portland State University
Emmanuel Ngwang, Mississippi Valley State University
Leslie Norris, Rappahannock Community College
Ludwig Otto, Tarrant County College
Adrienne Peek, Modesto Junior College
Adrienne Redding, Andrews University
Julie Rivera, California State University–Long Beach
John Robinson, Diablo Valley College
Pam Rooney, Western Michigan University
Linda Rosekrans, The State University of New York–Cortland
Becky Rudd, Citrus College
Arthur Saltzman, Missouri Southern State University
Vicki Schwab, Manatee Community College
John Sullivan, Muhlenberg College
Eleanor Swanson, Regis University
Kimberly Thompson, Wittenberg University
Kathleen Walton, Southwestern Oregon Community College
James Ray Watkins, The Art Institute of Pittsburgh, Online;
Colorado Technical
University, Online; and The Center for Talented Youth, Johns
Hopkins University
Lisa Weihman, West Virginia University
Robert Williams, Radford University
Nancy Wright, Syracuse University
Robbin Zeff, George Washington University
Preface xxv
This page intentionally left blank
UNIT I
The Analytical Frame of Mind:
Introduction to Analytical Methods
CHAPTER 1
Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
CHAPTER 2
Counterproductive Habits of Mind
CHAPTER 3
A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
CHAPTER 4
Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t, and How to Do It
CHAPTER 5
Analyzing Arguments
CHAPTER 6
Topics and Modes of Analysis
This page intentionally left blank
CHAPTER 1
Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
FIRST PRINCIPLES
Writing takes place now in more forms than ever before. Words
flash by on our
computer and cell phone screens and speak to us from iPods.
PowerPoint bulleted
lists are replacing the classroom blackboard, and downloadable
entries from Wikipe-
dia and Google offer instant reading on almost any subject.
Despite the often-heard
claim that we now inhabit a visual age—that the age of print is
passing—we are, in fact,
surrounded by a virtual sea of electronically accessible print.
What does all this mean
for writers and writing?
If what is meant by writing is the form in which written text
appears on page or
screen, then presumably the study of writing would focus on the
new forms of orga-
nization that characterize writing on the web. But what if we
define writing as the act
of recording our thoughts in search of understanding? In that
case, the writing practices
and mental habits that help us to think more clearly would be,
as they have long been,
at the center of what it means to learn to write.
This book is primarily about ways of using writing to discover
and develop ideas.
Its governing premise is that learning to write well means
learning to use writing
to think well. This does not mean that the book ignores such
matters as sentence
style, paragraphing, and organization, but that it treats these
matters in the context of
writing as a way of generating and shaping thinking.
Although it is true that authors of web pages and PowerPoint
demonstrations
display their finished products in forms unlike the traditional
essay, people rarely
arrive at their ideas in the form of PowerPoint lists and
hypertext. Whatever form the
thinking will finally take, first comes the stage of writing to
understand—writing as a
sustained act of reflection. Implicit throughout this book is an
argument for the value
of reflection in an age that seems increasingly to confuse
sustained acts of thinking
with information downloading and formatting.
ANALYSIS DEFINED
We have seized upon analysis as the book’s focus because it is
the skill most commonly
called for in college courses and beyond. The faculty with
whom we work encour-
age analytical writing because it offers alternatives both to
oversimplified thinking of
3
4 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
the like/dislike, agree/disagree variety and to the cut-and-paste
compilation of sheer
information. It is the kind of writing that helps people not only
to retain and assimi-
late information, but to use information in the service of their
own thinking about
the world.
More than just a set of skills, analysis is a frame of mind, an
attitude toward
experience. It is a form of detective work that typically pursues
something puzzling,
something you are seeking to understand rather than something
you are already sure
you have the answers to. Analysis finds questions where there
seemed not to be any,
and it makes connections that might not have been evident at
first.
Analyzing, however, is often the subject of attack. It is
sometimes thought of as
destructive—breaking things down into their component parts,
or, to paraphrase a
famous poet, murdering to dissect. Other detractors attack it as
the rarefied province
of intellectuals and scholars, beyond the reach of normal
people. In fact, we all analyze
all of the time, and we do so not simply to break things down
but to construct our
understandings of the world we inhabit.
If, for example, you find yourself being followed by a large
dog, your first response,
other than breaking into a cold sweat, will be to analyze the
situation. What does being
followed by a large dog mean for me, here, now? Does it mean
the dog is vicious and
about to attack? Does it mean the dog is curious and wants to
play? Similarly, if you
are losing a game of tennis, or you’ve just left a job interview,
or you are looking at
a painting of a woman with three noses, you will begin to
analyze. How can I play
differently to increase my chances of winning? Am I likely to
get the job, and why (or
why not)? Why did the artist give the woman three noses?
If we break things down as we analyze, we do so to search for
meaningful patterns,
or to uncover what we had not seen at first glance—or just to
understand more closely
how and why the separate parts work as they do.
As this book tries to show, analyzing is surprisingly formulaic.
It consists of a fairly
limited set of basic moves. People who think well have these
moves at their disposal,
whether they are aware of using them or not. Having good ideas
is less a matter of
luck than of practice, of learning how to make best use of the
writing process. Sudden
flashes of inspiration do, of course, occur; but those who write
regularly know that
inspirational moments can, in fact, be courted. The rest of this
book offers you ways
of courting and then realizing the full potential of your ideas.
Next we offer five basic “moves”—reliable ways of
proceeding—for courting ideas
analytically.
THE FIVE ANALYTICAL MOVES
Each of the five moves is developed in more detail in
subsequent chapters; this is an
overview. As we have suggested, most people already analyze
all the time, but they
often don’t realize that this is what they’re doing. A first step
toward becoming a better
analytical thinker and writer is to become more aware of your
own thinking processes,
building on skills that you already possess, and eliminating
habits that get in the way.
Each of the following moves serves the primary purpose of
analysis: to figure out what
something means, why it is as it is and does what it does.
The Five Analytical Moves 5
Move 1: Suspend Judgment
Suspending judgment is a necessary precursor to thinking
analytically because
our tendency to judge everything shuts down our ability to see
and to think. It takes
considerable effort to break the habit of responding to
everything with likes and
dislikes, with agreeing and disagreeing. Just listen in on a few
conversations to be
reminded of how pervasive this phenomenon really is. Even
when you try to suppress
them, judgments tend to come.
Judgments usually say more about the person doing the judging
than they do
about the subject being judged. The determination that
something is boring is espe-
cially revealing in this regard. Yet people typically roll their
eyes and call things boring
as if this assertion clearly said something about the thing they
are reacting to but not
about the mind of the beholder.
Consciously leading with the word interesting (as in, “What I
find most interest-
ing about this is. . . ”) tends to deflect the judgment response
into a more exploratory
state of mind, one that is motivated by curiosity and thus better
able to steer clear
of approval and disapproval. As a general rule, you should seek
to understand the
subject you are analyzing before deciding how you feel about it.
(See the Judgment
Reflex in Chapter 2, Counterproductive Habits of Mind, for
more.)
Move 2: Define Significant Parts and How They’re Related
Whether you are analyzing an awkward social situation, an
economic problem, a
painting, a substance in a chemistry lab, or your chances of
succeeding in a job inter-
view, the process of analysis is the same:
• Divide the subject into its defining parts, its main elements or
ingredients.
• Consider how these parts are related, both to each other and to
the subject as a
whole.
In the case of analyzing the large dog encountered earlier, you
might notice that
he’s dragging a leash, has a ball in his mouth, and is wearing a
bright red scarf. Having
broken your larger subject into these defining parts, you would
try to see the connec-
tions among them and determine what they mean, what they
allow you to decide about
the nature of the dog: apparently somebody’s lost pet, playful,
probably not hostile,
unlikely to bite me.
Analysis of the painting of the woman with three noses, a
subject more like the
kind you might be asked to write about in a college course,
would proceed in the same
way. Your result—ideas about the nature of the painting—
would be determined, as
with the dog, not only by your noticing its various parts, but
also by your familiarity
with the subject. If you knew little about art history, scrutiny of
the painting’s parts
would not tell you, for instance, that it is an example of the
movement known as
Cubism. Even without this context, however, you would still be
able to draw some
analytical conclusions—ideas about the meaning and nature of
the subject. You might
conclude, for example, that the artist is interested in perspective
or in the way we see,
as opposed to realistic depictions of the world.
6 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
One common denominator of all effective analytical writing is
that it pays close
attention to detail. We analyze because our global responses, to
a play, for example, or
to a speech or a social problem, are too general. If you comment
on an entire football
game, you’ll find yourself saying things like “great game,”
which is a generic response,
something you could say about almost anything. This “one-size-
fits-all” kind of com-
ment doesn’t tell us very much except that you probably liked
the game. To say more,
you would necessarily become more analytical—shifting your
attention to the signifi-
cance of some important aspect of the game, such as “they won
because the offensive
line was giving the quarterback all day to find his receivers” or
“they lost because they
couldn’t defend against the safety blitz.”
This move from generalization to analysis, from the larger
subject to its key com-
ponents, is characteristic of good thinking. To understand a
subject, we need to get
past our first, generic, evaluative response to discover what the
subject is “made of,”
the particulars that contribute most strongly to the character of
the whole.
If all that analysis did, however, was to take subjects apart,
leaving them broken and
scattered, the activity would not be worth very much. The
student who presents a draft
of a paper to his or her professor with the words, “Go ahead, rip
it apart,” reveals a dis-
abling misconception about analysis—that, like dissecting a
frog in a biology lab, analy-
sis takes the life out of its subjects. Clearly, analysis means
more than breaking a subject
into its parts. When you analyze a subject you ask not just
“What is it made of?” but also
“How do these parts help me to understand the meaning of the
subject as a whole?”
Move 3: Make the Implicit Explicit
One definition of what analytical writing does is that it makes
explicit (overtly stated)
what is implicit (suggested but not overtly stated), converting
suggestions into direct
statements. Some people fear that, like the emperor’s new
clothes, implications aren’t
really there, but are instead the phantasms of an overactive
imagination. “Reading
between the lines” is the common and telling phrase that
expresses this anxiety. We will
have more to say in Chapter 4 against the charge that analysis
makes something out of
nothing—the spaces between the lines—rather than out of what
is there in black and
white. Another version of this anxiety is implied by the term
hidden meanings.
Implications are not hidden, but neither are they completely
spelled out so that
they can be simply extracted. The word implication comes from
the Latin implicare,
which means “to fold in.” The word explicit is in opposition to
the idea of implication.
It means “folded out.” This etymology of the two words,
implicit and explicit, suggests
that meanings aren’t actually hidden, but neither are they
opened to full view. An act
of mind is required to take what is folded in and fold it out for
all to see.
The process of drawing out implications is also known as
making inferences.
Inference and implication are related but not synonymous terms,
and the difference
is essential to know. The term implication describes something
suggested by the
material itself; implications reside in the matter you are
studying. The term inference
describes your thinking process. In short, you infer what the
subject implies.
Now, let’s move on to an example that suggests not only how
the process
of making the implicit explicit works, but also how often we do
it in our every-
day lives. Imagine that you are driving down the highway and
find yourself
The Five Analytical Moves 7
analyzing a billboard advertisement for a brand of beer. Such an
analysis might begin
with your noticing what the billboard photo contains, its various
parts—six young,
athletic, and scantily clad men and women drinking beer while
pushing kayaks into a
fast-running river. At this point, you have produced not an
analysis but a summary—a
description of what the photo contains. If, however, you go on
to consider what the
particulars of the photo imply, your summary would become
analytical.
You might infer, for example, that the photo implies that beer is
the beverage of fash-
ionable, healthy, active people. Thus, the advertisement’s
meaning goes beyond its explicit
contents. Your analysis would lead you to convert to direct
statement meanings that are
suggested but not overtly stated, such as the advertisement’s
goal of attacking common
stereotypes about its product (that only lazy, overweight men
drink beer). By making the
implicit explicit (inferring what the ad implies) you can better
understand the nature of
your subject. (See Chapter 4 for more on implications versus
hidden meanings.)
Try this 1.1: Making Inferences
Locate any magazine ad that you find interesting. Ask yourself,
“What is this a
picture of?” Use our hypothetical beer ad as a model for
rendering the implicit
explicit. Don’t settle for just one answer. Keep answering the
question in different
ways, letting your answers grow in length as they identify and
begin to interpret the
significance of telling details. If you find yourself getting stuck,
add to the question:
“and why did the advertiser choose this particular image or set
of images?”
Science as a Process of Argument
I find it ironic that the discipline of science, which is so
inherently analytical,
is so difficult for students to think about analytically. Much of
this comes
from the prevailing view of society that science is somehow
factual. Science
students come to college to learn the facts. I think many find it
comforting to
think that everything they learn will be objective. None of the
wishy-washy
subjectivity that many perceive in other disciplines. There is no
need to
argue, synthesize, or even have a good idea. But this view is
dead wrong.
Anyone who has ever done science knows that nothing could be
further
from the truth. Just like other academics, scientists spend
endless hours pa-
tiently arguing over evidence that seems obscure or irrelevant to
laypeople.
There is rarely an absolute consensus. In reality, science is an
endless pro-
cess of argument, obtaining evidence, analyzing evidence, and
reformulating
arguments. To be sure, we all accept gravity as a “fact.” To not
do so would
be intellectually bankrupt, because all reasonable people agree
to the truth of
gravity. But to Newton, gravity was an argument for which
evidence needed
to be produced, analyzed, and discussed. It’s important to
remember that a
significant fraction of his intellectual contemporaries were not
swayed by his
argument. Equally important is that many good scientific ideas
of today will
eventually be significantly modified or shown to be wrong.
—Bruce Wightman, Professor of Biology
VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM
8 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
Move 4: Look for Patterns
We have been defining analysis as the understanding of parts in
relation to each other
and to a whole, as well as the understanding of the whole in
terms of the relationships
among its parts. But how do you know which parts to attend to?
What makes some
details in the material you are studying more worthy of your
attention than others?
Here are three principles for selecting significant parts of the
whole:
1. Look for a pattern of repetition or resemblance. In virtually
all subjects,
repetition is a sign of emphasis. In a symphony, for example,
certain patterns
of notes repeat throughout, announcing themselves as major
themes. In a legal
document, such as a warranty, a reader quickly becomes aware
of words that
are part of a particular idea or pattern of thinking: for instance,
disclaimers of
accountability.
The repetition may not be exact. In Shakespeare’s play King
Lear, for exam-
ple, references to seeing and eyes call attention to themselves
through repetition.
Let’s say you notice that these references often occur along
with another strand
of language having to do with the concept of proof. How might
noticing this
pattern lead to an idea? You might make a start by inferring
from the pattern
that the play is concerned with ways of knowing (proving)
things—with seeing
as opposed to other ways of knowing, such as faith or intuition.
2. Look for binary oppositions. Sometimes patterns of
repetition that you begin to
notice in a particular subject matter are significant because they
are part of a
contrast—a basic opposition—around which the subject matter
is structured. A
binary opposition is a pair of elements in which the two
members of the pair are
opposites; the word binary means “consisting of two.” Some
examples of binary
oppositions that we encounter frequently are nature/civilization,
city/country,
public/private, organic/inorganic, voluntary/involuntary. One
advantage of
detecting repetition is that it will lead you to discover binaries,
which are central
to locating issues and concerns. (For more on working with
binary oppositions,
see Chapters 3 and 5.)
3. Look for anomalies—things that seem unusual, seem not to
fit. An anomaly
(a ! not, nom ! name) is literally something that cannot be
named, what the
dictionary defines as deviation from the normal order. Along
with looking for
pattern, it is also fruitful to attend to anomalous details—those
that seem not
to fit the pattern. Anomalies help us to revise our stereotypical
assumptions.
A TV commercial, for example, advertises a baseball team by
featuring its star
reading a novel by Dostoyevsky in the dugout during a game. In
this case, the
anomaly, a baseball player who reads serious literature, is being
used to subvert
(question, unsettle) the stereotypical assumption that sports and
intellectualism
don’t belong together.
Just as people tend to leap to evaluative judgments, they also
tend to avoid
information that challenges (by not conforming to) opinions
they already
hold. Screening out anything that would ruffle the pattern
they’ve begun to
The Five Analytical Moves 9
see, they ignore the evidence that might lead them to a better
theory. (For more
on this process of using anomalous evidence to evolve an
essay’s main idea, see
Chapter 9, Making a Thesis Evolve.) Anomalies are important
because noticing
them often leads to new and better ideas. Most advances in
scientific thought,
for example, have arisen when a scientist observes some
phenomenon that does
not fit with a prevailing theory.
Move 5: Keep Reformulating Questions and Explanations
Analysis, like all forms of writing, requires a lot of
experimenting. Because the
purpose of analytical writing is to figure something out, you
shouldn’t expect to
know at the start of your writing process exactly where you are
going, how all of your
subject’s parts fit together, and to what end. The key is to be
patient and to know
that there are procedures—in this case, questions—you can rely
on to take you from
uncertainty to understanding.
The following three groups of questions (organized according to
the analytical
moves they’re derived from) are typical of what goes on in an
analytical writer’s head as
he or she attempts to understand a subject. These questions
work with almost anything
that you want to think about. As you will see, the questions are
geared toward helping
you locate and try on explanations for the meaning of various
patterns of details.
Which details seem significant? Why?
What does the detail mean?
What else might it mean?
(Moves: Define Significant Parts; Make the Implicit Explicit)
How do the details fit together? What do they have in common?
What does this pattern of details mean?
What else might this same pattern of details mean? How else
could it be
explained?
(Move: Look for Patterns)
What details don’t seem to fit? How might they be connected
with other details
to form a different pattern?
What does this new pattern mean? How might it cause me to
read the meaning
of individual details differently?
(Moves: Look for Anomalies and Keep Asking Questions)
The process of posing and answering such questions—the
analytical process—is
one of trial and error. Learning to write well is largely a matter
of learning how to
frame questions. One of the main things you acquire in the
study of an academic
discipline is knowledge of the kinds of questions that the
discipline typically asks. For
example, an economics professor and a sociology professor
might observe the same
phenomenon, such as a sharp decline in health benefits for the
elderly, and analyze
its causes and significance in different ways. The economist
might consider how such
10 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
benefits are financed and how changes in government policy
and the country’s popu-
lation patterns might explain the declining supply of funds for
the elderly. The soci-
ologist might ask about attitudes toward the elderly and about
the social structures
that the elderly rely on for support.
ANALYSIS AT WORK: A SAMPLE PAPER
Examine the following excerpt from a draft of a paper about
Ovid’s Metamorphoses,
a collection of short mythological tales dating from ancient
Rome. We have included
annotations in blue to suggest how a writer’s ideas evolve as he
or she looks for
pattern, contrast, and anomaly, constantly remaining open to
reformulation.
The draft actually begins with two loosely connected
observations: that males
dominate females, and that many characters in the stories lose
the ability to speak and
thus become submissive and dominated. In the excerpt, the
writer begins to connect
these two observations and speculate about what this connection
means.
There are many other examples in Ovid’s Metamorphoses that
show the dominance of man
over woman through speech control. In the Daphne and Apollo
story, Daphne becomes a tree to
escape Apollo, but her ability to speak is destroyed. Likewise,
in the Syrinx and Pan story, Syrinx
becomes a marsh reed, also a life form that cannot talk,
although Pan can make it talk by
playing it. [The writer establishes a pattern of similar detail.]
Pygmalion and Galatea
is a story in which the male creates his rendition of the perfect
female. The female does not
speak once; she is completely silent. Also, Galatea is referred to
as “she” and never given a real
name. This lack of a name renders her identity more silent.
[Here the writer begins to link
the contrasts of speech/silence with the absence/presence of
identity.]
Ocyrhoe is a female character who could tell the future but who
was transformed into a mare
so that she could not speak. One may explain this
transformation by saying it was an attempt by
the gods to keep the future unknown. [Notice how the writer’s
thinking expands as she
sustains her investigation of the overall pattern of men silencing
women: here
she tests her theory by adding another variable—prophecy.]
However, there is a male
character, Tiresias, who is also a seer of the future and is
allowed to speak of his foreknowledge,
thereby becoming a famous figure. (Interestingly, Tiresias
during his lifetime has experienced being
both a male and a female.) [Notice how the Ocyrhoe example
has spawned
a contrast based on gender in the Tiresias example. The pairing
of the two
examples demonstrates that the ability to tell the future is not
the sole cause of
silencing because male characters who can do it are not
silenced—though the
writer pauses to note that Tiresias is not entirely male.] Finally,
in the story of
Mercury and Herse, Herse’s sister, Aglauros, tries to prevent
Mercury from marrying Herse.
Mercury turns her into a statue; the male directly silences the
female’s speech.
The woman silences the man in only two stories studied. [Here
the writer searches
out an anomaly— women silencing men—that grows in the rest
of the
paragraph into an organizing contrast.] In the first, “The Death
of Orpheus,” the women
make use of “clamorous shouting, Phrygian flutes with curving
horns, tambourines, the beating of
breasts, and Bacchic howlings” (246) to drown out the male’s
songs, dominating his speech in terms
of volume. In this way, the quality of power within speech is
demonstrated: “for the first time, his
words had no effect, and he failed to move them [the women] in
any way by his voice” (247).
Distinguishing Analysis from Argument, Summary, and
Expressive Writing 11
Next the women kill him, thereby rendering him silent.
However, the male soon regains his temporar-
ily destroyed power of expression: “the lyre uttered a plaintive
melody and the lifeless tongue made
a piteous murmur” (247). Even after death Orpheus is able to
communicate. The women were not
able to destroy his power completely, yet they were able to
severely reduce his power of speech and
expression. [The writer learns, among other things, that men are
harder to silence;
Orpheus’s lyre continues to sing after his death.]
The second story in which a woman silences a man is the story
of Actaeon, in which the
male sees Diana naked, and she transforms him into a stag so
that he cannot speak of it:
“he tried to say ‘Alas!’ but no words came” (79). This loss of
speech leads to Actaeon’s inability
to inform his own hunting team of his true identity; his loss of
speech leads ultimately to his
death. [This example reinforces the pattern that the writer had
begun to notice
in the Orpheus example.]
In some ways these four paragraphs of draft exemplify a writer
in the process of
discovering a workable idea. They begin with a list of similar
examples, briefly noted.
As the examples accumulate, the writer begins to make
connections and formulate
trial explanations. We have not included enough of this excerpt
to get to the tentative
thesis the draft is working toward, although that thesis is
already beginning to emerge.
What we want to emphasize here is the writer’s willingness to
accumulate data and to
locate it in various patterns of similarity and contrast.
Try this 1.2: Applying the Five Analytical Moves to a Speech
Speeches provide rich examples for analysis, and they are easily
accessible on the Inter-
net. We especially recommend a site called American Rhetoric
(You can Google it for
the URL). Locate any speech and then locate its patterns of
repetition and contrast. On
the basis of your results, formulate a few conclusions about the
speech’s point of view
and its way of presenting it. Try to get beyond the obvious and
the general—what does
applying the moves cause you to notice that you might not have
noticed before?
DISTINGUISHING ANALYSIS FROM ARGUMENT,
SUMMARY,
AND EXPRESSIVE WRITING
How does analysis differ from other kinds of thinking and
writing? A common way of
answering this question is to think of communication as having
three possible centers
of emphasis—the writer, the subject, and the audience.
Communication, of course,
involves all three of these components, but some kinds of
writing concentrate more
on one than on the others. Autobiographical writing, for
example, such as diaries or
memoirs or stories about personal experience, centers on the
writer and his or her
desire for self-expression. Argument, in which the writer takes a
stand on an issue, ad-
vocating or arguing against a policy or attitude, is reader-
centered; its goal is to bring
about a change in its readers’ actions and beliefs. Analytical
writing is more concerned
with arriving at an understanding of a subject than it is with
either self-expression or
changing readers’ views. (See Figure 1.1.)
These three categories of writing are not mutually exclusive.
So, for example,
expressive (writer-centered) writing is also analytical in its
attempts to define
and explain a writer’s feelings, reactions, and experiences. And
analysis is a form
12 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
of self-expression since it inevitably reflects the ways a writer’s
experiences have
taught him or her to think about the world. But even though
expressive writing and
analysis necessarily overlap, they also differ significantly in
both method and aim. In
expressive writing, your primary subject is your self, with other
subjects serving as a
means of evoking greater self-understanding. In analytical
writing, your reasoning
may derive from your personal experience, but it is your
reasoning and not you or
your experiences that matter. Analysis asks not just “What do I
think?” but “How
good is my thinking? How well does it fit the subject I am
trying to explain?”
In its emphasis on logic and the dispassionate scrutiny of ideas
(“What do I think
about what I think?”), analysis is a close cousin of argument.
But analysis and argu-
ment are not the same. Analytical writers are frequently more
concerned with per-
suading themselves, with discovering what they believe about a
subject, than they
are with persuading others. And, while the writer of an
argument often goes into the
writing process with some certainty about the position he or she
wishes to support,
the writer of an analysis is more likely to begin with the details
of a subject he or she
wishes to better understand.
Accordingly, argument and analysis often differ in the kind of
thesis statements
they formulate. The thesis of an argument is usually some kind
of should statement:
readers should or shouldn’t vote for bans on smoking in public
buildings, or they
should or shouldn’t believe that gays can function effectively in
the military. The thesis
of an analysis is usually a tentative answer to a what, how, or
why question; it seeks to
explain why people watch professional wrestling, or what a
rising number of sexual
harassment cases might mean, or how certain features of
government health care
policy are designed to allay the fears of the middle class. The
writer of an analysis is
less concerned with convincing readers to approve or
disapprove of professional wres-
tling, or legal intervention into the sexual politics of the
workplace, or government
control of health care than with discovering how each of these
complex subjects might
be defined and explained. As should be obvious, though, the
best arguments are built
upon careful analysis: the better you understand a subject, the
more likely you will be
to find valid positions to argue about it.
writer-centered
(expressive writing)
communication
reader-centered
(argument)
subject-centered
(summary and analysis)
FIGURE 1.1
Diagram of Communication Triangle
Distinguishing Analysis from Argument, Summary, and
Expressive Writing 13
Applying the Five Analytical Moves: The Example of
Whistler’s Mother
Summary differs from analysis because the aim of summary is
to recount, in effect,
to reproduce someone else’s ideas. But summary and analysis
are also clearly related
and usually operate together. Summary is important to analysis
because you can’t
analyze a subject without laying out its significant parts for
your reader. Similarly,
analysis is important to summary because summarizing is more
than just copying
someone else’s words. To write an accurate summary you have
to ask analytical ques-
tions, such as:
• Which of the ideas in the reading are most significant? Why?
• How do these ideas fit together? What do the key passages in
the reading
mean?
Like an analysis, an effective summary doesn’t assume that the
subject matter
can speak for itself: the writer needs to play an active role. A
good summary provides
perspective on the subject as a whole by explaining, as an
analysis does, the mean-
ing and function of each of that subject’s parts. Moreover, like
an analysis, a good
summary does not aim to approve or disapprove of its subject:
the goal, in both
kinds of writing, is to understand rather than to evaluate. (For
more on summary, see
Chapters 6 and 13.)
So summary, like analysis, is a tool of understanding and not
just a mechanical
task. But a summary stops short of analysis because summary
typically makes much
smaller interpretive leaps. A summary of the painting popularly
known as Whistler’s
Mother, for example, would tell readers what the painting
includes, which details are
the most prominent, and even what the overall effect of the
painting seems to be. A
summary might say that the painting possesses a certain serenity
and that it is some-
what spare, almost austere. This kind of language still falls into
the category of focused
description, which is what a summary is.
An analysis would include more of the writer’s interpretive
thinking. It might tell
us, for instance, that the painter’s choice to portray his subject
in profile contributes
to our sense of her separateness from us and of her
nonconfrontational passivity. We
look at her, but she does not look back at us. Her black dress
and the fitted lace cap
that obscures her hair are not only emblems of her self-
effacement, shrouds disguis-
ing her identity like her expressionless face, but also the tools
of her self-containment
and thus of her power to remain aloof from prying eyes. What is
the attraction of this
painting (this being one of the questions that an analysis might
ask)? What might
draw a viewer to the sight of this austere, drably attired woman,
sitting alone in the
center of a mostly blank space? Perhaps it is the very starkness
of the painting, and the
mystery of self-sufficiency at its center, that attracts us. (See
Figure 1.2.)
Observations of the sort just offered go beyond describing what
the painting con-
tains and enter into the writer’s ideas about what its details
imply, what the painting
invites us to make of it and by what means. Notice in our
analysis of the painting how
intertwined the description (summary) is with the analysis.
Laying out the data is
key to any kind of analysis, not simply because it keeps the
analysis accurate but also
14 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
because, crucially, it is in the act of carefully describing a
subject that analytical writers
often have their best ideas.
You may not agree with the terms by which we have
summarized the painting,
and thus you may not agree with such conclusions as “the
mystery of self-sufficiency.”
Nor is it necessary that you agree because there is no single,
right answer to what the
painting means. The absence of a single right answer does not,
however, mean that all
possible interpretations are equal and equally convincing to
readers. The writer who
can offer a careful description of a subject’s key features is
likely to arrive at conclusions
about possible meanings that others would share.
Here are two general rules to be drawn from this discussion of
analysis and
summary:
1. Describe with care. The words you choose to summarize
your data will contain
the germs of your ideas about what the subject means.
2. In moving from summary to analysis, scrutinize the language
you have chosen,
asking, “Why did I choose this word?” and “What ideas are
implicit in the language
I have used?”
FIGURE 1.2
Arrangement in Grey and Black: The Artist’s Mother by James
Abbott McNeill Whistler, 1871.
RE
UN
IO
N
DE
S
M
US
EE
S
NA
TI
ON
AU
X,
A
RT
R
ES
OU
RC
E,
N
Y.
J
am
es
A
bb
ot
t M
cN
ei
l W
hi
st
le
r.
Analysis and Personal Associations 15
ANALYSIS AND PERSONAL ASSOCIATIONS
Although observations like those offered in the Interpretive
Leaps column in
Figure 1.3 go beyond simple description, they stay with the task
of explaining the
painting, rather than moving to private associations that the
painting might prompt,
such as effusions about old age, or rocking chairs, or the
character and situation of
the writer’s own mother. Such associations could well be
valuable unto themselves as
a means of prompting a searching piece of expressive writing.
They might also help a
writer to interpret some feature of the painting that he or she
was working to under-
stand. But the writer would not be free to use pieces of his or
her personal history as
conclusions about what the painting communicates, unless these
conclusions could
also be reasonably inferred from the painting itself.
Analysis is a creative activity, a fairly open form of inquiry, but
its imaginative
scope is governed by logic. The hypothetical analysis we have
offered is not the only
reading of the painting that a viewer might make because the
same pattern of de-
tails might lead to different conclusions. But a viewer would not
be free to conclude
anything he or she wished, such as that the woman is mourning
the death of a son
Data Method of Analysis Interpretive Leaps
these details destabilize
the serenity of the figure,
adding some tension to the
picture in the form of
slightly uneasy posture
and figure's need for
support: she looks too
long, drooped in on her
own spine
austerity and containment
of the figure made more
pronounced by slight
contrast with busier, more
lively, and more ornate
elements and with little
picture showing world
outside
subject in profile, not
looking at us
folded hands, fitted lace
cap, contained hair,
expressionless face
patterned curtain and
picture versus still figure
and blank wall; slightly
frilled lace cuffs and ties
on cap versus plain black
dress
slightly slouched body
position and presence of
support for feet
anomalies; make what is
implicit in the anomalies
explicit
locate organizing
contrast; make what
is implicit in the
contrast explicit
locate pattern of same or
similar detail; make what is
implicit in pattern of details
explicit
make implicit explicit
(speculate about what
the detail might suggest)
figure strikes us as
separate,
nonconfrontational,
passive
figure strikes us as self-
contained, powerful in her
separateness and
self-enclosure—
self-sufficient?
FIGURE 1.3
Summary and Analysis of Whistler’s Mother Diagram
16 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does
or is patiently waiting to die. Such conclusions would be
unfounded speculations be-
cause the black dress is not sufficient to support them. Analysis
often operates in areas
in which there is no one right answer, but like summary and
argument, it requires the
writer to reason from evidence.
A few rules are worth highlighting here:
1. The range of associations for explaining a given detail or
word must be governed
by context.
2. It’s fine to use your personal reactions as a way into
exploring what a subject
means, but take care not to make an interpretive leap stretch
farther than the
actual details will support.
3. Because the tendency to transfer meanings from your own
life onto a subject
can lead you to ignore the details of the subject itself, you need
always to be ask-
ing yourself: “What other explanations might plausibly account
for this same
pattern of detail?”
As we began this chapter by saying, analysis is a form of
detective work. It can
surprise us with ideas that our experiences produce once we
take the time to listen
to ourselves thinking. But analysis is also a discipline; it has
rules that govern how we
proceed and that enable others to judge the validity of our ideas.
A good analytical
thinker needs to be the attentive Dr. Watson to his or her own
Sherlock Holmes. That
is what the remainder of this book teaches you to do.
ASSIGNMENT: Analyze a Portrait or Other Visual Image
Locate any portrait, preferably a good reproduction from an art
book or magazine,
one that shows detail clearly. Then do a version of what we’ve
done with Whistler’s
Mother in the preceding columns.
Your goal is to produce an analysis of the portrait with the steps
we included in
analyzing Whistler’s Mother. First, summarize the portrait,
describing accurately its
significant details. Do not go beyond a recounting of what the
portrait includes; avoid
interpreting what these details suggest.
Then use the various methods offered in this chapter to analyze
the data. What
repetitions (patterns of same or similar detail) do you see? What
organizing contrasts
suggest themselves? In light of these patterns of similarity and
difference, what anom-
alies do you then begin to detect? Move from the data to
interpretive conclusions.
This process will produce a set of interpretive leaps, which you
may then try to
assemble into a more coherent claim of some sort—about what
the portrait “says.”
CHAPTER 2
Counterproductive Habits of Mind
Analysis, we have been suggesting, is a frame of mind, a set of
habits for observ-
ing and making sense of the world. There is also, it is fair to
say, an anti-analytical
frame of mind with its own set of habits. These shut down
perception and arrest
potential ideas at the cliché stage. This chapter attempts to
unearth these anti-
analytical habits. Then the next chapter offers some systematic
ways of improving
your observational skills.
The meaning of observation is not self-evident. If you had five
friends over and
asked them to write down one observation about the room you
were all sitting in, it’s
a sure bet that many of the responses would be generalized
judgments—“it’s comfort-
able”; “it’s a pigsty.” And why? Because the habits of mind that
come readily to most of
us tend to shut down the observation stage so that we literally
notice and remember
less. We go for the quick impression and dismiss the rest.
Having ideas is dependent on allowing ourselves to notice
things in a subject
that we wish to better understand rather than glossing things
over with a quick and
too easy understanding. The problem with convincing ourselves
that we have the
answers is that we are thus prevented from seeing the questions,
which are usu-
ally much more interesting than the temporary stopping points
we have elected
as answers.
The nineteenth-century poet, Emily Dickinson, writes that
“Perception of an
object/Costs precise the object’s loss.” When we leap
prematurely to our perceptions
about a thing, we place a filter between ourselves and the
object, shrinking the amount
and kinds of information that can get through to our minds and
our senses. The point
of the Dickinson poem is a paradox—that the ideas we arrive at
actually deprive us
of material with which to have more ideas. So we have to be
careful about leaping to
conclusions, about the ease with which we move to
generalization, because if we are
not careful, such moves will lead to a form of mental
blindness—loss of the object.
FEAR OF UNCERTAINTY
Most of us learn early in life to pretend that we understand
things even when we don’t.
Rather than ask questions and risk looking foolish, we nod our
heads. Soon, we even
come to believe that we understand things when really we don’t,
or not nearly as well
as we think we do. This understandable but problematic human
trait means that to
17
18 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
become better thinkers, most of us have to cultivate a more
positive attitude toward
not knowing. Prepare to be surprised at how difficult this can
be.
Start by trying to accept that uncertainty—even its more
extreme version,
confusion—is a productive state of mind, a precondition to
having ideas. The poet
John Keats coined a memorable phrase for this willed tolerance
of uncertainty.
He called it negative capability.
I had not had a dispute but a disquisition with Dilke, on various
subjects;
several things dovetailed in my mind, & at once it struck me,
what qual-
ity went to form a Man of Achievement especially in Literature
& which
Shakespeare possessed so enormously—I mean Negative
Capability,
that is when man is capable of being in uncertainties, Mysteries,
doubts,
without any irritable reaching after fact & reason.
—Letter to George and Thomas Keats, December 1817
The key phrases here are “capable of being in uncertainties” and
“without any
irritable reaching.” Keats is not saying that facts and reason are
unnecessary and
therefore can be safely ignored. But he does praise the kind of
person who can
remain calm (rather than becoming irritable) in a state of
uncertainty. He is en-
dorsing a way of being that can stay open to possibilities longer
than most of us are
comfortable with. Negative capability is an essential habit of
mind for productive
analytical thinking.
PREJUDGING
Too often inexperienced writers are pressured by well-meaning
teachers and text-
books to arrive at a thesis statement—a single sentence
formulation of the governing
claim that a paper will support—before they have observed
enough and reflected
enough to find one worth using. These writers end up clinging
to the first idea that
they think might serve as a thesis, with the result that they stop
looking at anything in
their evidence except what they want and expect to see. Writers
who leap prematurely
to thesis statements typically find themselves proving the
obvious—some too-general
and superficial idea—and worse, they miss opportunities for the
better paper that is
lurking in the more complicated evidence being screened out by
the desire to make
the thesis “work.”
Unit II of this book, Writing the Analytical Essay, will have
much to say about
finding and using thesis statements. But this unit (especially
Chapter 3, A Toolkit of
Analytical Methods) first focuses attention on the kinds of
thinking and writing you’ll
need to engage in before you can successfully make the move to
thesis-driven writing.
In this discovery phase, you will need to slow down the drive to
conclusions to see
more in your evidence.
Tell yourself that you don’t understand, even if you think that
you do. You’ll know
that you are surmounting the fear of uncertainty when the
meaning of your evidence
starts to seem less rather than more clear to you, and perhaps
even strange. You will
begin to see details that you hadn’t seen before and a range of
competing meanings
where you had thought there was only one.
Blinded by Habit 19
BLINDED BY HABIT
Some people, especially the very young, are good at noticing
things. They see things
that the rest of us don’t see or have ceased to notice. But why is
this? Is it just that
people become duller as they get older? The poet William
Wordsworth thought the
problem was not age but habit. That is, as we organize our lives
so that we can func-
tion more efficiently, we condition ourselves to see in more
predictable ways and to
tune out things that are not immediately relevant to our daily
needs.
You can test this theory by considering what you did and did
not notice this morn-
ing on the way to work or class or wherever you regularly go.
Following a routine for
moving through the day can be done with minimal engagement
of either the brain
or the senses. Our minds are often, as we say, “somewhere
else.” As we walk along, our
eyes wander a few feet in front of our shoes or blankly in the
direction of our destina-
tion. Moving along the roadway in cars, we periodically realize
that miles have gone
by while we were driving on automatic pilot, attending barely at
all to the road or the
car or the landscape. Arguably, even when we try to focus on
something that we want
to consider, the habit of not really attending to things stays with
us.
The deadening effect of habit on seeing and thinking has long
been a preoccu-
pation of artists as well as philosophers and psychologists.
Some people have even
defined the aim of art as “defamiliarization.” “The essential
purpose of art,” writes the
novelist David Lodge, “is to overcome the deadening effects of
habit by representing
familiar things in unfamiliar ways.” The man who coined the
term defamiliarization,
Victor Shklovsky, wrote, “Habitualization devours works,
clothes, furniture, one’s
wife, and the fear of war. . . . And art exists that one may
recover the sensation of life”
(David Lodge, The Art of Fiction. New York: Penguin, 1992, p.
53).
Growing up we all become increasingly desensitized to the
world around us; we
tend to forget the specific things that get us to feel and think in
particular ways. In-
stead we respond to our experience with a limited range of
generalizations, and more
often than not, these are shared generalizations—that is, clichés.
A lot of what passes for thinking is merely reacting:
right/wrong, good/bad, loved
it/hated it, couldn’t relate to it, boring. Responses like these are
habits, reflexes of the
mind. And they are surprisingly tough habits to break. As an
experiment, ask some-
one for a description of a place, a movie, a new CD, and see
what you get. Too often
it will be a diatribe. Offer a counterargument and be told,
huffily, “I’m entitled to my
opinion.” Why is this so?
We live in a culture of inattention and cliché. It is a world in
which we are perpetu-
ally assaulted with mind-numbing claims (Arby’s offers “a
baked potato so good you’ll
never want anyone else’s”), flip opinions (“The
Republicans/Democrats are idiots”)
and easy answers (“Be yourself”; “Provide job training for the
unemployed, and we
can do away with homelessness”). We’re awash in such stuff.
That’s one reason for the prominence of the buzz phrase
“thinking outside the
box”—which appears to mean getting beyond outworn ways of
thinking about
things. But more than that, the phrase assumes that most of the
time most of us
are trapped inside the box—inside a set of prefabricated
answers (clichés) and
like/dislike responses. This is not a new phenomenon, of
course—250 years ago
20 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
the philosopher David Hume, writing about perception, asserted
that our lives are
spent in “dogmatic slumbers,” so ensnared in conventional
notions of just about
everything that we don’t really see.
We turn now to three of the most stubbornly counterproductive
habits of mind:
the judgment reflex, generalizing, and overpersonalizing.
THE JUDGMENT REFLEX
It would be impossible to overstate the mind-numbing effect
that the judgment reflex
has on thinking. Why? Consider what we do when we judge
something and what we
ask others to do when we offer them our judgments. Ugly,
realistic, pretty, wonderful,
unfair, crazy: notice how the problem with such words is a
version of the problem
with all generalizations—lack of information. What have you
actually told someone
else if you say that something is ugly, or boring, or realistic?
In its most primitive form—most automatic and least
thoughtful—judging is like
an on/off switch. When the switch is thrown in one direction or
the other—good/bad,
right/wrong, positive/negative—the resulting judgment
predetermines and overrides
any subsequent thinking we might do. Rather than thinking
about what X is or how X
operates, we lock ourselves prematurely into proving that we
were right to think that
X should be banned or supported.
The psychologist Carl Rogers has written at length on the
problem of the judgment
reflex. He claims that our habitual tendency as humans—
virtually a programmed
response—is to evaluate everything and to do so very quickly.
Walking out of a movie,
for example, most people will immediately voice their approval
or disapproval, usually
in either/or terms: I liked it or didn’t like it; it was right/wrong,
good/bad, interesting/
boring. The other people in the conversation will then offer
their own evaluation and
their judgments of the others’ judgments: “I think that it was a
good movie and that
you are wrong to think it was bad,” and so on. Like the knee
jerking in response to the
physician’s hammer, such reflex judgments are made without
conscious thought (the
source of the pejorative term “knee-jerk thinking”). They close
off thinking with likes
and dislikes and instant categories.
This is not to say that all judging should be avoided. Obviously
our thinking on
many occasions must be applied to decision-making: whether
we should or shouldn’t
vote for a particular candidate, should or shouldn’t eat French
fries, should or
shouldn’t support a ban on cigarette advertising. Ultimately, in
other words, analyti-
cal thinking does need to arrive at a point of view—which is a
form of judgment—but
analytical conclusions are usually not phrased in terms of
like/dislike or good/bad.
They disclose what a person has come to understand about X
rather than how he or
she rules on the worth of X.
In some ways, the rest of this book consists of a set of methods
for blocking the
judgment reflex in favor of more thoughtful responses. For now,
here are two moves to
make in order to short circuit the judgment reflex and begin
replacing it with a more
thoughtful, patient, and curious habit of mind. First, try the cure
that Carl Rogers
recommended to negotiators in industry and government. Do not
assert an agreement
Generalizing 21
or disagreement with another person’s position until you can
repeat that position in a
way the other person would accept as fair and accurate. This is
surprisingly hard to do
because we are usually so busy calling up judgments of our own
that we barely hear
what the other person is saying.
Second, try eliminating the word “should” from your vocabulary
for a while. Judg-
ments take the form of should statements. We should pass the
law. We should not
consider putting such foolish restrictions into law. The
analytical habit of mind is
characterized by the words why, how, and what. Analysis asks:
What is the aim of the
new law? Why do laws of this sort tend to get passed in some
parts of the country
rather than others? How does this law compare with its
predecessor?
You might also try eliminating evaluative adjectives—those that
offer judgments with
no data. “Green” is a descriptive, concrete adjective. It offers
something we can experi-
ence. “Beautiful” is an evaluative adjective. It offers only
judgment. (See Figure 2.1.)
Try this 2.1: Distinguishing Evaluative from Nonevaluative
Words
The dividing line between judgmental and nonjudgmental words
is often more dif-
ficult to discern in practice than you might assume. Categorize
each of the terms in
the following list as judgmental or nonjudgmental, and be
prepared to explain your
reasoning: monstrous, delicate, authoritative, strong, muscular,
automatic, vibrant,
tedious, pungent, unrealistic, flexible, tart, pleasing, clever,
slow.
Try this 2.2: Experiment with Adjectives and Adverbs
Write a paragraph of description—on anything that comes to
mind—without
using any evaluative adjectives or adverbs. Alternatively,
analyze and categorize the
adjectives and adverbs in a piece of your own recent writing.
GENERALIZING
What it all boils down to is… What this adds up to is. . . The
gist of her
speech was. . .
Generalizing is not always a bad habit. Reducing complex
events, theories, books,
or speeches to a reasonably accurate summarizing statement
requires practice and
skill. We generalize from our experience because this is one
way of arriving at ideas.
THE PROBLEM
data (words, images, other detail) > broad
generalization
leaps to
data > evaluative claims (like/dislike; agree/disagree)
leaps to
FIGURE 2.1
The Problems with Generalizing and Judging
22 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
The problem with generalizing is that it removes the mind—
usually much too
quickly—from the data that produced the generalization in the
first place.
People tend to remember their reactions and impressions. The
dinner was dull.
The house was beautiful. The music was exciting. But they
forget the specific, con-
crete causes of these impressions (if they ever fully noticed
them). As a result, people
deprive themselves of material to think with—the data that
might allow them to
reconsider their initial impressions or share them with others.
Generalizations are just as much a problem for readers and
listeners as they are for
writers. Consider for a moment what you are actually asking
others to do when you offer
them a generalization such as “His stories are very depressing.”
Unless the recipient of
this observation asks a question—such as “Why do you think
so?”—he or she is being
required to take your word for it: the stories are depressing
because you say so.
What happens instead if you offer a few details that caused you
to think as you
do? Clearly, you are on riskier ground. Your listener might
think that the details you
cite are actually not depressing or that this is not the most
interesting or useful way
to think about the stories. He or she might offer a different
generalization, a different
reading of the data, but at least conversation has become
possible.
Vagueness and generality are major blocks to learning because,
as habits of mind,
they allow you to dismiss virtually everything you’ve read and
heard except the general
idea you’ve arrived at. Often the generalizations that come to
mind are so broad that
they tell us nothing. To say, for example, that a poem is about
love or death or rebirth,
or that the economy of a particular emerging nation is
inefficient, accomplishes very
little, since the generalizations could fit almost any poem or
economy. In other words,
your generalizations are often sites where you stopped thinking
prematurely, not the
“answers” you’ve thought they were.
The simplest antidote to the problem of generalizing is to train
yourself to be
more self-conscious about where your generalizations come
from. Remember to
trace your general impressions back to the details that caused
them. This tracing of
attitudes back to their concrete causes is the most basic—and
most necessary—move
in the analytical habit of mind.
Here’s another strategy for bringing your thinking down from
high levels of gen-
erality. Think of the words you use as steps on an abstraction
ladder. The more general
and vague the word, the higher its level of abstraction.
Mammal, for example, is higher
on the abstraction ladder than cow.
You’ll find that it takes some practice to learn to distinguish
between abstract
words and concrete ones. A concrete word appeals to the senses.
Abstract words are
not available to our senses of touch, sight, hearing, taste, and
smell. Submarine is a
concrete word. It conjures up a mental image, something we can
physically experi-
ence. Peace-keeping force is an abstract phrase. It conjures up a
concept, but in an
abstract and general way. We know what people are talking
about when they say there
is a plan to send submarines to a troubled area. We can’t be so
sure what is up when
people start talking about peace-keeping forces.
You might try using “Level 3 Generality” as a convenient tag
phrase reminding
you to steer clear of the higher reaches of abstract
generalization, some so high up
the ladder from the concrete stuff that produced them that there
is barely enough
air to sustain the thought. Why Level 3 instead of Level 2?
There aren’t just two
categories, abstract and concrete; the categories are the ends of
a continuum, a
sliding scale. And too often when writers try to concretize their
generalizations,
the results are still too general: they change animal to mammal,
but they need cow
or, better, black angus.
Try this 2.3: Locating Words on the Abstraction Ladder
Find a word above (more abstract) and a word below (more
concrete) for each of the
following words: society, food, train, taxes, school,
government, cooking oil, organism,
story, magazine.
Try this 2.4: Distinguishing Abstract from Concrete Words
Make a list of the first ten words that come to mind and then
arrange them from most
concrete to most abstract. Then repeat the exercise by choosing
key words from a page
of something you have written recently.
OVERPERSONALIZING (NATURALIZING OUR
ASSUMPTIONS)
In one sense all writing is personal: you are the one putting
words on the page, and
inevitably you see things from your point of view. Even if you
were to summarize what
someone else had written, aiming for maximum impersonality,
you would be making
the decisions about what to include and exclude. Most effective
analytical prose has a
strong personal element—the writer’s stake in the subject
matter. As readers, we want
the sense that a writer is engaged with the material and cares
about sharing it.
But in another sense, no writing is strictly personal. As
contemporary cultural
theorists are fond of pointing out, the “I” is not a wholly
autonomous free agent who
Habits of Mind
Readers should not conclude that the “Counterproductive Habits
of Mind”
presented in this chapter are confined to writing. Psychologists
who study
the way we process information have established important
links between
the way we think and the way we feel. Some psychologists, such
as Aaron
Beck, have identified common “errors in thinking” that parallel
the habits
of mind discussed in this chapter. Beck and others have shown
that falling
prey to habits of mind is associated with a variety of negative
outcomes.
For instance, a tendency to engage in either/or thinking,
overgeneralization,
and personalization has been linked to higher levels of anger,
anxiety, and
depression. Failure to attend to these errors in thinking chokes
off reflection
and analysis. As a result, the person becomes more likely to
“react” rather
than think, which may prolong and exacerbate the negative
emotions.
—Mark Sciutto, Professor of Psychology
VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM
Overpersonalizing (Naturalizing Our Assumptions) 23
24 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
writes from a unique point of view. Rather, the “I” is always
shaped by forces out-
side the self—social, cultural, educational, historical, etc. The
extreme version of this
position allots little space for what we like to think of as
“individuality”: the self is a
site through which dominant cultural ways of understanding the
world (ideologies)
circulate. From this perspective we are like actors who don’t
know that we’re actors,
reciting various cultural scripts that we don’t realize are scripts.
This is, of course, an overstated position. A person who
believes that civil rights for
all is an essential human right is not necessarily a victim of
cultural brainwashing. The
grounds of his or her belief, shaped by participation in a larger
community of belief
(ethnic, religious, family tradition, etc.) is, however, not merely
personal.
But it’s a mistake for a person to assume that because he or she
experienced or
believes X, everyone else does too. Rather than open-mindedly
exploring what a sub-
ject might mean, the overpersonalizer tends to use a limited
range of culturally con-
ditioned likes and dislikes to close the subject down.
Overpersonalizing substitutes
merely reacting for thinking.
It is surprisingly difficult to break the habit of treating our
points of view as self-
evidently true—not just for us but for everyone. What is
“common sense” for one
person, and so not even in need of explaining, can be quite
uncommon and not so
obviously sensible to someone else. More often than not,
common sense is a phrase
that really means “what seems obvious to me and therefore
should be obvious to you.”
This is a habit of mind called “naturalizing your assumptions.”
The word naturalize
in this context means you are representing—and seeing—your
own assumptions as
natural, as simply the way things are (and ought to be).
Overpersonalizers tend to make personal experiences and
prejudices an unques-
tioned standard of value. Your own disastrous experience with a
health maintenance
organization (HMO) may predispose you to dismiss a plan for
nationalized health
care, but your writing needs to examine in detail the holes in
the plan, not simply
evoke the three hours you lingered in some doctor’s waiting
room. Paying too much
attention to how a subject makes you feel or fits your previous
experience of life can
seduce you away from analyzing how the subject itself operates.
This is not to say that there is no learning or thinking value in
telling our ex-
periences: narratives can be used analytically. Storytelling has
the virtue of offering
concrete experience—not just the conclusions the experience
may have led to.
Personal narratives can take us back to the source of our
convictions. The problem
comes when “relating” to someone’s story becomes a habitual
substitute for thinking
through the ideas and attitudes that the story suggests.
The problem with the personal is perhaps most clear when
viewed as half of a
particularly vicious set of binary oppositions that might be
schematized thus:
subjective vs. objective
personal expression vs. impersonal analysis
passionately engaged vs. detached, impassively neutral
genuinely felt vs. heartless
Like most vicious binaries, the personal/impersonal, heart/head
binary overstates the
case and obscures the considerable overlap of the two sides.
The antidote to the overpersonalizing habit of mind is, as with
most habits you
want to break, to become more self-conscious about it. Ask
yourself, “Is this what I
really believe?” Of course, some personal responses can provide
valuable beginnings
for constructive thinking, provided that, as with generalizing,
you get in the habit of
tracing your own responses back to their causes. If you find an
aspect of your subject
irritating or funny or disappointing, locate exact details that
evoked your emotional
response, and begin to analyze those details.
Try this 2.5: Tracing Impressions Back to Causes
One of Ernest Hemingway’s principal rules for writing was to
trace impressions back
to causes. He once wrote to an apprentice writer, “Find what
gave you the emotion;
what the action was that gave you the excitement. Then write it
down, making it
clear so the reader will see it too and have the same feeling you
had.” You can try this
exercise anywhere. Wait for an impression to hit, and then
record the stimuli—the
concrete details that produced your response—as accurately as
you can.
Try this 2.6: Looking for Naturalized Assumptions
Start listening to the things people say in everyday
conversation. Read some
newspaper editorials with your morning coffee (a pretty
disturbing way to start the
day in most cases). Watch for examples of people naturalizing
their assumptions.
You will find examples of this everywhere. Also, try
paraphrasing the common
complaint “I couldn’t relate to it.” What does being able to
“relate” to something
consist of? What problems would follow from accepting this
idea as a standard
of value?
OPINIONS (VERSUS IDEAS)
Perhaps no single word causes more problems in the relation
between students and
teachers, and for people in general, than the word opinion.
Consider for a moment the
often-heard claim “I’m entitled to my opinion.” This claim is
worth exploring. What
is an opinion? How is it (or isn’t it) different from a belief or an
idea? If I say that I am
entitled to my opinion, what am I asking you to do or not do?
Many of the opinions people fight about are actually clichés,
pieces of much-
repeated conventional wisdom. For example, “People are
entitled to say what they
want. That’s just my opinion.” But, of course, this assertion
isn’t a private and personal
revelation. It is an exaggerated and overstated version of one of
the items in the U.S.
Bill of Rights, guaranteeing freedom of speech. Much public
thinking has gone on
about this private conviction, and it has thus been carefully
qualified. A person can’t,
for example, say publicly whatever he or she pleases about
other people if what he or
she says is false and damages the reputation of another person—
at least not without
threat of legal action.
Our opinions are learned. They are products of our culture and
our upbringing—
not personal possessions. It is okay to have opinions, but
dangerous to give too many
of them protected-species status, walling them off into a
reserve, not to be touched by
reasoning or evidence.
Opinions (versus Ideas) 25
26 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
Some things, of course, we have to take on faith. Religious
convictions, for
example, are more than opinions, though they operate in a
similar way: we believe
where we can’t always prove. But even our most sacred
convictions are not really
harmed by thinking. The world’s religions are constantly
engaged in interpreting
and reinterpreting what religious texts mean, what various
traditional practices
mean, and how they may or may not be adapted to the attitudes
and practices of
the world as it is today.
WHAT IT MEANS TO HAVE AN IDEA
Thinking, as opposed to reporting or reacting, should lead you
to ideas. But what does
it mean to have an idea? This question lies at the heart of this
book. It’s one thing to
acquire knowledge, but you also need to learn how to produce
knowledge, to think for
yourself. The problem is that people are daunted when asked to
arrive at ideas. They
dream up ingenious ways to avoid the task, or they get
paralyzed with anxiety.
What is an idea? Must an idea be something that is entirely
“original”? Must it
revamp the way you understand yourself or your stance toward
the world?
Such expectations are unreasonably grand. Clearly, a writer in
the early stages of
learning about a subject can’t be expected to arrive at an idea so
original that, like a
Ph.D. thesis, it revises complex concepts in a discipline. Nor
should you count as ideas
Ideas versus Opinions
Writers need to be aware of the distinction between an argument
that seeks
support from evidence and mere opinions and assertions. Many
students
taking political science courses often come with the assumption
that in
politics one opinion is as good as another. (Tocqueville thought
this to be
a peculiarly democratic disease.) From this perspective any
position a po-
litical science professor may take on controversial issues is
simply his or
her opinion to be accepted or rejected by students according to
their own
beliefs/prejudices. The key task, therefore, is not so much
substituting
knowledge for opinions, but rather substituting well-constructed
arguments
for unexamined opinions.
What is an argument, and how might it be distinguished from
opinions?
Several things need to be stressed: (1) The thesis should be
linked to evi-
dence drawn from relevant sources: polling data, interviews,
historical ma-
terial, and so forth. (2) The thesis should make as explicit as
possible its
own ideological assumptions. (3) A thesis, in contrast to mere
statement of
opinion, is committed to making an argument, which means that
it presup-
poses a willingness to engage with others. To the extent that
writers operate
on the assumption that everything is an opinion, they have no
reason to
construct arguments; they are locked into an opinion.
—Jack Gambino, Professor of Political Science
VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM
What It Means to Have an Idea 27
only those that lead to some kind of life-altering discovery.
Ideas are usually much
smaller in scope, much less grand, than people seem to expect
them to be.
It is easiest to understand what ideas are by considering what
ideas do and where
they can be found. Here is a partial list:
• An idea answers a question; it explains something that needs
to be explained or
provides a way out of a difficulty that other people have had in
understanding
something.
• An idea usually starts with an observation that is puzzling,
with something you
want to figure out rather than something you think you already
understand.
• An idea may be the discovery of a question where there
seemed not to be one.
• An idea may make explicit and explore the meaning of
something implicit—an
unstated assumption upon which an argument rests or a logical
consequence of
a given position.
• An idea may connect elements of a subject and explain the
significance of that
connection.
• An idea often accounts for some dissonance—that is,
something that seems to
not fit together.
• An idea provides direction; it helps you see what to do next.
Most strong analytical ideas launch you in a process of
resolving problems and
bringing competing positions into some kind of alignment. They
locate you where
there is something to negotiate, where you are required not just
to list answers but
also to ask questions, make choices, and engage in reasoning
about the significance
of your evidence.
Some would argue that ideas are discipline-specific, that what
counts as an idea
in Psychology differs from what counts as an idea in History or
Philosophy or Busi-
ness. And surely the context does affect the way that ideas are
shaped and expressed.
This book operates on the premise, however, that ideas across
the curriculum share
common elements. All of the items in the list just given, for
example, seem to us to be
common to ideas and to idea-making in virtually any context.
(See Figure 2.2.)
HAVING IDEAS
RELATING REPORTING
versus
(doing something with the material)
(personal experience
matters, but . . .)
(information matters, but . . .)
FIGURE 2.2
Having Ideas Ideas occupy a middle ground between the
extremes of sheer personal response and
faceless reportage of information.
28 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
RULES OF THUMB FOR HANDLING COMPLEXITY
This chapter has been about blocking habits of mind that allow
you to evade a more
complex way of approaching your writing. Almost all writers
feel uncomfortable when
encountering complexity. But discomfort need not lead to
avoidance or to verbal pa-
ralysis. The following rules of thumb can help you to respond to
the complexities of
the subjects that you write about rather than oversimplifying or
evading them.
1. Reduce scope. Whenever possible, reduce drastically the
range of your inquiry.
Resist the temptation to try to include too much information.
Even when an as-
signment calls for broader coverage of a subject, you will
usually do best by cov-
ering the ground up front and then analyzing one or two key
points in greater
depth.
For example, if you were asked to write on Franklin
Roosevelt’s New Deal,
you would obviously have to open with some general
observations, such
as what it was and why it arose. But if you tried to stay on this
general
level throughout, your paper would have little direction or
focus. You could
achieve a focus, though, by moving quickly from the general to
some much
smaller and more specific part of the subject, such as attacks on
the New Deal.
You would then be able to limit the enormous range of possible
evidence
to a few representative figures, such as Huey Long, Father
Coughlin, and
Alf Landon. Once you began to compare the terms and
legitimacy of their
opposition to the New Deal, you would be much more likely to
manage a
complex analysis of the subject than if you had remained at the
level of broad
generalization.
2. Study the wording of topics for unstated questions. Nearly
all formulations of a
topic contain a number of questions that emerge when you
ponder the word-
ing. Framing these questions overtly is often the first step to
having an idea.
Take a topic question such as “Is feminism good for Judaism?”
It seems to invite
you simply to argue yes or no, but it actually requires you to set
up and answer
a number of implied questions. For example, what does “good
for Judaism”
mean—that which allows the religion to evolve? That which
conserves its tradi-
tion? The same kinds of questions might be asked of the term
feminism. And
what of the possibility that feminism has no significant effect
whatsoever?
As this example illustrates, even an apparently limited and
straightfor-
ward question presses writers to make choices about how to
engage it. So don’t
leap from the topic question to your plan of attack too quickly.
One of the
best tricks of the trade lies in smoking out the unstated
assumptions implied
by the wording of the topic, and addressing them. (See Chapter
5, Analyzing
Arguments, for more on uncovering assumptions.)
3. Suspect your first responses. If you settle for these, the
result is likely to be
superficial and overly general. A better strategy is to examine
your first responses
for ways in which they might be inaccurate, and then develop
the implications
of these overstatements (or errors) into a new formulation. In
many cases,
writers go through this process of proposing and rejecting ideas
ten times or
more before they arrive at an angle or approach that will sustain
an essay.
Rules of Thumb for Handling Complexity 29
A first response is okay for a start, as long as you don’t stop
there. So, for
example, most of us would agree, at first glance, that no one
should be denied
health care, or that a given film or novel that concludes with a
marriage is a
happy ending, or that the American government should not pass
trade laws that
might cause Americans to lose their jobs. On closer inspection,
however, each
of these responses begins to reveal its limitations. Given that
there is a limited
amount of money available, should everyone, regardless of age
or physical con-
dition, be accorded every medical treatment that might prolong
life? And might
not a novel or film that concludes in marriage signal that the
society depicted
offers too few options, or more cynically, that the author is
feeding the audience
an implausible fantasy to blanket over problems raised earlier in
the work? And
couldn’t trade laws resulting in short-term loss of jobs
ultimately produce more
jobs and a healthier economy?
As these examples suggest, first responses—usually pieces of
conventional
wisdom—can blind you to rival explanations. Try not to decide
on an answer to
questions you’re given—or those of your own making—too
quickly.
4. Begin with questions, not answers. Whether you are focusing
on an assigned topic
or devising one of your own, you are usually better off to begin
with something
that you don’t understand very well and want to understand
better. Begin by
asking what kinds of questions the material poses. So, for
example, if you are
convinced that Robinson Crusoe changes throughout Defoe’s
novel and you
write a paper cataloging those changes, you essentially are
composing a selec-
tive plot summary. If, by contrast, you wonder why Crusoe
walls himself within
a fortress after he discovers a footprint in the sand, you will be
more likely to
interpret the significance of events than just to report them.
5. Write all of the time about what you are studying. Doing so
is probably the single
best preparation for developing your own interest in a subject
and for finding
interesting approaches to it. Don’t wait to start writing until you
think you have
an idea you can organize a paper around. By writing
informally—as a matter
of routine—about what you are studying, you can acquire the
habits of mind
necessary to having and developing ideas. Similarly, by reading
as often and as
attentively as you can, and writing spontaneously about what
you read, you will
accustom yourself to being a less passive consumer of ideas and
information, and
will have more ideas and information available to think actively
with and about.
(See Freewriting in Chapter 3, A Toolkit of Analytical Methods,
for more.)
6. Accept that interest is a product of writing—not a
prerequisite. The best way to get
interested is to expect to become interested. Writing gives you
the opportunity
to cultivate your curiosity by thinking exploratively. Rather
than approaching
topics in a mechanical way, or putting them off to the last
possible moment and
doing the assignment grudgingly, try giving yourself and the
topic the benefit
of the doubt. If you can suspend judgment and start writing, you
will often find
yourself uncovering interests where you had not seen them
before.
7. Use the “backburner.” In restaurants, the backburner is the
place that chefs
leave their sauces and soup stocks to simmer while they are
actively engaged
in other, more immediately pressing and faster operations on the
frontburners.
30 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
Think of your brain as having a backburner—a place where you
can set and
temporarily forget (though not entirely) some piece of thinking
that you are
working on. A good way to use the backburner is to read
through and take
some notes on something you are writing about—or perhaps a
recent draft of
something you are having trouble finishing—just before you go
to sleep at night.
Writers who do this often wake up to find whole outlines, whole
strings of useful
words already formed in their heads. Keep a notebook by your
bed and record
these early-morning thoughts. If you do this over a period of
days (which as-
sumes, of course, that you will need to start your writing
projects well in advance
of deadlines), you will be surprised at how much thinking you
can do when you
didn’t know you were doing it. The backburner keeps working
during the day as
well—periodically insisting that the frontburner, your more
conscious self, listen
to what it has to say. Pretty soon, ideas start popping up all over
the place.
In the context of this discussion, we’ll end these rules of thumb
with the following
anecdote. The wife of the writer and cartoonist, James Thurber,
reportedly was asked
about her husband’s behavior at dinner parties wherein he
occasionally went blank
and seemed to be staring off into space. “Oh, don’t worry about
that,” she said. “He’s
all right. He’s just writing.”
ASSIGNMENT: Observation Practice
Among the habits of mind that this chapter recommends, one of
the most useful (and
potentially entertaining) is to trace impressions, reactions,
sudden thoughts, moods,
etc., back to their probable causes. Practice this skill for a
week, recording at least one
impression a day in some detail (that is, what you both thought
and felt). Then deter-
mine at least three concrete causes of your response. That is, go
after specific sensory
details. For class purposes, pick one or two of your journal
writings and revise them
to a form that could be shared with other members of the class.
Interesting subjects for such writing might include your
response to first-year student
orientation, some other feature of the beginning of the school
year, or your response to
selected places on campus. What impact do certain places have
on you? Why?
CHAPTER 3
A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
Once I begin the act of writing, it all falls away—the view from
the window,
the tools, the talismans, even the snoring cat—and I am
unconscious of
myself and my surroundings while I fuse language with idea,
make a spe-
cific image visible or audible through the discovery of the right
words . . .
One’s carping inner critics are silenced for a time, and, as a
result, what
is produced is a little bit different from anything I had planned.
There is
always a surprise, a revelation. During the act of writing I have
told myself
something that I didn’t know I knew.
—Gail Godwin, “How I Write” (Boston: The Writer, October
1987)
In a recent (and fascinating) bestseller entitled Blink, Malcolm
Gladwell
offers an exploration into intuitive knowing. Gladwell
ultimately argues that there is
a big difference between experts who make decisions in the
blink of an eye and rela-
tive novices (people outside their area of expertise) who do so.
He finds that although
both novices and experts can make intuitive decisions based on
rapid assessment of
key details (a process he calls thin slicing), the accuracy and
quality of these decisions
is incomparably better in thinkers who have trained their habits
of perception.
This chapter offers a set of procedures—tools—for training your
habits of per-
ception, especially those habits that allow you to see significant
detail. The tools are
presented as formulae that you can apply to anything you wish
to better understand.
We have deliberately given each of the tools a name and
nameable steps so that they
are easy to invoke consciously in place of the semi-conscious
glide into such habits as
overgeneralizing and the judgment reflex. (See Chapter 2,
Counterproductive Habits
of Mind, for more.)
Most of the items in the Toolkit share the trait of encouraging
defamiliarization.
In the last chapter we spoke of the necessity of
defamiliarizing—of finding ways to see
things that the veneer of familiarity would otherwise render
invisible. This involves
recognizing that the apparently self-evident meanings of things
seem “natural” and
“given” only because we have been conditioned to see them this
way.
Most of us assume, for example, that the media is a site of
public knowledge
and awareness. But look what happens to that idea when
defamiliarized by Jonathan
Franzen in a recent essay (“Imperial Bedroom”):
31
32 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
Since really serious exposure in public today is assumed to be
synonymous
with being seen on television, it would seem to follow that
televised space is
the premier public space. Many things that people say to me on
television,
however, would never be tolerated in a genuine public space—
in a jury box,
for example, or even on a city sidewalk. TV is an enormous,
ramified exten-
sion of the billion living rooms and bedrooms in which it’s
consumed. You
rarely hear a person on the subway talking loudly about, say,
incontinence,
but on television it’s been happening for years. TV is devoid of
shame, and
without shame there can be no distinction between public and
private.
Franzen here enables us to see freshly by offering us details that
challenge our
conventional notions of public and private. Seeing in this way
requires that we attend
carefully to the concrete aspect of things.
We admit that in some cases it is the fear of the unfamiliar
rather than the blind-
ness bred of habit that keeps people from looking closely at
things. Such is the situ-
ation of college students confronted with difficult and
unfamiliar reading. And so,
there is clearly some value in using habit to domesticate the
unfamiliar in particular
(and daunting) circumstances. Nevertheless, it’s probably easier
to overcome the fear
of grappling with new material than it is to turn off the notion
that meanings are
obvious. (On strategies for tackling difficult reading, see the
discussions of Paraphrase
" 3 and Passage-Based Focused Freewriting later in this chapter.
See also Chapter 13,
Reading Analytically.)
Before introducing the Toolkit, we should say that what we are
proposing is (in
a sense) nothing new. There is a long history dating back to the
ancient Greek and
Roman rhetoricians of using formulae to discover and develop
ideas. In classical
rhetoric, the pursuit and presentation of ideas—of workable
claims for arguments—
was divided into five stages: inventio, dispositio, elocutio,
memoria, and pronuntiatio.
For present purposes we need to concentrate on only two—
inventio (invention) and
dispositio (disposition). Disposition includes the various means
of effectively
organizing a speech or piece of writing, given that rhetoric is
concerned with the
means of persuasion. Invention includes various ways of finding
things to say, of
discovering arguable claims to develop and dispose (arrange).
The early rhetoricians thought of invention in terms of what
they called “topics,”
from the Greek word topoi, meaning place or region. The topics
were “places” that an
orator (speech-maker) could visit, mentally, to discover possible
ways of developing a
subject. The topics are what we might now think of as
strategies—a word which, inter-
estingly, has its roots in the Greek word for army, and, thus,
with the idea of winning
over an audience to your point of view and defeating enemies.
Because the quality and
plausibility of a writer’s ideas constitute, arguably, the best
means of persuading an audi-
ence, we here emphasize ways of discovering as much as
possible about your evidence.
THE TOOLKIT
What follows are a set of fundamental analytical activities—
tools that effective think-
ers use constantly, whether they are aware of using them or not.
Some people do
indeed have ideas as sudden flashes of inspiration (in the blink
of an eye), but there
is method even in such seemingly intuitive leaps. And when the
sudden flashes of
inspiration don’t come, method is even more essential.
One trick to becoming a better observer and thus a better
thinker is to slow down,
to stop trying to draw conclusions before you’ve spent time
openly attending to the
data, letting yourself notice more. Better ideas grow out of a
richer acquaintance with
whatever it is you are looking at. Observation and interpretation
go hand in hand,
but it helps greatly to allow yourself a distinct observation stage
and to prolong this
beyond what most people find comfortable. All of the activities
in the Toolkit seek to
create such a stage. The Toolkit will also help you to stave off
anxiety about assimi-
lating difficult material by giving you something concrete to do
with it, rather than
expecting yourself to leap instantly to understanding.
The activities in the Toolkit can be conducted either orally or in
writing and
should be practiced again and again, until they become habitual.
The activities them-
selves do not produce ready-made papers, and may in fact
produce an abundance of
writing that never makes it through to the final draft. But the
thinking these activities
inspire ultimately produces much better final results.
There are, of course, more observational and idea-generating
methods than we
have offered here. In classical rhetoric, for example, the topics
of invention include
such things as the traditional rhetorical modes (comparison and
contrast, classifica-
tion, definition, etc.) and ways of inventorying an audience to
discover things that
need to be said. Our purpose in this chapter is narrower. We are
concentrating on
ways of looking at data—whether in print, visual, or the
world—that will allow you
to become more fully aware of the features that define your
subject, that make it what
it is. (Later chapters offer tools for other, mostly later-stage
tasks such as making in-
terpretive leaps, conversing with sources, and finding and
evolving a thesis.)
PARAPHRASE " 3
The activity we call Paraphrase " 3 offers the quickest means of
seeing how a little writ-
ing about something you’re reading can lead to having ideas
about it. Paraphrasing moves
toward interpretation because it tends to uncover areas of
uncertainty and find questions.
It instantly defamiliarizes. It also keeps your focus small so that
you can practice thinking
in depth rather than going for an overly broad “big picture.”
Paraphrasing is commonly misunderstood as summary (a way of
shrinking material
you’ve read) or perhaps as simply a way to avoid plagiarism by
putting it in your
own words. Too often when people wish to understand or retain
information, they
summarize—that is, they produce a general overview of what
the words say. Paraphras-
ing stays much closer to the actual words than summarizing.
The word paraphrase
means to put one phrase next to (para) another phrase. When
you paraphrase a pas-
sage, you cast and recast its key terms into near synonyms,
translating it into a parallel
statement. The goal of paraphrasing is to open up the possible
meanings of the words;
it’s a mode of inquiry.
Why is paraphrasing useful? The answer has to do with words—
what they are and
what we do with them. When we read, it is easy to skip quickly
over the words, assum-
ing we know what they mean. Yet when people start talking
about what they mean by
Paraphrase ! 3 33
34 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
particular words—the difference, for example, between
assertive and aggressive or the
meaning of ordinary words such as polite, realistic, or
gentlemanly—they usually find
less agreement than they expected. Most words mean more than
one thing, and mean
different things to different people.
What you say is inescapably a product of how you say it.
Language doesn’t merely
reflect reality; what we see as reality is shaped by the words we
use. This idea is known as
the constitutive theory of language. It is opposed to the so-
called “transparent” theory
of language, wherein it is implied that we can see through
words to some meaning that
exists beyond and is independent of them. When you paraphrase
language, whether
your own or language you encounter in your reading, you are
not just defining terms
but opening out the wide range of implications those words
inevitably possess.
We call this activity Paraphrase " 3 because usually one
paraphrase is not enough.
Take a sentence you want to understand better and recast it into
other language three
times. This will banish the problematic notion that the meaning
of words is self-
evident, and it will stimulate your thinking.
If you paraphrase a key passage from a reading several times,
you will discover that
it gets you working with the language. But you need to
paraphrase slavishly. You can’t
let yourself just go for the gist; replace all of the key words.
The new words you are
forced to come up with represent first stabs at interpretation, at
having (small) ideas
about what you are reading by unearthing a range of possible
meanings embedded
in the passage.
In practice, Paraphrase " 3 has three steps:
1. Select a single sentence or phrase from whatever it is you
are studying that you
think is interesting, perhaps puzzling, and especially useful for
understanding
the material.
2. Do Paraphrase " 3. Find synonyms for all of the key terms—
and do this three
times.
3. Reflect. What have you come to recognize about the original
passage on the basis
of repeated restatement?
Try this 3.1: Experimenting with Paraphrase " 3
Recast the substantive language of the following statements
using Paraphrase " 3:
• I am entitled to my opinion.
• We hold these truths to be self-evident.
• That’s just common sense.
What do you come to understand about these remarks as a result
of paraphrasing?
Which words, for example, are most slippery (that is, difficult
to define)?
It is interesting to note, by the way, that Thomas Jefferson
originally wrote the
words “sacred and undeniable” in his draft of the Declaration of
Independence,
instead of “self-evident.” So what?
Notice and Focus (Ranking) 35
Try this 3.2: Doing Paraphrase " 3 with a Reading
Recast the substantive language of a key sentence or short
passage in something
you are reading—say, a passage you find central or difficult in
any of your assigned
reading, the kind of passage most likely to attract yellow
highlighter. Try not to make
the language of your paraphrase more general than the original.
This method is an
excellent way to prepare for class discussion or to generate
thinking about the read-
ing that you might use in a paper. It is also, as we discuss in
Unit III, a key method of
analyzing the secondary sources that you draw on in your
papers.
NOTICE AND FOCUS (RANKING)
The activity called Notice and Focus guides you to dwell longer
with the data before
feeling compelled to decide what the data mean. Repeatedly
returning to the question,
“What do you notice?” is one of the best ways to counteract the
tendency to generalize
too rapidly. “What do you notice?” redirects attention to the
subject matter itself and
delays the pressure to come up with answers.
So the first step is to repeatedly answer the question, “What do
you notice?” being
sure to cite actual details of the thing being observed rather
than moving to more
general observations about it. This phase of the exercise should
produce an extended
and unordered list of details—features of the thing being
observed—that call atten-
tion to themselves for one reason or another.
The second step is the focusing part in which you rank (create
an order of impor-
tance for) the various features of the subject that you have
noticed. Answer the question
“Which three details (specific features of the subject matter) are
most interesting (or
significant or revealing or strange)?” The purpose of relying on
“interesting” or one of the
other suggested words is that these will help to deactivate the
like/dislike switch, which is
so much a reflex in all of us, and replace it with a more
analytical perspective.
The third step in this process is to say why the three things you
selected struck you
as the most interesting. Your attempts to answer this “why”
question will trigger leaps
from observation to interpretive conclusions.
Doing Notice and Focus is more difficult than it sounds.
Remember to allow your-
self to notice as much as you can about what you are looking at
before you try to
explain it. Dwell with the data (in that attitude of uncertainty
we’ve recommended in
Chapter 2). Record what you see. Resist moving to
generalization or, worse, to judg-
ment. The longer you allow yourself to dwell on the data, the
more you will notice,
and the richer your interpretation of the evidence will ultimately
be.
Prompts: Interesting and Strange
What does it mean to find something “interesting”? Often we
are interested by things
that have captured our attention without our clearly knowing
why. Interest and
curiosity are near cousins.
The word strange is a useful prompt because it gives us
permission to notice
oddities. Strange invites us to defamiliarize things within our
range of notice. Strange,
36 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
in this context, is not a judgmental term but one denoting
features of a subject or
situation that aren’t readily explainable. Where you locate
something strange, you
have something to interpret—to figure out what makes it strange
and why.
Along similar lines, the words revealing and significant work by
requiring you to
make choices that can lead to interpretive leaps. If something
strikes you as revealing
or significant, even if you’re not yet sure why, you will
eventually have to produce
some explanation.
Try this 3.3: Doing Notice and Focus with a Room
Practice this activity with the room you’re in. List a number of
details about it, then
rank the three most important ones. Use as a focusing question
any of the four words
suggested above—interesting, significant, revealing or strange.
Or come up with your
own focus for the ranking, such as the three aspects of the room
that seem most to
affect the way you feel and behave in the space.
Try this 3.4: Notice and Focus Fieldwork
Try this exercise with a range of subjects: a photograph, a
cartoon, an editorial,
conversations overheard around campus, looking at people’s
shoes, political speeches,
and so forth. Remember to include all three steps: notice, rank
and say why.
10 ON 1
The exercise we call 10 on 1 is a cousin of Notice and Focus—it
too depends on
extended observation but with more focus and usually occurring
at a later stage of
analysis. Notice and Focus is useful because it frees you to look
at the object with no
constraints or prejudgments. Notice and Focus treats your
subject matter as a broad
canvas to move around in. 10 on 1 promotes a more intensive
and elaborate explora-
tion of a single representative piece of evidence. 10 on 1 is built
on the idea that one
sure way to notice more is to narrow your scope.
The term 10 on 1 is shorthand for the principle that it is better
to make ten ob-
servations or points about a single representative issue or
example (10 on 1) than to
make the same basic point about ten related issues or examples
(1 on 10). A paper
that has evolved from detailed analysis of what the writer takes
to be his or her single
most telling example is far more likely to arrive at a good idea
than a paper that settles
prematurely for one idea and applies it mechanically to each
piece of evidence it
encounters (i.e., the same general idea attached to 10 similar
examples).
The shift from making one observation about ten examples to
making ten pos-
sible observations about your single best example is the aim of
the exercise. Ten, in
this case, is an arbitrary number. The ten are the observations
you make about your
representative example along with any ideas these observations
start to give you. If
you can keep the number 10 in mind, it will prod you to keep
asking yourself ques-
tions rather than stopping the observation process too soon.
What do I notice? What
else do I notice? What might this imply? What else might it
imply?
For extended discussion of doing 10 on 1 as an organizational
principle for papers,
see Chapter 8 (Using Evidence to Build a Paper) in Unit II,
Writing the Analytical
The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast
37
Essay. We have included this brief discussion to better integrate
10 on 1 with our other
observational strategies.
THE METHOD: WORKING WITH PATTERNS OF
REPETITION
AND CONTRAST
The Method is our shorthand for a systematic procedure for
analyzing evidence by
looking for patterns of repetition and contrast. It differs from
other tools we have
been offering in being more comprehensive. Whereas Notice
and Focus and 10 on
1 cut through a wealth of data to focus on individual details,
The Method goes for the
whole picture, involving methodical application of a matrix or
grid of observational
moves upon a subject. Although these are separate moves, they
also work together and
build cumulatively to the discovery of an infrastructure, a
blueprint of the whole.
Here is the procedure in its most pared-down form:
• What repeats?
• What goes with what?
• What is opposed to what?
• What doesn’t fit?
• And for any of these, so what?
As you can see, these are the steps that we first presented as
Move 4, Look for Patterns,
in the Five Analytical Moves of Chapter 1. Now we are
returning to this move in more
elaborate form.
Before laying out these steps more precisely, we want first to
mention that The
Method can be applied to virtually anything you wish to
analyze—an essay, a political
campaign, a work of visual or verbal art, a dense passage from
some secondary source
that you feel to be important but can’t quite figure out, and, last
but not least, your own
writing. It may be helpful to think of this method of analysis as
a form of mental doo-
dling, one that encourages the attitude of negative capability we
spoke of in Chapter 2.
Rather than worrying about what you are going to say, or about
whether you under-
stand, you instead get out a pencil and start tallying up what
you see. Engaged in this
process, you’ll soon find yourself gaining entry to the logic of
your subject matter.
The method of looking for patterns works through a series of
steps. Hold yourself
initially to doing the steps one at a time and in order. Later, you
will be able to record
your answers under each of the three steps simultaneously.
Although the steps of The
Method are discrete and modular, they are also consecutive.
They proceed by a kind
of narrative logic. Each step leads logically to the next, and
then to various kinds of
regrouping, which is actually rethinking. (Note: we have
divided into two kinds of
repetition, exact and similar, what was one step in the Five
Analytical Moves.)
Step 1. Locate exact repetitions—identical or nearly identical
words or details—and
note the number of times each repeats.
For example, if the word seems repeats three times, write
“seems " 3.” Consider
different forms of the same word—seemed, seem—as exact
repetitions. Similarly, if
38 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
you are working with images rather than words, the repeated
appearance of high
foreheads would constitute an exact repetition.
Concentrate on substantive (meaning-carrying) words. Only in
rare cases do words
like “and” or “the” merit attention as a significant repetition. If
you are working with a
longer text, such as an essay or book chapter or short story,
limit yourself to recording
the half-dozen or so words that call attention to themselves
through repetition.
Step 2. Locate repetitions of the same or similar kind of detail
or word—which we call
strands—and name the connecting logic. (For example, polite,
courteous, mannerly
and accuse, defense, justice, witness are strands.)
Simply listing the various strands that you find in your evidence
goes a long way
toward helping you discover what is most interesting and
important for you to ad-
dress. But to use the discovery of strands as an analytical tool,
you have to do more
than list. You have to name the common denominators that
make the words or details
in your list identifiable as a strand. Naming and renaming your
strands will trigger
ideas; it is itself an analytical move. And again, when working
with longer pieces, try
to locate the half-dozen strands that seem to you most
important.
Step 3. Locate details or words that form or suggest binary
oppositions, and select from
these the most important ones, which function as organizing
contrasts. Sometimes
patterns of repetition that you begin to notice in a particular
subject matter are
significant because they are part of a contrast—a basic
opposition—around which
the subject matter is structured. To find these oppositions, ask
yourself, What is
opposed to what?
When looking for binary oppositions, start with what’s on the
page. List words
or details that are opposed to other words or details. Note that
often these opposi-
tions are not obvious; you need to become aware of what is
repeatedly there and
then ask yourself, is something opposed to this? And often the
oppositions that
you discover are not actual words in a text but implied
meanings. For example,
images of rocks and water might suggest the binary
permanence/impermanence
or unchanging/changing.
This process of constructing binary oppositions from the data
usually leads you
to discover what we call organizing contrasts. An organizing
contrast is a central bi-
nary, one that reveals the central issues and concerns in the
material you are studying
and also provides—like the structural beam in a building—its
unifying shape. Some
examples that we encounter frequently are nature/civilization,
city/country, public/
private, organic/ inorganic, and voluntary/involuntary.
Step 4. Rank the data within your lists to isolate what you take
to be the most important
repetitions, strands, and binaries. Then write a paragraph—half
a page or so—in
which you explain your choice of one repetition or one strand or
one binary as central
to understanding whatever you have been observing. Ranking
your data in terms of
its importance is a means of moving toward interpretive leaps.
Your most impor-
tant binaries might be a pair of opposed terms and/or ideas, but
each might also
be a strand that is opposed to another strand.
The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast
39
Step 5. Search for anomalies—data that do not seem to fit any
of the dominant patterns.
We have made this the last step because anomalies often
become evident only after
you have begun to discern a pattern, so it is best to locate
repetitions, strands, and
organizing contrasts—things that fit together in some way—
before looking for
things that seem not to fit. Once you see an anomaly, you will
often find that it is
part of a strand you had not detected (and perhaps one side of a
previously unseen
binary). In this respect, looking for anomalies encourages
defamiliarizing—it’s
great for shaking yourself out of potentially limited ways of
looking at your evi-
dence and getting you to consider other possible interpretations.
Thinking Recursively with Strands and Binaries
Applying The Method has the effect of inducing you to get
physical with the data—
literally, for you will probably find yourself circling,
underlining, and listing. Although
you will thus descend from the heights of abstraction to the
realm of concrete detail,
the point of tallying repetitions and strands and binaries and
then selecting the most
important and interesting ones is to trigger ideas. The discipline
required to notice
patterns in the language produces more specific, more carefully
grounded conclusions
than you otherwise might produce.
You should expect ideas to suggest themselves to you as you
move through the
mechanical steps of The Method. The active thinking often
takes place as you are
grouping and regrouping. As you start listing, you will find that
strands begin to sug-
gest other strands that are in opposition to them. And you may
find that words you
first took to be parts of a single strand are actually parts of
different strands and are,
perhaps, in opposition. This process of noticing and then
relocating words and details
into different patterns is one aspect of using The Method that
can push your analysis
to interpretation.
To some extent using The Method is archaeological. It digs into
the language or
the material details of whatever you are analyzing in order to
unearth its thinking.
This is most evident in the discovery of organizing contrasts.
Binary oppositions often
indicate places where there is struggle among various points of
view. And there is
usually no single “right” answer about which of a number of
binaries is the primary
organizing contrast. One of the best ways to develop your
analyses is to reformulate
binaries, trying on different possible oppositions as the primary
one. (For more on
using binaries analytically, see Chapter 5, Analyzing
Arguments.)
Thus far we have been talking about The Method as a grid for
viewing other peo-
ple’s finished work. The Method also describes the processes by
which writers, artists,
scientists, and all manner of thinkers create those works in the
first place. Much of
the thinking that we do as we write and read happens through a
process of associa-
tion, which is, by its very nature, repetitive. In associative
thinking, thoughts develop as
words and details, which suggest other words and details that
are like them. Thinking
moves not just forward in a straight line, but sideways and in
circles. We repeatedly make
connections; we figure out what goes with what and what is
opposed to what.
In this sense, writing (making something out of words) and
reading (arriving at an
understanding of someone else’s words) operate in much the
same way.
40 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
Generating Ideas with The Method: An Example
See how the thinking in the following paragraph moves because
the writer is
noting strands and binaries. First he notes the differences in two
kinds of
fashion ads aimed at men. There are the high-fashion ads and
the Dockers
ads. In the first of these, the word beautiful repeats twice as
part of a strand
(including gorgeous, interesting, supermodel, demure). The
writer then poses traits
of the Dockers ads as an opposing strand. Instead of a beautiful
face there is no
face, instead of “gorgeous outfit,” the author says “it’s tough to
concentrate on
the clothes.” These oppositions cause the writer to make his
interpretive leap,
that the Dockers ads “weren’t primarily concerned with clothes
at all” and that
this was intentional.
The most striking aspect of the spots is how different they are
from typical
fashion advertising. If you look at men’s fashion magazines, for
example,
at the advertisements for the suits of Ralph Lauren or Valentino
or Hugo
Boss, they almost always consist of a beautiful man, with
something in-
teresting done to his hair, wearing a gorgeous outfit. At the
most, the man
may be gesturing discreetly, or smiling in the demure way that a
man
like that might smile after, say, telling the supermodel at the
next table
no thanks he has to catch an early-morning flight to Milan. But
that’s all.
The beautiful face and the clothes tell the whole story. The
Dockers ads,
though, are almost exactly the opposite. There’s no face. The
camera is
jumping around so much that it’s tough to concentrate on the
clothes. And
instead of stark simplicity, the fashion image is overlaid with a
constant,
confusing patter. It’s almost as if the Dockers ads weren’t
primarily con-
cerned with clothes at all—and in fact that’s exactly what
Levi’s intended.
What the company had discovered, in its research, was that
baby-boomer
men felt that the chief thing missing from their lives was male
friend-
ship. Caught between the demands of the families that many of
them had
started in the eighties and career considerations that had grown
more
onerous, they felt they had lost touch with other men. The
purpose of
the ads—the chatter, the lounging around, the quick cuts—was
simply to
conjure up a place where men could put on one-hundred-
percent-cotton
khakis and reconnect with one another. In the original
advertising brief,
that imaginary place was dubbed Dockers World.
—Malcolm Gladwell, “Listening to Khakis”
Doing The Method on a Poem: Our Analysis
Here is an example of how one might do The Method on a piece
of text—in this
case, a student poem. You might try it yourself first, using our
version to check
against your own.
The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast
41
Brooklyn Heights, 4:00 A.M.
Dana Ferrelli
sipping a warm forty oz.
Coors Light on a stoop in
Brooklyn Heights. I look
across the street, in the open window;
Blonde bobbing heads, the
smack of a jump rope, laughter
of my friends breaking
beer bottles. Putting out their
burning filters on the #5 of
a hopscotch court.
We reminisce of days when we were
Fat, pimple faced—
look how far we’ve come. But tomorrow
a little blonde girl will
pick up a Marlboro Light filter, just to play.
And I’ll buy another forty, because
that’s how I play now.
Reminiscing about how far I’ve come
1. Words that repeat exactly: forty " 2, blonde " 2, how far
we’ve (I’ve) come " 2,
light " 2, reminisce, reminiscing " 2, filter, filters " 2, Brooklyn
Heights " 2
2. Strands: jump rope, laughter, play, hopscotch (connecting
logic: childhood games
representing the carefree worldview of childhood); Coors Light,
Marlboro Light
filters, beer bottles (connecting logic: drugs, adult “games,”
escapism?);
smack, burning, breaking (violent actions and powerful
emotion: burning)
3. Binary oppositions: how far we’ve come/how far I’ve come
(a move from plural
to singular, from a sense of group identity to isolation, from
group values to a
more individual consideration)
42 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
Blonde bobbing heads/little blonde girl
Burning/putting out
Coors Light, Marlboro Lights/jump rope, hopscotch
How far I’ve come (two meanings of far?, one positive, one not)
Heights/stoop
Present/past
4. Ranked repetitions, strands and binaries plus paragraph
explaining the choice of
one of these as central to understanding.
Most important repetitions: forty, how far we’ve/I’ve come
Most important strands: jump rope, laughter, play, hopscotch;
Coors Light,
Marlboro Light filters, beer bottles
Most important binaries: jump rope, laugher, play, hopscotch
versus Coors Light,
Marlboro Light filters, beer bottles; burning/putting out
Paragraph(s):
This is a poem about growing up—or failing to grow up, both
being subjects
about which the poem expresses mixed emotions. The repetition
of forty (forty-ounce
beer) is interesting in this context. It signals a certain
weariness—perhaps with a kind
of pun on forty to suggest middle age and thus the speaker’s
concern about moving
toward being older in a way that seems stale and flat. The beer,
after all, is warm—
which is not the best state for a beer to be in, once opened, if it
is to retain its taste and
character. Forty ounces of beer—“supersizing”—suggest excess.
This reading of forty as excess along with the possible allusion
to middle
age takes us to what is, in our reading of the poem, the most
important (or at
least most interesting) binary opposition: burning versus putting
out. We are
attracted to this binary because it seems to be part of a more
intense strand in
the poem, one that runs counter to the weary prospect of moving
on toward a
perhaps lonely (“how far I’ve come”) middle-aged feeling.
Burning goes with
breaking and the smack of the jump rope, and even putting out,
if we visualize
putting out not just as fire extinguished but in terms of putting a
cigarette out by
pushing the burning end of it into something (the number 5 on
the hopscotch
court). The poem’s language has a violent and passionate edge
to it, even though
the violent words are not always in a violent context (for
example, the smack
of the jump rope).
This is a rather melancholy poem in which, perhaps, the poetic
voice is mourning
the passing, the “putting out” of the passion of youth
(“burning”). In the poem’s more
obvious binary—the opposition of childhood games to more
“adult” ones—the same
melancholy plays itself out, making the poem’s refrain-like
repetition of “how far
I’ve come” ring with unhappy irony. The little blonde girl is an
image of the speaker’s
own past self (because the poem talks about reminiscing), and
the speaker mourns
that little girl’s (her own) passing into a more uncertain and less
carefree state. It is
4:00 a.m. in Brooklyn Heights—just about the end of night, the
darkest point perhaps
before the beginning of morning, and windows in the poem are
open, so things are
The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast
43
not all bad. The friends make noise together, break bottles
together, revisit hopscotch
square 5 together, and contemplate moving on.
We couldn’t, by the way, find any significant anomalies (step 5)
in the poem. That in
itself suggests how highly patterned the poem is around its
basic strands and binaries.
Try this 3.5: Apply The Method to Something You Are Reading
Try The Method on a piece of reading that you wish to
understand better, perhaps
a series of editorials on the same subject, an essay, one or more
poems by the same
author (because The Method is useful for reading across texts
for common denomina-
tors), a collection of stories, a political speech, and so on. You
can work with as little
as a few paragraphs or as much as an entire article or chapter or
book.
A Procedure for Finding and Querying Binaries
As should be evident, working with binaries is central to using
The Method. But bi-
naries are so pervasive a part of analysis that we’ve given them
their own place in the
Toolkit, and we take them up again in an upcoming chapter
(Chapter 5, Analyzing
Arguments).
In Chapter 5 we argue that writing and analyzing arguments is
largely a mat-
ter of unearthing, rephrasing, and reevaluating the binary
oppositions (this against
that, on/off, dark/light, wild/domestic) that undergird them.
Working with binaries
is not the same thing as either/or thinking (right/wrong,
good/bad, black/white, wel-
fare state/free society). Either/or thinking is a problem because
it reduces things to
oversimplified extremes and reduces complex situations to only
two choices. Work-
ing with binaries, however, is not about creating stark
oppositions and weighing in
heavily on one side or the other. It is about finding these
oppositions and querying
their accuracy.
In Chapter 5 there is a fuller discussion of a four-step procedure
for working with
binaries. This procedure should enhance your ability to
understand and confront
other people’s arguments and your own. Here, in brief, are the
four steps:
1. Locate a Range of Opposing Categories (Binaries)
2. Analyze and Define the Opposing Terms
3. Question the Accuracy of the Binary and Rephrase the Terms
4. Substitute “To What Extent?” for “Either/Or”
Step four is the move that we are recommending now. It is a
tool for rephrasing
either/or choices—either free enterprise or government
control—into qualified claims,
making things a matter of degree. The operative phrase is “to
what extent” or “the
extent to which.” To what extent is the Supreme Court decision
on allowing manufac-
turers to set minimum prices for retailers an evasion of
government responsibility in
favor of unregulated free enterprise?
Try this 3.6: Working with Binaries
Write a few paragraphs in which you work with the binaries
suggested by the follow-
ing familiar expression: “School gets in the way of one’s
education.” Keep the focus on
44 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
working through the binaries implicit in the quotation. What
other terms would you
substitute for “school” and “education”? Coming up with a
range of synonyms for each
term will clarify what is at stake in the binary. Remember to
consider the accuracy of
the claim. To what extent, and in what ways, is the expression
both true and false?
Try this 3.7: Fieldwork in Either/Or Thinking
Locate some organizing contrasts in anything—something you
are studying, some-
thing you’ve just written, something you saw on television last
night, something on
the front page of the newspaper, something going on at your
campus or workplace,
and so forth. Binaries pervade the way we think; therefore, you
can expect to find
them everywhere. Consider, for example, the binaries suggested
by current trends in
contemporary music or by the representation of women in
birthday cards. Having
selected the binaries you want to work with, pick one and
transform the either/or
thinking into more qualified thinking using the extent-to-which
formula.
FREEWRITING
We have placed freewriting last in the Toolkit because it draws
on the other writing
strategies discussed in this chapter, notably paraphrasing and 10
on 1. Freewriting is
a method of arriving at ideas by writing continuously about a
subject for a limited
period of time without pausing to edit, correct, bite your pen, or
stare into space. The
rationale behind this activity can be understood through a well-
known remark by the
novelist E.M. Forster (in regard to the “tyranny” of
prearranging everything): “How
do I know what I think until I see what I say?” Freewriting
gives you the chance to see
what you’ll say.
The writer Anne Lamott writes eloquently (in Bird by Bird)
about the
censor we all hear as a nasty voice—actually a collection of
nasty voices—in our
heads that keep us from writing. These are the internalized
voices of past cr itics
whose comments have become magnified to suggest that we will
never get it
right. Freewriting allows us to tune out these voices long
enough to discover
what we might think.
This activity is sometimes known by the term prewriting. We
prefer the terms
freewriting or exploratory writing because prewriting implies
something that happens
before writing and that has no place in the final form. Good
analytical writing, at
whatever stage, has an exploratory feel. It shares its discovery
process with the reader.
And to a significant extent, the final draft re-creates for the
reader the writer’s experi-
ence of arriving at his or her key ideas.
This is not to say that writers should care only about the process
of discovery
and not about the final product, nor are we suggesting that
writers should substitute
freewriting and inconclusive thinking for carefully organized
finished drafts. We are
claiming, however, that writers have a much easier and more
productive experience
revising the final or penultimate draft if they spend more time
doing various kinds of
exploratory writing before moving to the final draft stage.
Freewriting 45
In freewriting, you write without stopping for a predetermined
period of time,
usually ten to twenty minutes. There aren’t many rules to
freewriting, just that it is
important to keep your pen (or fingers on the keyboard) moving.
Don’t reread as
you go. Don’t pause to correct things. Don’t cross things out.
Just keep writing. To
get to good writing, you first have to tolerate some chaos. In
freewriting, especially if
you engage in it frequently, you often surprise yourself with the
quality of your own
thinking, with the ideas you didn’t really know you had and the
many details you
hadn’t really noticed until you started writing.
Try this 3.8: Descriptions from Everyday Life
Spend a week describing things that you can observe in your
everyday environment—
whatever interests you on a particular day, or the same kind of
thing over a period of
days. Get the details of what you are describing on the page. If
judgments and general-
izations emerge, let them come, but don’t stay on them long.
Get back to the narration
of detail as quickly as you can. At the end of the week, write a
piece called either “What
I learned in a week of looking at . . . ” or come up with your
own shaping title.
Passage-Based Focused Freewriting
Passage-based focused freewriting is a version of freewriting
particularly suited for
increasing your ability to learn from what you read. It prompts
in-depth analysis of a
representative example, on the assumption that you’ll attain a
better appreciation of
the whole after you’ve explored how a piece of it works.
Passage-based focused freewriting resembles freewriting in
encouraging you to
leap associatively from idea to idea as they arise, and it differs
from a finished essay,
in which the sentences follow logically as you unfold your
central idea. The passage-
based version differs from regular freewriting, however, in
adding the limitation of
focus on a piece of text within which this associative thinking
may occur.
Narrow the scope to a single passage, a brief piece of the
reading (at least a sen-
tence, at most a paragraph) to anchor your analysis. You might
choose the passage in
answer to one of the following questions:
• What one passage in the reading most needs to be discussed—
is most useful for
understanding the material—and why?
• What one passage seems puzzling, difficult to pin down,
anomalous, or even just
unclear—and how might this be explained?
One advantage of focused freewriting is that its impromptu
nature encourages
you to take chances, to think out loud on the page. It invites you
to notice what you
notice in the moment and take some stabs at what it might mean
without having to
worry about formulating a weighty thesis statement or
maintaining consistency. It
allows you to worry less about what you don’t understand and
instead start to work
things out as you write.
There is no set procedure for such writing, but here are some
guidelines:
46 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
1. Seek to understand before you judge. Focus on what the text
is saying and
doing and what it is inviting readers to think, not on your own
agreement/
disagreement or like/dislike. Attend to the point of view it
advances on the
subject at hand, not to your point of view on that subject.
Eventually you
should arrive at your point of view about its point of view, but
that generally
comes later.
2. Choose a limited piece of concrete evidence to focus on.
Select a passage that
you find interesting, that you have questions about, perhaps one
that you don’t
quite understand. That way your writing will have some work to
do.
3. Contextualize the evidence. Where does the passage come
from in the text? Of
what larger discussion is it a part? Briefly answering these
questions prevents
you from taking things out of context.
4. Make observations about the evidence. Stay close to the data
you’ve quoted.
Paraphrase key phrases in the passage, teasing out the possible
meanings of these
words. Then reflect on what you’ve come to better understand
through para-
phrasing. Note: to encourage attention to the words and
discourage overly gen-
eral leaps, it is useful to write out the passage before you begin
your freewriting
(especially if you are being asked to do the freewriting in class,
as is often the case
in college writing). The act of copying often induces you to
notice more about
the particular features of your chosen passage.
5. Share your reasoning about what the evidence means. As you
move from ob-
servation to implication, remember that you need to explain how
you know the
data mean what you claim they mean.
6. Address how the passage is representative. Consider how the
passage you’ve
selected connects to broader issues in the reading. At various
points in your
freewriting feel free to move from your analysis of local details
to address what,
given what you now understand, the work as a whole may
plausibly be “saying”
about this or that issue or question. It’s okay to work with the
details for almost
the entire time and then press yourself to an interpretive leap
with the formula,
“I’m almost out of time but my big point is . . .”
Try this 3.9: Doing a Passage-Based Focused Freewrite
Select a passage from any of the material that you are reading
and copy it at the
top of the page. Then do a twenty-minute focused freewrite on
it, using the guide-
lines already stated. It is often productive to take the focused
freewrite and type
it, revising and further freewriting until you have filled the
inevitable gaps in
your thinking that the time limit has created. (One colleague of
ours has students do
this in a different font, so both can see how the thinking is
evolving.) Eventually, you can
build up, through a process of accretion, the thinking for an
entire paper in this way.
Writers’ Notebooks
Writers’ notebooks (journals) are unlike a personal diary, in
which you keep track of
your days’ activities and recount the feelings these occasioned;
journals are for gen-
erating and collecting ideas and for keeping track of your
ongoing interactions with
Freewriting 47
course materials. A journal can be, in effect, a collection of
focused freewrites that you
develop in response to the reading and lectures in a course.
The best way to get a journal to work for you is to experiment.
You might try, for
example, copying and commenting on statements from your
reading or class meetings
that you found potentially illuminating. Use the journal to write
down the ideas, reac-
tions, and germs of ideas you had during a class discussion or
that you found running
around in your head after a late night’s reading. Use the journal
to retain your first
impressions of books or films or music or performances or
whatever so that you can
then look back at them and trace the development of your
thinking.
If possible, write in your journal every day. As with
freewriting, the best way to get
started is just to start, see what happens, and take it from there.
Also as with freewrit-
ing, the more you write, the more you’ll find yourself noticing,
and, thus, the more
you’ll have to say.
Passage-Based Focused Freewriting: An Example
Following is an example of a student’s exploratory writing on
an essay by the
twentieth-century, African-American writer Langston Hughes.
The piece is a twenty-
minute reflection on two excerpts. Most notable about this
piece, perhaps, is the sheer
number of interesting ideas. That may be because the writer
continually returns to
the language of the original quotes for inspiration. She is not
restricted by main-
taining a single and consistent thread. It is interesting, though,
that as the freewrite
progresses, a primary focus (on the second of her two quotes)
seems to emerge.
Passages from “The Negro Artist and the Racial Mountain” by
Langston Hughes
“But jazz to me is one of the inherent expressions of Negro life
in America; the eternal tom-tom
beating in the Negro soul—the tom-tom of revolt against
weariness in a white world, a world of
subway trains, and work, work, work; the tom-tom of joy and
laughter, and pain swallowed in a
smile. Yet the Philadelphia clubwoman is ashamed to say that
her race created it and she does not
like me to write about it. The old subconscious ‘white is best’
runs through her mind. . . . And now
she turns up her nose at jazz and all its manifestations—
likewise almost everything else distinctly
racial.”
“We build our temples for tomorrow, strong as we know how,
and we stand on top of the
mountain, free within ourselves.”
Langston Hughes’s 1926 essay on the situation of the Negro
artist in America sets up some
interesting issues that are as relevant today as they were in
Hughes’s time. Interestingly, the final
sentence of the essay (“We build our temples . . .”) will be
echoed some four decades later by the
Civil Rights leader, Martin Luther King, but with a different
spin on the idea of freedom. Hughes
writes “we stand on top of the mountain, free within ourselves.”
King says, “Free at last, free at
last, my God almighty, we’re free at last.” King asserts an
opening out into the world—a freeing
of black people, finally, from slavery and then another century
of oppression.
Hughes speaks of blacks in a more isolated position— “on top
of the mountain” and
“within ourselves.” Although the mountain may stand for a
height from which the artist
can speak, it is hard to be heard from the top of mountains. It is
one thing to be free. It is
another to be free within oneself. What does this phrase mean?
If I am free within myself
I am at least less vulnerable to those who would restrict me
from without. I can live with
48 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods
their restrictions. Mine is an inner freedom. Does inner freedom
empower artists? Perhaps
it does. It may allow them to say what they want and not worry
about what others say or
think. This is one thing that Hughes seems to be calling for. But
he is also worried about
lack of recognition of Negro artists, not only by whites but by
blacks. His use of the
repeated phrase, tom-tom, is interesting in this respect. It, like
the word “mountain,”
becomes a kind of refrain in the essay—announcing both a
desire to rise above the world
and its difficulties (mountain) and a desire to be heard (tom-tom
and mountain as pulpit).
The idea of revolt, outright rebellion, is present but subdued in
the essay. The tom-tom is a
“revolt against weariness” and also an instrument for expressing
“joy and laughter.” The tom-tom
also suggests a link with a past African and probably Native
American culture—communicating by
drum and music and dance. White culture in the essay stands for
a joyless world of “work, work,
work.” This is something I would like to think about more, as
the essay seems to link the loss of
soul with the middle and upper classes, both black and white.
And so the essay seeks to claim another space among those he
calls “the low down folks, the
so-called common element.” Of these he says “ . . . they do not
particularly care whether they are
like white folks or anybody else. Their joy runs, bang! into
ecstasy. Their religion soars to a shout.
Work maybe a little today, rest a little tomorrow. Play awhile.
Sing awhile. O, let’s dance!” In these
lines Hughes the poet clearly appears. Does he say then that the
Negro artist needs to draw from
those of his own people who are the most removed from middle
class American life? If I had more
time, I would start thinking here about Hughes’s use of the
words “race” and “racial.” . . .
ASSIGNMENTS: Using the Toolkit
1. Pick a single scene from a film, a single photograph from a
collection of a pho-
tographer’s photographs, or some other single example that is
interestingly rep-
resentative of a larger subject. Do 10 on 1 with your scene or
other representative
example. Notice as much as you can about it. Then organize
your observations
using The Method: What details repeat? What is opposed to
what? Use the
results to generate a piece of writing.
2. Work with binaries to develop a short essay. You might
consider, for example,
some of the either/or categories that students tend to put each
other in, or their
teachers. Or look to current events in the world or in some more
local arena, and
find the binaries that seem to divide people or groups.
3. Find a subject to analyze using Notice and Focus and then
The Method. Your
aim here initially is not to write a formal paper but to do data-
gathering on the
page. After you have written the paragraph that is the final part
of The Method,
revise and expand your work into a short essay. Don’t worry too
much at this
point about form (introductory paragraph, for example) or
thesis. Just write at
greater length about what you noticed and what you selected as
most revealing
or interesting or strange or significant, and why.
You might use a story, essay, or poem by a writer you like,
perhaps a painting
or an artistic photograph. The Method could yield interesting
results applied to
the architecture on your campus, the student newspaper, campus
clothing styles,
or the latest news about the economy.
CHAPTER 4
Interpretation: What It Is, What
It Isn’t, and How to Do It
While Chapter 3, A Toolkit of Analytical Methods, provides a
number of analytical
methods (Paraphrase " 3, Notice and Focus, The Method,
Working with Binaries,
and Freewriting), this chapter offers only one—the
interpretation-triggering question
“So what?” This question, along with a variant we call Seems to
Be about X . . . , takes
you from observations to theories about the meaning of your
data. Interpretation is
the meaning-making phase of analysis.
Think of the analytical tools in this book as prompts or triggers.
As you saw in
Chapter 3, the words interesting, strange, significant, and
revealing prompt different
kinds of noticing. Each causes a particular spin or orientation
on the way you look
at your data. Similarly, when you employ the strategy we call
ranking (naming one
observation as more important than others), you have already
pushed yourself toward
interpretation. Habitually prompting your thinking with these
words and phrases
can train your attention, helping you to see features of your
evidence that open up
its meaning.
We begin this chapter with an example that demonstrates how
the So what? ques-
tion functions, along with revisiting the prompts interesting and
strange. Then we
step back from practice to theory and address the issues that
interpretation typically
raises. The chapter ends with an example that brings all the
steps together, from
observations to implications to conclusions.
To preview the theoretical discussion: just as the analytical
frame of mind has to
make way against its opposite, the anti-analytical mind-set, so
too does interpretation.
Here is a quick take on the premises underlying the pro-
interpretation mind-set
followed by examples of anti-interpretation claims.
Pro-Interpretation Premises
• Everything means, which is to say that everything in life calls
on us to interpret,
even when we are unaware of doing so.
• Meaning is contextual, which is to say that meaning-making
always occurs inside
of some social or cultural or other frame of reference.
49
50 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
Anti-Interpretation Thinking
• “Sometimes a cigar is just a cigar,” which is a joke that
psychoanalyst Sigmund Freud
made about his own interpretive practice; that is, sometimes a
thing simply is what
it is and no more. (We’ll demonstrate that a cigar is almost
never just a cigar.)
• “You’re just making that up,” that is, “reading into” things
and finding stuff that
“isn’t there.” (This is a tenacious anti-interpretation attitude.
We show that it is
partially justified, but mostly not.)
• “I’m entitled to my opinion.” (We spoke of this reflex in
Chapter 2 in the context
of overpersonalizing. Its anti-interpretive and anti-analytical
power comes from
the mistaken idea that meanings are entirely personal and thus
that all inter-
pretations are subjective and not susceptible to the rules of
logic. This mind-set
sounds attractively democratic—all meanings are created
equal—but the fact is
that some interpretations are better than others. We’ll explain
why this is so.)
And now, onto the chapter’s primary formula for interpretation,
So what?
PUSHING OBSERVATIONS TO CONCLUSIONS: ASKING SO
WHAT?
The prompt for making the move from observation to
implication and, ultimately,
interpretation is So what?, which is shorthand for such
questions as:
What does the observation imply?
Why does this observation matter?
Where does this observation get us?
How can we begin to generalize about the subject?
Asking So what?—or its milder cousin, And so?—is a calling to
account, which is
why, in conversation, its force is potentially rude. That is, the
question intervenes rather
peremptorily with a “Why does this matter?” It is thus a
challenge to make meaning
through a creative leap—to move beyond the patterns and
emphases you’ve been ob-
serving in the data to tentative conclusions on what these
observations suggest.
The peremptoriness of the So what? question can, we think, be
liberating. Okay,
take the plunge, it says. Start laying out possible
interpretations. And, when you are
tempted to stop thinking too soon, asking So what? will press
you onward.
For example, let’s say you make a number of observations about
the nature of
e-mail communication—it’s cheap, informal, often
grammatically incorrect, full of
abbreviations (“IMHO”), and ephemeral (impermanent). You
rank these and decide
that its ephemerality is most interesting. So what? Well, that’s
why so many people use
it, you speculate, because it doesn’t last. So what that its
popularity follows from its
ephemerality? Well, apparently we like being released from the
hard-and-fast rules of
formal communication; e-mail frees us. So what? Well.
The repeated asking of this question causes people to push on
from and pursue
the implications of their first responses; it prompts people to
reason in a chain, rather
than settling prematurely for a single link.
Asking So What?: An Example 51
In step 1 of this process, you describe your evidence,
paraphrasing key language
and looking for interesting patterns of repetition and contrast.
In step 2 you begin querying your own observations by making
what is implicit
explicit.
In the final step you push your observations and statements of
implications to
interpretive conclusions by again asking, So what? See Figure
4.1.
ASKING SO WHAT?: AN EXAMPLE
The following is the opening paragraph of a talk given by a
professor of Political Sci-
ence at our college, Dr. Jack Gambino, on the occasion of a
gallery opening featuring
the work of two contemporary photographers of urban and
industrial landscapes.
We have located in brackets our annotations of his turns of
thought, as these pivot on
“strange” and “So what?”
If you look closely at Camilo Vergara’s photo of Fern Street,
Camden, 1988,
you’ll notice a sign on the side of a dilapidated building:
Danger: Men Working
W. Hargrove Demolition
Perhaps that warning captures the ominous atmosphere of these
very different kinds of photographic documents by Camilo
Vergara and
Edward Burtynsky: “Danger: Men Working.” Watch out—
human beings
are at work! But the work that is presented is not so much a
building-up
as it is a tearing-down—the work of demolition. [Strange:
tearing down
is unexpected; writer asks So what? and answers.] Of course,
demolition
is often necessary in order to construct anew: old buildings are
leveled
for new projects, whether you are building a highway or bridge
in
an American city or a dam in the Chinese countryside. You
might call
modernity itself, as so many have, a process of creative
destruction,
a term used variously to describe modern art, capitalism, and
technological innovation. The photographs in this exhibit,
however,
force us to pay attention to the “destructive” side of this modern
At some point the So what? question will begin to trigger a
move from
implications to possible conclusions.
Observation So what? Implication(s)
Implications So what? Conclusions(s)
FIGURE 4.1
So What?
52 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
equation. [Strange: photos emphasize destruction and not
creation;
writer asks So what? and answers.] What both Burtynsky and
Vergara
do in their respective ways is to put up a warning sign—they
ques-
tion whether the reworking of our natural and social
environment leads
to a sustainable human future. And they wonder whether the
process
of creative destruction may not have spun recklessly out of
control,
producing places that are neither habitable nor sustainable. In
fact, a
common element connecting the two photographic versions is
the near
absence of people in the landscape. [Writer points to supporting
feature
of evidence, which he will further theorize.] While we see the
evidence
of the transforming power of human production on the physical
and
social environment, neither Vergara’s urban ruins nor
Burtynsky’s indus-
trial sites actually show us “men working.” [Writer continues to
move
by noticing strange absence of people in photographs of sites
where
men work.] Isolated figures peer suspiciously out back doors or
pick
through the rubble, but they appear out of place. [Writer asks a
final So
what? and arrives at a conclusion.] It is this sense of
displacement—of
human beings alienated from the environments they themselves
have
created—that provides the most haunting aspect of the work of
these
two photographers.
The Gambino paragraph is a good example of how interpretive
paragraphs
are generated. Notice the pattern by which the paragraph moves:
the observation
of something strange, about which the writer asks and answers
So what? several
times until arriving at a final So what?—the point at which he
decides what his
observations ultimately mean. We call the final So what? in this
chain of think-
ing “the ultimate So what” because it moves from implications
to the writer’s
culminating point.
The Gambino paragraph is also a good example of the way
paragraphs
operate as smaller units or stages on the way to a longer paper.
We’ll say more
in Chapter 10 about paragraph structure. For now, think of
paragraphs as the
building blocks of a piece of thinking in which movement of
mind creates the
structure (not the too-simple notion of topic sentence +
evidence). Ideas evolve
one paragraph at a time; there is no rule that says you can’t
write a paper in
paragraph-length chunks and later line these up in a way that
best reveals the big
picture.
Try this 4.1: Tracking the Interpretive Process in a Student
Paper
The following paper offers you an opportunity to further
observe how a writer moves
from observation to interpretation. We’ve inserted the phrase So
what? at the places
in the first four paragraphs where that prompt seems to be
allowing the writer to
draw out the implication of an observation. We have left the last
three paragraphs
unmarked so that you can supply the interpretive prompts
wherever you see the writer
moving from observations to implications and conclusions. Also
watch for—and
mark—places where the writer moves forward by seeking to
explain some feature of
the dance that she found strange.
Asking So What?: An Example 53
Hua dan: The Dance of Values in the Beijing Opera
[1] Lanfang says in his autobiography that ′′The beautiful
dance movements created by
past artists are all based on gestures in real life, synthesized and
accentuated to
become art′′ . . . (36). In this quote Lanfang emphasizes a
representation of life
through ′′beautiful′′ movement. As he is a product of his
culture, he is describing what
his culture deems ′′beautiful.′′ The female roles in the Beijing
Opera, particularly the
Hua dan, convey their own set of cultural values about
femininity in Chinese culture.
[2] There is much posing and holding of shapes within the Hua
dan role. [So what?] There
is a gentle, poised focus in these moments. This allows the
viewers time to take in the
elegance of the shape, costumes, makeup, music, and artistry of
the performer. The fruit
of these efforts becomes evident and framed by the pausing. [So
what?] The work the
performers put in is valued in the pause.
[3] All the movements are very clear in their choices between
making angles and using the full
extension of the limbs, particularly the arms. The angular
shapes give a sharp contrast to
the extension of the arms and legs. Circular formations of the
arms are seamlessly round
and often repeated to emphasize their distinctness. [So what?]
This exactness and
clarity emphasizes the importance and power of the body. By
paying such attention to
particulars it gives greater emphasis to the powers held in
making these shapes.
[4] There is much repetition and opening and closing in the
movement. [So what?] Repetition
can represent the large amount of time females spend on such
activities. It can also give a
sense of the time it actually takes for such actions in real life,
such as sewing. The women do
spend much time sewing, and this time is represented. It also
takes consistency and dedication
to complete such tasks multiple times, so these become valued
characteristics.
[5] Rhythm is also an element of the very controlled female
walking consisting of small, even
steps. The feet barely leave the floor and don’t extend into
kicks or jumps, as do some of
the male roles. Even in the Hua dan demonstration in the
“Aspects of Peking Opera” video
when a bounce was in the character’s step and the eyes were
alive, the flow of the walk
remained consistent. The smallness of the steps could represent
the female’s place in so-
ciety. They are petite and not flashy in their maneuvers. They
complete their tasks without
much fanfare. Keeping the feet low also limits the opening of
the legs. Such protection and
withholding represents a value in itself—the absence of overt
sexual suggestion. Although
the male characters may be more likely to overtly demonstrate
their strength and power,
it takes a great amount of control and focus for the women to
execute their walks, so this
convention is demonstrating the value of women keeping their
struggles and work hidden.
[6] Although my viewing of Peking Opera is limited, it caught
my eye to see the Hua dan’s
shoulders finally move in a flirtation demonstration in the
“Aspects” video. This isola-
tion and interruption of flow seemed out of character to all
other demonstrated acts. All
other actions were focused on creating lines and full range of
motion. Breaking typically
occurs only at the elbows and wrists. These shoulder shrugs
break not only the lines but
the flowing rhythm. Making flirtation stand out suggests that in
the context of the opera,
such coquettish moments are important for the audience both in
terms of character and
life off the stage. It also reminds the viewers that there are even
more areas of the body
that have not been used but are present within the character and
performer.
54 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
[7] What are the recurring themes in all these observations?
They lie in control, value of
movement, and repetition. The “beauty” lies not only in the
quality of the movement but
in what it represents. The dainty representation of females, their
modesty and strong
work ethic, and care in their activities are of great importance,
but so too is the slight
pleasure in restricted flirtation. When combined, these qualities
of movement create a
carefully crafted portrayal of a polished female. It serves to
represent not only a clear
character but a beautiful and desirable female figure.
IMPLICATIONS VERSUS HIDDEN MEANINGS
Because implications (implicit meanings) are suggested by the
language or details of
a subject rather than explicitly stated, some people mistakenly
believe that interpre-
tation is a mysterious process. “Where do you get that?” they
say, often suspiciously.
Some people go further in their suspicion or outright rejection
of interpretive think-
ing. They say things like “Why can’t you just enjoy the movie?”
or “Does everything
have to mean something?”
Two familiar phrases reveal anxiety and even hostility toward
what we named in the
first chapter as one of the five analytical moves: Make the
Implicit Explicit. The phrases
are hidden meanings and reading between the lines. We say
more about these later, but
first we offer an exercise demonstrating that implicit meanings
are really “there,” which
is to say that they are readily suggested by explicit language in
the text even though they
are not stated directly. Although it is true that people might not
always agree on what
is being implied by particular language or details, differences
are usually small and can
be negotiated because drawing out implications is a logical
process.
Taking the Pressure Off
When writing about dance, the primary evidence is the dance
itself and the
theatrical accompaniments enhancing the work (sets, costumes,
music, nar-
rative, lights, etc.). Seeing and understanding how and what
dance commu-
nicates is the main task of the dance writer. Because dance is
often abstract
and purposely open to multiple interpretations, students are
usually terrified
at the prospect of finding and interpreting evidence in support
of a thesis.
Typical first responses to analysis include
“I enjoy watching dance, but I have never looked for meaning or
message.”
“I don’t know enough about dance to understand it.”
My responses include, “Sit back, relax, and enjoy the dance—
save analy-
sis for later. Start your analysis by pretending you are
discussing the per-
formance with a friend who did not see it. As you tell him or
her about the
performance, you will naturally begin to gather evidence and
analyze.”
—Karen Dearborn, Professor of Dance
VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM
Implications versus Hidden Meanings 55
Try this 4.2: Inferring Implications from Observations
Each of the following statements is rich in implication. Some
are quite general ob-
servations; others are scientific facts, and others come to us as
hypotheses from the
social sciences. Write a list of as many plausible implications as
you can think of for
each of the statements. You might find it useful to do this
exercise along with other
people because part of its aim is to reveal the extent to which
different people infer
the same implications.
1. The sidewalk is disappearing as a feature of the American
residential landscape.
New housing developments have them only if a township
requires them of the
developer. (Here are a couple of implications to prime the
pump: people don’t
walk anywhere anymore; builders lack much sense of social
responsibility; cur-
rent development practices are eliminating ways of life that
involve anything
except the car—and there are more.)
2. New house designs are tending increasingly toward open
plans in which the
kitchen is not separated from the rest of the house. New house
designs continue
to have a room called the living room, usually a space at the
front of the house
near the front door, but many (not all) also have a separate
space called the fam-
ily room, which is usually in some part of the house farther
removed from the
front door and closer to the kitchen.
3. “Good fences make good neighbors.”—Robert Frost
4. In the female brain, there are more connections between the
right hemisphere
(emotions, spatial reasoning) and the left hemisphere (verbal
facility). In the
male brain, these two hemispheres remain more separate.
5. An increasing number of juveniles—people younger than
eighteen—are being
tried and convicted as adults, rather than as minors, in America,
with the result
that more minors are serving adult sentences for crimes they
committed while
still in their teens.
6. Neuroscientists tell us that the frontal cortex of the brain,
the part that is respon-
sible for judgment and especially for impulse control, is not
fully developed in
humans until roughly the age of twenty-one. What are the
implications of this
observation relative to observation 5?
7. Linguists have long commented on the tendency of women’s
speech to use rising
inflection at the end of statements as if the statements were
questions. An actual
command form—Be home by midnight!—thus becomes a
question instead. What
are we to make of the fact that in recent years younger men
(under thirty) have
begun to end declarative statements and command forms with
rising inflections?
8. Shopping malls and grocery stores rarely have clocks.
9. All data are neutral; they’re neither good nor bad.
After you have made your list of implications for each item,
consider how you
arrived at them. On the basis of this experience, how would you
answer the following
questions? What is the difference between an idea being
“hidden” and an idea being
56 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
implied? What, in other words, is an implication? To what
extent do you think most
people would arrive at the same implications that you did?
As Try this 4.2 illustrates, the inferring of implications does
require an act of mind.
But the implications are neither hidden nor fancifully invented.
The charge that the
meaning is hidden implies an act of conspiracy on the part of
either an author, who
chooses to deliberately obscure his or her meaning, or on the
part of readers, who con-
spire to “find” things lurking below the surface that other
readers don’t know about and
are unable to see. A further assumption is that people probably
know what they mean
most of the time but, for some perverse reason, are unwilling to
come out and say so.
“Reading between the lines” is a version of the hidden meaning
theory in suggest-
ing that we have to look for meanings elsewhere than in the
lines of text themselves.
At its most skeptical, reading between the lines means that an
interpretation has come
from nothing at all, from the white space between the lines, and
therefore has been
imposed on the material by the interpreter.
Proponents of these views of analysis are, in effect, committing
themselves to the
position that everything in life means what it says and says what
it means. This posi-
tion posits another related one: that meanings are always
obvious and understood in
the same way by everyone, and thus don’t require interpretation
(which is an example
of “naturalizing our own assumptions” as discussed in Chapter
2). People who use the
expressions hidden meanings and reading between the lines
generally don’t recognize
that these phrases imply theories of interpretation, but they do.
It is probably safe to assume that most writers try to write what
they mean and mean
what they say. That is, they try to control the range of possible
interpretations that their
words could give rise to, but there is always more going on in a
piece of writing (as in our
everyday conversation) than can easily be pinned down and
controlled. It is, in fact, an in-
herent property of language that it always means more than and
thus other than it says.
Though we may not pause to take notice, we are continually
processing what
goes on around us for the indirect or suggested meanings it
contains. If you observe
yourself for a day, you’ll find yourself interpreting even the
most direct-seeming state-
ments. There’s an old cartoon about the anxiety bred by the
continual demands of
interpretation: a person saying “Good morning” causes the one
addressed to respond,
“What did she mean by that?”
The truth to which this cartoon points is that a statement can
have various mean-
ings, depending on various circumstances and how it is said.
The relationship between
words and meaning is always complex. As Marshall McLuhan,
one of the fathers of
modern communication theory, noted, communication always
involves determining
not just what is being said, but also “what kind of message a
message is.” Depending
on tone and context, “Good morning” can mean a number of
things.
THE LIMITS ON INTERPRETATION
As we said in the chapter opening, everything means, which is
to say that everything
in life calls on us to interpret, even when we are unaware of
doing so. It is not the case,
however, that things can mean whatever we want them to. There
are powerful limits
The Limits on Interpretation 57
on interpretation because (1) meanings are bound by rules of
logic and evidence, and
(2) meanings always occur within one or more particular
interpretive contexts.
To approach these claims, we need first to consider the
elemental question of
where meanings come from. The first thing to understand about
meanings is that they
are made, not ready-made in the subject matter. They are the
product of a transaction
between a mind and the world, between a reader and his or her
materials. That is, the
making of meaning is a process to which the observer and the
thing observed both
contribute. It is not a product of either alone.
If meanings aren’t ready-made, there to be found in the subject
matter, what’s
to prevent people from imposing meaning with wild abandon?
To pursue this
question, we ask that you revisit the photograph and discussion
of the painting
Whistler’s Mother located at the end of Chapter 1. There we
distinguished a summary—a
focused description—of the painting from an interpretation that
grew out of the
summary. We interpreted such evidence as the figure of the
mother being in profile and
austerely dressed as signs that the painting is ultimately about
her separateness from us,
inviting us to contemplate her as an emblem of the mystery of
self-sufficiency.
Plausible versus Implausible Interpretations
What if instead of our interpretation a person claimed that the
painting is about
death, with the black-clad mother mourning the death of a loved
one, perhaps a per-
son who lived in the house represented in the painting on the
wall? It is true that black
clothes often indicate mourning. This is a culturally accepted,
recognized sign. But
with only the black dress, and perhaps the sad facial expression
(if it is sad) to go on,
the mourning theory gets sidetracked from what is actually in
the painting into story-
telling. This points out one of the primary limits on the
meaning-making process.
• Meanings must be reasoned from sufficient evidence if they
are to be judged
plausible. Meanings can always be refuted by people who find
fault with your
reasoning or can cite conflicting evidence.
Now what if another person asserted that Whistler’s mother is
an alien astronaut,
for example, her long black dress concealing a third leg?
Obviously, this interpretation
would not win wide support, and for a reason that points out
another of the primary
limits on the meaning-making process.
• Meanings, to have value outside one’s own private realm of
experience, have to
make sense to other people. The assertion that Whistler’s
mother is an alien as-
tronaut is unlikely to be deemed acceptable by enough people to
give it currency.
This is to say that the relative value of interpretive meanings is
socially (culturally)
determined. Although people are free to say that things mean
whatever they want
them to mean, saying doesn’t make it so. The mourning theory
has more evidence
than the alien astronaut theory, but it still relies too heavily on
what is not there,
on a narrative for which there is insufficient evidence in the
painting itself.
Your readers’ willingness to accept an interpretation is
powerfully connected to
their ability to see its plausibility—that is, how it follows from
both the supporting
details that you have selected and the language you have used in
characterizing those
58 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
details. The writer who can offer a plausible (not necessarily or
obviously true, but
believable) description of a subject’s key features is likely to
arrive at conclusions
about possible meanings that others would share. Often the best
that you can hope for
with analytical conclusions is not that others will say, “Yes,
that is obviously right,” but
“Yes, I can see where it might be possible and reasonable to
think as you do.”
Interpretive Contexts and Multiple Meanings
There are, however, other possible interpretations that would
satisfy the two
criteria of sufficient evidence and broad cultural acceptance.
And it is valuable to
recognize that evidence usually supports more than one
plausible interpretation.
Consider, for example, a reading of Whistler’s Mother that a
person might produce
if he or she began with noticing the actual title, Arrangement in
Grey and Black: The
Artist’s Mother. From this starting point, a person might focus
observation on the
disposition of color exclusively and arrive at an interpretation
that the painting is
about painting (which might then explain why there is also a
painting on the wall).
The figure of the mother then would have meaning only insofar
as it contained
the two colors mentioned in the painting’s title, black and gray,
and the painting’s
representational content (the aspects of life that it shows us)
would be assigned less
importance. This is a promising and plausible idea for an
interpretation. It makes
use of different details from previous interpretations that we’ve
suggested, but it
would also address some of the details already targeted (the
dress, the curtain) from
an entirely different context, focusing on the use and
arrangement of color.
To generalize: two equally plausible interpretations can be
made of the same thing.
It is not the case that our first reading, focusing on the profile
view of the mother
and suggesting the painting’s concern with mysterious
separateness, is right, whereas
the painting-about-painting (or aesthetic) view, building from
the clue in the title, is
wrong. They operate within different contexts.
An interpretive context is a lens. Depending on the context you
choose—preferably
a context suggested by the evidence itself—you will see
different things. Regardless of
how the context is arrived at, an important part of getting an
interpretation accepted
as plausible is to argue for the appropriateness of the
interpretive context you use, not
just the interpretation it takes you to.
Specifying an Interpretive Context: An Example
Notice how in the following analysis the student writer’s
interpretation relies on his
choice of a particular interpretive context, post–World War II
Japan. Had he selected
another context, he might have arrived at some different
conclusions about the same
details. Notice also how the writer perceives a pattern in the
details and how he queries
his own observations (So what?) to arrive at an interpretation.
The series entitled “Kamaitachi” is a journal of the
photographer Hosoe’s desolate childhood
and wartime evacuation in the Tokyo countryside. He returns
years later to the areas where he
grew up, a stranger to his native land, perhaps likening himself
to the legendary Kamaitachi, an
invisible sickle-toothed weasel, intertwined with the soil and its
unrealized fertility. “Kamaitachi
#8” (1956), a platinum palladium print, stands alone to best
capture Hosoe’s alienation from
Intention as an Interpretive Context 59
and troubled expectation of the future of Japan. [Here the writer
chooses the photogra-
pher’s life as his interpretive context.]
The image is that of a tall fence of stark horizontal and vertical
rough wood lashed together,
looming above the barren rice fields. Straddling the fence, half-
crouched and half-clinging, is
a solitary male figure, gazing in profile to the horizon.
Oblivious to the sky above of dark and
churning thunderclouds, the figure instead focuses his attentions
and concentrations elsewhere.
[The writer selects and describes significant detail.]
It is exactly this elsewhere that makes the image successful, for
in studying the man we are
to turn our attention in the direction of the figure’s gaze and
away from the photograph itself.
He hangs curiously between heaven and earth, suspended on a
makeshift man-made structure,
in a purgatorial limbo awaiting the future. He waits with
anticipation—perhaps dread?—for a
time that has not yet come; he is directed away from the
present, and it is this sensitivity to
time that sets this print apart from the others in the series. One
could argue that in effect this
man, clothed in common garb, has become Japan itself,
indicative of the post-war uncertainty
of a country once-dominant and now destroyed. What will the
future (dark storm clouds) hold
for this newly-humbled nation? [Here the writer notices a
pattern of in-between-ness
and locates it in an historical context in order to make his
interpretive leap.]
Remember that regardless of the subject you select for your
analysis, you should
directly address not just “What does this say?” but also, as this
writer has done, “What
are we invited to make of it, and in what context?”
INTENTION AS AN INTERPRETIVE CONTEXT
An interpretive context that frequently creates problems in
analysis is intention.
People relying on authorial intention as their interpretive
context typically assert that
the author—not the work itself—is the ultimate and correct
source of interpreta-
tions. This is true of what a senator says about a bill he wishes
passed. It is also true
of what an artist says about her work.
FIGURE 4.2
The Dancers by Sarah Kersh. Pen-and-Ink Drawing, 6′′ "
13.75′′.
©
Th
e
Da
nc
er
s,
by
S
ar
ah
K
er
sh
. P
en
a
nd
in
k d
ra
w
in
g,
6
′′
"
1
3.
75
′′.
Us
ed
b
y P
er
m
iss
io
n
of
S
ar
ah
K
er
sh
.
60 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
Look at the drawing titled The Dancers in Figure 4.2. What
follows is the artist’s
statement about how the drawing came about and what it came
to mean to her.
This piece was created completely unintentionally. I poured
some ink onto
paper and blew on it through a straw. The ink took the form of
what looked
like little people in movement. I recopied the figures I liked,
touched up the
rough edges, and ended with this gathering of fairy-like
creatures. I love
how in art something abstract can so suddenly become
recognizable.
In this case, interestingly, the artist initially had no intentions
beyond ex perimenting
with materials. As the work evolved, she began to arrive at her
own interpretation of
what the drawing might suggest. Most viewers would probably
find the artist’s inter-
pretation plausible, but this is not to say that the artist must
have the last word and that
it is somehow an infraction for others to produce alternative
interpretations.
Suppose the artist had stopped with her first two sentences.
Even this explicit state-
ment of her lack of intention would not prohibit people from
interpreting the draw-
ing in some of the ways that she later goes on to suggest. The
artist’s initial absence of
a plan doesn’t require viewers to interpret The Dancers as only
ink on paper.
In any case, whenever an intention is ascribed to a person, an
act, or a product,
this intention contributes significantly to meaning; but the
intention, whatever its
source, does not outrank or exclude other interpretations. It is
simply another context
for understanding.
Why is this so? In our earlier discussion of personalizing, we
suggested that people
are not entirely free agents, immune to the effects of the culture
they inhabit. It fol-
lows that when people produce things, they are inevitably
affected by that culture in
ways of which they are both aware and unaware. The culture, in
other words, speaks
through them. In the early 1960s, for example, a popular
domestic sitcom entitled
Leave It to Beaver portrayed the mother, June Cleaver, usually
impeccably dressed in
heels, dress, and pearls, doing little other than dusting the
mantlepiece and making
tuna fish sandwiches for her sons. Is the show then intentionally
oppressing June by
implying that the proper role for women is that of domestic
helper? Well, in the con-
text of post–women’s movement thinking, the show’s
representation of Mrs. Cleaver
might plausibly be read this way, but not as a matter of
intention. But to conclude
that Leave It to Beaver promoted a particular stereotype about
women does not mean
that the writers got together every week and asked, “How
should we oppress June this
week?” It is cultural norms asserting themselves here, not
authorial intent.
It is interesting and useful to try to determine from something
you are analyzing
what its makers might have intended. But, by and large, you are
best off concentrat-
ing on what the thing itself communicates as opposed to what
someone might have
wanted it to communicate.
What Is and Isn’t “Meant” to Be Analyzed
What about analyzing things that were not intended to “mean”
anything, like enter-
tainment films and everyday things like blue jeans and shopping
malls? Some peo-
ple believe that it is wrong to bring out unintended
implications. Let’s take another
The Fortune Cookie School of Interpretation 61
example: Barbie dolls. These are just toys intended for young
girls, people might say.
Clearly, the intention of the makers of Barbie is to make money
by entertaining chil-
dren. Does that mean Barbie must remain outside of interpretive
scrutiny for such
things as her built-in earrings, high-heeled feet, and heavily
marketed lifestyle?
What the makers of a particular product or idea intend is only a
part of what that
product or idea communicates. The urge to cordon off certain
subjects from analy-
sis on the grounds that they weren’t meant to be analyzed
unnecessarily excludes a
wealth of information—and meaning—from your range of
vision. It is right to be
careful about the interpretive contexts we bring to our
experience. It is less right—less
useful—to confine our choice of context in a too literal-minded
way to a single
category. To some people, baseball is only a game and clothing
is only there to protect
us from the elements.
What such people don’t want to admit is that things
communicate meaning to oth-
ers whether we wish them to or not, which is to say that the
meanings of most things
are socially determined. What, for example, does the choice of
wearing a baseball cap to
a staff meeting or to a class “say”? Note, by the way, that a
communicative gesture such
as the wearing of a hat need not be premeditated to
communicate something to other
people. The hat is still “there” and available to be “read” by
others as a sign of certain
attitudes and a culturally defined sense of identity—with or
without intention.
Baseball caps, for example, carry different associations from
berets or wool caps
because they come from different social contexts. Baseball caps
convey a set of at-
titudes associated with the piece of American culture they come
from. They suggest,
for example, popular rather than high culture, casual rather than
formal, young—
perhaps defiantly so, especially if worn backward—rather than
old, and so on. The
social contexts that make gestures like our choice of hats carry
particular meanings
are always shifting, but some such context is always present. As
we asserted at the
beginning of this chapter, everything means, and meaning is
always contextual.
We can, of course, protest that the “real” reason for turning our
baseball cap back-
ward is to allow more light in, making it easier to see than when
the bill of the cap
shields our faces. This practical rationale makes sense, but it
does not explain away the
social statement that the hat and a particular way of wearing it
might make.
Because meaning is, to a significant extent, socially determined,
we can’t entirely
control what our clothing, our manners, our language, or even
our way of walking
communicates to others. This is one of the reasons that analysis
makes some people
suspicious and uneasy. They don’t want to acknowledge that
they are sending mes-
sages in spite of themselves, messages they haven’t deliberately
and overtly chosen.
We turn now to two common problems writers encounter in
interpretation. These
problems are so widespread that we have fancifully labeled
them “schools.”
THE FORTUNE COOKIE SCHOOL OF INTERPRETATION
The theory of interpretation that we call the Fortune Cookie
School believes
that things have a single, hidden, right meaning, and that if a
person can only “crack”
the thing, it will yield an extractable and self-contained
message. There are several
problems with this conception of the interpretive process.
62 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
First, the assumption that things have single hidden meanings
interferes with
open-minded and dispassionate observation. Adherents of the
Fortune Cookie
School look solely for clues pointing to the hidden message and,
having found
these clues, discard the rest, like the cookie in a Chinese
restaurant once the fortune
has been extracted. The fortune cookie approach forecloses on
the possibility of
multiple plausible meanings, each within its own context. When
you assume that
there is only one right answer, you are also assuming that there
is only one proper
context for understanding and, by extension, that anybody who
happens to select
a different starting point or context and who thus arrives at a
different answer is
necessarily wrong.
Most of the time, practitioners of the fortune cookie approach
aren’t even
aware that they are assuming the correctness of a single context
because they don’t
realize a fundamental truth about interpretations: they are
always limited by con-
texts. In other words, we are suggesting that claims to universal
truths are always
problematic. Things don’t just mean in some simple and clear
way for all people in
all situations; they always mean within a network of beliefs,
from a particular point
of view. The person who claims to have access to some
universal truth, beyond
context and point of view, is either naïve (unaware) or, worse, a
bully—insisting
that his or her view of the world is obviously correct and must
be accepted by
everyone.
THE ANYTHING GOES SCHOOL OF INTERPRETATION
At the opposite extreme from the single-right-answer Fortune
Cookie School lies
the completely relativist Anything Goes School. The problem
with the anything
goes approach is that it tends to assume that all interpretations
are equally viable,
that meanings are simply a matter of individual choice,
irrespective of evidence or
plausibility. Put another way, it overextends the creative aspect
of interpretation
to absurdity, arriving at the position that you can see in a
subject whatever you
want to see.
As we suggest throughout this book, it is simply not the case
that meaning is
entirely up to the individual. Some readings are clearly better
than others: as we
argued earlier, the aesthetic or separateness readings of
Whistler’s Mother are bet-
ter than the mourning or, especially, alien astronaut
interpretations. The better
interpretations have more evidence and rational explanation of
how the evidence
supports the interpretive claims—qualities that make these
meanings more public
and negotiable.
In the field of logic there is a principle known as parsimony.
This principle
holds that “no more forces or causes should be assumed than are
necessary to ac-
count for the facts” (The Oxford English Dictionary). In other
words, the explana-
tion that both explains the largest amount of evidence (accounts
for facts) and is
the simplest (no more than necessary) is the best. There are
limits to this rule as
well: sometimes focusing on what appears to be an insignificant
detail as a starting
point can provide a revelatory perspective on a subject. But as
rules go, parsimony
is a useful one to keep in mind as you start sifting through your
various interpre-
tive leaps about a subject.
SEEMS TO BE ABOUT X BUT COULD ALSO BE (IS
REALLY) ABOUT Y
This book’s opening chapters have focused your attention on
three prerequisites to
becoming a more perceptive analytical thinker:
• Training yourself to observe more fully and more
systematically—dwelling lon-
ger with the data before leaping to generalizations, using
Paraphrase " 3, Notice
and Focus (ranking), The Method, and working with binaries.
• Pushing yourself to make interpretive leaps by describing
carefully and then
querying your own observations by repeatedly asking, So what?
• Getting beyond common misconceptions about where
meanings come from—
that meanings are hidden, that they are read into something but
are really not
there (reading between the lines), that there are single right
answers or that any-
thing goes, that meanings ought to be controlled by a maker’s
intentions, that
some things should not be analyzed because they weren’t meant
to be, and so
forth.
A useful verbal prompt for acting on these principles is “seems
to be about X but
could also be (or is really) about Y.” There are several reasons
why this formula works
to stimulate interpretation.
• The person who is doing the interpreting too often stops with
the first answer
that springs to mind as he or she moves from observation to
implication, usu-
ally landing upon a cliché. If this first response becomes the X,
then he or she is
prompted by the formula to come up with other, probably less
commonplace
interpretations as the Y.
• Often a person who is interpreting will, in the data-gathering
stage, collect state-
ments of intention from spokespersons for the subject—what the
book or ad or
political speech or whatever is asking us to believe about itself.
If we accept this
information only as X, then the Y is a prompt that will more
likely move us to
analyze such statements more acutely.
In this context we can see how “Appears to Be about X. . . ,′′
like the other prompts
in this book, defamiliarizes. When we begin to interpret
something, we usually find
that less obvious meanings are cloaked by more obvious ones,
and so we are distracted
from seeing them. In most cases, the less obvious and possibly
unintended meanings
are more telling and more interesting than the obvious ones we
have been conditioned
to see. But to get to these more interesting and less obvious
meanings, we need to
have assimilated two key elements of the interpretive methods
offered in this chapter:
(1) that there are multiple plausible interpretations because
different interpretive
contexts cause us to value different things in the evidence and
(2) that intention does
not control this process of meaning-making.
Seems to Be about X but Could Also Be (Is Really) about Y 63
64 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
Why, you might ask, are less obvious meanings more likely to
be more significant
and telling? One reason is that this shift, particularly in the
context of advertising
or political language, is likely to orient us toward the rhetoric
of the subject. We are
focusing then on its means of persuading an audience. In the
case of analyzing a work
or art or an historical event, we are more likely to move beyond
conventional gener-
alizations. (See the discussion of rhetorical analysis in Chapter
6.)
Consider the following example:
A recent highly successful television ad campaign for Nike
Freestyle shoes contains 60 seconds
of famous basketball players dribbling and passing and
otherwise handling the ball in dexter-
ous ways to the accompaniment of court noises and hip-hop
music. The ad seems to be about
X (basketball or shoes) but could also be about Y. Once you’ve
made this assertion, a rapid-fire
(brainstormed) list might follow in which you keep filling in the
blanks (X and Y) with different
possibilities. Alternatively, you might find that filling in the
blanks (X and Y) leads to a more
sustained exploration of a single point. This is your eventual
goal, but doing a little brainstorm-
ing first would keep you from shutting down the interpretive
process too soon.
Here is one version of a rapid-fire list, any item of which might
be expanded:
Seems to be about basketball but is really about dance.
Seems to be about selling shoes but is really about artistry.
Seems to be about artistry but is really about selling shoes.
Seems to be about basketball but is really about race.
Seems to be about basketball but is really about the greater
acceptance of black
culture in American media and society.
Seems to be about the greater acceptance of black culture in
American media but
is really about representing black basketball players as
performing seals or freaks.
Seems to be about individual expertise but is really about
working as a group.
Here is one version of a more sustained exploration of a single
seems-to-be-
about-X statement.
The Nike Freestyle commercial seems to be about basketball but
is really about the greater ac-
ceptance of black culture in American media. Of course it is a
shoe commercial and so aims to
sell a product, but the same could be said about any
commercial.
What makes the Nike commercial distinctive is its seeming
embrace of African-American
culture. The hip-hop sound track, for example, which coincides
with the rhythmic dribbling
of the basketball, places music and sport on a par, and the
dexterity with which the players
(actual NBA stars) move with the ball—moonwalking, doing
360s on it, balancing it on their
fingers, heads, and backs—is nothing short of dance.
The intrinsic cool of the commercial suggests that Nike is
targeting an audience of basket-
ball lovers, not just African-Americans. If I am right, then it is
selling blackness to white as well
as black audiences. Of course, the idea that blacks are cooler
than whites goes back at least as
far as the early days of jazz and might be seen as its own
strange form of prejudice. . . . In that
case, maybe there is something a little disturbing in the
commercial, in the way that it relegates
the athletes to the status of trained seals. I’ll have to think more
about this.
Note: don’t be misled by our use of the word really in this
formula (“Seems to be
about X, is really about Y ”) into thinking that there should be
some single, hidden,
right answer. Rather, the aim of the formula is to prompt you to
think recursively, to
come up, initially, with a range of landing sites for your
interpretive leap, rather than
just one. The prompt serves to get you beyond the obvious—for
example, that the ad
appears to be about basketball but is really about selling shoes.
Try this 4.3: Apply the Formula “Seems to Be about X, but
Could Also Be
(Is Really) about Y”
As we have been saying, this formula is useful for quickly
getting past your first
responses. An alternative version of this formula is “Initially I
thought X about the sub-
ject, but now I think Y.” Take any reading or viewing
assignment you have been given
for class, and write either version of the formula at the top of a
page. Fill in the blanks
several times, and then explain your final choice for X and Y in
a few paragraphs. You
might also try these formulae when you find yourself getting
stuck while drafting a
paper. Seems to Be about X . . . is a valuable revision as well as
interpretive tool.
PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER: INTERPRETATION
OF A NEW YORKER COVER
A major point of this section is that interpretive contexts are
suggested by the mate-
rial you are studying; they aren’t simply imposed. Explaining
why you think a subject
should be seen through a particular interpretive lens is an
important part of making
interpretations reasonable and plausible. Our discussion
illustrates a writer’s decision-
making process in choosing an interpretive context, and how,
once that context has
been selected, the writer goes about analyzing evidence to test
as well as support the
usefulness of that context.
The example upon which we are focusing is a visual image, a
cover from The
New Yorker magazine (see Figure 4.3). The cover is by Ian
Falconer and is entitled
“The Competition”; it appeared on the October 9, 2000, issue.
Producing a close description of anything you are analyzing is
one of the best ways
to begin because the act of describing causes you to notice more
and triggers analyti-
cal thinking. Here is our description of the New Yorker cover.
Description of a New Yorker Cover, Dated October 9, 2000
The picture contains four women, visible from the waist up,
standing in a row in
semi-profile, staring out at some audience other than us because
their eyes look off
to the side. All four gaze in the same direction. Each woman is
dressed in a bathing
suit and wears a banner draped over one shoulder in the manner
of those worn
in the swimsuit competition at beauty pageants. Three of the
women are virtually
identical. The banners worn by these three women show the
letters gia, rnia, and
rida, the remainder of the letters being cut off by the other
women’s shoulders, so
that we have to fill in the missing letters to understand which
state each woman
represents.
Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover
65
66 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
FIGURE 4.3
Ar
tw
or
k b
y I
an
Fa
lco
ne
r/T
he
N
ew
Y
or
ke
r ©
2
00
0
Co
nd
e
Na
st
e
Pu
bl
ica
tio
ns
In
c.
The fourth woman, who stands third from the left in line, tucked
in among the
others who look very much alike, wears a banner reading york.
This woman’s appear-
ance is different in just about every respect from the other
three. Whereas they are
blonde with long flowing hair, she is dark with her hair up in a
tight bun. Whereas their
mouths are wide open, revealing a wall of very white teeth, her
mouth is closed, lips
drawn together. Whereas their eyes are wide open and staring,
hers, like her mouth,
are nearly closed, under deeply arched eyebrows. The dark
woman’s lips, eyes, and hair
are dark. She wears dark eye makeup and has a pronounced dark
beauty mark on her
cheek. Whereas the other three women’s cheeks are high and
round, hers are sharply
angular. The three blonde women wear one-piece bathing suits
in a nondescript gray
color. The dark-haired woman, whose skin stands out in stark
contrast to her hair,
wears a two-piece bathing suit, exposing her midriff. Like her
face, the dark-haired
woman’s breast, sticking out in half profile in her bathing suit,
is pointed and angular.
The other three women’s breasts are round and quietly
contained in their high-necked
gray bathing suits.
Using The Method to Identify Patterns of Repetition and
Contrast
As we discussed in Chapter 3, looking for patterns of repetition
and contrast (that is,
The Method) is one of your best means of getting at the
essential character of a sub-
ject. It prevents you from generalizing, instead involving you in
hands-on engagement
with the details of your evidence. Our formula for looking for
patterns, The Method,
has five steps, which you should try to do one at a time so as
not to rush to conclu-
sions. You will find, however, that step 1, looking for things
that repeat exactly, tends
to suggest items for step 2, repetition of the same or similar
kinds of words or details
(strands), and that step 2 leads naturally to step 3, looking for
binary oppositions and
organizing contrasts. And so, in practice, noticing and listing
the elements of strands
tend to coincide with the discovery of binary oppositions.
Here are our partial lists of exact repetitions and strands and
binary oppositions
in the New Yorker cover:
Some details that repeat exactly:
Large, wide open, round eyes (3 pairs)
Long, blonde, face-framing hair (3)
Small, straight eyebrows (3 pairs)
Wide-open (smiling?) mouths with expanses of white teeth (3)
(but individual
teeth not indicated)
Banners (4) but each with different lettering
Round breasts (3)
States that end in a (3)
Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover
67
68 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
Some strands (groups of the same or similar kinds of details):
Lots of loose and flowing blonde hair/large, fully open, round
eyes/large, open,
rather round (curved) mouths:
Connecting logic ! open, round
Skin uniformly shaded on three of the figures/minimal color and
shading contrasts/
mouths full of teeth but just a mass of white without individual
teeth showing:
Connecting logic ! homogenous, undifferentiated, indistinct
Binary oppositions:
Blonde hair/black hair
Open mouths/closed mouth
Straight eyebrows/slanted (arched) eyebrows
Round breasts/pointed breast
Covered midriff/uncovered midriff
Notice that we have tried hard to stick with “the facts” here—
concrete details in
the picture. If we were to try, for example, to name the
expression on the three blonde
women’s faces and the one on the black-haired woman
(expressionless vs. knowing?
vapid vs. shrewd? trusting vs. suspicious? etc.), we would move
from data gathering—
direct observation of detail—into interpretation. The longer you
delay interpretation
in favor of noticing patterns of like and unlike detail, the more
thoughtful and better
grounded your eventual interpretation will be.
Anomalies:
Miss New York
Pushing Observations to Conclusions: Selecting an Interpretive
Context
As we argued throughout this chapter, the move from
observations to conclusions
depends on context. You would, for example, come up with
different ideas about
the significance of particular patterns of detail in the New
Yorker cover if you were
analyzing them in the context of the history of The New Yorker
cover art than you
might if your interpretive context was other art done by Ian
Falconer, the cover’s
artist. Both of these possibilities suggest themselves, the first
by the fact that the title
of the magazine, The New Yorker, stands above the women’s
heads, and the second
by the fact that the artist’s last name, Falconer, runs across two
of the women.
What other interpretive contexts might one plausibly and fairly
choose, based
on what the cover itself offers us? Consider the cover’s date—
October 9, 2000. Some
quick research into what was going on in the country in the
early fall of 2000 might
provide some clues about how to read the cover in a historical
context. November 2000
was the month of a presidential election. At the time the cover
was published, the
long round of presidential primaries, with presidential hopefuls
courting various key
states for their votes, had ended, but the last month of
campaigning by the presidential
nominees—Al Gore and George W. Bush—was in full swing.
You might wish to consider whether and how the cover speaks
to the country’s po-
litical climate during the Gore/Bush competition for the
presidency. The banners, the
bathing suits, and the fact that the women stand in a line staring
out at some implied
audience of viewers, perhaps judges, reminds us that the
picture’s narrative context
is a beauty pageant, a competition in which women representing
each of the states
compete to be chosen the most beautiful of them all. Choosing
to consider the cover
in the context of the presidential campaign would be reasonable;
you would not have
to think you were imposing a context on the picture in an
arbitrary and ungrounded
way. Additionally, the Table of Contents identifies the title of
Falconer’s drawing as
“The Competition.”
Clearly, there is other information on the cover that might allow
you to interpret
the picture in some kind of political and or more broadly
cultural context. A signifi-
cant binary opposition is New York versus Georgia, California,
and Florida. The three
states having names ending in the same letter are represented by
look-alike, virtually
identical blondes. The anomalous state, New York, is
represented by a woman, who,
despite standing in line with the others, is about as different
from them as a figure
could be. So what that the woman representing New York looks
so unlike the women
from the other states? And why those states?
If you continued to pursue this interpretive context, you might
want more informa-
tion. Which presidential candidate won the primary in each of
the states pictured? How
were each of these states expected to vote in the election in
November? When is the Miss
America pageant held? Which state won the Miss America title
in the time period before
the cover was published? Since timing would matter in the case
of a topical interpretive
context, it would also be interesting to know when the cover art
was actually produced
and when the magazine accepted it. If possible, you could also
try to discover whether
other of the cover artist’s work was in a similar vein. (He has a
website.)
Making the Interpretation Plausible
As we have been arguing, the picture will “mean” differently,
depending on whether
we understand it in terms of American presidential politics in
the year 2000, or
in terms of American identity politics at the same point,
specifically attitudes
of and about New Yorkers, and The New Yorker magazine’s
place among these
attitudes—and influence on them. As we have already observed,
analytical
thinking involves interpretation, and interpretive conclusions
are tentative and
open to alternative possibilities. An interpretive conclusion is
not a fact but a
theory. Interpretive conclusions stand or fall not so much on
whether they can be
proved right or wrong (or some combination of the two), but on
whether they are
demonstrably plausible.
What makes an interpretation plausible? Your audience might
choose not to
accept your interpretation for a number of reasons. They might,
for example, be
New Yorkers and, furthermore, inclined to think that New
Yorkers are cool and that this
is what the picture “says.” They might be from one of the states
depicted on the cover
in terms of look-alike blondes and, further, inclined to think
that New Yorkers are full
of themselves and forever portraying the rest of the country as
shallowly conformist
and uncultured.
Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover
69
70 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
But none of these personal influences ultimately matters. What
matters is that
you share your evidence, show your reasons for believing that it
means what you
say it means, and do this well enough for a reader to find your
interpretation rea-
sonable (whether he or she actually believes it or not). Then you
will have passed
the plausibility test. Your interpretation will stand until another
person offers an
analysis with interpretive conclusions that seems more plausible
than yours, point-
ing to more or better evidence, and arguing for the meaning of
that evidence more
convincingly.
Arriving at an Interpretive Conclusion: Making Choices
Let’s try on one final interpretive context, and then see which
of the various contexts
(lenses) through which we have viewed the cover produces the
most credible inter-
pretation, the one that seems to best account for the patterns of
detail in the evidence.
Different interpretations will account better for some details
than others—which is
why it enriches our view of the world to try on different
interpretations. Ultimately,
you will have to decide which possible interpretation, as seen
through which interpre-
tive context, best accounts for what you think is most important
and interesting to
notice about your subject.
We will try to push our own interpretive process to a choice by
selecting one inter-
pretive context as the most revealing: The New Yorker
magazine itself. The dark-haired
figure wearing the New York banner stands, in a sense, for the
magazine or, at least, for
a potential reader—a representative New Yorker. What, then,
does the cover “say” to
and about New Yorkers and to and about the magazine and its
readers?
Throughout this book we use the question So what? to prompt
interpretive leaps.
So what that the woman representing New York is dark when
the other women are
light, is closed (narrowed eyes, closed mouth, hair tightly
pulled up and back) when
the others are open (wide-open eyes and mouths, loosely
flowing hair), is pointed
and angular when the others are round, sports a bared midriff
when the others are
covered?
As with our earlier attempt to interpret the cover in the context
of the 2000 presi-
dential campaign, interpreting it in the context of other New
Yorker covers would
require a little research. How do New Yorker covers
characteristically represent New
Yorkers? What might you discover by looking for patterns of
repetition and contrast
in a set of New Yorker covers rather than just this one?
We are willing to bet that you would soon discover the
magazine’s droll awareness
of its own heralding of New Yorkers as sophisticated, cultured,
and cosmopolitan: it at
once embraces and sends up the stereotype. How does the cover
read in the context,
for example, of various jokes about how New Yorkers think of
themselves relative
to the rest of the country, such as the cover depicting the United
States as two large
coastlines, east and west, connected by an almost nonexistent
middle?
Armed with the knowledge that the covers are not only
characteristically laughing
at the rest of the country but also at New Yorkers themselves,
you might begin to make
explicit what is implicit in the cover.
Here are some attempts at making the cover speak. Does the
cover “say” that New
Yorkers are shrewder, less naïve (less open), warier than other
Americans, but largely
because they are also more worldly and smarter? Is the cover in
some way a “dumb
blonde” joke in which the dark woman with the pronounced
beauty mark and cal-
culating gaze participates in but also sets herself apart from
some kind of national
“beauty” contest? Are we being invited (intentionally or not) to
invert the conven-
tional value hierarchy of dark and light so that the dark
woman—the sort that gets
represented as the evil stepmother in fairy tales such as “Snow
White”—becomes “the
fairest of them all,” and nobody’s fool?
Let’s end this sample analysis and interpretation with two
possibilities—
somewhat opposed to each other, but probably both “true” of
what the cover
communicates, at least to certain audiences (East and West
Coast Americans, and
readers of The New Yorker). At its most serious, the New
Yorker cover may speak to
American history in which New York has been the point of
entry for generations of
immigrants, the “dark” (literally and figuratively) in the face of
America’s blonde
northern European legacy.
Within the context of other New Yorker covers, however, we
might find ourselves
gravitating to a less serious and perhaps equally plausible
interpretive conclusion:
that the cover is a complex joke. It appears to be saying, yes,
America, we do think
that we’re cooler and more individual and less plastic than the
rest of you, but we also
know that we shouldn’t be so smug about it.
ASSIGNMENTS: Write an Interpretive Essay
1. Build a paper from implications. Begin this assignment by
making observations
and drawing out implications for one of the topics below. Then
use your list as
the starting point for a longer paper.
Having done the preceding exercise with inferring
implications, you could
now make up your own list of observations and pursue
implications. Make some
observations, for example, about the following, and then
suggest the possible
implications of your observations.
• Changing trends in automobiles today
• What your local newspaper chooses to put on its front page (or
editorial page)
over the course of a week
• Shows (or advertisements) that appear on network television
(as opposed to
cable) during 1 hour of evening prime time
• Advertisements for scotch whiskey in highbrow magazines
2. Analyze a magazine cover by researching an interpretive
context. Choose
a magazine that, like The New Yorker, has interesting covers.
Write an
analysis of one such cover by studying other covers from the
same maga-
zine. (Visit The New Yorker store website to access a wide
range of covers,
Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover
71
72 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How
to Do It
including others by Ian Falconer.) Follow the model offered at
the end of this
chapter:
a. Apply The Method—looking for patterns of repetition and
contrast—to the
cover itself so that you arrive at key repetitions, strands, and
organizing con-
trasts and begin to ponder a range of possible interpretive leaps
to what they
signify.
b. Use these data to suggest plausible interpretive contexts for
the cover. Re-
member that interpretive contexts are not simply imposed from
without;
they’re suggested by the evidence.
c. Then move to the other covers. Perform similar operations
on them to arrive
at an awareness of common denominators among the covers, and
to analyze
what those shared traits might reveal or make more evident in
the particular
cover you are studying. You will be trying to figure out how the
magazine
conceives of itself and its audience by the way that it
characteristically repre-
sents its “face.”
It might be illuminating to survey a range of covers by a single
artist, such as
Ian Falconer, who created the cover we analyze in the chapter.
Or try Harry
Bliss, who also creates covers and cartons for The New Yorker
and is a children’s
illustrator. Work by both of these artists may be found on their
websites.
CHAPTER 5
Analyzing Arguments
Our most direct advice on analyzing arguments, and thus on
learning to write
them more effectively, can be found in this chapter. Here we
show you how to un-
earth the essentially binary structure of arguments and how to
uncover the unstated
assumptions upon which arguments typically rest. Arguing with
someone else’s argu-
ment is usually as much a matter of addressing what is left
unsaid—the assumptions
underneath the argument that the arguer takes to be givens
(obvious truths)—as
confronting what is argued overtly.
THE ROLE OF BINARIES IN ARGUMENT
In human—and computerized—thinking, a binary is a pair of
elements, usually in
opposition to each other, as in off/on, yes/no, right/wrong,
agree/disagree, and so
on. Many ideas begin with a writer’s noticing some kind of
opposition or tension
or choice within a subject—capital punishment either does or
does not deter crime;
a character in a novel is either a courageous rebel or a fool; a
new environmental
policy is either visionary or blind. As we note in earlier
chapters, a major advantage
of looking for binaries is that they help you determine what
issues are at stake in your
subject because binaries position you among competing choices.
(See discussion of
The Method in Chapter 3, A Toolkit of Analytical Methods.)
There is an old joke to the effect that there are two kinds of
people: those who like
binary thinking and those who do not. Part of the humor here
lies in the recognition
that we cannot help but think in binary terms. As the
philosopher Herbert Marcuse
says, “We understand that which is in terms of that which is
not”: light is that which
is not dark; masculine is that which is not feminine; civilized is
that which is not
primitive. Creating opposing categories is fundamental to
defining things. But as these
examples may suggest, binaries are also dangerous because they
can perpetuate what
is called reductive thinking, especially if applied uncritically.
If you restrict yourself to thinking in binary terms, you can run
into two prob-
lems. First, most subjects cannot be adequately considered in
terms of only two
options—either this or that, with nothing in between. Second,
binaries often con-
ceal value judgments: the category “primitive,” as opposed to
“civilized,” is not a neu-
tral description but a devaluation. Civilized, for example, is that
which has rejected
and moved beyond the primitive. Women, in this way of
thinking, are an inverse of
73
74 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
men: they are a category defined by unmanly traits. It is useful
and necessary to
construct binaries, but, as our examples reveal, it is dangerous
to ignore the gray areas
in between and the value judgments that binaries tend to
conceal.
Often the trouble starts with the ways binaries are phrased. Two
of the most com-
mon and potentially counterproductive ways of phrasing
binaries are either/or and
agree/disagree. In the vast majority of cases, there are more
than two alternatives,
but the either/or or agree/disagree phrasing prevents you from
looking for them.
And it does not acknowledge that both alternatives may have
some truth to them. A
new environmental policy may be both visionary and blind. And
there may be more
accurate categories than visionary and blind for considering the
merits and demerits
of the policy.
Framing an issue in either/or terms can be useful for stimulating
a chain of
thought, but it is usually not a good way to end one. Consider
the either/or binary,
“Was the Civil War fought over slavery or economics?” You
could begin this way, but
if you’re not careful—conscious of the all-or-nothing force of
binary formulations—
you could easily get trapped in an overly dichotomized position;
in this case, that
economics caused the war and that slavery had nothing to do
with it, or vice versa.
You can’t analyze without binaries, but you need to be wary of
putting everything
into big, undifferentiated categories, labeled all black or all
white, with nothing in
between.
A PROCEDURE FOR REFORMULATING BINARIES IN
ARGUMENT
We previewed this procedure in brief in our discussion of The
Method in Chapter 3.
Here we develop it in more detail.
Strategy 1: Locate a Range of Opposing Categories
The first step in using binaries analytically is to locate and
distinguish them carefully.
Consider, for example, the binaries contained in the following
question: Does the model
of management known as Total Quality Management (TQM) that
is widely used in
Japan work in the American automotive industry? The most
obvious binary in this
question is work versus not work. But there are also other
binaries in the question—
Japanese versus American, for example, and TQM versus more
traditional and more
traditionally American models of management. These binaries
imply further binaries.
Insofar as TQM is acknowledged to be a team-oriented,
collaborative management
model, the question requires a writer to consider the accuracy
and relative suitability
of particular traits commonly ascribed to Japanese versus
American workers, such as
communal and cooperative versus individualistic and
competitive.
Strategy 2: Analyze and Define the Key Terms
Having located the various binaries, you should begin to
analyze and define terms.
What, for example, does it mean to ask whether TQM works in
the American
automotive industry? Does work mean “make a substantial
profit”? Does work mean
A Procedure for Reformulating Binaries in Argument 75
“produce more cars more quickly”? Does work mean
“improving employee morale”?
You would probably find yourself drowning in vagueness unless
you carefully argued
for the appropriateness of your definition of this key term.
Strategy 3: Question the Accuracy of the Binary
Having begun to analyze and define your terms, you would next
need to determine how
accurately they define the issues raised by your subject. You
might consider, for example,
the extent to which American management styles actually differ
from the Japanese ver-
sion of TQM. In the process of trying to determine if there are
significant differences,
you could start to locate particular traits in these management
styles and in Japanese
versus American culture that might help you formulate your
binary more precisely.
Think of the binary as a starting point—a kind of deliberate
overgeneralization—that
allows you to set up positions you can then test to refine.
Strategy 4: Substitute “To What Extent?” for “Either/Or”
The best strategy in using binaries productively is usually to
locate arguments on both
sides of the either/or choice that the binary poses and then
choose a position some-
where between the two extremes. Once you have arrived at what
you consider the
most accurate phrasing of the binary, you can rephrase the
original either/or question
in the more qualified terms that asking “To what extent?”
allows. Making this move
does not release you from the responsibility of taking a stand
and arguing for it.
So, in answer to a question such as “Was the Civil War fought
over slavery or
economics?” you would attempt to determine the extent to
which each side of the bi-
nary—slavery and economics—could reasonably be credited as
the cause of the war.
To do so, you would first rephrase the question thus: To what
extent did economics,
rather than slavery, cause the Civil War? Rephrasing in this way
might also enable you
to see problems with the original binary formulation.
By analyzing the terms of the binary, you would come to
question them and ul-
timately arrive at a more complex and qualified position to
write about. Admittedly,
in reorienting your thinking from the obvious and clear-cut
choices that either/or
formulations provide to the murkier waters of asking “To what
extent?” your decision
process is made more difficult. The gain, however, is that the
to-what-extent mindset,
by predisposing you to assess multiple and potentially
conflicting points of view, will
enable you to address more fairly and accurately the issues
raised by your subject.
Applying these steps usually causes you to do one or more of
the following:
1. Discover that you have not adequately named the binary and
that another op-
position would be more accurate.
2. Weight one side of your binary more heavily than the other,
rather than seeing
the issue as all or nothing.
3. Discover that the two terms of your binary are not really so
separate and
opposed after all but are actually parts of one complex
phenomenon or issue
(a move known as collapsing the binary).
76 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
Where might you end up if you approached our earlier sample
topic (whether
TQM works in the American automotive industry) by asking to
what extent one
side of the binary better suits available evidence, rather than
arguing that one side
is clearly the right choice and the other entirely wrong? You
would still be arguing
that one position on TQM in American industry is more accurate
than the other, but
you would inevitably arrive at more carefully qualified
conclusions than the question
might otherwise have led you to. You would most likely take
care, for example, to sug-
gest the danger of assuming that all American workers are
rugged individualists and
all Japanese workers are communal bees.
Try this 5.1: Reformulating Binaries
Apply the strategies for using binaries analytically to analyze
the following statements
(or questions), as we did with the TQM example. This does not
mean that you must
proceed step-by-step through the strategies, but, at the least,
you should list all of the
binaries you can find, isolate the key terms, and reformulate
them. Even if the original
formulation looks okay to you, assume that it is an
overgeneralization that needs to
be refined and rephrased.
1. It is important to understand why leaders act in a leadership
role. What is the
driving force? Is it an internal drive for the business or group to
succeed, or is it
an internal drive for the leader to dominate others?
2. Is nationalism good for emerging third-world countries?
3. The private lives of public figures should not matter in the
way they are assessed
by the public. What matters is how competently they do their
jobs.
4. The Seattle sound of rock and roll known as Grunge was not
original; it was just
a rehash of Punk and New Wave elements.
UNCOVERING ASSUMPTIONS (REASONING BACK TO
PREMISES)
All arguments ultimately rest on fundamental assumptions
called givens—positions
that you decide are not in need of argument because you assume
the reader will “give”
them to you as true. Often, however, these assumptions need
first to be acknowledged
and then argued, or at least tested. You cannot assume that their
truth is self-evident.
The failure to locate and examine unacknowledged assumptions
(premises) is the
downfall of many essays. The problem occurs because our
categories—the mental
boxes we’ve created over time—have become so fixed, so
unquestioned, that we cease
to be fully aware of them.
Everything you read has basic assumptions that underlie it.
What are assumptions in
this context? They are the basic ground of beliefs from which a
position springs, its start-
ing points or givens, its basic operating premises. The Oxford
English Dictionary defines
a premise—from a Latin word meaning “to put before”—as “a
previous statement or
proposition from which another statement is inferred or follows
as a conclusion.”
All arguments or articulations of point of view have premises—
that is, they are
based in a given set of assumptions, which are built upon to
arrive at conclusions.
Uncovering Assumptions (Reasoning Back to Premises) 77
Often, though, the assumptions are not visible; they’re implicit
(which is why they
need to be inferred). Usually writers are not hiding from readers
the subterranean
bases of their outlooks, which might be considered unethical.
Rather, many writers
(especially inexperienced ones) remain unaware of the premises
that underlie their
points of view. Similarly, most readers don’t stop to think about
the starting points of
what they read, so they read only the tip of the proverbial
iceberg.
The ability to uncover assumptions is a powerful analytical
procedure to learn—it
gives you insight into the roots, the basic givens that a piece of
writing (or a speaker)
has assumed are true. When you locate assumptions in a text,
you understand the
text better—where it’s coming from and what else it believes
that is more fundamen-
tal than what it is overtly declaring. You also find things to
write about; uncovering
assumptions offers one of the best ways of developing and
revising your own work.
Uncovering assumptions can help you understand why you
believe x, or may reveal
to you that two of your givens are in conflict with each other.
To uncover assumptions, you need to read “backward”—to ask
what a reading
must also already believe, given that it believes what it overtly
claims. In other words,
you need to imagine or reinvent the process of thinking by
which a writer has arrived
at a position.
Say you read a piece that praises a television show for being
realistic but faults it
for setting a bad example for the kids who watch it. What
assumptions might we infer
from such a piece?
• Television should attempt to depict life accurately
(realistically).
• Television should produce shows that set good examples.
• Kids imitate or at least have their attitudes shaped by what
they watch on
television.
• Good and bad examples are clear and easily recognizable by
everyone.
Note that none of these assumptions is self-evidently true; each
would need to be
argued for. And some of the assumptions conflict with others—
for example, that
shows should be both morally uplifting and realistic, given that
in “real life” those who
do wrong often go unpunished. These are subjects an analytical
response to the piece
(or a revision of it) could bring out.
What’s Beneath the Question?
On some occasions, students find that they have confronted an
issue that
cannot be resolved by the deductive method. This can be
exciting for them.
Will cutting marginal tax rates cause people to work more? The
answer is
yes or no, depending on the premises underlying the work-
leisure prefer-
ences incorporated into your model.
—James Marshall, Professor of Economics
VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM
78 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
UNCOVERING ASSUMPTIONS: A BRIEF EXAMPLE
Consider the common complaint that “Tax laws benefit the
wealthy.” No matter how
you might develop this claim (moving it forward), you would
get into trouble if you
didn’t also move backward to uncover the premises embedded
in this thesis about
the purpose of tax laws. The wording of this claim seems to
conceal an egalitarian
premise: the assumption that tax laws should not benefit anyone
or, at least, that they
should benefit everyone equally. But what is the purpose of tax
laws? Should they
redress economic inequities? Should they spur the economy by
rewarding those who
generate capital? You might go to the U.S. Constitution and/or
legal precedents to
resolve such questions, but our point here is that you would
need to move your thesis
back to this point and test the validity of the assumptions upon
which it rests.
Regardless of the position you might adopt—attacking tax laws,
defending them,
showing how they actually benefit everyone, or whatever—you
would risk arguing
blindly if you failed to question what the purpose of tax law is
in the first place. This
testing of assumptions would, at the least, cause you to qualify
and refine your thesis.
(See Figure 5.1.)
A PROCEDURE FOR UNCOVERING ASSUMPTIONS
How do you actually go about uncovering assumptions? Here’s
a fairly flexible proce-
dure, which we apply step-by-step to the claim “Tax laws
benefit the wealthy.”
1. Paraphrase the explicit claim. This activity gets you started
interpreting the
claim, and it may begin to suggest the claim’s underlying
assumptions. We might
paraphrase the claim as “The rules for paying income tax give
rich people mon-
etary advantages” or “The rules for paying income tax help the
rich get richer.”
2. List the implicit ideas that the claim seems to assume to be
true. Here are two:
“Tax laws shouldn’t benefit anybody” and “Tax laws should
benefit those who
need the benefit, those with the least money”(which, by the
way, are mutually
exclusive).
Working
Thesis
Revised
Thesis ConclusionsPremises
EvidenceEvidence
FIGURE 5.1
Reasoning Back to Premises
Analyzing an Argument: The Example of "Playing by the
Antioch Rules" 79
3. Determine the various ways that the key terms of the claim
might be defined, as
well as how the writer of the claim has defined them. This
process of definition
helps you see the key concepts upon which the claim depends.
How does the
writer intend benefit? Does he or she mean that tax laws benefit
only the wealthy
and presumably harm those who are not wealthy? Where is the
line between
wealthy and not wealthy drawn?
4. Try on an oppositional stance to the claim to see if this
unearths more underly-
ing assumptions. Regardless of your view on the subject,
suppose for the sake of
argument that the writer is wrong. This step allows you to think
comparatively,
helping you to see the claim more clearly, to see what it
apparently excludes from
its fundamental beliefs.
Knowing what the underlying assumption leaves out helps us
see the nar-
rowness upon which the claim may rest; we understand better its
limits. Two
positions that the claim appears to exclude are “Tax laws
benefit the poor” and
“Tax laws do not benefit the wealthy.”
ANALYZING AN ARGUMENT: THE EXAMPLE OF
“PLAYING
BY THE ANTIOCH RULES”
Because the following essay originally appeared (in 1993) as a
newspaper editorial
(in The New York Times), it is less expository than much
academic analytical writing.
We have included it because it so clearly illustrates how a
writer reasons forward to
conclusions by reasoning backward to premises. The essay also
illustrates how the
strategies of refocusing binaries and qualifying claims operate
in a finished piece of
writing. As we have already noted, these strategies, which are
so useful for analyzing
arguments, are equally useful for producing them.
As you read this editorial on the controversial rules established
at Antioch College
(which, sadly, is closing its doors) to govern sexual conduct
among its students, try to
focus not only on the content of the argument, but also on its
form; that is, how the
writer moves from one phase of his thinking to the next. Toward
this end, we have
added our own summaries of what each paragraph of the
editorial accomplishes. At
the end of the editorial we sum up the writer’s primary
developmental strategies in a
form you can apply to your own writing.
Playing by the Antioch Rules
By Eric Fassin
[1] A good consensus is hard to find, especially on sexual
politics. But the infamous rules
instituted last year by Antioch College, which require students
to obtain explicit verbal
consent before so much as a kiss is exchanged, have created just
that. They have pro-
voked indignation (this is a serious threat to individual
freedom!) as well as ridicule (can
this be serious?). Sexual correctness thus proves a worthy
successor to political correct-
ness as a target of public debate. [The writer names the issue:
the complaint
that Antioch’s rules threaten individual freedom.]
80 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
[2] Yet this consensus against the rules reveals shared
assumptions among liberals, conserva-
tives and even radicals about the nature of sex in our culture.
[The writer identifies
members of an unlikely consensus and focuses on a surprising
similarity.]
[3] The new definition of consent at Antioch is based on a
“liberal” premise: it assumes that
sexual partners are free agents and that they mean what they
say—yes means yes, and
no means no. But the initiator must now obtain prior consent,
step by step, which in
practice shifts the burden of clarification from the woman to the
man. The question is no
longer “Did she say no?” but “Did she say yes?” Silence does
not indicate consent, and it
becomes his responsibility to dispel any ambiguity. [The writer
identifies assump-
tion of freedom underlying the rules.]
[4] The novelty of the rules, however, is not as great as it
seems. Antioch will not exert more
control over its students; there are no sexual police. In practice,
you still do what you
want—as long as your partner does not complain . . . the
morning after. If this is censor-
ship, it intervenes ex post facto, not a priori. [The writer
questions the premise that
rules will actually control individual freedom more than current
norms do.]
[5] In fact, the “threat” to individual freedom for most critics is
not the invasion of privacy
through the imposition of sexual codes, but the very existence
of rules. Hence the suc-
cess of polemicists like Katie Roiphe or Camille Paglia, who
argue that feminism in
recent years has betrayed its origins by embracing old-style
regulations, paradoxically
choosing the rigid 1950s over the liberating 1960s. Their advice
is simply to let women
manage on their own, and individuals devise their own rules.
This individualist critique
of feminism finds resonance with liberals, but also, strangely,
with conservatives,
who belatedly discover the perils of regulating sexuality. [The
writer locates an
antiregulatory (laissez-faire) premise beneath the freedom
premise.]
[6] But sexual laissez-faire, with its own implicit set of rules,
does not seem to have worked
very well recently. Since the collapse of established social
codes, people play the same
game with different rules. If more women are complaining of
sexual violence, while more
men are worrying that their words and actions might be
misconstrued, who benefits
from the absence of regulation? [The writer attacks the laissez-
faire premise
for ineffectiveness.]
[7] A laissez-faire philosophy toward relationships assumes
that sexuality is a game that can
(and must) be played without rules, or rather that the invention
of rules should be left
to individual spontaneity and creativity, despite rising evidence
that the rule of one’s
own often leads to misunderstandings. When acted out,
individual fantasy always plays
within preordained social rules. These rules conflict with the
assumption in this culture
that sex is subject to the reign of nature, not artifice, that it is
the province of the
individual, not of society. [The writer uncovers an assumption
beneath the
laissez-faire premise: sex is natural and thus outside social
rules.]
[8] Those who believe that society’s constraints should have
nothing to do with sex also
agree that sex should not be bound by the social conventions of
language. Indeed, this
rebellion against the idea of social constraints probably
accounts for the controversy
over explicit verbal consent—from George Will, deriding “sex
amidst semicolons,”
to Camille Paglia railing, “As if sex occurs in the verbal realm.”
As if sexuality were
incompatible with words. As if the only language of sex were
silence. For The New Yorker,
Analyzing an Argument: The Example of "Playing by the
Antioch Rules" 81
“the [Antioch] rules don’t get rid of the problem of unwanted
sex at all; they just shift
the advantage from the muscle-bound frat boy to the honey-
tongued French major.”
[The writer develops the linguistic implications of the natural
premise
and questions the assumption that sex is incompatible with
language.]
[9] This is not very different from the radical feminist position,
which holds that verbal per-
suasion is no better than physical coercion. In this view,
sexuality cannot be entrusted to
rhetoric. The seduction of words is inherently violent, and
seduction itself is an object of
suspicion. (If this is true, Marvell’s invitation “To His Coy
Mistress” is indeed a form of sex-
ual harassment, as some campus feminists have claimed.) [The
writer develops a fur-
ther implication: that the attack on rules masks a fear of
language’s power
to seduce—and questions the equation of seduction with
harassment.]
[10] What the consensus against the Antioch rules betrays is a
common vision of sexuality
which crosses the lines dividing conservatives, liberals and
radicals. So many of the ar-
guments start from a conventional situation, perceived and
presented as natural:
a heterosexual encounter with the man as the initiator, and the
woman as gatekeeper—
hence the focus on consent. [The writer redefines consensus as
sharing the
unacknowledged premise that conventional sex roles are
natural.]
[11] The outcry largely results from the fact that the rules
undermine this traditional erotic
model. Not so much by proscribing (legally), but by prescribing
(socially). The new
model, in which language becomes a normal form of erotic
communication, underlines
the conventional nature of the old one. [The writer reformulates
the claim
about the anti-rules consensus: rules undermine attempts to pass
off
traditional sex roles as natural.]
[12] By encouraging women out of their “natural” reserve,
these rules point to a new defini-
tion of sexual roles. “Yes” could be more than a way to make
explicit the absence of
“no”; “yes” can also be a cry of desire. Women may express
demands, and not only grant
favors. If the legal “yes” opened the ground for an erotic “yes,”
if the contract gave way
to desire and if consent led to demand, we would indeed enter a
brave new erotic world.
[The writer extends the implication of the claim: rules could
make sex
more erotic rather than less free.]
[13] New rules are like new shoes: they hurt a little at first, but
they may fit tomorrow. The
only question about the Antioch rules is not really whether we
like them, but whether
they improve the situation between men and women. All rules
are artificial, but, in the
absence of generally agreed-upon social conventions, any new
prescription must feel
artificial. And isn’t regulation needed precisely when there is an
absence of cultural
consensus? [The writer questions the standard by which we
evaluate rules;
the writer proposes reformulating the binary from artificial
versus natu-
ral to whether rules will improve gender relations.]
[14] Whether we support or oppose the Antioch rules, at least
they force us to acknowledge
that the choice is not between regulation and freedom, but
between different sets of
rules, implicit or explicit. They help dispel the illusion that
sexuality is a state of nature
individuals must experience outside the social contract, and that
eroticism cannot exist
within the conventions of language. As Antioch reminds us,
there is more in eroticism
and sexuality than is dreamt of in this culture. [The writer
culminates with his
82 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
own idea: rules are good because they force us to acknowledge
as a
harmful illusion the idea that sex operates outside social
conventions.]
Despite its brevity, this editorial covers a daunting amount of
ground—an exami-
nation of “shared assumptions among liberals, conservatives and
even radicals about
the nature of sex in our culture” (paragraph 2). The writer,
given his audience (readers
of the Sunday New York Times), allows himself more breadth
in both his topic and his
claims than he would if he were writing an article on the same
subject in an academic
setting, where he would narrow his focus to supply more
analysis of issues and evidence.
The aim of editorials like this one is not only to inform or
persuade but also to provoke
and entertain. Nevertheless, the strategies that direct the
thinking in this piece are, with
some minor exceptions, the same as they would be in a more
extended analytical piece.
They are central strategies that you can apply to many sorts of
writing situations, such
as analyzing arguments and as a means of finding and
developing your own ideas.
STRATEGIES FOR DEVELOPING AN ARGUMENT BY
REASONING
BACK TO PREMISES
1. Set up a claim but delay passing judgment on it. In the
concluding sentence of
paragraph 1, the word “target” suggests that the essay might
attack Antioch’s
policy. In paragraph 2, however, the writer does not go on to
demonstrate what
is threatening and potentially ridiculous about Antioch’s sexual
contract, but
neither does he yet offer his own conclusion on whether the
views he has thus far
described are right or wrong. Instead, he slows down the
forward momentum
toward judgment and begins to analyze what the consensus
against the Antioch
rules might mean—the “shared assumptions” it reveals “among
liberals, con-
servatives, and even radicals about the nature of sex in our
culture.” In fact, the
writer spends the first three-quarters of the essay trying on
various answers to
this question of meaning.
(Note: a careful reader would recognize by tonal signals such
as the exclamation
mark in “serious threat to individual freedom!” that the opening
paragraph has,
in fact, begun to announce its position, albeit not overtly, by
subtly overstating its
opposite. It is not until later in the editorial, however, that we
can clearly recognize
that the writer is employing a common introductory strategy—
defining the posi-
tion you plan to argue against.)
2. Decide what is really at issue by reasoning back to premises.
Rather than proceed-
ing directly to a judgment on whether the Antioch rules threaten
individual
freedom, the writer carefully searches out the assumptions—the
premises and
givens—underlying the attacks on the rules. (This is a key step
missing from
most inadequately developed analyses and arguments.) He
proposes, for ex-
ample, that underneath the consensus’ attack on the rules and its
defense of
individual freedom lies a basic premise about sex and society—
that sexuality
should not be governed by rules because it is natural rather than
cultural: “These
rules conflict with the assumption in this culture that sex is
subject to the reign
of nature, not artifice, that it is the province of the individual,
not of society.”
Strategies for Developing an Argument by Reasoning Back to
Premises 83
3. Be alert for terms that create false dichotomies. A false
dichotomy (sometimes
called a false binary) inaccurately divides possible views on a
subject into two
opposing camps, forcing a choice between black and white,
when some shade
of gray might be fairer and more accurate. When reading, or
when writing an
argument of your own, it is a good strategy to question any
either/or dichotomy.
Consider whether its opposing terms define the issue fairly and
accurately before
accepting an argument in favor of one side or the other.
Consider, too, how you might reject both choices offered by
an either/or op-
position to construct an alternative approach that is truer to the
issues at hand.
This is what the writer of the editorial does. He outlines and
then rejects as a
false dichotomy the consensus view that sexual behavior either
is a province of
individual freedom or is regulated by society:
False Dichotomies
Freedom vs. regulation
Natural vs. artificial
No rules vs. rules
The writer argues instead that much of what we perceive to be
natural is in fact
governed by social rules and conventions, such as the notion of
men as sexual
initiators and women as no-sayers and gatekeepers. He proposes
that what is
really at stake is a different dichotomy, a choice between two
sets of rules, one
implicit and one explicit:
Reformulated Dichotomies
Rules vs. other rules
Implicit vs. explicit
Not working vs. might work
Based on “no” vs. based on “yes”
The editorial concludes that we need to decide questions of
sexual behavior—at
Antioch and in the culture at large—by recognizing and
evaluating the relative
merits of the two sets of rules rather than by creating a false
dichotomy between
rules and no rules, between regulation and freedom.
4. In your conclusion, return to the position that you set out to
explore and restate it in
the more carefully qualified way you arrived at in the body of
your essay: “The choice
is not between regulation and freedom, but between different
sets of rules.” Clearly,
the essay’s conclusion does not simply repeat the essay’s
introductory claims, but it
does respond to the way in which the essay began. Notice that
virtually the entire
essay has consisted of reasoning back to premises as a way of
arriving at new ways
of thinking.
Try this 5.2: Reasoning Back to Premises
In the following excerpt from a student paper, the writer
advances various claims
based on premises that are not articulated. Analyze the excerpt
using the procedure
for uncovering assumptions detailed earlier. Find the places in
the paragraph where
84 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
the writer’s operating assumptions—what he or she takes as
givens—are left unsaid,
and compile a list of these. First, try to find the premises that
are articulated. On what
premises, for example, does the writer base the argument that
self-interest contributes
to the health and growth of the economy as a whole?
In all levels of trade, including individual, local, domestic, and
interna-
tional, both buyers and sellers are essentially concerned with
their own
welfare. This self-interest, however, actually contributes to the
health and
growth of the economy as a whole. Each country benefits by
exporting
those goods in which it has an advantage and importing goods
in which
it does not. Importing and exporting allow countries to focus on
produc-
ing those goods that they can generate most efficiently. As a
result of
specializing in certain products and then trading them, self-
interest leads
to efficient trade, which leads to consumer satisfaction.
Try this 5.3: Acknowledging Competing Premises
In the following paragraph the writer has made his or her
premises quite clear but has
not acknowledged the possible validity of competing premises.
(It is this same neglect
of other possible positions that Fassin makes the substance of
his editorial against
the detractors of the Antioch rules; use him as a model). If the
writer could become
more self-conscious of reasoning back to premises, he or she
would be more likely to
discover these competing claims and either qualify the argument
or overtly counter
these competing claims.
Field hockey is a sport that can be played by either men or
women. All
sports should be made available for members of both sexes. As
long as
women are allowed to participate on male teams in sports such
as football
and wrestling, men should be allowed to participate on female
teams in
sports such as field hockey and lacrosse. If women press for and
receive
equal opportunity in all sports, then it is only fair that men be
given the
same opportunity. If women object to this type of equal
opportunity, then
they are promoting reverse discrimination.
Examine the paragraph and lay out the writer’s premises in your
own words. First
(1) Find at least two key assumptions that he or she wishes us to
accept. Hint: the
writer assumes, for example, that fairness ought to take
precedence over other possible
values in the selection of athletic teams. More generally, think
about how he or she is
defining other of her key terms. Then (2) formulate two
assumptions that an audience
who disagrees with the writer’s point of view might hold.
THE PROBLEMS WITH DEBATE-STYLE ARGUMENT
Many of you will have been introduced to writing arguments
through the debate
model—writing pro or con on a given position, with the aim of
defeating an imagined
opponent and convincing your readers of the rightness of your
position. But as the
American College Dictionary says, “to argue implies reasoning
or trying to understand;
it does not necessarily imply opposition.” It is this more
exploratory, tentative, and
dispassionate mode of argument that this book encourages you
to practice.
Seeing the Trees as Well as the Forest: Toulmin and the Rules
of Argument 85
To its credit, the debate model teaches writers to consider more
than a single
viewpoint, their opponent’s as well as their own. But,
unfortunately, it can also train
them, even if inadvertently, to see the other side only as the
opposition and to concen-
trate their energy only on winning the day. The problem with
this approach is that it
overemphasizes the bottom line—aggressively advancing a
claim for or against some
view—without first engaging in the exploratory interpretation
of evidence that is so
necessary to arriving at thoughtful arguments.
Thus, debate-style argument produces a frame of mind in which
defending posi-
tions matters more than taking the necessary time to develop
ideas worth defending.
And, very possibly, it nourishes the mudslinging and
opinionated mindset—attack
first—that proliferates in editorials and television talk shows,
not to mention the
conversations you overhear in going about your life. We are not
saying that peo-
ple should forget about making value and policy decisions and
avoid the task of
persuading others. We are saying that too many of the
arguments we all read, hear,
and participate in every day are based on insufficient analysis.
In sum, adhering to the more restrictive, debate-style definition
of argument can
create a number of problems for careful analytical writers:
1. By requiring writers to be oppositional, it inclines them to
discount or dismiss
problems in the side or position they have chosen; they cling to
the same static
position rather than testing it as a way of allowing it to evolve.
2. It inclines writers toward either/or thinking rather than
encouraging them to
formulate more qualified (carefully limited, acknowledging
exceptions, etc.)
positions that integrate apparently opposing viewpoints.
3. It overvalues convincing someone else at the expense of
developing under-
standing.
Analysis is an important corrective to narrow and needlessly
oppositional
thinking. A writer who is skeptical of global generalizations and
of unexamined
value judgments may sound timid and even confused compared
with the insistent
pronouncements of daytime talk shows and televised political
debates. And be-
cause the argumentative habit of mind is so aggressively visible
in our culture, most
people never get around to experimenting with the more
reflective and less combative
approach that analysis embraces. But the effort you put into
carefully formulating
your ideas by qualifying them, checking for unstated
assumptions, and acknowledg-
ing rather than ignoring problems in your position will make
you a stronger writer
and thinker.
SEEING THE TREES AS WELL AS THE FOREST: TOULMIN
AND THE RULES OF ARGUMENT
At this point in our discussion, it will be helpful to digress
slightly to talk about the
systematic examination of evidence as it is described in the
field of logic. Logic as a
discipline has offered us various, sometimes conflicting rules of
argument—procedures
for locating and using evidence in the service of a claim and for
determining when that
use of evidence can be judged valid.
86 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
Philosophers have long quested for forms that might lend to
human argu-
ment some greater clarity and certainty, more like what is
possible with formulas
in math. As our discussion of one particular debate within the
discipline of
ph ilosophy demonstrates, however, the examination of
evidence is necessarily
an untidy process.
Probably the most common way of talking about logical
argumentation goes back
to the Greek philosopher Aristotle. At the heart of the
Aristotelian model is the syl-
logism, which consists of three parts:
1. Major premise: a general proposition presumed to be true
2. Minor premise: a subordinate proposition also presumed to
be true
3. Conclusion: a claim that follows logically from the two
premises, if the argument
has been properly framed
A frequently cited example of a syllogism is:
All men are mortal (major premise).
Socrates is a man (minor premise).
Therefore, Socrates is mortal (conclusion).
A premise is a proposition (assumption) upon which an
argument is based and from
which a conclusion is drawn. In the syllogism, if both of the
premises are true and
have been stated in the proper form (both containing a shared
term), then theoretically
the conclusion must also be true. In the example, if it is true
that all men are
mortal, and if it is true that Socrates is a man, then it must
follow that Socrates is
mortal.
The British philosopher Steven Toulmin offered a competing
model of argument
in his influential book, The Uses of Argument (1958). The
Toulmin model can be
seen as motivated by a desire to describe the structure of
argument in a way that
comes closer to what actually happens in practice when we try
to take a position. The
Toulmin model consists of:
1. Data: the evidence appealed to in support of a claim; data
respond to the ques-
tion “What have you got to go on?”
2. Warrant: a general principle or reason used to connect the
data with the claim;
the warrant responds to the question “How did you get there?”
(from the data
to the claim)
3. Claim: a conclusion about the data
Toulmin’s model was motivated by his belief that the
philosophical tradition
of formal logic, with its many rules for describing and
evaluating the conduct of
arguments, conflicts with the practice and idiom (ways of
phrasing) of arguers.
To radically simplify Toulmin’s case, it is that the syllogism
does not adequately
account for what really happens when thinkers try to frame and
defend various
claims.
Toulmin notes that the rules governing the phrasing of
syllogistic arguments are
very strict, as they must be if the form of an argument alone is
to disclose its validity.
Seeing the Trees as Well as the Forest: Toulmin and the Rules
of Argument 87
The Socrates syllogism cited above earns its validity on the
basis of its form. But for
Toulmin, the strictness of the rules necessary for guaranteeing
formal validity leaves
out the greater amount of uncertainty that is a part of reasoning
about most ques-
tions, issues, and problems. A syllogism is designed to reveal
its soundness through
the careful framing and arrangement of its terms:
All men are mortal. (All x’s are y.)
Socrates is a man. (Socrates is an x.)
Therefore, Socrates is mortal. (Socrates is y.)
But at what price, asks Toulmin, do we simplify our phrasing of
complex situa-
tions in the world in order to gain this appearance of truth? In
how many situations,
he asks, can we say that “all x’s are y”?
Toulmin observes, using his own argument structure as a case in
point, that as
soon as an argument begins to add information in support of its
premises, the com-
plexity and inevitable tentativeness of the argument become
apparent, rather than its
evident truth.
Here is one of Toulmin’s examples of what must happen to the
form of an
argument when a person begins to add this supporting
information, which he calls
backing:
Data: Harry was born in Bermuda.
Warrant: The relevant statutes provide that people born in the
colonies of
British parents are entitled to British citizenship.
Claim: So, presumably, Harry is a British citizen.
The backing for the warrant would inevitably involve
mentioning “the relevant
statutes”—acts of Parliament, statistical reports, and so forth—
to prove its accuracy.
The addition of such information, says Toulmin, would “prevent
us from writing the
argument so that its validity shall be manifest from its formal
properties alone” (The
Uses of Argument, p. 123).
In other words, formal logic has evaluated an argument on the
basis of a tightly
structured form (such as the syllogism) that makes the
argument’s validity visible
(manifest). But as soon as the form of the argument is made to
include the greater
amount of information that supports its accuracy and truth, it is
no longer possible
to evaluate the argument solely on the basis of its adherence to
the required form. On
this basis, Toulmin questions the tradition of guaranteeing the
soundness of argu-
ments solely on rules of form.
The advantage of understanding Toulmin’s critique of
syllogistic logic is that his
model provides an antidote to the notion that there is a ready-
made system for con-
necting evidence with claims that guarantees that an argument
will always be right. To
use an analogy, if the Aristotelian syllogism appears to offer us
the promise of never
mistaking the forest for the trees, Toulmin’s revision of that
model is to never let us
forget that the forest is in fact made up of trees.
As a writer, you naturally want some guidelines and workable
methods for
selecting evidence and linking it to claims, and this book does
what it can to
88 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
provide them. But what you can’t expect to find is a set of
predetermined slots
into which you can drop any evidence and find the truth. Rather,
as Toulmin
allows us to see, analyses and arguments cannot be separated
from the complex
set of details and circumstances that are part of life as we live
it.
Clearly, the rules of argument are important for clarifying and
testing our think-
ing. But an argument depends not only on whether its premises
follow logically but
on the quality of the thinking that produces those premises in
the first place and
painstakingly tests their accuracy. This is the job of analysis.
REFINING CATEGORICAL THINKING: TWO EXAMPLES
We have paused to extol Toulmin because his flexible and
sensitive approach to argu-
mentative context offers the way out of a problem that besets
too many of the argu-
ments we all encounter in our daily lives. That problem is
categorical thinking, and,
to be more precise, the rigidity to which categorical thinking is
prone.
To generalize from particular experiences, we try to put those
experiences into
meaningful categories. Analytical thought is quite unthinkable
without categories.
But these can mislead us into oversimplification when the
categories are too broad or
too simply connected. This is especially the case with the
either/or choices to which
categorical thinking is prone: approve/disapprove, real/unreal,
accurate/inaccurate,
believable/unbelievable. The writer who evaluates leadership in
terms of its selfless-
ness/selfishness, for example, needs to pause to consider why
we should evaluate lead-
ership in these terms in the first place.
We will refer to the following two examples to illustrate how
(1) qualifying your
claims and (2) checking for the unstated assumptions upon
which your claims depend
can remedy the two primary problems created by categorical
thinking: unqualified
claims and overstated positions.
Example I: I think that there are many things shown on TV that
are damaging for people to see.
But there is no need for censorship. No network is going to
show violence without the approval
of the public, obviously for financial reasons. What must be
remembered is that the public ma-
jority will see what it wants to see in our mass society.
Example II: Some members of our society feel that [the
televised cartoon series] The Simpsons
promotes wrong morals and values for our society. Other
members find it funny and entertaining.
I feel that The Simpsons has a more positive effect than a
negative one. In relation to a real-life
marriage, Marge and Homer’s marriage is pretty accurate. The
problems they deal with are not very
large or intense. As for the family relationships, the Simpsons
are very close and love each other.
The main problem with example I is the writer’s failure to
qualify his ideas, a
problem that causes him to generalize to the point of
oversimplification. Note the
writer’s habit of stating his claims absolutely (we have
italicized the words that make
these claims unqualified):
“there is no need for censorship”
“no network is going to show violence without”
Refining Categorical Thinking: Two Examples 89
“obviously for financial reasons”
“what must be remembered”
“the majority will see”
Such broad, pronouncement-like claims cannot be supported.
The solution
is to more carefully limit the claims, especially the key premise
about public
approval. The assertion that a commercial television industry
will, for finan-
cial reasons, give the public “what it wants” is true to an extent
(our key phrase
for reformulating either/ors)—but it is not true as globally as
the writer wishes us to
believe.
Couldn’t it also be argued, for example, that given the power of
television to
shape people’s tastes and opinions, the public sees not just what
it wants but what it
has been taught to want? This complication of the writer’s
argument about public
approval undermines the credibility of his global assertion that
“there is no need
for censorship.”
Example II would appear to be more qualified than example I
because it
acknowledges the existence of more than one point of view.
Rather than broadly
asserting that the show is positive and accurate, she tempers
these claims (as italics
show): “I feel that The Simpsons has a more positive effect than
a negative one”;
“Marge and Homer’s marriage is pretty accurate.” These
qualifications, however,
are superficial.
Before she could convince us to approve of The Simpsons for
its accuracy
in depicting marriage, she would have to convince us that
accuracy is a reasonable
criterion for evaluating TV shows (especially cartoons) rather
than assuming the
unquestioned value of accuracy. Would an accurate depiction of
the life of a serial
killer, for example, necessarily make for a “positive” show?
Similarly, if a fantasy
show has no interest in accuracy, is it necessarily “negative”
and without moral
value?
When writers present a debatable premise as if it were self-
evidently true, the
conclusions built upon it cannot stand. At the least, the writer
of example II needs to
recognize her debatable premise, articulate it, and make an
argument in support of
it. She might also precede her judgment about the show with
more analysis. Before
deciding that the show is “more positive than negative” and thus
does not promote
“wrong morals and values for our society,” she could analyze
what the show says about
marriage and how it goes about saying it.
Likewise, if the writer of example I had further examined his
own claims
before rushing to argue an absolute position on censorship, he
would have
noticed how much of the thinking that underlies them remains
unarticulated and
thus unexamined. It would also allow him to sort out the logical
contradiction
with his opening claim that “there are many things shown on TV
that are
da maging for people to see.” If television networks will only
broadcast what the public
approves of, then apparently the public must approve of being
damaged or fail to
notice that it is being damaged. If the public either fails to
notice it is being damaged
or approves of it, aren’t these credible arguments for rather than
against censorship?
90 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
A BRIEF GLOSSARY OF COMMON LOGICAL ERRORS
This last section of the chapter returns briefly to the field of
logic, which provides
terms to shorthand certain common thinking errors. We mention
six errors, all of
which involve the root problem of oversimplification.
1. Simple cause/complex effect. The fallacy of simple
cause/complex effect involves
assigning a single cause to a complex phenomenon that cannot
be so easily
explained. A widespread version of this fallacy is seen in
arguments that blame
individual figures for broad historical events, for example,
“Eisenhower caused
America to be involved in the Vietnam War.” Such a claim
ignores the Cold War
ethos, the long history of colonialism in Southeast Asia, and a
multitude of other
factors. When you reduce a complex sequence of events to a
simple and single
cause—or assign a simple effect to a complex cause—you will
virtually always
be wrong.
2. False cause. Another common cause/effect thinking error,
false cause is produced
by assuming that two events are causally connected when they
aren’t necessarily.
One of the most common forms of this fallacy—known as post
hoc, ergo propter
hoc (Latin for “after this, therefore because of this”)—assumes
that because A
precedes B in time, A causes B. For example, it was once
thought that the sun
shining on a pile of garbage caused the garbage to conceive
flies.
This error is the stuff that superstition is made of. “I walked
under a ladder,
and then I got hit by a car” becomes “Because I walked under a
ladder, I got hit
by a car.” Because one action precedes a second one in time, the
first action is
assumed to be the cause of the second. A more dangerous form
of this error
goes like this:
Evidence: A new neighbor moved in downstairs on Saturday.
My television dis-
appeared on Sunday.
Conclusion: The new neighbor stole my TV.
As this example also illustrates, typically in false cause some
significant alterna-
tive has not been considered, such as the presence of flies’ eggs
in the garbage.
Similarly, it does not follow that if a person watches television
and then commits
a crime, television watching necessarily causes crime; there are
other causes to
be considered.
3. Analogy and false analogy. An analogy is a means of
understanding some-
thing relatively foreign in terms of something more familiar.
When you argue
by analogy you are saying that what is true for one thing will
necessarily be
true for something else that it in some way resembles. The
famous poetic line
“my love is like a red, red rose,” is actually an argument by
analogy. At first
glance, this rather clichéd comparison seems too far-fetched to
be reasonable.
But is it a false analogy or a potentially enabling one? Past
users of this analogy
have thought the thorns, the early fading, the beauty, and so on,
sufficient to
validate the analogy between roses and women. Analogies, in
short, are not bad
A Brief Glossary of Common Logical Errors 91
or illogical in themselves. In fact, they can be incredibly useful,
depending on
how you handle them.
The danger that arguing analogically can pose is that an
inaccurate compari-
son, usually one that oversimplifies, prevents you from looking
at the evidence.
Flying to the moon is like flying a kite? Well, it’s a little bit
like that, but . . .
in most ways that matter, sending a rocket to the moon does not
resemble send-
ing a kite into the air.
Another way that an analogy can become false is when it
becomes over-
extended: there is a point of resemblance at one juncture, but
the writer then
goes on to assume that the two items compared will necessarily
resemble each
other in most other respects. To what extent is balancing your
checkbook really
like juggling? On the other hand, an analogy that first appears
overextended may
not be: how far, for example, could you reasonably go in
comparing a presiden-
tial election to a sales campaign, or an enclosed shopping mall
to a village main
street?
When you find yourself reasoning by analogy, ask yourself
two questions:
(1) are the basic similarities greater and more significant than
the obvious dif-
ferences? and (2) am I overrelying on surface similarities and
ignoring more
essential differences?
4. Equivocation. Equivocation confuses an argument by
slipping between two
meanings for a single word or phrase. For example: “Only man
is capable of
religious faith. No woman is a man. Therefore, no woman is
capable of religious
faith.” Here the first use of man is generic, intended to be
gender neutral, while
the second use is decidedly masculine. One specialized form of
equivocation
results in what are sometimes called weasel words. A weasel
word is one that has
been used so much and so loosely that it ceases to have much
meaning (the term
derives from the weasel’s reputed practice of sucking the
contents from an egg
without destroying the shell). The word natural, for example,
can mean good,
pure, and unsullied, but it can also refer to the ways of nature
(flora and fauna).
Such terms (love, reality, and experience are others) invite
equivocation because
they mean so many different things to different people.
5. Begging the question. To beg the question is to argue in a
circle by asking read-
ers to accept without argument a point that is actually at stake.
This kind of
fallacious argument hides its conclusion among its assumptions.
For example,
“Huckleberry Finn should be banned from school libraries as
obscene because it
uses obscene language” begs the question by presenting as
obviously true issues
that are actually in question: the definition of obscenity and the
assumption that
the obscene should be banned because it is obscene.
6. Overgeneralization. An overgeneralization is an inadequately
qualified claim. It
may be true that some heavy drinkers are alcoholics, but it
would be not fair
to claim that all heavy drinking is or leads to alcoholism. As a
rule, be wary of
“totalizing” or global pronouncements; the bigger the
generalization, the more
likely it admits exceptions.
92 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments
ASSIGNMENTS: Analyze or Produce an Argument
1. Locate the binaries in an editorial or other position piece and
explore the extent
to which these are adequate and inadequate ways of defining the
subject. Once
you have arrived at the essential claims of the piece, analyze
these using the tools
offered in this chapter. In particular, you should use the
strategies for reformu-
lating binaries in A Procedure for Reformulating Binaries in
Argument and for
unearthing premises in the A Procedure for Uncovering
Assumptions sections.
Remember to share your thinking, not just to present your
conclusions, as you
write your analysis.
2. Write an essay in which you reason back to the premises that
underlie some idea
or attitude of your own, preferably one that has undergone some
kind of change
in recent years (for example, your attitude toward the world of
work, marriage,
family life, community, religion, etc.). Take care not to
substitute unanalyzed
narrative for analysis. Even though you are working from your
own experience,
stay focused on analysis of your assumptions and binaries
(which you can use
the two procedures cited in the previous assignment option to
produce).
3. Compose an argument of your own (it can be an editorial),
using the chapter’s
Strategies for Developing an Argument by Reasoning Back to
Premises. As you
have seen, the editorial on the Antioch Rules is both a critique
of the thinking
in another argument and an argument in its own right. And so if
you wish you
may use an analysis of an existing argument to prompt your
own.
CHAPTER 6
Topics and Modes of Analysis
The first unit of this book, The Analytical Frame of Mind, has
sought to persuade
you that analysis is worth the challenge—that you can unlearn
less productive ways of
thinking and take on fresh habits that will make you smarter. In
this final chapter of
Unit I, we offer concrete advice about how to succeed in
creating writing that fulfills
some of the most common basic writing tasks that you will be
asked to produce at the
undergraduate level and beyond.
A unifying element of the chapters in this unit is their focus on
the stage of the
composing process that rhetoricians call invention. This chapter
takes up several of
classical rhetoric’s topics of invention, which are places (from
the Greek topoi) from
which a writer or orator might discover the things he or she
needs to say. These top-
ics include comparison/contrast and definition, to which we
have added summary,
reaction papers, and agree/disagree topics because these are
such common forms in
college and other writing settings. The chapter offers you
strategies for making the
best use of these topics as analytical tools.
The chapter opens by focusing on rhetorical analysis: an
approach that we have
been featuring from the opening pages, without labeling it as
such. Rhetorical analysis
is a concern for analytical thinkers because it focuses on how
and why our responses
are triggered and shaped by things in the world, from a sign we
read on the subway to
the language of a presidential speech.
Like analysis in general, rhetorical analysis asks what things
mean, why they are
as they are and do what they do. But rhetorical analysis asks
these questions with one
primary question always foregrounded: how does the thing
achieve its effects on an
audience? Rhetorical analysis asks not just what do I think, but
what am I being invited
to think (and feel) and by what means?
RHETORICAL ANALYSIS
To analyze the rhetoric of something is to determine how that
something persuades
and positions its readers or viewers or listeners. Rhetorical
analysis is an essential skill
because it reveals how particular pieces of communication seek
to enlist our support
and shape our behavior. Only then can we decide whether we
should be persuaded to
respond as we have been invited to respond.
93
94 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis
Everything has a rhetoric: classrooms, churches, speeches,
supermarkets, department
store windows, Starbucks, photographs, magazine covers, your
bedroom, this book. In-
tention, by the way, is not the issue. It doesn’t matter whether
the effect of a place or a
piece of writing on its viewers (or readers) is deliberate and
planned or not. What mat-
ters is that you can notice how the details of the thing itself
encourage or discourage
certain kinds of responses in the consumers of whatever it is
you are studying. What, for
example, does the high ceiling of a Gothic cathedral invite in
the way of response from
people who enter it? What do the raised platform at the front of
a classroom and the tidy
rows of desks secured to the floor say to the students who enter
there?
If you are reading this book in a first-year college writing
course, you may be
asked to write a rhetorical analysis, often of a visual image of
some kind, early in the
semester. What follows is an exercise in rhetorical analysis that
will help you better
understand the aims and methods of this kind of analysis. We
think it is easiest to start
with analysis of visual rhetoric—the rhetoric, for example, of a
typical classroom.
Rhetorical Analysis of a Place: A Brief Example
To get you started on a rhetorical analysis of a place, here is the
beginning of one on
the layout of our college campus. It was written as a freewrite
and could serve as the
basis for further observation.
The campus is laid out in several rows and quadrangles. It is
interesting to observe where the differ-
ent academic buildings are, relative to the academic
departments they house. It is also interesting
to see how the campus positions student housing. In a way, the
campus is set up as a series of
quadrangles—areas of space with four sides. One of the
dormitories, for example, forms a quad-
rangle. Quadrangles invite people to look in—rather than out.
They are enclosed spaces, the center
of which is a kind of blank. The center serves as a shared space,
a safely walled-off area for the de-
velopment of a separate community. The academic buildings
also form a quadrangle of sorts, with an
open green space in the center. On one side of the quadrangle
are the buildings that house the natu-
ral and social sciences. Opposite these—on the other side of a
street that runs through the center of
campus—are the modern brick and glass structures that house
the arts and the humanities . . .
If you push these observations by asking “So what?,” here are
some of the rhetori-
cal implications at which you might arrive:
• That the campus is inward-looking and self-enclosed
• That it invites its members to feel separate and safe
• That it announces the division of the sciences and the social
sciences from the
arts and humanities, so the campus layout arguably creates the
sense of a divided
community.
Rhetorical Analysis of an Advertisement: A Student Paper
This example is excerpted from a student’s rhetorical analysis
of a perfume advertise-
ment that appeared in a magazine aimed at young women. The
analysis was written
in a course called Introduction to Communication. The writer’s
aim is not only to tell
Rhetorical Analysis 95
her readers what the advertisement “says” but to locate it in a
social context. The stu-
dent also uses secondary sources to provide an interpretive
context (a lens) through
which to see the rhetoric of the ad—its means of persuasion.
The visual imagery of advertisements offers instructive
opportunities for rhetori-
cal analysis because advertising is a form of persuasion.
Advertisers attend to rhetoric
by carefully targeting their audiences. This means
advertisements are well suited to
the questions that rhetorical analysis typically asks: how is the
audience being invited
to respond and by what means (in what context)? You’ll notice
that in the rhetorical
analysis of the magazine ad, the writer occasionally extends her
analysis to evaluative
conclusions about the aims and possible effects (on American
culture) of the adver-
tisement. We’ve included the first five paragraphs of the essay
along with a piece of
its conclusion.
Marketing the Girl Next Door: A Declaration of Independence?
[1] Found in Seventeen magazine, the advertisement for
“tommy girl,” the perfume manu-
factured by Tommy Hilfiger, sells the most basic American
ideal of independence. Various
visual images and text suggest that purchasing tommy girl buys
freedom and liberation
for the mind and body. This image appeals to young women
striving to establish them-
selves as unbound individuals. Ironically, the advertisement
uses traditional American
icons as vehicles for marketing to the modern woman. Overall,
the message is simple:
American individualism can be found in a spray or nonspray
bottle.
[2] Easily, the young woman dominates the advertisement. She
has the look of the all-
American “girl next door.” Her appeal is a natural one, as she
does not rely on makeup
or a runway model’s cheekbones for her beauty. Freckles frame
her eyes that ambitiously
gaze skyward; there are no limits restricting women in capitalist
America. Her flowing
brown hair freely rides a stirring breeze. Unconcerned with the
order of a particular
hairstyle, she smiles and enjoys the looseness of her spirit. The
ad tells us how wearing
this perfume allows women to achieve the look of self-assured
and liberated indifference
without appearing vain.
[3] The second most prevalent image in the advertisement is
the American flag, which
neatly matches the size of the young woman’s head. The
placement and size of the flag
suggest that if anything is on her cloudless mind, it is
fundamental American beliefs
that allow for such self-determination. The half-concealed flag
is seemingly continued in
the young woman’s hair. According to the ad, American ideals
reside well within the girl
as well as the perfume.
[4] It is also noticeable that there is a relative absence of land
surrounding the young
woman. We can see glimpses of “fruited plains” flanking the
girl’s shoulders. This young
woman is barely bound to earth, as free as the clouds that float
beneath her head. It is
this liberated image Americans proudly carry that is being sold
in the product.
[5] The final image promoting patriotism can be found in the
young woman’s clothing. The
young woman is draped in the blue jean jacket, a classic symbol
of American ruggedness
and originality. As far as we can see, the jacket is spread open,
supporting the earlier
claim of the young women’s free and independent spirit. These
are the very same
96 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis
ideals that embody American pride and patriotism. The ad
clearly employs the
association principle in linking the tommy girl fragrance with
emotionally compelling
yet essentially unrelated images of American nationalism and
patriotism. [. . .]
[10] Yet in reality, this marketing of liberation is paradoxical;
although this freeing message
promotes rebellion and nonconformity, it actually supports the
market economy and feeds
into capitalism and conformity. When advertisers employ
political protest messages to be
associated with products, they imply that buying the product is
a form of political action.
We now move to strategies for making your response to some
traditional topics
more analytical. Like the other thinking tools in this unit, each
of these topics can aid
in the invention stage of your writing.
SUMMARY
Summary and analysis go hand in hand; the primary goal for
both is to understand
rather than evaluate. Summary is a necessary early step in
analysis because it provides
perspective on the subject as a whole by explaining the meaning
and function of each
of that subject’s parts. Within larger analyses—papers or
reports—summary performs
the essential function of contextualizing a subject accurately. It
creates a fair picture of
what’s there.
Summarizing isn’t simply the unanalytical reporting of
information; it’s more
than just shrinking someone else’s words. To write an accurate
summary, you have to
ask analytical questions, such as the following:
• Which of the ideas in the reading are most significant? Why?
• How do these ideas fit together?
• What do the key passages in the reading mean?
Summarizing is, then, like paraphrasing, a tool of understanding
and not just a
mechanical task.
When summaries go wrong, they are just lists, a simple “this
and then this” sequence.
Often lists are random, as in a shopping list compiled from the
first thing you thought of
to the last. Sometimes they are organized in broad categories:
fruit and vegetables here,
dried goods there. At best, they do very little logical connecting
among the parts beyond
“next.” Summaries that are just lists tend to dollop out the
information monotonously.
They omit the thinking that the piece is doing—the ways it is
connecting the informa-
tion, the contexts it establishes, and the implicit slant or point
of view.
Writing analytical summaries can teach you how to read for the
connections, the
lines that connect the dots. And when you’re operating at that
level, you are much
more likely to have ideas about what you are summarizing.
Strategies for Making Summaries More Analytical
Strategy 1: Look for the Underlying Structure Use The Method
to find patterns
of repetition and contrast. (See Chapter 3.) If you apply it to a
few key para-
graphs, you will find the terms that are repeated, and these will
suggest strands,
Summary 97
which in turn make up organizing contrasts. This process works
to categorize
and then further organize information and, in so doing, to bring
out its underly-
ing structure.
Strategy 2: Select the Information That You Wish to Discuss on
Some Principle
Other Than General Coverage Use the Notice and Focus strategy
to rank items of
information in some order of importance. (See Chapter 3.) Let’s
say that you are writ-
ing a paper on major changes in the tax law or on recent
developments in U.S. policy
toward the Middle East. Rather than simply collecting the
information, try to arrange
it into hierarchies. What are the least or most significant
changes or developments,
and why? Which are most overlooked or most overrated or most
controversial or most
practical, and why? All of these terms—significant, overlooked,
and so forth—have
the effect of focusing the summary, guiding your decisions
about what to include and
exclude.
Strategy 3: Reduce Scope and Say More about Less Both The
Method and Notice and
Focus involve some loss of breadth; you won’t be able to cover
everything. But this is
usually a trade-off worth making. Your ability to rank parts of
your subject or choose
a revealing feature or pattern to focus on gives you surer control
of the material than if
you just reproduce what is in the text. You can still begin with a
brief survey of major
points to provide context, before narrowing the focus. Reducing
scope is an especially
efficient and productive strategy when you are trying to
understand a reading you find
difficult or perplexing. It moves you beyond passive
summarizing and toward having
ideas about the reading.
If, for example, you are reading Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales and
start cataloging
what makes it funny, you are likely to end up with unanalyzed
plot summary—
a list that arranges its elements in no particular order. But
narrowing the question
to “How does Chaucer’s use of religious commentary contribute
to the humor of
‘The Wife of Bath’s Tale’?” reduces the scope to a single tale
and the humor to a
single aspect of humor. Describe those as accurately as you can,
and you will begin
to notice things.
Strategy 4: Get Some Detachment: Shift Your Focus from
What? to How? and
Why? Most readers tend to get too single-minded about
absorbing the information.
That is, they attend only to the what: what the reading is saying
or is about. They take
it all in passively. But you can deliberately shift your focus to
how it says what it says,
and why.
If, for example, you were asked to discuss the major discoveries
that Darwin made
on The Beagle, you could avoid simply listing his conclusions
by redirecting your
attention to how he proceeds. You could choose to focus, for
example, on Darwin’s
use of the scientific method, examining how he builds and, in
some cases, discards
hypotheses. Or you might select several passages that illustrate
how Darwin proceeded
from evidence to conclusion and then rank them in order of
importance to the over-
all theory. Notice that in shifting the emphasis to Darwin’s
thinking—the how and
why—you would not be excluding the what (the information
component) from your
discussion.
98 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis
PERSONAL RESPONSE: THE REACTION PAPER
The biggest advantage of reaction papers is that they give you
the freedom to explore
where and how to engage your subject. They bring to the
surface your emotional or intui-
tive response, allowing you to experiment with placing the
subject in various contexts.
Another advantage of personal response questions is that they
allow you to get some
distance on your first impressions. If, as you reexamine your
first reactions, you look for
ways that they might not be accurate, you will often find places
where you now disagree
with yourself, in effect, stimulating you to think in new ways
about the subject.
Personal response becomes a problem, however, when it
distracts you from ana-
lyzing the subject. In most cases, when you are invited to
respond personally, you are
being asked for more than your endorsement or critique of the
subject. If you find
yourself constructing a virtual list—I agree with this point or I
disagree with that
point—you are probably doing little more than matching your
opinions with the
points of view encountered in a reading. In most cases, you
misinterpret the intent of
a personal response topic if you view it as an invitation to:
1. Assert your personal opinions unreflectively.
2. Substitute narratives of your own experience for careful
consideration of the
subject. In an academic setting, an opinion is more than simply
an expression
of your beliefs; it’s a conclusion that you earn the rights to
through a careful
examination of evidence.
Strategies for Making Personal Responses More Analytical
Strategy 1: Trace Your Responses Back to Their Causes As we
noted in Chapter 2,
tracing your impressions back to their causes is the key to
making personal response
analytical—because you focus on the details that gave you the
response rather than
on the response alone.
Let’s say, for example, that you are responding to an article on
ways of increasing
the numbers of registered voters in urban precincts. You find
the article irritating;
your personal experience working with political campaigns has
taught you that get-
ting out the vote is not as easy as this writer makes it seem.
From that starting point,
you might analyze one (to you) overly enthusiastic passage,
concentrating on how the
writer has not only overestimated what campaign workers can
actually do but also
condescends to those who don’t register—assuming, perhaps,
that they are ignorant
rather than indifferent or disillusioned. Tracing your response
back to its cause may
help to defuse your emotional response and open the door to
further investigation
of the other writer’s rationale. You might, for example, discover
that the writer has in
mind a much more long-term effect or that urban models differ
significantly from the
suburban ones of your experience.
Strategy 2: Assume That You May Have Missed the Point It’s
difficult to see the logic of
someone else’s position if you are too preoccupied with your
own. Similarly, it is difficult
to see the logic, or illogic, of your own position if you already
assume it to be true.
Personal Response: The Reaction Paper 99
Although an evaluative response (approve/disapprove) can
sometimes spur analy-
sis, it can also lead you to prejudge the case. If, however, you
habitually question the
validity of your own point of view, you will sometimes
recognize the possibility of
an alternative point of view, as was the case in the voter
registration example. (See
Figure 6.1.) Assuming that you have missed the point is a good
strategy in all kinds of
analytical writing. It causes you to notice details of your subject
that you might not
otherwise have registered.
Strategy 3: Locate Your Response within a Limiting Context
Suppose you are
asked in a religion course to write your religious beliefs.
Although this topic would
naturally lead you to think about your own experiences and
beliefs, you would
probably do best to approach it in some more limiting context.
The reading in the
course could provide this limit. Let’s say that thus far you have
read two modern
religious thinkers, Martin Buber and Paul Tillich. Using these
as your context, “What
do I believe?” could become “How does my response to Buber
and Tillich illuminate
my own assumptions about the nature of religious faith?” An
advantage of this move,
beyond making your analysis less general, is that it would help
you to get perspective
on your own position.
Another way of limiting your context is to consider how one
author or
recognizable point of view that you have encountered in the
course might
respond to a single statement from another author or point of
view. If you used
this strategy to respond to the topic “Does God exist?” you
might arrive at a
formulation such as “How would Martin Buber critique Paul
Tillich’s definition
of God?” Although this topic appears to exclude personal
response entirely, it
in fact does not. Your opinion would necessarily enter because
you would be
actively formulating something that is not already evident in the
reading
(how Buber might respond to Tillich).
Evaluative Personal Response: “The article was irritating.” This
response is too broad
and dismissively judgmental. Make it more analytical by tracing
the response back to the evidence
that triggered it.
A More Analytical Evaluative Response: “The author of the
article oversimplifies
the problem by assuming the cause of low voter registration to
be voters’
ignorance rather than voters’ indifference.” Although still
primarily an evaluative
response, this observation is more analytical. It takes the
writer’s initial response (”irritating”) to a
specific cause.
A Nonevaluative Analytical Response: “The author’s emphasis
on increased cover-
age of city politics in local/neighborhood forums such as the
churches suggests
that the author is interested in long-term effects of voter
registration drives and
not just in immediate increases.” Rather than simply reacting
(”irritating”) or leaping to
evaluation (”oversimplifies the problem”), the writer here
formulates a possible explanation for the
difference between his or her point of view on voter registration
drives and the article’s.
FIGURE 6.1
Making Personal Response More Analytical
100 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis
AGREE/DISAGREE
We offer here only a brief recap of this kind of topic because it
is discussed at length
in earlier chapters. Topics are frequently worded as
agree/disagree, especially on essay
exams, but the wording is potentially misleading because you
are rarely being asked
for as unqualified an opinion as agree or disagree.
In most cases, your best strategy in dealing with agree/disagree
questions is to
choose neither side. Instead, question the terms of the binary so
as to arrive at a more
complex and qualified position to write about. In place of
choosing one side or the
other, decide to what extent you agree and to what extent you
disagree. You are still
responsible for coming down more on one side than the other,
but this need not mean
that you have to locate yourself in a starkly either/or position.
The code phrase for
accomplishing this shift, as we’ve suggested in Chapter 5, is
“the extent to which”: “To
what extent do you agree (or disagree)?”
COMPARISON/CONTRAST
Although comparison/contrast is meant to invite analysis, it is
too often treated as an
end in itself. The fundamental reason for comparing and
contrasting is that you can
usually discover ideas about a subject much more easily when
you are not viewing
it in isolation. When executed mechanically, however, without
the writer pressing to
understand the significance of a similarity or difference,
comparison/contrast can
suffer from pointlessness.
Comparison/contrast topics produce pointless essays if you
allow them to turn
into matching exercises—that is, if you match common features
of two subjects but
don’t get beyond the equation stage (a, b, c = x, y, z). Writers
fall into this trap when
they have no larger question or issue to explore and perhaps
resolve by making the
comparison. If, for example, you were to pursue the comparison
of the representa-
tions of the Boston Tea Party in British and American history
textbooks, you would
begin by identifying similarities and differences. But simply
presenting these and
concluding that the two versions resemble and differ from each
other in some ways
would be pointless. You would need to press your comparisons
with the So what?
question (see Chapter 4) to give them some interpretive weight.
Strategies for Making Comparison/Contrast More Analytical
Strategy 1: Argue for the Significance of a Key Comparison
Rather than simply cov-
ering a range of comparisons, focus on a key comparison.
Although narrowing the
focus might seem to eliminate other important areas of
consideration, in fact it usu-
ally allows you to incorporate at least some of these other areas
in a more tightly con-
nected, less list-like fashion. So, for example, a comparison of
the burial rites of two
cultures probably reveals more about them than a much broader
but more superficial
list of cultural similarities and differences. In the majority of
cases, covering less is
covering more.
Comparison/Contrast 101
You can determine which comparison is key by ranking. You
are ranking
whenever you designate one part of your topic as especially
important or reveal-
ing. Suppose you are asked to compare General Norman
Schwarzkopf ’s strat-
egy in the first Persian Gulf War with General Douglas
MacArthur’s strategy in
World War II. As a first move, you could limit the comparison
to some reveal-
ing parallel, such as the way each man dealt with the media, and
then argue for
its significance above other similarities or differences. You
might, for instance,
claim that in their treatment of the media we get an especially
clear or telling
vantage point on the two generals’ strategies. At this point you
are on your way to
an analytical point—for example, that because MacArthur was
more effectively
shielded from the media at a time when the media was a virtual
instrument of
propaganda, he could make choices that Schwarzkopf might
have wanted to make
but couldn’t.
Strategy 2: Use One Side of the Comparison to Illuminate the
Other Usually it is not
necessary to treat each part of the comparison equally. It’s a
common misconception
that each side must be given equal space. In fact, the purpose of
your comparison
governs the amount of space you’ll need to give to each part.
Often, you will be using
one side of the comparison primarily to illuminate the other. For
example, in a course
on contemporary military policy, the ratio between the two parts
would probably be
roughly seventy percent on Schwarzkopf to thirty percent on
MacArthur rather than
fifty percent on each.
Strategy 3: Imagine How One Side of Your Comparison Might
Respond to
the Other This strategy, a variant of the preceding one, is a
particularly
useful way of helping you to respond to comparison/contrast
topics more
purposefully. This strategy can be adapted to a wide variety of
subjects. If you
were asked to compare Sigmund Freud with one of his most
important follow-
ers, Jacques Lacan, you would probably be better off focusing
the broad ques-
tion of how Lacan revises Freud by considering how and why he
might critique
Freud’s interpretation of a particular dream in The
Interpretation of Dreams.
Similarly, in the case of the Persian Gulf War example, you
could ask yourself how
MacArthur might have handled some key decision in the Persian
Gulf War and why.
Or you might consider how he would have critiqued
Schwarzkopf ’s handling of that
decision and why.
Strategy 4: Focus on Difference within Similarity (or Similarity
within Difference) The
typical move when you are asked to compare two subjects is to
collect a number of
parallel examples and show how they are parallel, which can
lead to bland tallying
of similarities without much analytical edge. In the case of
obvious similarities, you
should move quickly to significant differences within the
similarity and the implica-
tions of these differences. In this way, you better define your
subject, and you are more
likely to offer your readers something that is not already clear
to them. For example,
the Carolingian and Burgundian Renaissances share an emphasis
on education, but if
102 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis
you were asked to compare them, you could reveal the character
of these two histori-
cal periods more effectively by concentrating on the different
purposes and origins of
this emphasis on education.
A corollary of the difference within similarity formula is that
you can focus on
unexpected similarity rather than obvious difference. It is no
surprise that President
Bill Clinton’s economic package differed from President Ronald
Reagan’s, but much
could be written about the way that Clinton “out-Reaganed
Bush” (as one politi-
cal commentator put it) by appealing to voters with Reagan’s
brand of populist
optimism—a provocative similarity within difference.
DEFINITION
Definition becomes meaningful when it serves some larger
purpose. You define
“rhythm and blues” because it is essential to any further
discussion of the evolution
of rock-and-roll music, or because you need that definition to
discuss the British
Invasion spearheaded by groups such as the Beatles, the Rolling
Stones, and the Yard-
birds in the late 1960s, or because you cannot classify John
Lennon, Mick Jagger, or
Eric Clapton without it.
Like comparison/contrast, definition can produce pointless
essays if the writer
gets no further than assembling information. Moreover, when
you construct a sum-
mary of existing definitions with no clear sense of purpose, you
tend to list definitions
indiscriminately. As a result, you are likely to overlook
conflicts among the various
definitions and overemphasize their surface similarities.
Definition is in fact a site at
which there is some contesting of authorities—different voices
who seek to make their
definition triumph.
Strategies for Making Definition More Analytical
Strategy 1: Test the Definition against Evidence One common
form of
definition asks you to apply a definition to a body of
information. It is rare to
find a perfect fit. Therefore, you should, as a general rule, use
the data to
assess the accuracy and the limitations of the definition, rather
than simply
imposing it on your data and ignoring or playing down the ways
in which it
does not fit. Testing the definition against evidence makes your
definition evolve.
The definition, in turn, serves as a lens to better focus your
thinking about
the evidence.
Suppose you were asked to define capitalism in the context of
third-world
economies. You might profitably begin by matching some
standard definition of
capitalism with specific examples from one or two third-world
economies, with
the express purpose of detecting where the definition does and
does not apply.
In other words, you would respond to the definition topic by
assaying the extent
to which (that phrase again!) the definition provides a tool for
making sense of
the subject.
Definition 103
Strategy 2: Use a Definition from One Source to Critique and
Illuminate
Another As a general rule, you should attempt to identify the
points of view
of the sources from which you take your definitions, rather than
accepting
them as uncontextualized answers. It is essential to identify the
particular slant
because otherwise you will tend to overlook the conflicting
elements among various
definitions of a key term.
A paper on alcoholism, for example, will lose focus if you use
all of the defini-
tions available. If, instead, you convert the definition into a
comparison and contrast
of competing definitions, you can more easily generate a point
and purpose for your
definition. By querying, for example, whether a given source’s
definition of alcohol-
ism is moral or physiological or psychological, you can more
easily resolve the issue
of definition.
Strategy 3: Problematize as Well as Synthesize the Definition
To explore
competing definitions of the same term requires you to attend to
the difficul-
ties of definition. In general, analysis achieves direction and
purpose by locating
and then exploring a problem. You can productively make a
problem out of
defining. This strategy is known as problematizing, which
locates and then
explores the significance of uncertainties and conflicts. It is
always a smart
move to problematize definitions to reveal complexity that less
careful thinkers
might miss.
The definition of capitalism that you might take from Karl
Marx, for
example, differs in its emphases from Adam Smith’s. In this
case, you would not only
isolate the most important of these differences but also try to
account for the
fact that Marx’s villain is Smith’s hero. Such an accounting
would probably
lead you to consider how the definition has been shaped by each
of these
writers’ political philosophies or by the culture in which each
theory was
composed.
Strategy 4: Shift from What? to How? and Why? Questions It is
no accident that
we earlier offered the same strategy for making summary more
analytical: analytical
topics that require definition also depend on “why?” or “how?”
questions, not “what?”
questions (which tend simply to call for information).
If, for example, you sought to define the meaning of darkness in
Joseph
Conrad’s Heart of Darkness and any two other modern British
novels, you would do
better to ask why the writers find darkness such a fertile term
than simply to
accumulate various examples of the term in the three novels.
You might start
by isolating the single best example from each of the works,
preferably ones
that reveal important differences as well as similarities. Then,
in analyzing how
each writer uses the term, you could work toward some larger
point that would
unify the essay. You might show how the conflicts of definition
within Conrad’s meta-
phor evolve historically, get reshaped by female novelists,
change after World War I,
and so forth.
104 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis
ASSIGNMENTS: Using the Topics and Modes of Analysis
1. Locate any magazine ad that you find interesting. Ask
yourself, what is this a
picture of ? Use the student paper on the perfume ad as a kind
of model for
ways of thinking about the ad’s rhetorical agenda. If you find
yourself getting
stuck, rephrase the question as, “What is this ad really about,
and why did the
advertiser choose this particular image or set of images?
Strategies in this unit
that might work well with this assignment are Seems to Be
about X . . . (in
Chapter 4) and Make the Implicit Explicit (see Chapters 1 and
4).
2. Analyze a New Yorker cover in more than one interpretive
context. The cover we
recommend is by Harry Bliss, dated August 1, 2005, and is
entitled “King Kong.”
It depicts a large gorilla near the Empire State Building in New
York squirting a
crowd of overheated New Yorkers with a large green squirt gun.
You can see this
cover either on the artist’s website or at The New Yorker store
website (click on
Browse by Artist; choose Harry Bliss.)
One obvious context for the cover is the movie King Kong,
which was about
to come out in the latest Peter Jackson version. Another context
is international
terrorism in general, and probably 9/11 in particular, given that
the gorilla (gue-
rilla?) is perched near a prominent NYC architectural icon.
Also, just before the
cover was published, a bombing had occurred in the London
underground.
In your paper you should focus on how the cartoonist is
negotiating both his
contexts and his audience. How, in other words, does the
rhetoric of the cover
work in the context of current fears about international
terrorism? Which details
of the cover “speak” most interestingly in this regard—and what
do they say?
3. Write two summaries of the same article or book chapter.
Make the first one
consecutive (the so-called “coverage” model)—that is, try to
cover the piece by
essentially listing the key points as they appear. Limit yourself
to a typed page.
Then rewrite the summary, doing the following:
• Rank the items in order of importance according to some
principle that you
designate, explaining your rationale;
• Eliminate the last few items on the list, or at most, give each a
single sentence;
and
• Use the space you have saved to include more detail about the
most important
item or two.
The second half of this assignment will probably require closer
to two pages.
4. Write a paper in which you explore significant differences
and similarities, using
any item from the following list.
List as many similarities and differences as you can: go for
coverage. Then
review your list and select the two or three most revealing
similarities and the
two or three most revealing differences. At this point, you are
ready to write a
few paragraphs in which you argue for the significance of a key
difference or
similarity. In so doing, you may find it interesting to focus on
an unexpected
Definition 105
similarity or difference—one that others might not initially
notice. (We recom-
mend trying the “unexpected” gambit.)
a. Accounts of the same event from two different newspapers or
magazines or
textbooks
b. Two CDs (or even songs) by the same artist or group
c. Two ads for the same kind of product
d. Graffiti in men’s bathrooms versus graffiti in women’s
bathrooms
e. The political campaigns of two opponents running for the
same or similar
office
f. Courtship behavior as practiced by men and by women
g. Two breeds of dog
h. Two clothing styles as emblematic of socioeconomic class or
a subgroup in
your school, town, or workplace
i. Two versions of the same song by different artists
5. Write a comparative definition in which you seek out
different and potentially
competing definitions of the same term or terms.
Begin with a dictionary such as the Oxford English Dictionary
(popularly
known as the OED, available in most library reference rooms or
online) that
contains both historically based definitions tracking the term’s
evolution over
time and etymological definitions that identify the linguistic
origins of the term
(its sources in older languages). Be sure to locate both the
etymology and the
historical evolution of the term or terms.
Then look up the term in one or preferably several specialized
dictionaries.
We offer a list of some of these in Chapter 16, Finding, Citing,
and Integrating
Sources, but you can also ask your reference librarian for
pertinent titles. Gener-
ally speaking, different disciplines generate their own
specialized dictionaries.
Summarize key differences and similarities among the ways
the dictionaries
have defined your term or terms. Then write a comparative
essay in which you
argue for the significance of a key similarity or difference, or
an unexpected one.
Here is the list of words: hysteria, ecstasy, enthusiasm,
witchcraft, leisure, gos-
sip, bachelor, spinster, romantic, instinct, punk, thug, pundit,
dream, alcoholism,
aristocracy, atom, ego, pornography, conservative, liberal,
entropy, election,
tariff. Some of these words are interesting to look at together,
such as ecstasy/
enthusiasm or liberal/ conservative or bachelor/spinster. Feel
free to write on a
pair instead of a single word.
This page intentionally left blank
UNIT II
Writing the Analytical Essay
CHAPTER 7
What Evidence Is and How It Works
CHAPTER 8
Using Evidence to Build a Paper: 10 on 1 versus 1 on 10
CHAPTER 9
Making a Thesis Evolve
CHAPTER 10
Structuring the Paper: Forms and Formats
CHAPTER 11
Introductions and Conclusions
CHAPTER 12
Recognizing and Fixing Weak Thesis Statements
This page intentionally left blank
CHAPTER 7
What Evidence Is and How It Works
Most of what goes wrong in using a thesis is the result of a
writer leaping
too quickly to a generalization that would do as a thesis, and
then treating
evidence only as something to be mustered in support of that
idea.
This chapter is about evidence—what it is, what it is meant to
do, and how to
recognize when you are using it well. The chapter’s overall
argument is that you
should use evidence to test, refine, and develop your ideas,
rather than just to prove
that they are correct. The chapter begins by analyzing two
common problems: claims
without evidence (unsubstantiated claims) and evidence without
claims (pointless
evidence).
A claim is an assertion that you make about your evidence—an
idea that you be-
lieve the evidence supports. The governing claim in a paper is
the thesis. In analytical
writing, the thesis is a theory that explains what some feature or
features of a subject
mean. When the material of your subject, your data, is used to
demonstrate the truth
or falsity of a particular claim, that material becomes evidence.
This chapter opens Unit II, which is about writing the thesis-
driven essay. Unit I
demonstrates how to make observations about data and reason
to implications and
conclusions, but it does not take this process to the point at
which a writer settles on a
formal claim (a thesis) and uses it to govern the development of
an entire essay.
In this unit we demonstrate how to employ the analytical
methods (tools) offered
in Unit I—especially Notice and Focus, The Method, the So
what? question, and Dif-
ference within Similarity—to find, formulate, and evolve a
thesis.
This unit’s approach to essay organization and the thesis may
differ from what
you’re used to. Writing Analytically is most unlike other
writing texts in its treatment
of the thesis. We argue that the problem with much writing of
the sort that people
are taught to do in school is that it arrives prematurely at an
idea that the writer then
“proves” by attaching it to a number of examples—a pattern we
call 1 on 10 (see
Chapter 8). Textbooks about writing tend to present thesis
statements as the finished
products of an act of thinking—as inert statements that writers
should march through
their papers from beginning to end. As we show in Chapters 8
and 9, the relationship
between thesis and evidence is far more fluid and dynamic. In
most good writing, the
thesis grows and changes in response to evidence, even in final
drafts.
109
For now, though, we delay further discussion of the thesis to
focus first on
evidence—the stuff that generates thesis statements and
responds to them.
THE FUNCTION OF EVIDENCE
A common assumption about evidence is that it is “the stuff that
proves I’m right.”
Although this way of thinking about evidence is not wrong, it is
much too limited.
Corroboration (proving the validity of a claim) is one of the
functions of evidence,
but not the only one.
It helps to remember that the word prove actually comes from a
Latin verb mean-
ing “to test.” The noun form of prove, proof, has two meanings:
(1) evidence sufficient
to establish a thing as true or believable and (2) the act of
testing for truth or believ-
ability. When you operate on the first definition of proof alone,
you are far more likely
to seek out evidence that supports only your point of view,
ignoring or dismissing
other evidence that could lead to a different and possibly better
idea. You might also
assume that you can’t begin writing until you have arrived at an
idea you’re convinced
is right because only then could you decide which evidence to
include. Both of these
practices close down your thinking instead of leading you to a
more open process of
formulating and testing ideas.
The advantage to following the second definition of the word
proof—in the sense
of testing—is that you are better able to negotiate among
competing points of view.
Doing so predisposes your readers to consider what you have to
say because you are
offering them not the thoughts a person has had, but rather a
person in the act of
thinking. Writing well means sharing your thought process with
your readers, telling
them why you believe the evidence means what you say it does.
THE MISSING CONNECTION: LINKING EVIDENCE AND
CLAIMS
Evidence rarely, if ever, can be left to speak for itself. The
word evident comes from
a Latin verb meaning “to see.” To say that the truth of a
statement is self-evident
means that it does not need to be proved because its truth can be
plainly seen by
all. When a writer leaves evidence to speak for itself, he or she
is assuming that it
can be interpreted in only one way, and that readers necessarily
will think as the
writer does.
But the relationship between evidence and claims is rarely self-
evident: that
relationship virtually always needs to be explained. One of the
five analytical
moves discussed in Chapter 1 was making the implicit explicit.
This move is
critical for working with evidence. The thought connections that
have occurred to
you about what the evidence means will not automatically occur
to others. (See
Figure 7.1.) Persuasive writing always makes the connections
between evidence and
claim overt.
Writers who think that evidence speaks for itself often do very
little with their
evidence except put it next to their claims: “The party was
terrible: there was no
alcohol”—or, alternatively, “The party was great: there was no
alcohol.” Just juxtapos-
ing the evidence with the claim leaves out the thinking that
connects them, thereby
110 Chapter 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works
Distinguishing Evidence from Claims 111
implying that the logic of the connection is obvious. But even
for readers prone to
agreeing with a given claim, simply pointing to the evidence is
not enough.
Of course, before you can attend to the relationship between
evidence and claims,
you first have to make sure to include both of them. Let’s pause
to take a look at
how to remedy the problems posed by leaving one out:
unsubstantiated claims and
pointless evidence.
“BECAUSE I SAY SO”: UNSUBSTANTIATED CLAIMS
Problem: Making claims that lack supporting evidence.
Solution
: Learn to recognize and support unsubstantiated assertions.
Unsubstantiated claims occur when a writer concentrates only
on conclusions, omit-
ting the evidence that led to them. At the opposite extreme,
pointless evidence results
when a writer offers a mass of detail attached to an overly
general claim. Both of these
problems can be solved by offering readers the evidence that led
to the claim and explain-
ing how the evidence led there. The word unsubstantiated means
“without substance.” An
unsubstantiated claim is not necessarily false; it just offers none
of the concrete “stuff”
upon which the claim is based. When a writer makes an
unsubstantiated claim, he or she
has assumed that readers will believe it just because the writer
put it out there.
Perhaps more important, unsubstantiated claims deprive you of
details. If you lack
some actual “stuff” to analyze, you can easily get stuck in a set
of abstractions, which
tend to overstate your position and leave your readers
wondering exactly what you
mean. The further away your language is from the concrete,
from references to physical
detail—things that you can see, hear, count, taste, smell, and
touch—the more abstract
it becomes.
DISTINGUISHING EVIDENCE FROM CLAIMS
To check your drafts for unsubstantiated assertions, you first
have to know how to
recognize them. It is sometimes difficult to separate facts from
judgments, data from
interpretations of the data. Writers who aren’t practiced in this
skill can believe that
they are offering evidence when they are really offering only
unsubstantiated claims.
In your own reading and writing, pause once in a while to label
the sentences of a
paragraph as either evidence (E) or claims (C). What happens if
we try to categorize
the sentences of the following paragraph in this way?
Evidence Claim
Crucial site of connection
FIGURE 7.1
Linking Evidence and Claims
The owners are ruining baseball in America. Although they
claim they are losing money, they
are really just being greedy. A few years ago, they even fired
the commissioner, Fay Vincent, be-
cause he took the players’ side. Baseball is a sport, not a
business, and it is a sad fact that it is
being threatened by greedy businessmen.
The first and last sentences of the paragraph are claims. They
draw conclusions
about as yet unstated evidence that the writer needs to provide.
The middle two sen-
tences are harder to classify. If particular owners have said
publicly that they are losing
money, the existence of the owners’ statements is a fact. But the
writer moves from evi-
dence to unsubstantiated claims when he suggests that the
owners are lying about their
financial situation and are doing so because of their greed.
Similarly, it is a fact that
commissioner Fay Vincent was fired, but it is only an assertion
that he was fired “be-
cause he took the players’ side,” an unsubstantiated claim.
Although many of us might
be inclined to accept some version of this claim as true, we
should not be asked to
accept his opinion as self-evident truth. What is the evidence in
support of the claim?
What are the reasons for believing that the evidence means what
he says it does?
GIVING EVIDENCE A POINT: MAKING DETAILS SPEAK
Problem: Presenting a mass of evidence without explaining how
it relates
to the claims.

More Related Content

PDF
9780230285293 Sample
PDF
Critical_Thinking_Skills.pdf
PPTX
Collaboration Tools and Patterns for Creative Thinking
PDF
creswell book.pdf
PDF
Research Methods In Psychology A Handbook Fourth Edition 4th Edition Wendy A ...
PDF
Big Ideas Putting The Zest Into Creativity And Innovation At Work Jonne Ceserani
DOCX
SuccessfulWriting aThesis orDissertation.docx
PDF
Doing Your Research Project With Documents A Stepbystep Guide To Take You Fro...
9780230285293 Sample
Critical_Thinking_Skills.pdf
Collaboration Tools and Patterns for Creative Thinking
creswell book.pdf
Research Methods In Psychology A Handbook Fourth Edition 4th Edition Wendy A ...
Big Ideas Putting The Zest Into Creativity And Innovation At Work Jonne Ceserani
SuccessfulWriting aThesis orDissertation.docx
Doing Your Research Project With Documents A Stepbystep Guide To Take You Fro...

Similar to Writing AnalyticallyThis page intentionally left b.docx (20)

PPTX
Research paper
PDF
Empirical Research And Writing A Political Science Students Practical Guide I...
PDF
THE DYNAMICS OF PERSUASION Book for Students.pdf
PDF
The Essential Guide to Doing Research 1st Edition Zina O'Leary
PDF
Asking the right questions a guide to critical thinking by m. neil browne, st...
PDF
How to write a thesis using master techniques
PDF
Methods In Psychological Research 3rd Edition Annabel Ness Evans
PPT
205_Academicwriting.ppt
PDF
Doing Qualitative Research 3rd Edition Benjamin F. Crabtree
PDF
Asking The Right Questions A Guide To Critical Thinking 8th Edition M Neil Br...
PPTX
Tesol proposoal writingworkshop
PDF
Weaving together the end game
PDF
Successfully Writing your Assignments
PDF
(ebook) Understanding and Evaluating Research (McGregor 2018).pdf
PDF
How to Read Academic Papers
PPT
مهارات الكتابة
PDF
Research Methods For Business A Skill Building Approach 7th Edition Sekaran T...
PPTX
Presentaciónsessió 8 voc
PDF
Interior Design Research Methods Lily B Robinson
PPT
Presentation by Director of Azande Holdings Group
Research paper
Empirical Research And Writing A Political Science Students Practical Guide I...
THE DYNAMICS OF PERSUASION Book for Students.pdf
The Essential Guide to Doing Research 1st Edition Zina O'Leary
Asking the right questions a guide to critical thinking by m. neil browne, st...
How to write a thesis using master techniques
Methods In Psychological Research 3rd Edition Annabel Ness Evans
205_Academicwriting.ppt
Doing Qualitative Research 3rd Edition Benjamin F. Crabtree
Asking The Right Questions A Guide To Critical Thinking 8th Edition M Neil Br...
Tesol proposoal writingworkshop
Weaving together the end game
Successfully Writing your Assignments
(ebook) Understanding and Evaluating Research (McGregor 2018).pdf
How to Read Academic Papers
مهارات الكتابة
Research Methods For Business A Skill Building Approach 7th Edition Sekaran T...
Presentaciónsessió 8 voc
Interior Design Research Methods Lily B Robinson
Presentation by Director of Azande Holdings Group
Ad

More from billylewis37150 (20)

DOCX
Writing Assignment#3Read Puterbaugh, D. Why Newborns Cause .docx
DOCX
Writing assignment  Write a brief character sketch, in which you.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment RubricNote Scholarly resources are defined a.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment Research Proposal Letter For this assi.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment on Sir Gawain and the Green Knight Respo.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment p.305 IV.B なまえ .docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment Media Analysis You are required to submi.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment Illustration Essay You are required to s.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment Critical Review of World Music Essay.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment Health Care CostsConduct some research and.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment for Description Describe yourself to someone w.docx
DOCX
Writing assignment directly related to the virus and impact on your .docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment Critical Review of World Music Recording C.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment APA FormatPrepare reference entries. Cre.docx
DOCX
Writing assignment based on the 4 groups of early colonizers New Spa.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment 3 InstructionsWrite a 900–1,100-word pape.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment 2- Instruction SheetPrideEnvyAngerGre.docx
DOCX
WRITING ASSIGNMENT 21.The plaintiffs—the Nicols, Hoerrs, Turners.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment (Ethics) Students must submit a paper of six t.docx
DOCX
Writing Assignment #2The purpose of this assignment is to have.docx
Writing Assignment#3Read Puterbaugh, D. Why Newborns Cause .docx
Writing assignment  Write a brief character sketch, in which you.docx
Writing Assignment RubricNote Scholarly resources are defined a.docx
Writing Assignment Research Proposal Letter For this assi.docx
Writing Assignment on Sir Gawain and the Green Knight Respo.docx
Writing Assignment p.305 IV.B なまえ .docx
Writing Assignment Media Analysis You are required to submi.docx
Writing Assignment Illustration Essay You are required to s.docx
Writing Assignment Critical Review of World Music Essay.docx
Writing Assignment Health Care CostsConduct some research and.docx
Writing Assignment for Description Describe yourself to someone w.docx
Writing assignment directly related to the virus and impact on your .docx
Writing Assignment Critical Review of World Music Recording C.docx
Writing Assignment APA FormatPrepare reference entries. Cre.docx
Writing assignment based on the 4 groups of early colonizers New Spa.docx
Writing Assignment 3 InstructionsWrite a 900–1,100-word pape.docx
Writing Assignment 2- Instruction SheetPrideEnvyAngerGre.docx
WRITING ASSIGNMENT 21.The plaintiffs—the Nicols, Hoerrs, Turners.docx
Writing Assignment (Ethics) Students must submit a paper of six t.docx
Writing Assignment #2The purpose of this assignment is to have.docx
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
PDF
Basic Mud Logging Guide for educational purpose
PPTX
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
PDF
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
PDF
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
PDF
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
PDF
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
PDF
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
PPTX
master seminar digital applications in india
PDF
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
PDF
Pre independence Education in Inndia.pdf
PPTX
Renaissance Architecture: A Journey from Faith to Humanism
PPTX
PPT- ENG7_QUARTER1_LESSON1_WEEK1. IMAGERY -DESCRIPTIONS pptx.pptx
PDF
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
PPTX
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
PPTX
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
PDF
TR - Agricultural Crops Production NC III.pdf
PPTX
Cell Structure & Organelles in detailed.
PDF
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
PDF
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
Basic Mud Logging Guide for educational purpose
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
O7-L3 Supply Chain Operations - ICLT Program
master seminar digital applications in india
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
Pre independence Education in Inndia.pdf
Renaissance Architecture: A Journey from Faith to Humanism
PPT- ENG7_QUARTER1_LESSON1_WEEK1. IMAGERY -DESCRIPTIONS pptx.pptx
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
TR - Agricultural Crops Production NC III.pdf
Cell Structure & Organelles in detailed.
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf

Writing AnalyticallyThis page intentionally left b.docx

  • 1. Writing Analytically This page intentionally left blank iii Writing Analytically FIFTH EDITION David Rosenwasser Muhlenberg College Jill Stephen Muhlenberg College Australia • Brazil • Mexico • Singapore Spain • United Kingdom • United States Publisher: Lyn Uhl Development Editor: Mary Beth Walden
  • 2. Assistant Editor: Lindsey Veautour Technology Project Manager: Stephanie Gregoire Marketing Manager: Mandee Eckersley Marketing Assistant: Kathleen Remsberg Marketing Communications Manager: Stacey Purviance Senior Content Project Manager: Michael Lepera Senior Art Director: Cate Barr Print Buyer: Mary Beth Hennebury Text Permissions Editor: Mardell Glinski Schultz Photo Permissions Editor: Sheri Blaney Production Service: Graphic World Publishing Services Text Designer: John Ritland Compositor: Graphic World Inc. Cover Designer: Maxine Ressler Cover Image: © Thinkstock/RF/Ron Chapple/ Jupiter Images Writing Analytically, Fifth Edition David Rosenwasser Jill Stephen © 2009, 2006 Thomson Wadsworth, a part of The Thomson Corporation. Thomson, the Star logo, and Wadsworth are trademarks used herein under license. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the copyright hereon may be reproduced or used in any form or by any
  • 3. means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, Web distribution, information storage and retrieval systems, or in any other manner—without the written permission of the publisher. Printed in Canada 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 10 09 08 07 Library of Congress Control Number: 2007939138 ISBN-13: 978-1-413-03310-6 ISBN-10: 1-413-03310-5 Thomson Higher Education 25 Thomson Place Boston, MA 02210 USA For more information about our products, contact us at: Thomson Learning Academic Resource Center 1-800-423-0563 For permission to use material from this text or product, submit a request online at http://www.thomsonrights.com. Any additional questions about permissions can be submitted by e-mail to [email protected] v
  • 4. UNIT I THE ANALYTICAL FRAME OF MIND: INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL METHODS 1 CHAPTER 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does 3 CHAPTER 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind 17 CHAPTER 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods 31 CHAPTER 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t, and How to Do It 49 CHAPTER 5 Analyzing Arguments 73 CHAPTER 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis 93 UNIT II WRITING THE ANALYTICAL ESSAY 107 CHAPTER 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works 109 CHAPTER 8 Using Evidence to Build a Paper: 10 on 1 versus 1 on 10 123 CHAPTER 9 Making a Thesis Evolve 139 CHAPTER 10 Structuring the Paper: Forms and Formats 159 CHAPTER 11 Introductions and Conclusions 179 CHAPTER 12 Recognizing and Fixing Weak Thesis Statements 193 BRIEF CONTENTS
  • 5. UNIT III WRITING THE RESEARCHED PAPER 203 CHAPTER 13 Reading Analytically 205 CHAPTER 14 Using Sources Analytically: The Conversation Model 215 CHAPTER 15 Organizing and Revising the Research Paper: Two Sample Essays 227 CHAPTER 16 Finding, Citing, and Integrating Sources 241 UNIT IV GRAMMAR AND STYLE 269 CHAPTER 17 Style: Choosing Words for Precision, Accuracy, and Tone 271 CHAPTER 18 Style: Shaping Sentences for Precision and Emphasis 287 CHAPTER 19 Common Grammatical Errors and How to Fix Them 305 vi Brief Contents vii Preface xvii UNIT I THE ANALYTICAL FRAME OF MIND: INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL METHODS 1
  • 6. CHAPTER 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does 3 First Principles 3 Analysis Defined 3 The Five Analytical Moves 4 Move 1: Suspend Judgment 5 Move 2: Define Significant Parts and How They’re Related 5 Move 3: Make the Implicit Explicit 6 Move 4: Look for Patterns 8 Move 5: Keep Reformulating Questions and Explanations 9 Analysis at Work: A Sample Paper 10 Distinguishing Analysis from Argument, Summary, and Expressive Writing 11 Applying the Five Analytical Moves: The Example of Whistler’s Mother 13 Analysis and Personal Associations 15 CHAPTER 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind 17 Fear of Uncertainty 17 Prejudging 18
  • 7. Blinded by Habit 19 The Judgment Reflex 20 Generalizing 21 Overpersonalizing (Naturalizing Our Assumptions) 23 Opinions (versus Ideas) 25 What It Means to Have an Idea 26 Rules of Thumb for Handling Complexity 28 CONTENTS CHAPTER 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods 31 The Toolkit 32 Paraphrase ! 3 33 Notice and Focus (Ranking) 35 Prompts: Interesting and Strange 35 10 on 1 36 The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast 37 Thinking Recursively with Strands and Binaries 39 Generating Ideas with The Method: An Example 40
  • 8. Doing The Method on a Poem: Our Analysis 40 A Procedure for Finding and Querying Binaries 43 Freewriting 44 Passage-Based Focused Freewriting 45 Writers’ Notebooks 46 Passage-Based Focused Freewriting: An Example 47 CHAPTER 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t, and How to Do It 49 Pushing Observations to Conclusions: Asking So What? 50 Asking So What?: An Example 51 Implications versus Hidden Meanings 54 The Limits on Interpretation 56 Plausible versus Implausible Interpretations 57 Interpretive Contexts and Multiple Meanings 58 Specifying an Interpretive Context: An Example 58 Intention as an Interpretive Context 59 What Is and Isn’t “Meant” to Be Analyzed 60 The Fortune Cookie School of Interpretation 61
  • 9. The Anything Goes School of Interpretation 62 Seems to Be about X but Could Also Be (Is Really) about Y 63 Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover 65 Description of a New Yorker Cover, Dated October 9, 2000 65 Using The Method to Identify Patterns of Repetition and Contrast 67 viii Contents Pushing Observations to Conclusions: Selecting an Interpretive Context 68 Making the Interpretation Plausible 69 Arriving at an Interpretive Conclusion: Making Choices 70 CHAPTER 5 Analyzing Arguments 73 The Role of Binaries in Argument 73 A Procedure for Reformulating Binaries in Argument 74 Strategy 1: Locate a Range of Opposing Categories 74 Strategy 2: Analyze and Define the Key Terms 74 Strategy 3: Question the Accuracy of the Binary 75 Strategy 4: Substitute “To What Extent?” for “Either/Or” 75
  • 10. Uncovering Assumptions (Reasoning Back to Premises) 76 Uncovering Assumptions: A Brief Example 78 A Procedure for Uncovering Assumptions 78 Analyzing an Argument: The Example of “Playing by the Antioch Rules” 79 Strategies for Developing an Argument by Reasoning Back to Premises 82 The Problems with Debate-Style Argument 84 Seeing the Trees as Well as the Forest: Toulmin and the Rules of Argument 85 Refining Categorical Thinking: Two Examples 88 A Brief Glossary of Common Logical Errors 90 CHAPTER 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis 93 Rhetorical Analysis 93 Rhetorical Analysis of a Place: A Brief Example 94 Rhetorical Analysis of an Advertisement: A Student Paper 94 Summary 96 Strategies for Making Summaries More Analytical 96 Personal Response: The Reaction Paper 98
  • 11. Strategies for Making Personal Responses More Analytical 98 Agree/Disagree 100 Comparison/Contrast 100 Strategies for Making Comparison/Contrast More Analytical 100 Contents ix Definition 102 Strategies for Making Definition More Analytical 102 UNIT II WRITING THE ANALYTICAL ESSAY 107 CHAPTER 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works 109 The Function of Evidence 110 The Missing Connection: Linking Evidence and Claims 110 “Because I Say So”: Unsubstantiated Claims 111 Distinguishing Evidence from Claims 111 Giving Evidence a Point: Making Details Speak 112 How to Make Details Speak: A Brief Example 113 What Counts as Evidence? 114 Kinds of Evidence 116
  • 12. Statistical Evidence 116 Anecdotal Evidence 117 Authorities as Evidence 117 Empirical Evidence 118 Experimental Evidence 118 Textual Evidence 118 Using What You Have 119 CHAPTER 8 Using Evidence to Build a Paper: 10 on 1 versus 1 on 10 123 Developing a Thesis Is More Than Repeating an Idea (1 on 10) 123 What’s Wrong with Five-Paragraph Form? 124 Analyzing Evidence in Depth: 10 on 1 127 Demonstrating the Representativeness of Your Example 128 10 on 1 and Disciplinary Conventions 128 Pan, Track, and Zoom: Using 10 on 1 to Build a Paper 128 Doing 10 on 1: A Brief Example (Tiananmen Square) 129 Converting 1 on 10 into 10 on 1: A Student Paper (Flood Stories) 131
  • 13. Revising the Draft Using 10 on 1 and Difference within Similarity 133 Doing 10 on 1: A Student Paper (Good Bye Lenin!) 136 x Contents Contents xi A Template for Organizing Papers Using 10 on 1: An Alternative to Five- Paragraph Form 138 CHAPTER 9 Making a Thesis Evolve 139 What a Strong Thesis Does 139 Making a Thesis Evolve: A Brief Example (Tax Laws) 140 The Reciprocal Relationship between Thesis and Evidence: The Thesis as Lens 142 What a Good Thesis Statement Looks Like 143 Six Steps for Making a Thesis Evolve 144 Evolving a Thesis in an Exploratory Draft: A Student Draft on Las Meninas 145 Evolving a Thesis in a Later-Stage Draft: The Example of Educating Rita 153 Locating the Evolving Thesis in the Final Draft 156
  • 14. CHAPTER 10 Structuring the Paper: Forms and Formats 159 Romantics versus Formalists 159 The Two Functions of Formats: Product and Process 160 Using Formats Heuristically: A Brief Example 161 Classical Forms and Formats 162 Writing Analytically’s Forms and Formats 162 Pan, Track, and Zoom: Using 10 on 1 to Build a Paper 163 Constellating 163 A Template for Organizing Papers Using 10 on 1 163 Six Steps for Making a Thesis Evolve 164 The Toolkit as Template 164 The Shaping Force of Thesis Statements 165 The Shaping Force of Transitions 166 The Shaping Force of Common Thought Patterns: Deduction and Induction 167 Thesis Slots 169 Negotiating Disciplinary Formats 169 Three Common Organizing Strategies 171
  • 15. Climactic Order 171 xii Contents Comparison/Contrast 172 Concessions and Refutations 173 Structuring the Paragraph 173 The Topic Sentence Controversy 174 Some Theories on Paragraph Structure 174 Finding the Skeleton of an Essay: An Example (September 11th: A National Tragedy?) 175 CHAPTER 11 Introductions and Conclusions 179 Introductions and Conclusions as Social Sites 179 What Introductions Do: “Why What I’m Saying Matters” 180 Putting an Issue or Question in Context 181 How Much to Introduce Up-Front: Typical Problems 182 Digression 182 Incoherence 183 Prejudgment 183 Using Procedural Openings 184
  • 16. Good Ways to Begin 185 What Conclusions Do: The Final So What? 186 Solving Typical Problems in Conclusions 188 Redundancy 188 Raising a Totally New Point 188 Overstatement 189 Anticlimax 189 Introductions in the Sciences 189 Conclusions in the Sciences: The Discussion Section 191 CHAPTER 12 Recognizing and Fixing Weak Thesis Statements 193 Five Kinds of Weak Thesis Statements and How to Fix Them 193 Weak Thesis Type 1: The Thesis Makes No Claim 194 Weak Thesis Type 2: The Thesis Is Obviously True or Is a Statement of Fact 195 Weak Thesis Type 3: The Thesis Restates Conventional Wisdom 195 Weak Thesis Type 4: The Thesis Bases Its Claim on Personal Conviction 196
  • 17. Weak Thesis Type 5: The Thesis Makes an Overly Broad Claim 198 Contents xiii How to Rephrase Thesis Statements: Specify and Subordinate 199 Is It Okay to Phrase a Thesis as a Question? 201 UNIT III WRITING THE RESEARCHED PAPER 203 CHAPTER 13 Reading Analytically 205 How to Read: Words Matter 206 Becoming Conversant Instead of Reading for the Gist 207 Three Tools to Improve Your Reading: A Review 207 The Pitch, the Complaint, and the Moment 208 Uncovering the Assumptions in a Reading 209 Reading with and against the Grain 210 Using a Reading as a Model 212 Applying a Reading as a Lens 213 CHAPTER 14 Using Sources Analytically: The Conversation Model 215 Six Strategies for Analyzing Sources 215
  • 18. “Source Anxiety” and What to Do about It 216 The Conversation Analogy 216 Ways to Use a Source as a Point of Departure 217 Six Strategies for Analyzing Sources 219 Make Your Sources Speak 219 Attend Carefully to the Language of Your Sources by Quoting or Paraphrasing 220 Supply Ongoing Analysis of Sources (Don’t Wait Until the End) 221 Use Your Sources to Ask Questions, Not Just to Provide Answers 221 Put Your Sources into Conversation with One Another 223 Find Your Own Role in the Conversation 225 CHAPTER 15 Organizing and Revising the Research Paper: Two Sample Essays 227 A Sample Research Paper and How to Revise It: The Flight from Teaching 227 Strategies for Writing and Revising Research Papers 230 Be Sure to Make Clear Who Is Talking 230
  • 19. xiv Contents Analyze as You Go Along Rather Than Saving Analysis for the End (Disciplinary Conventions Permitting) 230 Quote in Order to Analyze: Make Your Sources Speak 231 Try Converting Key Assertions in the Source into Questions 231 Get Your Sources to Converse with One Another, and Actively Referee the Conflicts among Them 232 A Good Sample Research Paper: Horizontal and Vertical Mergers within the Healthcare Industry 233 Guidelines for Writing the Researched Paper 238 CHAPTER 16 Finding, Citing, and Integrating Sources 241 Getting Started 242 Three Rules of Thumb for Getting Started 244 Electronic Research: Finding Quality on the Web 244 Understanding Domain Names 245 Print Corollaries 246 Web Classics 246 Wikipedia, Google, and Blogs 246
  • 20. Asking the Right Questions 247 Subscriber-Only Databases 248 Indexes of Scholarly Journals 249 Who’s Behind That Website? 250 A Foolproof Recipe for Great Research—Every Time 252 Citation Guides on the Web 254 A Librarian’s Brief Guidelines to Successful Research 254 Plagiarism and the Logic of Citation 254 Why Does Plagiarism Matter? 255 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) about Plagiarism 256 How to Cite Sources 257 Single Author, MLA Style 258 Single Author, APA Style 259 How to Integrate Quotations into Your Paper 260 How to Prepare an Abstract 262 Guidelines for Finding, Citing, and Integrating Sources 264 Contents xv
  • 21. UNIT IV GRAMMAR AND STYLE 269 CHAPTER 17 Style: Choosing Words for Precision, Accuracy, and Tone 271 Not Just Icing on the Cake: Style Is Meaning 272 How Style Shapes Thought: A Brief Example 273 Making Distinctions: Shades of Meaning 273 Word Histories and the OED 274 What’s Bad about “Good” and “Bad” 275 Concrete and Abstract Diction 276 Latinate Diction 277 Choosing Words: Some Rhetorical Considerations 278 Tone 278 Formal and Colloquial Styles: Who’s Writing to Whom, and Why Does It Matter? 279 The Person Question 281 The First Person Pronoun “I”: Pro and Con 281 The Second Person Pronoun “You”: Pro and Con 282 Using and Avoiding Jargon 283 CHAPTER 18 Style: Shaping Sentences for Precision
  • 22. and Emphasis 287 How to Recognize the Four Basic Sentence Types 287 The Simple Sentence 288 The Compound Sentence 288 The Complex Sentence 289 The Compound-Complex Sentence 289 So Why Do the Four Sentence Types Matter? 290 Coordination, Subordination, and Emphasis 290 Coordination 290 Reversing the Order of Coordinate Clauses for Emphasis 291 So Why Does the Order of Coordinate Clauses Matter? 291 Subordination 292 Reversing Main and Subordinate Clauses 292 So Why Does It Matter What Goes in the Subordinate Clause? 293 Parallel Structure 293 So Why Does Parallel Structure Matter? 295 xvi Contents
  • 23. Periodic and Cumulative Sentences: Two Effective Sentence Shapes 295 The Periodic Sentence: Delaying Closure for Emphasis 295 The Cumulative Sentence: Starting Fast 297 So Why Do Periodic and Cumulative Sentences Matter? 298 Cutting the Fat 298 Expletive Constructions 299 Static versus Active Verbs: “To Be” or “Not to Be” 299 Active and Passive Voices: Doing and Being Done To 301 About Prescriptive Style Manuals 302 Experiment! 303 CHAPTER 19 Common Grammatical Errors and How to Fix Them 305 Why Correctness Matters 306 The Concept of Basic Writing Errors (BWEs) 306 What Punctuation Marks Say: A Quick-Hit Guide 307 Nine Basic Writing Errors and How to Fix Them 309 BWE 1: Sentence Fragments 309 A Further Note on Dashes and Colons 311
  • 24. BWE 2: Comma Splices and Fused (or Run-On) Sentences 311 BWE 3: Errors in Subject–Verb Agreement 314 A Note on Nonstandard English 315 BWE 4: Shifts in Sentence Structure (Faulty Predication) 316 BWE 5: Errors in Pronoun Reference 316 Ambiguous Reference 317 A Note on Sexism and Pronoun Usage 319 BWE 6: Misplaced Modifiers and Dangling Participles 319 BWE 7: Errors in Using Possessive Apostrophes 320 BWE 8: Comma Errors 321 BWE 9: Spelling/Diction Errors That Interfere with Meaning 323 Glossary of Grammatical Terms 325 CHAPTER 19 APPENDIX Answer Key (with Discussion) 330 CREDITS 339 INDEX 341 xvii
  • 25. Writing Analytically focuses on ways of using writing to discover and develop ideas. That is, the book treats writing as a tool of thought—a means of undertaking sus- tained acts of inquiry and reflection. For some people, learning to write is associated less with thinking than with ar- ranging words, sentences, and ideas in clear and appropriate form. The achievement of good writing does, of course, require attention to form, but writing is also a mental activity. Through writing we figure out what things mean (which is our definition of analysis). The act of writing allows us to discover and, importantly, to interrogate what we think and believe. All the editions of Writing Analytically have evolved from what we learned while establishing and directing a cross-curricular writing program at a four-year liberal arts college (a program we began in 1989 and continue to direct). The clearest con- sensus we’ve found among faculty is on the kind of writing that they say they want from their students: not issue-based argument, not personal reflection (the “reaction” paper), not passive summary, but analysis, with its patient and methodical inquiry into the meaning of information. Yet most books of writing instruction devote only a chapter, if that, to analysis. The main discovery we made when we first wrote this book was that none of the
  • 26. reading we’d done about thesis statements seemed to match either our own practice as writers and teachers or the practice of published writers. Textbooks about writing tend to present thesis statements as the finished products of an act of thinking—as inert statements that writers should march through their papers from beginning to end. In practice, the relationship between thesis and evidence is far more fluid and dynamic. In most good writing, the thesis grows and changes in response to evidence, even in final drafts. In other words, the relationship between thesis and evidence is recip- rocal: the thesis acts as a lens for focusing what we see in the evidence, but the evi- dence, in turn, creates pressure to refocus the lens. The root issue here is the writer’s attitude toward evidence. The ability of writers to discover ideas and improve on them in revision depends largely on their ability to use evidence as a means of testing and developing ideas rather than just supporting them. By the time we came to writing the third edition, we had begun to focus on ob- servation skills. We recognized that students’ lack of these skills is as much a prob- lem as thought-strangling formats like five-paragraph form or a too-rigid notion of thesis. We began to understand that observation doesn’t come naturally; it needs to be taught. The book advocates locating observation as a separate phase of thinking
  • 27. before the writer becomes committed to a thesis. Much weak writing is prematurely and too narrowly thesis driven precisely because people try to formulate the thesis before they have done much (or any) analyzing. PREFACE The solution to this problem sounds easy to accomplish, but it isn’t. As writers and thinkers, we all need to slow down—to dwell longer in the open- ended, exploratory, information-gathering stage. This requires specific tasks that will reduce the anxiety for answers, impede the reflex move to judgments, and encourage a more hands-on engagement with materials. Writing Analytically supplies these tasks for each phase of the writing and idea- generating process: making observations, inferring implications, and making the leap to possible conclusions. WHAT’S NEW IN THIS EDITION This edition of Writing Analytically marks the fourth time we’ve had the chance to revisit the book’s initial thinking on writing. The difficult but also exciting thing about repeatedly revising the same book is that the writer must keep learning how to see the logic of the book as a whole, even as new thinking rises from earlier thinking and
  • 28. threatens to displace it. We believe that we have now succeeded at what we couldn’t quite manage to do in the fourth edition—to integrate the early versions of the book, oriented largely toward thesis and evidence, with the later editions of the book, oriented toward observation and interpretation. Here in brief (and in boldface) are the suggestions and criticisms to which this extensively rewritten and reorganized version of the book responds: • Put back the definition-of-analysis chapter containing the five analytical moves, which disappeared in the third edition. This edition starts with a revised version of the older chapter, now called Analysis: What It Is and What It Does. • Make things easier to find! Make core ideas stand out more clearly. And so . . . : 1. We have organized the book into four units to make the book’s arguments and advice clearer and more clearly incremental. These units are: I. The Analytical Frame of Mind: Introduction to Analytical Methods II. Writing the Analytical Essay III. Writing the Researched Paper
  • 29. IV. Grammar and Style 2. We have created separate chapters on matters that were not adequately pulled together and foregrounded in previous editions. • The book’s observational strategies, such as 10 on 1 and The Method, now appear prominently in a single chapter called A Toolkit of Analytical Methods (Chapter 3). • A revised chapter called Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t, and How to Do It (Chapter 4) reunites materials on interpretation that were split up in the fourth edition. • The book’s advice on analyzing and producing arguments now appears in a single chapter called Analyzing Arguments (Chapter 5). xviii Preface • A new chapter called Topics and Modes of Analysis (Chapter 6) adds explicit discussion of rhetorical analysis, acknowledging it as an ongoing topic of the book, and restores attention to ways of making the traditional rhetorical modes, such as comparison and contrast, more analytical. • The book’s advice on organizing papers is now pulled
  • 30. together in a largely new chapter on organization called Structuring the Paper: Forms and Formats (Chapter 10), which also includes a new section on para- graphing. Readers will now know where to look for alternatives to five- paragraph form. The chapter invites readers to think of organization in terms of movement of mind at both the paper and paragraph levels. • Get rid of the overstuffed first chapter and restore the unexpurgated version of counterproductive habits of mind as a separate chapter. Done. We recognize that in the fourth edition we attempted to do what all writers, not just our stu- dents, too often do—pack everything into the opening. The parts of this opening chapter have now been broken up and redistributed more logically. We have also reorganized and rewritten our chapter on counterproductive habits of mind, which now appears as Chapter 2. We continue to believe, as the chapter argues, that it is hard to develop new thinking skills without first becoming aware of what’s wrong with our customary modes of response. • Put the book’s advice on reading with the chapters on researched writing. A pared-down chapter called Reading Analytically (Chapter 13) now opens the book’s unit on research-based writing. In this chapter, we make it clear that all of
  • 31. the book’s strategies can be applied to reading, but we now foreground some that are particular to writing about reading—such as using a reading as a lens—in this revised reading chapter. • Make the book shorter and less repetitive. We have tried to prune every sentence—in fact, every clause, phrase, and word—wherein we had succumbed to the temptation to say something twice when once would do. We think we have made the book more readable in both clarity and tone and lighter to carry. We continue to believe that the book’s schematic way of describing the analytical thought process will make students more confident thinkers, better able to contend with complexity and to move beyond the simplistic agree/disagree response and pas- sive assembling of downloaded information. We have faith in the book’s various for- mulae and verbal prompts for their ability to spur more thoughtful writing and also for the role they can play in making the classroom a more genuinely engaging and collaborative space. When students and teachers can share the means of idea produc- tion, class discussion and writing become better connected, and students can more easily learn that good ideas don’t just happen—they’re made. HOW TO USE THIS BOOK Writing Analytically is designed to be used in first-year writing
  • 32. courses or seminars, as well as in more advanced writing-intensive courses in a variety of subject areas. Preface xix Though the book’s chapters form a logical sequence, each can also stand alone and be used in different sequences. We assume that most professors will want to supply their own subject matter for students to write about. The book does, however, contain writing exercises through- out that can be applied to a wide range of materials—print and visual, text-based (reading), and experiential (writing from direct observation). In the text itself we suggest using newspapers, magazines, films, primary texts (both fiction and nonfic- tion), academic articles, textbooks, television, historical documents, places, advertis- ing, photographs, political campaigns, and so on. There is, by the way, an edition of this book that contains readings—Writing Analytically with Readings. It includes writing assignments that call on students to apply the skills in the original book to writing about the readings and to using the readings as lenses for analyzing other material. The book’s writing exercises take two forms: end-of-chapter assignments that
  • 33. could produce papers and informal writing exercises called “Try This” that are em- bedded inside the chapters near the particular skills they employ. Many of the Try This exercises could generate papers, but usually they are more limited in scope, asking readers to experiment with various kinds of data- gathering and analysis. The book acknowledges that various academic disciplines differ in their expecta- tions of student writing. Interspersed throughout the text are boxes labeled Voices from across the Curriculum. These were written for the book by professors in various disciplines who offer their disciplinary perspective on such matters as reasoning back to premises and determining what counts as evidence. Overall, however, the text concentrates on the many values and expectations that the disciplines share about writing. THEORETICAL ORIENTATIONS We have had the good fortune to interest others enough in our work to stimulate attack, much of it, we think, the result of misunderstanding. In an effort to clarify our own premises and origins, we offer the following disclosure of our influences and orientations. The book is aligned with the thinking of Carl Rogers and others on the goal of making argument less combative, less inflected by a vocabulary
  • 34. of military strategiz- ing that discourages negotiation among competing points of view and the evolution of new ideas from the pressure of one idea against another. The book is also heavily influenced by the early proponents of the process move- ment in writing pedagogy. Books such as Peter Elbow’s Writing Without Teachers and Ken Macrorie’s Telling Writing were standard fare in graduate programs when we began to teach. We came of age, so to speak, accepting that writing instruction should focus on writers’ process and not just on ways of shaping finished products. As is now generally recognized, the inherent romanticism and expressivist bias of the process approach to writing limited its usefulness for people who were interested in teaching students how to write for academic audiences. Despite the social scientific approach that researchers such as Janet Emig, James Britton, and Linda Flower (to name a few) brought to the xx Preface understanding of students’ writing process, the process approach to writing instruction suffered a decline in status as trends in college writing programs took up other causes. (See, for example, the arguments of Patricia Bizzell, David Bartholomae, Charles Bazerman, and others, who reoriented compositionists toward discourse analysis and
  • 35. ethnographic research on the writing practices of other disciplines.) We continue to believe that attention to process and attention to the stylistic and epistemological norms of writing in the disciplines can and should be brought into accord. We think, further, that a relatively straightforward and teachable set of strate- gies can go a long way toward achieving this goal. The process approach is not neces- sarily expressivist, at least not exclusively so. Analytical strategies with the power to enrich students’ writing process can be taught, and they shed light on the otherwise mysterious-seeming nature of individuals’ creativity as thinkers. The book has drawn some interesting critiques, based on people’s assumptions about our connection to particular theoretical orientations. One such critique comes from people who think the book invites students to think in a “New Critical” vacuum— that it is uncritically aligned with an unreformed, unself- conscious and old-fashioned New Critical mind-set. The midcentury interpretive movement known as the New Criticism has come to be misunderstood as rigidly materialist, deriving meaning only from the physical details that one can see on the page, on the screen, on the sidewalk, and so on. This is not the place to take up a comprehensive assessment of the ideas and impact of the New Criticism, but, as the best of the New Critics clearly knew, things al- ways mean (as our book explicitly argues) in context.
  • 36. Interpretive contexts, which we dis- cuss extensively in Chapter 4 and elsewhere, are determined by the thing being observed; but, in turn, they also determine what the observer sees. Ideas are always the products of assumptions about how best to situate observations in a frame of reference. Only when these interpretive frames, these ways of seeing and their ideological underpinnings, are made clear do the details begin to meaningfully and plausibly “speak.” We are aware that the language of binary oppositions, patterns of repetition, and organizing contrasts suggests not just the methods of the New Critics but those of their immediate successors, structuralists. Without embarking here on an extended foray into the evolution of theory in the latter half of the twentieth century, we will just say that the value assumptions of both the New Criticism (with its faith in irony, tension, and ambiguity) and structuralism (with its search for universal structures of mind and culture) do not automatically accompany their methods. Any approach to thinking and writing that values complexity will subscribe to some extent to the necessity of recognizing tension and irony and paradox and ambiguity. As for finding universal structures of mind and culture, we haven’t so grand a goal, but we do think that there is value in trying to state simply and clearly in nontechnical language some of the characteristic moves of mind that make some people better thinkers than others
  • 37. and better able to arrive at ideas. Here are some other ways in which Writing Analytically might lend itself to mis- understandings. Its employment of verbal prompts like So what? and its recom- mendation of step-by-step procedures, such as the procedure for making a thesis evolve, should not be confused with prescriptive slot-filler formulae for writing. Our book does not prescribe a fill-in-the-blank grid for analyzing data, but it does try to Preface xxi describe systematically what good thinkers do—as acts of mind—when they are confronted with data. Our focus on words has also attracted critique. The theoretical orientation that has come to be called performance theory has emphasized the idea that words alone don’t adequately account for the meanings we make of them. Words exist—their in- terpretations exist—in how and why they are spoken in particular circumstances, genres, and traditions. Our view is that this essential emphasis on the significance of context does not diminish the importance of attending to words. The situation is rather like the one we addressed earlier in reference to the New Criticism. Words mean in particular contexts. It is reductive to assume that attention to
  • 38. language means that only words matter or that words matter in some context-less vacuum. The methods we define in Writing Analytically can be applied to nonverbal and verbal data. Interestingly, we were aware of, but had not actually studied, the work of John Dewey as we evolved our thinking for this book. Looking more closely at his writing now, we are struck by the number of key terms and assumptions our thinking shares with his. In his book How We Think, Dewey speaks, for example, of “systematic reflection” as a goal. He was interested, as are we, in what goes on in the production of actual thinking, rather than “setting forth the results of thinking” after the fact, in the manner of formal logic. On this subject Dewey writes, “When you are only seeking the truth and of neces- sity seeking somewhat blindly, you are in a radically different position from the one you are in when you are already in possession of the truth” (revised edition 1933, 74–75). Dewey thought, as do we, that habits of mind can be trained, but first people have to be made more conscious of them. This is what Writing Analytically tries to accom- plish. It begins with some of the same premises that Dewey and others have offered: • The importance of being able to dwell in and tolerate uncertainty • The importance of curiosity and knowing how to cultivate it • The importance of being conscious of language
  • 39. • The importance of observation Dewey also said that people cannot make themselves have ideas. This we believe is not true. People can make themselves have ideas, and it is possible to describe the processes through which individuals enable themselves to make interpretive leaps. It is also possible (and necessary) for people to learn how to differentiate ideas from other things that are often mistaken for ideas, such as clichés and opinions—products of the deadening effect of habit (about which we have much to say in the book’s opening unit). Although the interpretive leaps from observation to idea can probably never be fully explained, we are not thus required to relegate the meaning-making process to the category of imponderable mystery. ABOUT THE AUTHORS David Rosenwasser and Jill Stephen are Professors of English at Muhlenberg College in Allentown, Pennsylvania, where they have co- directed a Writing Across the Curriculum (WAC) program since 1987. They began teaching writing to college xxii Preface students in the 1970s—David at the University of Virginia and then at the College of William and Mary, and Jill at New York University and then at
  • 40. Hunter College (CUNY). Writing Analytically has grown out of their undergraduate teaching and the seminars on writing and writing instruction that they have offered to faculty at Muhlenberg and at other colleges and universities across the country. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Our greatest debt in this edition of the book is to Kenny Marotta, who helped us rethink the book. Like all great teachers, he let us see more clearly the shape and im- plications of our own thinking. Those of you unaware of his gifts as a fiction writer are missing a rare pleasure. Major thanks also go to developmental editor extraordinaire Mary Beth Walden for her tireless efforts on our behalf—her understanding of how we work; her ability to help us hide from distractions; her sound advice, patience, and good cheer. We are also very grateful to departing acquisitions editor Aron Keesbury for his frank talk and occasional flights of poetry. We have over the years been fortunate to work with a range of talented and dedi- cated editors: Dickson Musslewhite, who saw us through the third and fourth edi- tions; Julie McBurney and John Meyers, who nurtured the book in its early days; and Michell Phifer and Karen R. Smith, who looked over our shoulders with acuity and wit. And we remain grateful to Karl Yambert, our original developmental editor, whose insight and patience first brought this book into being.
  • 41. Christine Farris at Indiana University has been a great friend of the book since its early days; we heard her voice often in our heads as we revised this edition. She and her colleagues John Schilb and Ted Leahey gave us what every writer needs— a discerning audience. Similar thanks are due to Wendy Hesford and Eddie Singleton of Ohio State University, as well as their graduate students, whom we have had the pleasure of working with over the past few years. The book has enabled us to make many new friends just starting their college teaching careers in rhetoric and composition—Matthew Johnson and Matt Hollrah, to name two. Our friend Dean Ward at Calvin College has been a source of inspiration and good conversation on writing for many years. So have two old friends, Richard Louth and Lin Spence, who offer the benefit of their long experience with the National Writing Project. And we always learn something about writing whenever we run into Mary Ann Cain and George Kalamaras, inspiring teachers and writers both. We have also benefited from stimulating conversations about writing with Chidsey Dickson. Among our colleagues at Muhlenberg College, we are especially grateful to reference librarian Kelly Cannon for his section on library and Internet research in Chapter 16. For writing the Voices from across the Curriculum boxes that appear throughout the book, thanks to Karen Dearborn, Laura Edelman,
  • 42. Jack Gambino, James Marshall, Rich Niesenbaum, Fred Norling, Mark Sciutto, Alan Tjeltveit, and Bruce Wightman. For their good counsel and their teaching materials, thanks to Anna Adams, Jim Bloom, Chris Borick, Ted Conner, Joseph Elliot, Barri Gold, Mary Lawlor, Jim Peck, Jeremy Teissere, and Alec Marsh, with whom we argue endlessly about writing. Carol Proctor in the English Department looks out for us. We also thank Muhlenberg Preface xxiii College, especially its provost, Marjorie Hass, for continuing to support our participa- tion at national conferences. We are indebted to our students at Muhlenberg College, who have shared their writing and their thinking about writing with us. Chief among these (of late) are Sarah Kersh, Robbie Saenz di Viteri, Laura Sutherland, Andrew Brown, Meghan Sweeney, Jen Epting, Jessica Skrocki, and Jake McNamara. Thanks also go to the following students who have allowed us to use their writing in our book (most recently): Jen Axe, Wendy Eichler, Theresa Leinker, and Kim Schmidt. Finally, thanks to our spouses (Deborah and Mark) and our children (Lizzie, Lesley, and Sarah) for their love and support during the many
  • 43. hours that we sit immobile at our computers. We would also like to thank the many colleagues who reviewed the book; we are grate- ful for their insight: Diann Ainsworth, Weatherford College Jeanette Adkins, Tarrant County College Joan Anderson, California State University–San Marcos Candace Barrington, Central Connecticut State University Maria Bates, Pierce College Karin Becker, Fort Lewis College Laura Behling, Gustavus Adolphus College Stephanie Bennett, Monmouth University Tom Bowie, Regis University Roland Eric Boys, Oxnard College David Brantley, College of Southern Maryland Jessica Brown, City College of San Francisco Christine Bryant Cohen, University of Illinois–Urbana- Champaign Alexandria Casey, Graceland University Anthony Cavaluzzi, Adirondack Community College Johnson Cheu, Michigan State University Jeff Cofer, Bellevue Community College Helen Connell, Barry University Cara Crandall, Emerson College Rose Day, Central New Mexico Community College Susan de Ghize, University of Denver Virginia Dumont-Poston, Lander University David Eggebrecht, Concordia University Karen Feldman, University of California Dan Ferguson, Amarillo College Gina Franco, Knox College Sue Frankson, College of DuPage Anne Friedman, Borough of Manhattan Community College Tessa Garcia, University of Texas–Pan American
  • 44. xxiv Preface Susan Garrett, Goucher College Edward Geisweidt, University of Alabama Nate Gordon, Kishwaukee College Glenn Hutchinson, University of North Carolina–Charlotte Habiba Ibrahim, University of Washington Charlene Keeler, California State University–Fullerton Douglas King, Gannon University Constance Koepfinger, Duquesne University Anne Langendorfer, The Ohio State University Kim Long, Shippensburg University Laine Lubar, Broome Community College Phoenix Lundstrom, Kapi`olani Community College Cynthia Martin, James Madison University Andrea Mason, Pacific Lutheran University Darin Merrill, Brigham Young University–Idaho Sarah Newlands, Portland State University Emmanuel Ngwang, Mississippi Valley State University Leslie Norris, Rappahannock Community College Ludwig Otto, Tarrant County College Adrienne Peek, Modesto Junior College Adrienne Redding, Andrews University Julie Rivera, California State University–Long Beach John Robinson, Diablo Valley College Pam Rooney, Western Michigan University Linda Rosekrans, The State University of New York–Cortland Becky Rudd, Citrus College Arthur Saltzman, Missouri Southern State University Vicki Schwab, Manatee Community College John Sullivan, Muhlenberg College Eleanor Swanson, Regis University Kimberly Thompson, Wittenberg University
  • 45. Kathleen Walton, Southwestern Oregon Community College James Ray Watkins, The Art Institute of Pittsburgh, Online; Colorado Technical University, Online; and The Center for Talented Youth, Johns Hopkins University Lisa Weihman, West Virginia University Robert Williams, Radford University Nancy Wright, Syracuse University Robbin Zeff, George Washington University Preface xxv This page intentionally left blank UNIT I The Analytical Frame of Mind: Introduction to Analytical Methods CHAPTER 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does CHAPTER 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind CHAPTER 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods CHAPTER 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t, and How to Do It CHAPTER 5
  • 46. Analyzing Arguments CHAPTER 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis This page intentionally left blank CHAPTER 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does FIRST PRINCIPLES Writing takes place now in more forms than ever before. Words flash by on our computer and cell phone screens and speak to us from iPods. PowerPoint bulleted lists are replacing the classroom blackboard, and downloadable entries from Wikipe- dia and Google offer instant reading on almost any subject. Despite the often-heard claim that we now inhabit a visual age—that the age of print is passing—we are, in fact, surrounded by a virtual sea of electronically accessible print. What does all this mean for writers and writing? If what is meant by writing is the form in which written text appears on page or screen, then presumably the study of writing would focus on the new forms of orga- nization that characterize writing on the web. But what if we
  • 47. define writing as the act of recording our thoughts in search of understanding? In that case, the writing practices and mental habits that help us to think more clearly would be, as they have long been, at the center of what it means to learn to write. This book is primarily about ways of using writing to discover and develop ideas. Its governing premise is that learning to write well means learning to use writing to think well. This does not mean that the book ignores such matters as sentence style, paragraphing, and organization, but that it treats these matters in the context of writing as a way of generating and shaping thinking. Although it is true that authors of web pages and PowerPoint demonstrations display their finished products in forms unlike the traditional essay, people rarely arrive at their ideas in the form of PowerPoint lists and hypertext. Whatever form the thinking will finally take, first comes the stage of writing to understand—writing as a sustained act of reflection. Implicit throughout this book is an argument for the value of reflection in an age that seems increasingly to confuse sustained acts of thinking with information downloading and formatting. ANALYSIS DEFINED We have seized upon analysis as the book’s focus because it is the skill most commonly called for in college courses and beyond. The faculty with
  • 48. whom we work encour- age analytical writing because it offers alternatives both to oversimplified thinking of 3 4 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does the like/dislike, agree/disagree variety and to the cut-and-paste compilation of sheer information. It is the kind of writing that helps people not only to retain and assimi- late information, but to use information in the service of their own thinking about the world. More than just a set of skills, analysis is a frame of mind, an attitude toward experience. It is a form of detective work that typically pursues something puzzling, something you are seeking to understand rather than something you are already sure you have the answers to. Analysis finds questions where there seemed not to be any, and it makes connections that might not have been evident at first. Analyzing, however, is often the subject of attack. It is sometimes thought of as destructive—breaking things down into their component parts, or, to paraphrase a famous poet, murdering to dissect. Other detractors attack it as the rarefied province of intellectuals and scholars, beyond the reach of normal
  • 49. people. In fact, we all analyze all of the time, and we do so not simply to break things down but to construct our understandings of the world we inhabit. If, for example, you find yourself being followed by a large dog, your first response, other than breaking into a cold sweat, will be to analyze the situation. What does being followed by a large dog mean for me, here, now? Does it mean the dog is vicious and about to attack? Does it mean the dog is curious and wants to play? Similarly, if you are losing a game of tennis, or you’ve just left a job interview, or you are looking at a painting of a woman with three noses, you will begin to analyze. How can I play differently to increase my chances of winning? Am I likely to get the job, and why (or why not)? Why did the artist give the woman three noses? If we break things down as we analyze, we do so to search for meaningful patterns, or to uncover what we had not seen at first glance—or just to understand more closely how and why the separate parts work as they do. As this book tries to show, analyzing is surprisingly formulaic. It consists of a fairly limited set of basic moves. People who think well have these moves at their disposal, whether they are aware of using them or not. Having good ideas is less a matter of luck than of practice, of learning how to make best use of the writing process. Sudden flashes of inspiration do, of course, occur; but those who write
  • 50. regularly know that inspirational moments can, in fact, be courted. The rest of this book offers you ways of courting and then realizing the full potential of your ideas. Next we offer five basic “moves”—reliable ways of proceeding—for courting ideas analytically. THE FIVE ANALYTICAL MOVES Each of the five moves is developed in more detail in subsequent chapters; this is an overview. As we have suggested, most people already analyze all the time, but they often don’t realize that this is what they’re doing. A first step toward becoming a better analytical thinker and writer is to become more aware of your own thinking processes, building on skills that you already possess, and eliminating habits that get in the way. Each of the following moves serves the primary purpose of analysis: to figure out what something means, why it is as it is and does what it does. The Five Analytical Moves 5 Move 1: Suspend Judgment Suspending judgment is a necessary precursor to thinking analytically because our tendency to judge everything shuts down our ability to see and to think. It takes considerable effort to break the habit of responding to
  • 51. everything with likes and dislikes, with agreeing and disagreeing. Just listen in on a few conversations to be reminded of how pervasive this phenomenon really is. Even when you try to suppress them, judgments tend to come. Judgments usually say more about the person doing the judging than they do about the subject being judged. The determination that something is boring is espe- cially revealing in this regard. Yet people typically roll their eyes and call things boring as if this assertion clearly said something about the thing they are reacting to but not about the mind of the beholder. Consciously leading with the word interesting (as in, “What I find most interest- ing about this is. . . ”) tends to deflect the judgment response into a more exploratory state of mind, one that is motivated by curiosity and thus better able to steer clear of approval and disapproval. As a general rule, you should seek to understand the subject you are analyzing before deciding how you feel about it. (See the Judgment Reflex in Chapter 2, Counterproductive Habits of Mind, for more.) Move 2: Define Significant Parts and How They’re Related Whether you are analyzing an awkward social situation, an economic problem, a painting, a substance in a chemistry lab, or your chances of succeeding in a job inter-
  • 52. view, the process of analysis is the same: • Divide the subject into its defining parts, its main elements or ingredients. • Consider how these parts are related, both to each other and to the subject as a whole. In the case of analyzing the large dog encountered earlier, you might notice that he’s dragging a leash, has a ball in his mouth, and is wearing a bright red scarf. Having broken your larger subject into these defining parts, you would try to see the connec- tions among them and determine what they mean, what they allow you to decide about the nature of the dog: apparently somebody’s lost pet, playful, probably not hostile, unlikely to bite me. Analysis of the painting of the woman with three noses, a subject more like the kind you might be asked to write about in a college course, would proceed in the same way. Your result—ideas about the nature of the painting— would be determined, as with the dog, not only by your noticing its various parts, but also by your familiarity with the subject. If you knew little about art history, scrutiny of the painting’s parts would not tell you, for instance, that it is an example of the movement known as Cubism. Even without this context, however, you would still be able to draw some analytical conclusions—ideas about the meaning and nature of
  • 53. the subject. You might conclude, for example, that the artist is interested in perspective or in the way we see, as opposed to realistic depictions of the world. 6 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does One common denominator of all effective analytical writing is that it pays close attention to detail. We analyze because our global responses, to a play, for example, or to a speech or a social problem, are too general. If you comment on an entire football game, you’ll find yourself saying things like “great game,” which is a generic response, something you could say about almost anything. This “one-size- fits-all” kind of com- ment doesn’t tell us very much except that you probably liked the game. To say more, you would necessarily become more analytical—shifting your attention to the signifi- cance of some important aspect of the game, such as “they won because the offensive line was giving the quarterback all day to find his receivers” or “they lost because they couldn’t defend against the safety blitz.” This move from generalization to analysis, from the larger subject to its key com- ponents, is characteristic of good thinking. To understand a subject, we need to get past our first, generic, evaluative response to discover what the subject is “made of,” the particulars that contribute most strongly to the character of
  • 54. the whole. If all that analysis did, however, was to take subjects apart, leaving them broken and scattered, the activity would not be worth very much. The student who presents a draft of a paper to his or her professor with the words, “Go ahead, rip it apart,” reveals a dis- abling misconception about analysis—that, like dissecting a frog in a biology lab, analy- sis takes the life out of its subjects. Clearly, analysis means more than breaking a subject into its parts. When you analyze a subject you ask not just “What is it made of?” but also “How do these parts help me to understand the meaning of the subject as a whole?” Move 3: Make the Implicit Explicit One definition of what analytical writing does is that it makes explicit (overtly stated) what is implicit (suggested but not overtly stated), converting suggestions into direct statements. Some people fear that, like the emperor’s new clothes, implications aren’t really there, but are instead the phantasms of an overactive imagination. “Reading between the lines” is the common and telling phrase that expresses this anxiety. We will have more to say in Chapter 4 against the charge that analysis makes something out of nothing—the spaces between the lines—rather than out of what is there in black and white. Another version of this anxiety is implied by the term hidden meanings.
  • 55. Implications are not hidden, but neither are they completely spelled out so that they can be simply extracted. The word implication comes from the Latin implicare, which means “to fold in.” The word explicit is in opposition to the idea of implication. It means “folded out.” This etymology of the two words, implicit and explicit, suggests that meanings aren’t actually hidden, but neither are they opened to full view. An act of mind is required to take what is folded in and fold it out for all to see. The process of drawing out implications is also known as making inferences. Inference and implication are related but not synonymous terms, and the difference is essential to know. The term implication describes something suggested by the material itself; implications reside in the matter you are studying. The term inference describes your thinking process. In short, you infer what the subject implies. Now, let’s move on to an example that suggests not only how the process of making the implicit explicit works, but also how often we do it in our every- day lives. Imagine that you are driving down the highway and find yourself The Five Analytical Moves 7 analyzing a billboard advertisement for a brand of beer. Such an
  • 56. analysis might begin with your noticing what the billboard photo contains, its various parts—six young, athletic, and scantily clad men and women drinking beer while pushing kayaks into a fast-running river. At this point, you have produced not an analysis but a summary—a description of what the photo contains. If, however, you go on to consider what the particulars of the photo imply, your summary would become analytical. You might infer, for example, that the photo implies that beer is the beverage of fash- ionable, healthy, active people. Thus, the advertisement’s meaning goes beyond its explicit contents. Your analysis would lead you to convert to direct statement meanings that are suggested but not overtly stated, such as the advertisement’s goal of attacking common stereotypes about its product (that only lazy, overweight men drink beer). By making the implicit explicit (inferring what the ad implies) you can better understand the nature of your subject. (See Chapter 4 for more on implications versus hidden meanings.) Try this 1.1: Making Inferences Locate any magazine ad that you find interesting. Ask yourself, “What is this a picture of?” Use our hypothetical beer ad as a model for rendering the implicit explicit. Don’t settle for just one answer. Keep answering the question in different ways, letting your answers grow in length as they identify and
  • 57. begin to interpret the significance of telling details. If you find yourself getting stuck, add to the question: “and why did the advertiser choose this particular image or set of images?” Science as a Process of Argument I find it ironic that the discipline of science, which is so inherently analytical, is so difficult for students to think about analytically. Much of this comes from the prevailing view of society that science is somehow factual. Science students come to college to learn the facts. I think many find it comforting to think that everything they learn will be objective. None of the wishy-washy subjectivity that many perceive in other disciplines. There is no need to argue, synthesize, or even have a good idea. But this view is dead wrong. Anyone who has ever done science knows that nothing could be further from the truth. Just like other academics, scientists spend endless hours pa- tiently arguing over evidence that seems obscure or irrelevant to laypeople. There is rarely an absolute consensus. In reality, science is an endless pro- cess of argument, obtaining evidence, analyzing evidence, and reformulating arguments. To be sure, we all accept gravity as a “fact.” To not do so would be intellectually bankrupt, because all reasonable people agree to the truth of
  • 58. gravity. But to Newton, gravity was an argument for which evidence needed to be produced, analyzed, and discussed. It’s important to remember that a significant fraction of his intellectual contemporaries were not swayed by his argument. Equally important is that many good scientific ideas of today will eventually be significantly modified or shown to be wrong. —Bruce Wightman, Professor of Biology VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM 8 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does Move 4: Look for Patterns We have been defining analysis as the understanding of parts in relation to each other and to a whole, as well as the understanding of the whole in terms of the relationships among its parts. But how do you know which parts to attend to? What makes some details in the material you are studying more worthy of your attention than others? Here are three principles for selecting significant parts of the whole: 1. Look for a pattern of repetition or resemblance. In virtually all subjects, repetition is a sign of emphasis. In a symphony, for example, certain patterns of notes repeat throughout, announcing themselves as major
  • 59. themes. In a legal document, such as a warranty, a reader quickly becomes aware of words that are part of a particular idea or pattern of thinking: for instance, disclaimers of accountability. The repetition may not be exact. In Shakespeare’s play King Lear, for exam- ple, references to seeing and eyes call attention to themselves through repetition. Let’s say you notice that these references often occur along with another strand of language having to do with the concept of proof. How might noticing this pattern lead to an idea? You might make a start by inferring from the pattern that the play is concerned with ways of knowing (proving) things—with seeing as opposed to other ways of knowing, such as faith or intuition. 2. Look for binary oppositions. Sometimes patterns of repetition that you begin to notice in a particular subject matter are significant because they are part of a contrast—a basic opposition—around which the subject matter is structured. A binary opposition is a pair of elements in which the two members of the pair are opposites; the word binary means “consisting of two.” Some examples of binary oppositions that we encounter frequently are nature/civilization, city/country, public/private, organic/inorganic, voluntary/involuntary. One advantage of detecting repetition is that it will lead you to discover binaries,
  • 60. which are central to locating issues and concerns. (For more on working with binary oppositions, see Chapters 3 and 5.) 3. Look for anomalies—things that seem unusual, seem not to fit. An anomaly (a ! not, nom ! name) is literally something that cannot be named, what the dictionary defines as deviation from the normal order. Along with looking for pattern, it is also fruitful to attend to anomalous details—those that seem not to fit the pattern. Anomalies help us to revise our stereotypical assumptions. A TV commercial, for example, advertises a baseball team by featuring its star reading a novel by Dostoyevsky in the dugout during a game. In this case, the anomaly, a baseball player who reads serious literature, is being used to subvert (question, unsettle) the stereotypical assumption that sports and intellectualism don’t belong together. Just as people tend to leap to evaluative judgments, they also tend to avoid information that challenges (by not conforming to) opinions they already hold. Screening out anything that would ruffle the pattern they’ve begun to The Five Analytical Moves 9
  • 61. see, they ignore the evidence that might lead them to a better theory. (For more on this process of using anomalous evidence to evolve an essay’s main idea, see Chapter 9, Making a Thesis Evolve.) Anomalies are important because noticing them often leads to new and better ideas. Most advances in scientific thought, for example, have arisen when a scientist observes some phenomenon that does not fit with a prevailing theory. Move 5: Keep Reformulating Questions and Explanations Analysis, like all forms of writing, requires a lot of experimenting. Because the purpose of analytical writing is to figure something out, you shouldn’t expect to know at the start of your writing process exactly where you are going, how all of your subject’s parts fit together, and to what end. The key is to be patient and to know that there are procedures—in this case, questions—you can rely on to take you from uncertainty to understanding. The following three groups of questions (organized according to the analytical moves they’re derived from) are typical of what goes on in an analytical writer’s head as he or she attempts to understand a subject. These questions work with almost anything that you want to think about. As you will see, the questions are geared toward helping you locate and try on explanations for the meaning of various patterns of details.
  • 62. Which details seem significant? Why? What does the detail mean? What else might it mean? (Moves: Define Significant Parts; Make the Implicit Explicit) How do the details fit together? What do they have in common? What does this pattern of details mean? What else might this same pattern of details mean? How else could it be explained? (Move: Look for Patterns) What details don’t seem to fit? How might they be connected with other details to form a different pattern? What does this new pattern mean? How might it cause me to read the meaning of individual details differently? (Moves: Look for Anomalies and Keep Asking Questions) The process of posing and answering such questions—the analytical process—is one of trial and error. Learning to write well is largely a matter of learning how to frame questions. One of the main things you acquire in the study of an academic discipline is knowledge of the kinds of questions that the
  • 63. discipline typically asks. For example, an economics professor and a sociology professor might observe the same phenomenon, such as a sharp decline in health benefits for the elderly, and analyze its causes and significance in different ways. The economist might consider how such 10 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does benefits are financed and how changes in government policy and the country’s popu- lation patterns might explain the declining supply of funds for the elderly. The soci- ologist might ask about attitudes toward the elderly and about the social structures that the elderly rely on for support. ANALYSIS AT WORK: A SAMPLE PAPER Examine the following excerpt from a draft of a paper about Ovid’s Metamorphoses, a collection of short mythological tales dating from ancient Rome. We have included annotations in blue to suggest how a writer’s ideas evolve as he or she looks for pattern, contrast, and anomaly, constantly remaining open to reformulation. The draft actually begins with two loosely connected observations: that males dominate females, and that many characters in the stories lose the ability to speak and thus become submissive and dominated. In the excerpt, the
  • 64. writer begins to connect these two observations and speculate about what this connection means. There are many other examples in Ovid’s Metamorphoses that show the dominance of man over woman through speech control. In the Daphne and Apollo story, Daphne becomes a tree to escape Apollo, but her ability to speak is destroyed. Likewise, in the Syrinx and Pan story, Syrinx becomes a marsh reed, also a life form that cannot talk, although Pan can make it talk by playing it. [The writer establishes a pattern of similar detail.] Pygmalion and Galatea is a story in which the male creates his rendition of the perfect female. The female does not speak once; she is completely silent. Also, Galatea is referred to as “she” and never given a real name. This lack of a name renders her identity more silent. [Here the writer begins to link the contrasts of speech/silence with the absence/presence of identity.] Ocyrhoe is a female character who could tell the future but who was transformed into a mare so that she could not speak. One may explain this transformation by saying it was an attempt by the gods to keep the future unknown. [Notice how the writer’s thinking expands as she sustains her investigation of the overall pattern of men silencing women: here she tests her theory by adding another variable—prophecy.] However, there is a male character, Tiresias, who is also a seer of the future and is allowed to speak of his foreknowledge, thereby becoming a famous figure. (Interestingly, Tiresias
  • 65. during his lifetime has experienced being both a male and a female.) [Notice how the Ocyrhoe example has spawned a contrast based on gender in the Tiresias example. The pairing of the two examples demonstrates that the ability to tell the future is not the sole cause of silencing because male characters who can do it are not silenced—though the writer pauses to note that Tiresias is not entirely male.] Finally, in the story of Mercury and Herse, Herse’s sister, Aglauros, tries to prevent Mercury from marrying Herse. Mercury turns her into a statue; the male directly silences the female’s speech. The woman silences the man in only two stories studied. [Here the writer searches out an anomaly— women silencing men—that grows in the rest of the paragraph into an organizing contrast.] In the first, “The Death of Orpheus,” the women make use of “clamorous shouting, Phrygian flutes with curving horns, tambourines, the beating of breasts, and Bacchic howlings” (246) to drown out the male’s songs, dominating his speech in terms of volume. In this way, the quality of power within speech is demonstrated: “for the first time, his words had no effect, and he failed to move them [the women] in any way by his voice” (247). Distinguishing Analysis from Argument, Summary, and Expressive Writing 11
  • 66. Next the women kill him, thereby rendering him silent. However, the male soon regains his temporar- ily destroyed power of expression: “the lyre uttered a plaintive melody and the lifeless tongue made a piteous murmur” (247). Even after death Orpheus is able to communicate. The women were not able to destroy his power completely, yet they were able to severely reduce his power of speech and expression. [The writer learns, among other things, that men are harder to silence; Orpheus’s lyre continues to sing after his death.] The second story in which a woman silences a man is the story of Actaeon, in which the male sees Diana naked, and she transforms him into a stag so that he cannot speak of it: “he tried to say ‘Alas!’ but no words came” (79). This loss of speech leads to Actaeon’s inability to inform his own hunting team of his true identity; his loss of speech leads ultimately to his death. [This example reinforces the pattern that the writer had begun to notice in the Orpheus example.] In some ways these four paragraphs of draft exemplify a writer in the process of discovering a workable idea. They begin with a list of similar examples, briefly noted. As the examples accumulate, the writer begins to make connections and formulate trial explanations. We have not included enough of this excerpt to get to the tentative thesis the draft is working toward, although that thesis is already beginning to emerge. What we want to emphasize here is the writer’s willingness to accumulate data and to
  • 67. locate it in various patterns of similarity and contrast. Try this 1.2: Applying the Five Analytical Moves to a Speech Speeches provide rich examples for analysis, and they are easily accessible on the Inter- net. We especially recommend a site called American Rhetoric (You can Google it for the URL). Locate any speech and then locate its patterns of repetition and contrast. On the basis of your results, formulate a few conclusions about the speech’s point of view and its way of presenting it. Try to get beyond the obvious and the general—what does applying the moves cause you to notice that you might not have noticed before? DISTINGUISHING ANALYSIS FROM ARGUMENT, SUMMARY, AND EXPRESSIVE WRITING How does analysis differ from other kinds of thinking and writing? A common way of answering this question is to think of communication as having three possible centers of emphasis—the writer, the subject, and the audience. Communication, of course, involves all three of these components, but some kinds of writing concentrate more on one than on the others. Autobiographical writing, for example, such as diaries or memoirs or stories about personal experience, centers on the writer and his or her desire for self-expression. Argument, in which the writer takes a stand on an issue, ad- vocating or arguing against a policy or attitude, is reader-
  • 68. centered; its goal is to bring about a change in its readers’ actions and beliefs. Analytical writing is more concerned with arriving at an understanding of a subject than it is with either self-expression or changing readers’ views. (See Figure 1.1.) These three categories of writing are not mutually exclusive. So, for example, expressive (writer-centered) writing is also analytical in its attempts to define and explain a writer’s feelings, reactions, and experiences. And analysis is a form 12 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does of self-expression since it inevitably reflects the ways a writer’s experiences have taught him or her to think about the world. But even though expressive writing and analysis necessarily overlap, they also differ significantly in both method and aim. In expressive writing, your primary subject is your self, with other subjects serving as a means of evoking greater self-understanding. In analytical writing, your reasoning may derive from your personal experience, but it is your reasoning and not you or your experiences that matter. Analysis asks not just “What do I think?” but “How good is my thinking? How well does it fit the subject I am trying to explain?” In its emphasis on logic and the dispassionate scrutiny of ideas
  • 69. (“What do I think about what I think?”), analysis is a close cousin of argument. But analysis and argu- ment are not the same. Analytical writers are frequently more concerned with per- suading themselves, with discovering what they believe about a subject, than they are with persuading others. And, while the writer of an argument often goes into the writing process with some certainty about the position he or she wishes to support, the writer of an analysis is more likely to begin with the details of a subject he or she wishes to better understand. Accordingly, argument and analysis often differ in the kind of thesis statements they formulate. The thesis of an argument is usually some kind of should statement: readers should or shouldn’t vote for bans on smoking in public buildings, or they should or shouldn’t believe that gays can function effectively in the military. The thesis of an analysis is usually a tentative answer to a what, how, or why question; it seeks to explain why people watch professional wrestling, or what a rising number of sexual harassment cases might mean, or how certain features of government health care policy are designed to allay the fears of the middle class. The writer of an analysis is less concerned with convincing readers to approve or disapprove of professional wres- tling, or legal intervention into the sexual politics of the workplace, or government control of health care than with discovering how each of these
  • 70. complex subjects might be defined and explained. As should be obvious, though, the best arguments are built upon careful analysis: the better you understand a subject, the more likely you will be to find valid positions to argue about it. writer-centered (expressive writing) communication reader-centered (argument) subject-centered (summary and analysis) FIGURE 1.1 Diagram of Communication Triangle Distinguishing Analysis from Argument, Summary, and Expressive Writing 13 Applying the Five Analytical Moves: The Example of Whistler’s Mother Summary differs from analysis because the aim of summary is to recount, in effect, to reproduce someone else’s ideas. But summary and analysis are also clearly related and usually operate together. Summary is important to analysis because you can’t analyze a subject without laying out its significant parts for
  • 71. your reader. Similarly, analysis is important to summary because summarizing is more than just copying someone else’s words. To write an accurate summary you have to ask analytical ques- tions, such as: • Which of the ideas in the reading are most significant? Why? • How do these ideas fit together? What do the key passages in the reading mean? Like an analysis, an effective summary doesn’t assume that the subject matter can speak for itself: the writer needs to play an active role. A good summary provides perspective on the subject as a whole by explaining, as an analysis does, the mean- ing and function of each of that subject’s parts. Moreover, like an analysis, a good summary does not aim to approve or disapprove of its subject: the goal, in both kinds of writing, is to understand rather than to evaluate. (For more on summary, see Chapters 6 and 13.) So summary, like analysis, is a tool of understanding and not just a mechanical task. But a summary stops short of analysis because summary typically makes much smaller interpretive leaps. A summary of the painting popularly known as Whistler’s Mother, for example, would tell readers what the painting includes, which details are the most prominent, and even what the overall effect of the
  • 72. painting seems to be. A summary might say that the painting possesses a certain serenity and that it is some- what spare, almost austere. This kind of language still falls into the category of focused description, which is what a summary is. An analysis would include more of the writer’s interpretive thinking. It might tell us, for instance, that the painter’s choice to portray his subject in profile contributes to our sense of her separateness from us and of her nonconfrontational passivity. We look at her, but she does not look back at us. Her black dress and the fitted lace cap that obscures her hair are not only emblems of her self- effacement, shrouds disguis- ing her identity like her expressionless face, but also the tools of her self-containment and thus of her power to remain aloof from prying eyes. What is the attraction of this painting (this being one of the questions that an analysis might ask)? What might draw a viewer to the sight of this austere, drably attired woman, sitting alone in the center of a mostly blank space? Perhaps it is the very starkness of the painting, and the mystery of self-sufficiency at its center, that attracts us. (See Figure 1.2.) Observations of the sort just offered go beyond describing what the painting con- tains and enter into the writer’s ideas about what its details imply, what the painting invites us to make of it and by what means. Notice in our analysis of the painting how
  • 73. intertwined the description (summary) is with the analysis. Laying out the data is key to any kind of analysis, not simply because it keeps the analysis accurate but also 14 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does because, crucially, it is in the act of carefully describing a subject that analytical writers often have their best ideas. You may not agree with the terms by which we have summarized the painting, and thus you may not agree with such conclusions as “the mystery of self-sufficiency.” Nor is it necessary that you agree because there is no single, right answer to what the painting means. The absence of a single right answer does not, however, mean that all possible interpretations are equal and equally convincing to readers. The writer who can offer a careful description of a subject’s key features is likely to arrive at conclusions about possible meanings that others would share. Here are two general rules to be drawn from this discussion of analysis and summary: 1. Describe with care. The words you choose to summarize your data will contain the germs of your ideas about what the subject means. 2. In moving from summary to analysis, scrutinize the language
  • 74. you have chosen, asking, “Why did I choose this word?” and “What ideas are implicit in the language I have used?” FIGURE 1.2 Arrangement in Grey and Black: The Artist’s Mother by James Abbott McNeill Whistler, 1871. RE UN IO N DE S M US EE S NA TI ON AU X, A RT R
  • 75. ES OU RC E, N Y. J am es A bb ot t M cN ei l W hi st le r. Analysis and Personal Associations 15 ANALYSIS AND PERSONAL ASSOCIATIONS
  • 76. Although observations like those offered in the Interpretive Leaps column in Figure 1.3 go beyond simple description, they stay with the task of explaining the painting, rather than moving to private associations that the painting might prompt, such as effusions about old age, or rocking chairs, or the character and situation of the writer’s own mother. Such associations could well be valuable unto themselves as a means of prompting a searching piece of expressive writing. They might also help a writer to interpret some feature of the painting that he or she was working to under- stand. But the writer would not be free to use pieces of his or her personal history as conclusions about what the painting communicates, unless these conclusions could also be reasonably inferred from the painting itself. Analysis is a creative activity, a fairly open form of inquiry, but its imaginative scope is governed by logic. The hypothetical analysis we have offered is not the only reading of the painting that a viewer might make because the same pattern of de- tails might lead to different conclusions. But a viewer would not be free to conclude anything he or she wished, such as that the woman is mourning the death of a son Data Method of Analysis Interpretive Leaps these details destabilize the serenity of the figure, adding some tension to the
  • 77. picture in the form of slightly uneasy posture and figure's need for support: she looks too long, drooped in on her own spine austerity and containment of the figure made more pronounced by slight contrast with busier, more lively, and more ornate elements and with little picture showing world outside subject in profile, not looking at us folded hands, fitted lace cap, contained hair, expressionless face patterned curtain and picture versus still figure and blank wall; slightly frilled lace cuffs and ties on cap versus plain black dress slightly slouched body position and presence of support for feet anomalies; make what is implicit in the anomalies
  • 78. explicit locate organizing contrast; make what is implicit in the contrast explicit locate pattern of same or similar detail; make what is implicit in pattern of details explicit make implicit explicit (speculate about what the detail might suggest) figure strikes us as separate, nonconfrontational, passive figure strikes us as self- contained, powerful in her separateness and self-enclosure— self-sufficient? FIGURE 1.3 Summary and Analysis of Whistler’s Mother Diagram 16 Chapter 1 Analysis: What It Is and What It Does or is patiently waiting to die. Such conclusions would be unfounded speculations be-
  • 79. cause the black dress is not sufficient to support them. Analysis often operates in areas in which there is no one right answer, but like summary and argument, it requires the writer to reason from evidence. A few rules are worth highlighting here: 1. The range of associations for explaining a given detail or word must be governed by context. 2. It’s fine to use your personal reactions as a way into exploring what a subject means, but take care not to make an interpretive leap stretch farther than the actual details will support. 3. Because the tendency to transfer meanings from your own life onto a subject can lead you to ignore the details of the subject itself, you need always to be ask- ing yourself: “What other explanations might plausibly account for this same pattern of detail?” As we began this chapter by saying, analysis is a form of detective work. It can surprise us with ideas that our experiences produce once we take the time to listen to ourselves thinking. But analysis is also a discipline; it has rules that govern how we proceed and that enable others to judge the validity of our ideas. A good analytical thinker needs to be the attentive Dr. Watson to his or her own Sherlock Holmes. That
  • 80. is what the remainder of this book teaches you to do. ASSIGNMENT: Analyze a Portrait or Other Visual Image Locate any portrait, preferably a good reproduction from an art book or magazine, one that shows detail clearly. Then do a version of what we’ve done with Whistler’s Mother in the preceding columns. Your goal is to produce an analysis of the portrait with the steps we included in analyzing Whistler’s Mother. First, summarize the portrait, describing accurately its significant details. Do not go beyond a recounting of what the portrait includes; avoid interpreting what these details suggest. Then use the various methods offered in this chapter to analyze the data. What repetitions (patterns of same or similar detail) do you see? What organizing contrasts suggest themselves? In light of these patterns of similarity and difference, what anom- alies do you then begin to detect? Move from the data to interpretive conclusions. This process will produce a set of interpretive leaps, which you may then try to assemble into a more coherent claim of some sort—about what the portrait “says.” CHAPTER 2
  • 81. Counterproductive Habits of Mind Analysis, we have been suggesting, is a frame of mind, a set of habits for observ- ing and making sense of the world. There is also, it is fair to say, an anti-analytical frame of mind with its own set of habits. These shut down perception and arrest potential ideas at the cliché stage. This chapter attempts to unearth these anti- analytical habits. Then the next chapter offers some systematic ways of improving your observational skills. The meaning of observation is not self-evident. If you had five friends over and asked them to write down one observation about the room you were all sitting in, it’s a sure bet that many of the responses would be generalized judgments—“it’s comfort- able”; “it’s a pigsty.” And why? Because the habits of mind that come readily to most of us tend to shut down the observation stage so that we literally notice and remember less. We go for the quick impression and dismiss the rest. Having ideas is dependent on allowing ourselves to notice things in a subject that we wish to better understand rather than glossing things over with a quick and too easy understanding. The problem with convincing ourselves that we have the answers is that we are thus prevented from seeing the questions, which are usu- ally much more interesting than the temporary stopping points we have elected
  • 82. as answers. The nineteenth-century poet, Emily Dickinson, writes that “Perception of an object/Costs precise the object’s loss.” When we leap prematurely to our perceptions about a thing, we place a filter between ourselves and the object, shrinking the amount and kinds of information that can get through to our minds and our senses. The point of the Dickinson poem is a paradox—that the ideas we arrive at actually deprive us of material with which to have more ideas. So we have to be careful about leaping to conclusions, about the ease with which we move to generalization, because if we are not careful, such moves will lead to a form of mental blindness—loss of the object. FEAR OF UNCERTAINTY Most of us learn early in life to pretend that we understand things even when we don’t. Rather than ask questions and risk looking foolish, we nod our heads. Soon, we even come to believe that we understand things when really we don’t, or not nearly as well as we think we do. This understandable but problematic human trait means that to 17 18 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind
  • 83. become better thinkers, most of us have to cultivate a more positive attitude toward not knowing. Prepare to be surprised at how difficult this can be. Start by trying to accept that uncertainty—even its more extreme version, confusion—is a productive state of mind, a precondition to having ideas. The poet John Keats coined a memorable phrase for this willed tolerance of uncertainty. He called it negative capability. I had not had a dispute but a disquisition with Dilke, on various subjects; several things dovetailed in my mind, & at once it struck me, what qual- ity went to form a Man of Achievement especially in Literature & which Shakespeare possessed so enormously—I mean Negative Capability, that is when man is capable of being in uncertainties, Mysteries, doubts, without any irritable reaching after fact & reason. —Letter to George and Thomas Keats, December 1817 The key phrases here are “capable of being in uncertainties” and “without any irritable reaching.” Keats is not saying that facts and reason are unnecessary and therefore can be safely ignored. But he does praise the kind of person who can remain calm (rather than becoming irritable) in a state of uncertainty. He is en- dorsing a way of being that can stay open to possibilities longer
  • 84. than most of us are comfortable with. Negative capability is an essential habit of mind for productive analytical thinking. PREJUDGING Too often inexperienced writers are pressured by well-meaning teachers and text- books to arrive at a thesis statement—a single sentence formulation of the governing claim that a paper will support—before they have observed enough and reflected enough to find one worth using. These writers end up clinging to the first idea that they think might serve as a thesis, with the result that they stop looking at anything in their evidence except what they want and expect to see. Writers who leap prematurely to thesis statements typically find themselves proving the obvious—some too-general and superficial idea—and worse, they miss opportunities for the better paper that is lurking in the more complicated evidence being screened out by the desire to make the thesis “work.” Unit II of this book, Writing the Analytical Essay, will have much to say about finding and using thesis statements. But this unit (especially Chapter 3, A Toolkit of Analytical Methods) first focuses attention on the kinds of thinking and writing you’ll need to engage in before you can successfully make the move to thesis-driven writing. In this discovery phase, you will need to slow down the drive to
  • 85. conclusions to see more in your evidence. Tell yourself that you don’t understand, even if you think that you do. You’ll know that you are surmounting the fear of uncertainty when the meaning of your evidence starts to seem less rather than more clear to you, and perhaps even strange. You will begin to see details that you hadn’t seen before and a range of competing meanings where you had thought there was only one. Blinded by Habit 19 BLINDED BY HABIT Some people, especially the very young, are good at noticing things. They see things that the rest of us don’t see or have ceased to notice. But why is this? Is it just that people become duller as they get older? The poet William Wordsworth thought the problem was not age but habit. That is, as we organize our lives so that we can func- tion more efficiently, we condition ourselves to see in more predictable ways and to tune out things that are not immediately relevant to our daily needs. You can test this theory by considering what you did and did not notice this morn- ing on the way to work or class or wherever you regularly go. Following a routine for
  • 86. moving through the day can be done with minimal engagement of either the brain or the senses. Our minds are often, as we say, “somewhere else.” As we walk along, our eyes wander a few feet in front of our shoes or blankly in the direction of our destina- tion. Moving along the roadway in cars, we periodically realize that miles have gone by while we were driving on automatic pilot, attending barely at all to the road or the car or the landscape. Arguably, even when we try to focus on something that we want to consider, the habit of not really attending to things stays with us. The deadening effect of habit on seeing and thinking has long been a preoccu- pation of artists as well as philosophers and psychologists. Some people have even defined the aim of art as “defamiliarization.” “The essential purpose of art,” writes the novelist David Lodge, “is to overcome the deadening effects of habit by representing familiar things in unfamiliar ways.” The man who coined the term defamiliarization, Victor Shklovsky, wrote, “Habitualization devours works, clothes, furniture, one’s wife, and the fear of war. . . . And art exists that one may recover the sensation of life” (David Lodge, The Art of Fiction. New York: Penguin, 1992, p. 53). Growing up we all become increasingly desensitized to the world around us; we tend to forget the specific things that get us to feel and think in particular ways. In-
  • 87. stead we respond to our experience with a limited range of generalizations, and more often than not, these are shared generalizations—that is, clichés. A lot of what passes for thinking is merely reacting: right/wrong, good/bad, loved it/hated it, couldn’t relate to it, boring. Responses like these are habits, reflexes of the mind. And they are surprisingly tough habits to break. As an experiment, ask some- one for a description of a place, a movie, a new CD, and see what you get. Too often it will be a diatribe. Offer a counterargument and be told, huffily, “I’m entitled to my opinion.” Why is this so? We live in a culture of inattention and cliché. It is a world in which we are perpetu- ally assaulted with mind-numbing claims (Arby’s offers “a baked potato so good you’ll never want anyone else’s”), flip opinions (“The Republicans/Democrats are idiots”) and easy answers (“Be yourself”; “Provide job training for the unemployed, and we can do away with homelessness”). We’re awash in such stuff. That’s one reason for the prominence of the buzz phrase “thinking outside the box”—which appears to mean getting beyond outworn ways of thinking about things. But more than that, the phrase assumes that most of the time most of us are trapped inside the box—inside a set of prefabricated answers (clichés) and like/dislike responses. This is not a new phenomenon, of course—250 years ago
  • 88. 20 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind the philosopher David Hume, writing about perception, asserted that our lives are spent in “dogmatic slumbers,” so ensnared in conventional notions of just about everything that we don’t really see. We turn now to three of the most stubbornly counterproductive habits of mind: the judgment reflex, generalizing, and overpersonalizing. THE JUDGMENT REFLEX It would be impossible to overstate the mind-numbing effect that the judgment reflex has on thinking. Why? Consider what we do when we judge something and what we ask others to do when we offer them our judgments. Ugly, realistic, pretty, wonderful, unfair, crazy: notice how the problem with such words is a version of the problem with all generalizations—lack of information. What have you actually told someone else if you say that something is ugly, or boring, or realistic? In its most primitive form—most automatic and least thoughtful—judging is like an on/off switch. When the switch is thrown in one direction or the other—good/bad, right/wrong, positive/negative—the resulting judgment predetermines and overrides any subsequent thinking we might do. Rather than thinking
  • 89. about what X is or how X operates, we lock ourselves prematurely into proving that we were right to think that X should be banned or supported. The psychologist Carl Rogers has written at length on the problem of the judgment reflex. He claims that our habitual tendency as humans— virtually a programmed response—is to evaluate everything and to do so very quickly. Walking out of a movie, for example, most people will immediately voice their approval or disapproval, usually in either/or terms: I liked it or didn’t like it; it was right/wrong, good/bad, interesting/ boring. The other people in the conversation will then offer their own evaluation and their judgments of the others’ judgments: “I think that it was a good movie and that you are wrong to think it was bad,” and so on. Like the knee jerking in response to the physician’s hammer, such reflex judgments are made without conscious thought (the source of the pejorative term “knee-jerk thinking”). They close off thinking with likes and dislikes and instant categories. This is not to say that all judging should be avoided. Obviously our thinking on many occasions must be applied to decision-making: whether we should or shouldn’t vote for a particular candidate, should or shouldn’t eat French fries, should or shouldn’t support a ban on cigarette advertising. Ultimately, in other words, analyti- cal thinking does need to arrive at a point of view—which is a
  • 90. form of judgment—but analytical conclusions are usually not phrased in terms of like/dislike or good/bad. They disclose what a person has come to understand about X rather than how he or she rules on the worth of X. In some ways, the rest of this book consists of a set of methods for blocking the judgment reflex in favor of more thoughtful responses. For now, here are two moves to make in order to short circuit the judgment reflex and begin replacing it with a more thoughtful, patient, and curious habit of mind. First, try the cure that Carl Rogers recommended to negotiators in industry and government. Do not assert an agreement Generalizing 21 or disagreement with another person’s position until you can repeat that position in a way the other person would accept as fair and accurate. This is surprisingly hard to do because we are usually so busy calling up judgments of our own that we barely hear what the other person is saying. Second, try eliminating the word “should” from your vocabulary for a while. Judg- ments take the form of should statements. We should pass the law. We should not consider putting such foolish restrictions into law. The analytical habit of mind is
  • 91. characterized by the words why, how, and what. Analysis asks: What is the aim of the new law? Why do laws of this sort tend to get passed in some parts of the country rather than others? How does this law compare with its predecessor? You might also try eliminating evaluative adjectives—those that offer judgments with no data. “Green” is a descriptive, concrete adjective. It offers something we can experi- ence. “Beautiful” is an evaluative adjective. It offers only judgment. (See Figure 2.1.) Try this 2.1: Distinguishing Evaluative from Nonevaluative Words The dividing line between judgmental and nonjudgmental words is often more dif- ficult to discern in practice than you might assume. Categorize each of the terms in the following list as judgmental or nonjudgmental, and be prepared to explain your reasoning: monstrous, delicate, authoritative, strong, muscular, automatic, vibrant, tedious, pungent, unrealistic, flexible, tart, pleasing, clever, slow. Try this 2.2: Experiment with Adjectives and Adverbs Write a paragraph of description—on anything that comes to mind—without using any evaluative adjectives or adverbs. Alternatively, analyze and categorize the adjectives and adverbs in a piece of your own recent writing.
  • 92. GENERALIZING What it all boils down to is… What this adds up to is. . . The gist of her speech was. . . Generalizing is not always a bad habit. Reducing complex events, theories, books, or speeches to a reasonably accurate summarizing statement requires practice and skill. We generalize from our experience because this is one way of arriving at ideas. THE PROBLEM data (words, images, other detail) > broad generalization leaps to data > evaluative claims (like/dislike; agree/disagree) leaps to FIGURE 2.1 The Problems with Generalizing and Judging 22 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind The problem with generalizing is that it removes the mind— usually much too quickly—from the data that produced the generalization in the first place. People tend to remember their reactions and impressions. The dinner was dull.
  • 93. The house was beautiful. The music was exciting. But they forget the specific, con- crete causes of these impressions (if they ever fully noticed them). As a result, people deprive themselves of material to think with—the data that might allow them to reconsider their initial impressions or share them with others. Generalizations are just as much a problem for readers and listeners as they are for writers. Consider for a moment what you are actually asking others to do when you offer them a generalization such as “His stories are very depressing.” Unless the recipient of this observation asks a question—such as “Why do you think so?”—he or she is being required to take your word for it: the stories are depressing because you say so. What happens instead if you offer a few details that caused you to think as you do? Clearly, you are on riskier ground. Your listener might think that the details you cite are actually not depressing or that this is not the most interesting or useful way to think about the stories. He or she might offer a different generalization, a different reading of the data, but at least conversation has become possible. Vagueness and generality are major blocks to learning because, as habits of mind, they allow you to dismiss virtually everything you’ve read and heard except the general idea you’ve arrived at. Often the generalizations that come to mind are so broad that
  • 94. they tell us nothing. To say, for example, that a poem is about love or death or rebirth, or that the economy of a particular emerging nation is inefficient, accomplishes very little, since the generalizations could fit almost any poem or economy. In other words, your generalizations are often sites where you stopped thinking prematurely, not the “answers” you’ve thought they were. The simplest antidote to the problem of generalizing is to train yourself to be more self-conscious about where your generalizations come from. Remember to trace your general impressions back to the details that caused them. This tracing of attitudes back to their concrete causes is the most basic—and most necessary—move in the analytical habit of mind. Here’s another strategy for bringing your thinking down from high levels of gen- erality. Think of the words you use as steps on an abstraction ladder. The more general and vague the word, the higher its level of abstraction. Mammal, for example, is higher on the abstraction ladder than cow. You’ll find that it takes some practice to learn to distinguish between abstract words and concrete ones. A concrete word appeals to the senses. Abstract words are not available to our senses of touch, sight, hearing, taste, and smell. Submarine is a concrete word. It conjures up a mental image, something we can physically experi-
  • 95. ence. Peace-keeping force is an abstract phrase. It conjures up a concept, but in an abstract and general way. We know what people are talking about when they say there is a plan to send submarines to a troubled area. We can’t be so sure what is up when people start talking about peace-keeping forces. You might try using “Level 3 Generality” as a convenient tag phrase reminding you to steer clear of the higher reaches of abstract generalization, some so high up the ladder from the concrete stuff that produced them that there is barely enough air to sustain the thought. Why Level 3 instead of Level 2? There aren’t just two categories, abstract and concrete; the categories are the ends of a continuum, a sliding scale. And too often when writers try to concretize their generalizations, the results are still too general: they change animal to mammal, but they need cow or, better, black angus. Try this 2.3: Locating Words on the Abstraction Ladder Find a word above (more abstract) and a word below (more concrete) for each of the following words: society, food, train, taxes, school, government, cooking oil, organism, story, magazine. Try this 2.4: Distinguishing Abstract from Concrete Words
  • 96. Make a list of the first ten words that come to mind and then arrange them from most concrete to most abstract. Then repeat the exercise by choosing key words from a page of something you have written recently. OVERPERSONALIZING (NATURALIZING OUR ASSUMPTIONS) In one sense all writing is personal: you are the one putting words on the page, and inevitably you see things from your point of view. Even if you were to summarize what someone else had written, aiming for maximum impersonality, you would be making the decisions about what to include and exclude. Most effective analytical prose has a strong personal element—the writer’s stake in the subject matter. As readers, we want the sense that a writer is engaged with the material and cares about sharing it. But in another sense, no writing is strictly personal. As contemporary cultural theorists are fond of pointing out, the “I” is not a wholly autonomous free agent who Habits of Mind Readers should not conclude that the “Counterproductive Habits of Mind” presented in this chapter are confined to writing. Psychologists who study the way we process information have established important links between the way we think and the way we feel. Some psychologists, such
  • 97. as Aaron Beck, have identified common “errors in thinking” that parallel the habits of mind discussed in this chapter. Beck and others have shown that falling prey to habits of mind is associated with a variety of negative outcomes. For instance, a tendency to engage in either/or thinking, overgeneralization, and personalization has been linked to higher levels of anger, anxiety, and depression. Failure to attend to these errors in thinking chokes off reflection and analysis. As a result, the person becomes more likely to “react” rather than think, which may prolong and exacerbate the negative emotions. —Mark Sciutto, Professor of Psychology VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM Overpersonalizing (Naturalizing Our Assumptions) 23 24 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind writes from a unique point of view. Rather, the “I” is always shaped by forces out- side the self—social, cultural, educational, historical, etc. The extreme version of this position allots little space for what we like to think of as “individuality”: the self is a site through which dominant cultural ways of understanding the world (ideologies)
  • 98. circulate. From this perspective we are like actors who don’t know that we’re actors, reciting various cultural scripts that we don’t realize are scripts. This is, of course, an overstated position. A person who believes that civil rights for all is an essential human right is not necessarily a victim of cultural brainwashing. The grounds of his or her belief, shaped by participation in a larger community of belief (ethnic, religious, family tradition, etc.) is, however, not merely personal. But it’s a mistake for a person to assume that because he or she experienced or believes X, everyone else does too. Rather than open-mindedly exploring what a sub- ject might mean, the overpersonalizer tends to use a limited range of culturally con- ditioned likes and dislikes to close the subject down. Overpersonalizing substitutes merely reacting for thinking. It is surprisingly difficult to break the habit of treating our points of view as self- evidently true—not just for us but for everyone. What is “common sense” for one person, and so not even in need of explaining, can be quite uncommon and not so obviously sensible to someone else. More often than not, common sense is a phrase that really means “what seems obvious to me and therefore should be obvious to you.” This is a habit of mind called “naturalizing your assumptions.” The word naturalize in this context means you are representing—and seeing—your
  • 99. own assumptions as natural, as simply the way things are (and ought to be). Overpersonalizers tend to make personal experiences and prejudices an unques- tioned standard of value. Your own disastrous experience with a health maintenance organization (HMO) may predispose you to dismiss a plan for nationalized health care, but your writing needs to examine in detail the holes in the plan, not simply evoke the three hours you lingered in some doctor’s waiting room. Paying too much attention to how a subject makes you feel or fits your previous experience of life can seduce you away from analyzing how the subject itself operates. This is not to say that there is no learning or thinking value in telling our ex- periences: narratives can be used analytically. Storytelling has the virtue of offering concrete experience—not just the conclusions the experience may have led to. Personal narratives can take us back to the source of our convictions. The problem comes when “relating” to someone’s story becomes a habitual substitute for thinking through the ideas and attitudes that the story suggests. The problem with the personal is perhaps most clear when viewed as half of a particularly vicious set of binary oppositions that might be schematized thus: subjective vs. objective
  • 100. personal expression vs. impersonal analysis passionately engaged vs. detached, impassively neutral genuinely felt vs. heartless Like most vicious binaries, the personal/impersonal, heart/head binary overstates the case and obscures the considerable overlap of the two sides. The antidote to the overpersonalizing habit of mind is, as with most habits you want to break, to become more self-conscious about it. Ask yourself, “Is this what I really believe?” Of course, some personal responses can provide valuable beginnings for constructive thinking, provided that, as with generalizing, you get in the habit of tracing your own responses back to their causes. If you find an aspect of your subject irritating or funny or disappointing, locate exact details that evoked your emotional response, and begin to analyze those details. Try this 2.5: Tracing Impressions Back to Causes One of Ernest Hemingway’s principal rules for writing was to trace impressions back to causes. He once wrote to an apprentice writer, “Find what gave you the emotion; what the action was that gave you the excitement. Then write it down, making it clear so the reader will see it too and have the same feeling you had.” You can try this
  • 101. exercise anywhere. Wait for an impression to hit, and then record the stimuli—the concrete details that produced your response—as accurately as you can. Try this 2.6: Looking for Naturalized Assumptions Start listening to the things people say in everyday conversation. Read some newspaper editorials with your morning coffee (a pretty disturbing way to start the day in most cases). Watch for examples of people naturalizing their assumptions. You will find examples of this everywhere. Also, try paraphrasing the common complaint “I couldn’t relate to it.” What does being able to “relate” to something consist of? What problems would follow from accepting this idea as a standard of value? OPINIONS (VERSUS IDEAS) Perhaps no single word causes more problems in the relation between students and teachers, and for people in general, than the word opinion. Consider for a moment the often-heard claim “I’m entitled to my opinion.” This claim is worth exploring. What is an opinion? How is it (or isn’t it) different from a belief or an idea? If I say that I am entitled to my opinion, what am I asking you to do or not do? Many of the opinions people fight about are actually clichés, pieces of much- repeated conventional wisdom. For example, “People are
  • 102. entitled to say what they want. That’s just my opinion.” But, of course, this assertion isn’t a private and personal revelation. It is an exaggerated and overstated version of one of the items in the U.S. Bill of Rights, guaranteeing freedom of speech. Much public thinking has gone on about this private conviction, and it has thus been carefully qualified. A person can’t, for example, say publicly whatever he or she pleases about other people if what he or she says is false and damages the reputation of another person— at least not without threat of legal action. Our opinions are learned. They are products of our culture and our upbringing— not personal possessions. It is okay to have opinions, but dangerous to give too many of them protected-species status, walling them off into a reserve, not to be touched by reasoning or evidence. Opinions (versus Ideas) 25 26 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind Some things, of course, we have to take on faith. Religious convictions, for example, are more than opinions, though they operate in a similar way: we believe where we can’t always prove. But even our most sacred convictions are not really harmed by thinking. The world’s religions are constantly
  • 103. engaged in interpreting and reinterpreting what religious texts mean, what various traditional practices mean, and how they may or may not be adapted to the attitudes and practices of the world as it is today. WHAT IT MEANS TO HAVE AN IDEA Thinking, as opposed to reporting or reacting, should lead you to ideas. But what does it mean to have an idea? This question lies at the heart of this book. It’s one thing to acquire knowledge, but you also need to learn how to produce knowledge, to think for yourself. The problem is that people are daunted when asked to arrive at ideas. They dream up ingenious ways to avoid the task, or they get paralyzed with anxiety. What is an idea? Must an idea be something that is entirely “original”? Must it revamp the way you understand yourself or your stance toward the world? Such expectations are unreasonably grand. Clearly, a writer in the early stages of learning about a subject can’t be expected to arrive at an idea so original that, like a Ph.D. thesis, it revises complex concepts in a discipline. Nor should you count as ideas Ideas versus Opinions Writers need to be aware of the distinction between an argument that seeks support from evidence and mere opinions and assertions. Many
  • 104. students taking political science courses often come with the assumption that in politics one opinion is as good as another. (Tocqueville thought this to be a peculiarly democratic disease.) From this perspective any position a po- litical science professor may take on controversial issues is simply his or her opinion to be accepted or rejected by students according to their own beliefs/prejudices. The key task, therefore, is not so much substituting knowledge for opinions, but rather substituting well-constructed arguments for unexamined opinions. What is an argument, and how might it be distinguished from opinions? Several things need to be stressed: (1) The thesis should be linked to evi- dence drawn from relevant sources: polling data, interviews, historical ma- terial, and so forth. (2) The thesis should make as explicit as possible its own ideological assumptions. (3) A thesis, in contrast to mere statement of opinion, is committed to making an argument, which means that it presup- poses a willingness to engage with others. To the extent that writers operate on the assumption that everything is an opinion, they have no reason to construct arguments; they are locked into an opinion. —Jack Gambino, Professor of Political Science
  • 105. VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM What It Means to Have an Idea 27 only those that lead to some kind of life-altering discovery. Ideas are usually much smaller in scope, much less grand, than people seem to expect them to be. It is easiest to understand what ideas are by considering what ideas do and where they can be found. Here is a partial list: • An idea answers a question; it explains something that needs to be explained or provides a way out of a difficulty that other people have had in understanding something. • An idea usually starts with an observation that is puzzling, with something you want to figure out rather than something you think you already understand. • An idea may be the discovery of a question where there seemed not to be one. • An idea may make explicit and explore the meaning of something implicit—an unstated assumption upon which an argument rests or a logical consequence of a given position.
  • 106. • An idea may connect elements of a subject and explain the significance of that connection. • An idea often accounts for some dissonance—that is, something that seems to not fit together. • An idea provides direction; it helps you see what to do next. Most strong analytical ideas launch you in a process of resolving problems and bringing competing positions into some kind of alignment. They locate you where there is something to negotiate, where you are required not just to list answers but also to ask questions, make choices, and engage in reasoning about the significance of your evidence. Some would argue that ideas are discipline-specific, that what counts as an idea in Psychology differs from what counts as an idea in History or Philosophy or Busi- ness. And surely the context does affect the way that ideas are shaped and expressed. This book operates on the premise, however, that ideas across the curriculum share common elements. All of the items in the list just given, for example, seem to us to be common to ideas and to idea-making in virtually any context. (See Figure 2.2.) HAVING IDEAS RELATING REPORTING
  • 107. versus (doing something with the material) (personal experience matters, but . . .) (information matters, but . . .) FIGURE 2.2 Having Ideas Ideas occupy a middle ground between the extremes of sheer personal response and faceless reportage of information. 28 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind RULES OF THUMB FOR HANDLING COMPLEXITY This chapter has been about blocking habits of mind that allow you to evade a more complex way of approaching your writing. Almost all writers feel uncomfortable when encountering complexity. But discomfort need not lead to avoidance or to verbal pa- ralysis. The following rules of thumb can help you to respond to the complexities of the subjects that you write about rather than oversimplifying or evading them. 1. Reduce scope. Whenever possible, reduce drastically the range of your inquiry. Resist the temptation to try to include too much information. Even when an as-
  • 108. signment calls for broader coverage of a subject, you will usually do best by cov- ering the ground up front and then analyzing one or two key points in greater depth. For example, if you were asked to write on Franklin Roosevelt’s New Deal, you would obviously have to open with some general observations, such as what it was and why it arose. But if you tried to stay on this general level throughout, your paper would have little direction or focus. You could achieve a focus, though, by moving quickly from the general to some much smaller and more specific part of the subject, such as attacks on the New Deal. You would then be able to limit the enormous range of possible evidence to a few representative figures, such as Huey Long, Father Coughlin, and Alf Landon. Once you began to compare the terms and legitimacy of their opposition to the New Deal, you would be much more likely to manage a complex analysis of the subject than if you had remained at the level of broad generalization. 2. Study the wording of topics for unstated questions. Nearly all formulations of a topic contain a number of questions that emerge when you ponder the word- ing. Framing these questions overtly is often the first step to having an idea.
  • 109. Take a topic question such as “Is feminism good for Judaism?” It seems to invite you simply to argue yes or no, but it actually requires you to set up and answer a number of implied questions. For example, what does “good for Judaism” mean—that which allows the religion to evolve? That which conserves its tradi- tion? The same kinds of questions might be asked of the term feminism. And what of the possibility that feminism has no significant effect whatsoever? As this example illustrates, even an apparently limited and straightfor- ward question presses writers to make choices about how to engage it. So don’t leap from the topic question to your plan of attack too quickly. One of the best tricks of the trade lies in smoking out the unstated assumptions implied by the wording of the topic, and addressing them. (See Chapter 5, Analyzing Arguments, for more on uncovering assumptions.) 3. Suspect your first responses. If you settle for these, the result is likely to be superficial and overly general. A better strategy is to examine your first responses for ways in which they might be inaccurate, and then develop the implications of these overstatements (or errors) into a new formulation. In many cases, writers go through this process of proposing and rejecting ideas ten times or more before they arrive at an angle or approach that will sustain
  • 110. an essay. Rules of Thumb for Handling Complexity 29 A first response is okay for a start, as long as you don’t stop there. So, for example, most of us would agree, at first glance, that no one should be denied health care, or that a given film or novel that concludes with a marriage is a happy ending, or that the American government should not pass trade laws that might cause Americans to lose their jobs. On closer inspection, however, each of these responses begins to reveal its limitations. Given that there is a limited amount of money available, should everyone, regardless of age or physical con- dition, be accorded every medical treatment that might prolong life? And might not a novel or film that concludes in marriage signal that the society depicted offers too few options, or more cynically, that the author is feeding the audience an implausible fantasy to blanket over problems raised earlier in the work? And couldn’t trade laws resulting in short-term loss of jobs ultimately produce more jobs and a healthier economy? As these examples suggest, first responses—usually pieces of conventional wisdom—can blind you to rival explanations. Try not to decide on an answer to
  • 111. questions you’re given—or those of your own making—too quickly. 4. Begin with questions, not answers. Whether you are focusing on an assigned topic or devising one of your own, you are usually better off to begin with something that you don’t understand very well and want to understand better. Begin by asking what kinds of questions the material poses. So, for example, if you are convinced that Robinson Crusoe changes throughout Defoe’s novel and you write a paper cataloging those changes, you essentially are composing a selec- tive plot summary. If, by contrast, you wonder why Crusoe walls himself within a fortress after he discovers a footprint in the sand, you will be more likely to interpret the significance of events than just to report them. 5. Write all of the time about what you are studying. Doing so is probably the single best preparation for developing your own interest in a subject and for finding interesting approaches to it. Don’t wait to start writing until you think you have an idea you can organize a paper around. By writing informally—as a matter of routine—about what you are studying, you can acquire the habits of mind necessary to having and developing ideas. Similarly, by reading as often and as attentively as you can, and writing spontaneously about what you read, you will accustom yourself to being a less passive consumer of ideas and
  • 112. information, and will have more ideas and information available to think actively with and about. (See Freewriting in Chapter 3, A Toolkit of Analytical Methods, for more.) 6. Accept that interest is a product of writing—not a prerequisite. The best way to get interested is to expect to become interested. Writing gives you the opportunity to cultivate your curiosity by thinking exploratively. Rather than approaching topics in a mechanical way, or putting them off to the last possible moment and doing the assignment grudgingly, try giving yourself and the topic the benefit of the doubt. If you can suspend judgment and start writing, you will often find yourself uncovering interests where you had not seen them before. 7. Use the “backburner.” In restaurants, the backburner is the place that chefs leave their sauces and soup stocks to simmer while they are actively engaged in other, more immediately pressing and faster operations on the frontburners. 30 Chapter 2 Counterproductive Habits of Mind Think of your brain as having a backburner—a place where you can set and temporarily forget (though not entirely) some piece of thinking that you are
  • 113. working on. A good way to use the backburner is to read through and take some notes on something you are writing about—or perhaps a recent draft of something you are having trouble finishing—just before you go to sleep at night. Writers who do this often wake up to find whole outlines, whole strings of useful words already formed in their heads. Keep a notebook by your bed and record these early-morning thoughts. If you do this over a period of days (which as- sumes, of course, that you will need to start your writing projects well in advance of deadlines), you will be surprised at how much thinking you can do when you didn’t know you were doing it. The backburner keeps working during the day as well—periodically insisting that the frontburner, your more conscious self, listen to what it has to say. Pretty soon, ideas start popping up all over the place. In the context of this discussion, we’ll end these rules of thumb with the following anecdote. The wife of the writer and cartoonist, James Thurber, reportedly was asked about her husband’s behavior at dinner parties wherein he occasionally went blank and seemed to be staring off into space. “Oh, don’t worry about that,” she said. “He’s all right. He’s just writing.” ASSIGNMENT: Observation Practice Among the habits of mind that this chapter recommends, one of
  • 114. the most useful (and potentially entertaining) is to trace impressions, reactions, sudden thoughts, moods, etc., back to their probable causes. Practice this skill for a week, recording at least one impression a day in some detail (that is, what you both thought and felt). Then deter- mine at least three concrete causes of your response. That is, go after specific sensory details. For class purposes, pick one or two of your journal writings and revise them to a form that could be shared with other members of the class. Interesting subjects for such writing might include your response to first-year student orientation, some other feature of the beginning of the school year, or your response to selected places on campus. What impact do certain places have on you? Why? CHAPTER 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods Once I begin the act of writing, it all falls away—the view from the window, the tools, the talismans, even the snoring cat—and I am unconscious of myself and my surroundings while I fuse language with idea, make a spe- cific image visible or audible through the discovery of the right words . . . One’s carping inner critics are silenced for a time, and, as a result, what
  • 115. is produced is a little bit different from anything I had planned. There is always a surprise, a revelation. During the act of writing I have told myself something that I didn’t know I knew. —Gail Godwin, “How I Write” (Boston: The Writer, October 1987) In a recent (and fascinating) bestseller entitled Blink, Malcolm Gladwell offers an exploration into intuitive knowing. Gladwell ultimately argues that there is a big difference between experts who make decisions in the blink of an eye and rela- tive novices (people outside their area of expertise) who do so. He finds that although both novices and experts can make intuitive decisions based on rapid assessment of key details (a process he calls thin slicing), the accuracy and quality of these decisions is incomparably better in thinkers who have trained their habits of perception. This chapter offers a set of procedures—tools—for training your habits of per- ception, especially those habits that allow you to see significant detail. The tools are presented as formulae that you can apply to anything you wish to better understand. We have deliberately given each of the tools a name and nameable steps so that they are easy to invoke consciously in place of the semi-conscious glide into such habits as overgeneralizing and the judgment reflex. (See Chapter 2, Counterproductive Habits
  • 116. of Mind, for more.) Most of the items in the Toolkit share the trait of encouraging defamiliarization. In the last chapter we spoke of the necessity of defamiliarizing—of finding ways to see things that the veneer of familiarity would otherwise render invisible. This involves recognizing that the apparently self-evident meanings of things seem “natural” and “given” only because we have been conditioned to see them this way. Most of us assume, for example, that the media is a site of public knowledge and awareness. But look what happens to that idea when defamiliarized by Jonathan Franzen in a recent essay (“Imperial Bedroom”): 31 32 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods Since really serious exposure in public today is assumed to be synonymous with being seen on television, it would seem to follow that televised space is the premier public space. Many things that people say to me on television, however, would never be tolerated in a genuine public space— in a jury box, for example, or even on a city sidewalk. TV is an enormous, ramified exten- sion of the billion living rooms and bedrooms in which it’s
  • 117. consumed. You rarely hear a person on the subway talking loudly about, say, incontinence, but on television it’s been happening for years. TV is devoid of shame, and without shame there can be no distinction between public and private. Franzen here enables us to see freshly by offering us details that challenge our conventional notions of public and private. Seeing in this way requires that we attend carefully to the concrete aspect of things. We admit that in some cases it is the fear of the unfamiliar rather than the blind- ness bred of habit that keeps people from looking closely at things. Such is the situ- ation of college students confronted with difficult and unfamiliar reading. And so, there is clearly some value in using habit to domesticate the unfamiliar in particular (and daunting) circumstances. Nevertheless, it’s probably easier to overcome the fear of grappling with new material than it is to turn off the notion that meanings are obvious. (On strategies for tackling difficult reading, see the discussions of Paraphrase " 3 and Passage-Based Focused Freewriting later in this chapter. See also Chapter 13, Reading Analytically.) Before introducing the Toolkit, we should say that what we are proposing is (in a sense) nothing new. There is a long history dating back to the ancient Greek and
  • 118. Roman rhetoricians of using formulae to discover and develop ideas. In classical rhetoric, the pursuit and presentation of ideas—of workable claims for arguments— was divided into five stages: inventio, dispositio, elocutio, memoria, and pronuntiatio. For present purposes we need to concentrate on only two— inventio (invention) and dispositio (disposition). Disposition includes the various means of effectively organizing a speech or piece of writing, given that rhetoric is concerned with the means of persuasion. Invention includes various ways of finding things to say, of discovering arguable claims to develop and dispose (arrange). The early rhetoricians thought of invention in terms of what they called “topics,” from the Greek word topoi, meaning place or region. The topics were “places” that an orator (speech-maker) could visit, mentally, to discover possible ways of developing a subject. The topics are what we might now think of as strategies—a word which, inter- estingly, has its roots in the Greek word for army, and, thus, with the idea of winning over an audience to your point of view and defeating enemies. Because the quality and plausibility of a writer’s ideas constitute, arguably, the best means of persuading an audi- ence, we here emphasize ways of discovering as much as possible about your evidence. THE TOOLKIT What follows are a set of fundamental analytical activities—
  • 119. tools that effective think- ers use constantly, whether they are aware of using them or not. Some people do indeed have ideas as sudden flashes of inspiration (in the blink of an eye), but there is method even in such seemingly intuitive leaps. And when the sudden flashes of inspiration don’t come, method is even more essential. One trick to becoming a better observer and thus a better thinker is to slow down, to stop trying to draw conclusions before you’ve spent time openly attending to the data, letting yourself notice more. Better ideas grow out of a richer acquaintance with whatever it is you are looking at. Observation and interpretation go hand in hand, but it helps greatly to allow yourself a distinct observation stage and to prolong this beyond what most people find comfortable. All of the activities in the Toolkit seek to create such a stage. The Toolkit will also help you to stave off anxiety about assimi- lating difficult material by giving you something concrete to do with it, rather than expecting yourself to leap instantly to understanding. The activities in the Toolkit can be conducted either orally or in writing and should be practiced again and again, until they become habitual. The activities them- selves do not produce ready-made papers, and may in fact produce an abundance of
  • 120. writing that never makes it through to the final draft. But the thinking these activities inspire ultimately produces much better final results. There are, of course, more observational and idea-generating methods than we have offered here. In classical rhetoric, for example, the topics of invention include such things as the traditional rhetorical modes (comparison and contrast, classifica- tion, definition, etc.) and ways of inventorying an audience to discover things that need to be said. Our purpose in this chapter is narrower. We are concentrating on ways of looking at data—whether in print, visual, or the world—that will allow you to become more fully aware of the features that define your subject, that make it what it is. (Later chapters offer tools for other, mostly later-stage tasks such as making in- terpretive leaps, conversing with sources, and finding and evolving a thesis.) PARAPHRASE " 3 The activity we call Paraphrase " 3 offers the quickest means of seeing how a little writ- ing about something you’re reading can lead to having ideas about it. Paraphrasing moves toward interpretation because it tends to uncover areas of uncertainty and find questions. It instantly defamiliarizes. It also keeps your focus small so that you can practice thinking in depth rather than going for an overly broad “big picture.” Paraphrasing is commonly misunderstood as summary (a way of
  • 121. shrinking material you’ve read) or perhaps as simply a way to avoid plagiarism by putting it in your own words. Too often when people wish to understand or retain information, they summarize—that is, they produce a general overview of what the words say. Paraphras- ing stays much closer to the actual words than summarizing. The word paraphrase means to put one phrase next to (para) another phrase. When you paraphrase a pas- sage, you cast and recast its key terms into near synonyms, translating it into a parallel statement. The goal of paraphrasing is to open up the possible meanings of the words; it’s a mode of inquiry. Why is paraphrasing useful? The answer has to do with words— what they are and what we do with them. When we read, it is easy to skip quickly over the words, assum- ing we know what they mean. Yet when people start talking about what they mean by Paraphrase ! 3 33 34 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods particular words—the difference, for example, between assertive and aggressive or the meaning of ordinary words such as polite, realistic, or gentlemanly—they usually find less agreement than they expected. Most words mean more than one thing, and mean
  • 122. different things to different people. What you say is inescapably a product of how you say it. Language doesn’t merely reflect reality; what we see as reality is shaped by the words we use. This idea is known as the constitutive theory of language. It is opposed to the so- called “transparent” theory of language, wherein it is implied that we can see through words to some meaning that exists beyond and is independent of them. When you paraphrase language, whether your own or language you encounter in your reading, you are not just defining terms but opening out the wide range of implications those words inevitably possess. We call this activity Paraphrase " 3 because usually one paraphrase is not enough. Take a sentence you want to understand better and recast it into other language three times. This will banish the problematic notion that the meaning of words is self- evident, and it will stimulate your thinking. If you paraphrase a key passage from a reading several times, you will discover that it gets you working with the language. But you need to paraphrase slavishly. You can’t let yourself just go for the gist; replace all of the key words. The new words you are forced to come up with represent first stabs at interpretation, at having (small) ideas about what you are reading by unearthing a range of possible meanings embedded in the passage.
  • 123. In practice, Paraphrase " 3 has three steps: 1. Select a single sentence or phrase from whatever it is you are studying that you think is interesting, perhaps puzzling, and especially useful for understanding the material. 2. Do Paraphrase " 3. Find synonyms for all of the key terms— and do this three times. 3. Reflect. What have you come to recognize about the original passage on the basis of repeated restatement? Try this 3.1: Experimenting with Paraphrase " 3 Recast the substantive language of the following statements using Paraphrase " 3: • I am entitled to my opinion. • We hold these truths to be self-evident. • That’s just common sense. What do you come to understand about these remarks as a result of paraphrasing? Which words, for example, are most slippery (that is, difficult to define)? It is interesting to note, by the way, that Thomas Jefferson originally wrote the words “sacred and undeniable” in his draft of the Declaration of Independence, instead of “self-evident.” So what?
  • 124. Notice and Focus (Ranking) 35 Try this 3.2: Doing Paraphrase " 3 with a Reading Recast the substantive language of a key sentence or short passage in something you are reading—say, a passage you find central or difficult in any of your assigned reading, the kind of passage most likely to attract yellow highlighter. Try not to make the language of your paraphrase more general than the original. This method is an excellent way to prepare for class discussion or to generate thinking about the read- ing that you might use in a paper. It is also, as we discuss in Unit III, a key method of analyzing the secondary sources that you draw on in your papers. NOTICE AND FOCUS (RANKING) The activity called Notice and Focus guides you to dwell longer with the data before feeling compelled to decide what the data mean. Repeatedly returning to the question, “What do you notice?” is one of the best ways to counteract the tendency to generalize too rapidly. “What do you notice?” redirects attention to the subject matter itself and delays the pressure to come up with answers. So the first step is to repeatedly answer the question, “What do you notice?” being
  • 125. sure to cite actual details of the thing being observed rather than moving to more general observations about it. This phase of the exercise should produce an extended and unordered list of details—features of the thing being observed—that call atten- tion to themselves for one reason or another. The second step is the focusing part in which you rank (create an order of impor- tance for) the various features of the subject that you have noticed. Answer the question “Which three details (specific features of the subject matter) are most interesting (or significant or revealing or strange)?” The purpose of relying on “interesting” or one of the other suggested words is that these will help to deactivate the like/dislike switch, which is so much a reflex in all of us, and replace it with a more analytical perspective. The third step in this process is to say why the three things you selected struck you as the most interesting. Your attempts to answer this “why” question will trigger leaps from observation to interpretive conclusions. Doing Notice and Focus is more difficult than it sounds. Remember to allow your- self to notice as much as you can about what you are looking at before you try to explain it. Dwell with the data (in that attitude of uncertainty we’ve recommended in Chapter 2). Record what you see. Resist moving to generalization or, worse, to judg- ment. The longer you allow yourself to dwell on the data, the
  • 126. more you will notice, and the richer your interpretation of the evidence will ultimately be. Prompts: Interesting and Strange What does it mean to find something “interesting”? Often we are interested by things that have captured our attention without our clearly knowing why. Interest and curiosity are near cousins. The word strange is a useful prompt because it gives us permission to notice oddities. Strange invites us to defamiliarize things within our range of notice. Strange, 36 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods in this context, is not a judgmental term but one denoting features of a subject or situation that aren’t readily explainable. Where you locate something strange, you have something to interpret—to figure out what makes it strange and why. Along similar lines, the words revealing and significant work by requiring you to make choices that can lead to interpretive leaps. If something strikes you as revealing or significant, even if you’re not yet sure why, you will eventually have to produce some explanation.
  • 127. Try this 3.3: Doing Notice and Focus with a Room Practice this activity with the room you’re in. List a number of details about it, then rank the three most important ones. Use as a focusing question any of the four words suggested above—interesting, significant, revealing or strange. Or come up with your own focus for the ranking, such as the three aspects of the room that seem most to affect the way you feel and behave in the space. Try this 3.4: Notice and Focus Fieldwork Try this exercise with a range of subjects: a photograph, a cartoon, an editorial, conversations overheard around campus, looking at people’s shoes, political speeches, and so forth. Remember to include all three steps: notice, rank and say why. 10 ON 1 The exercise we call 10 on 1 is a cousin of Notice and Focus—it too depends on extended observation but with more focus and usually occurring at a later stage of analysis. Notice and Focus is useful because it frees you to look at the object with no constraints or prejudgments. Notice and Focus treats your subject matter as a broad canvas to move around in. 10 on 1 promotes a more intensive and elaborate explora- tion of a single representative piece of evidence. 10 on 1 is built on the idea that one sure way to notice more is to narrow your scope.
  • 128. The term 10 on 1 is shorthand for the principle that it is better to make ten ob- servations or points about a single representative issue or example (10 on 1) than to make the same basic point about ten related issues or examples (1 on 10). A paper that has evolved from detailed analysis of what the writer takes to be his or her single most telling example is far more likely to arrive at a good idea than a paper that settles prematurely for one idea and applies it mechanically to each piece of evidence it encounters (i.e., the same general idea attached to 10 similar examples). The shift from making one observation about ten examples to making ten pos- sible observations about your single best example is the aim of the exercise. Ten, in this case, is an arbitrary number. The ten are the observations you make about your representative example along with any ideas these observations start to give you. If you can keep the number 10 in mind, it will prod you to keep asking yourself ques- tions rather than stopping the observation process too soon. What do I notice? What else do I notice? What might this imply? What else might it imply? For extended discussion of doing 10 on 1 as an organizational principle for papers, see Chapter 8 (Using Evidence to Build a Paper) in Unit II, Writing the Analytical
  • 129. The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast 37 Essay. We have included this brief discussion to better integrate 10 on 1 with our other observational strategies. THE METHOD: WORKING WITH PATTERNS OF REPETITION AND CONTRAST The Method is our shorthand for a systematic procedure for analyzing evidence by looking for patterns of repetition and contrast. It differs from other tools we have been offering in being more comprehensive. Whereas Notice and Focus and 10 on 1 cut through a wealth of data to focus on individual details, The Method goes for the whole picture, involving methodical application of a matrix or grid of observational moves upon a subject. Although these are separate moves, they also work together and build cumulatively to the discovery of an infrastructure, a blueprint of the whole. Here is the procedure in its most pared-down form: • What repeats? • What goes with what? • What is opposed to what? • What doesn’t fit? • And for any of these, so what?
  • 130. As you can see, these are the steps that we first presented as Move 4, Look for Patterns, in the Five Analytical Moves of Chapter 1. Now we are returning to this move in more elaborate form. Before laying out these steps more precisely, we want first to mention that The Method can be applied to virtually anything you wish to analyze—an essay, a political campaign, a work of visual or verbal art, a dense passage from some secondary source that you feel to be important but can’t quite figure out, and, last but not least, your own writing. It may be helpful to think of this method of analysis as a form of mental doo- dling, one that encourages the attitude of negative capability we spoke of in Chapter 2. Rather than worrying about what you are going to say, or about whether you under- stand, you instead get out a pencil and start tallying up what you see. Engaged in this process, you’ll soon find yourself gaining entry to the logic of your subject matter. The method of looking for patterns works through a series of steps. Hold yourself initially to doing the steps one at a time and in order. Later, you will be able to record your answers under each of the three steps simultaneously. Although the steps of The Method are discrete and modular, they are also consecutive. They proceed by a kind of narrative logic. Each step leads logically to the next, and then to various kinds of regrouping, which is actually rethinking. (Note: we have
  • 131. divided into two kinds of repetition, exact and similar, what was one step in the Five Analytical Moves.) Step 1. Locate exact repetitions—identical or nearly identical words or details—and note the number of times each repeats. For example, if the word seems repeats three times, write “seems " 3.” Consider different forms of the same word—seemed, seem—as exact repetitions. Similarly, if 38 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods you are working with images rather than words, the repeated appearance of high foreheads would constitute an exact repetition. Concentrate on substantive (meaning-carrying) words. Only in rare cases do words like “and” or “the” merit attention as a significant repetition. If you are working with a longer text, such as an essay or book chapter or short story, limit yourself to recording the half-dozen or so words that call attention to themselves through repetition. Step 2. Locate repetitions of the same or similar kind of detail or word—which we call strands—and name the connecting logic. (For example, polite, courteous, mannerly and accuse, defense, justice, witness are strands.)
  • 132. Simply listing the various strands that you find in your evidence goes a long way toward helping you discover what is most interesting and important for you to ad- dress. But to use the discovery of strands as an analytical tool, you have to do more than list. You have to name the common denominators that make the words or details in your list identifiable as a strand. Naming and renaming your strands will trigger ideas; it is itself an analytical move. And again, when working with longer pieces, try to locate the half-dozen strands that seem to you most important. Step 3. Locate details or words that form or suggest binary oppositions, and select from these the most important ones, which function as organizing contrasts. Sometimes patterns of repetition that you begin to notice in a particular subject matter are significant because they are part of a contrast—a basic opposition—around which the subject matter is structured. To find these oppositions, ask yourself, What is opposed to what? When looking for binary oppositions, start with what’s on the page. List words or details that are opposed to other words or details. Note that often these opposi- tions are not obvious; you need to become aware of what is repeatedly there and then ask yourself, is something opposed to this? And often the oppositions that you discover are not actual words in a text but implied
  • 133. meanings. For example, images of rocks and water might suggest the binary permanence/impermanence or unchanging/changing. This process of constructing binary oppositions from the data usually leads you to discover what we call organizing contrasts. An organizing contrast is a central bi- nary, one that reveals the central issues and concerns in the material you are studying and also provides—like the structural beam in a building—its unifying shape. Some examples that we encounter frequently are nature/civilization, city/country, public/ private, organic/ inorganic, and voluntary/involuntary. Step 4. Rank the data within your lists to isolate what you take to be the most important repetitions, strands, and binaries. Then write a paragraph—half a page or so—in which you explain your choice of one repetition or one strand or one binary as central to understanding whatever you have been observing. Ranking your data in terms of its importance is a means of moving toward interpretive leaps. Your most impor- tant binaries might be a pair of opposed terms and/or ideas, but each might also be a strand that is opposed to another strand. The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast 39
  • 134. Step 5. Search for anomalies—data that do not seem to fit any of the dominant patterns. We have made this the last step because anomalies often become evident only after you have begun to discern a pattern, so it is best to locate repetitions, strands, and organizing contrasts—things that fit together in some way— before looking for things that seem not to fit. Once you see an anomaly, you will often find that it is part of a strand you had not detected (and perhaps one side of a previously unseen binary). In this respect, looking for anomalies encourages defamiliarizing—it’s great for shaking yourself out of potentially limited ways of looking at your evi- dence and getting you to consider other possible interpretations. Thinking Recursively with Strands and Binaries Applying The Method has the effect of inducing you to get physical with the data— literally, for you will probably find yourself circling, underlining, and listing. Although you will thus descend from the heights of abstraction to the realm of concrete detail, the point of tallying repetitions and strands and binaries and then selecting the most important and interesting ones is to trigger ideas. The discipline required to notice patterns in the language produces more specific, more carefully grounded conclusions than you otherwise might produce. You should expect ideas to suggest themselves to you as you move through the
  • 135. mechanical steps of The Method. The active thinking often takes place as you are grouping and regrouping. As you start listing, you will find that strands begin to sug- gest other strands that are in opposition to them. And you may find that words you first took to be parts of a single strand are actually parts of different strands and are, perhaps, in opposition. This process of noticing and then relocating words and details into different patterns is one aspect of using The Method that can push your analysis to interpretation. To some extent using The Method is archaeological. It digs into the language or the material details of whatever you are analyzing in order to unearth its thinking. This is most evident in the discovery of organizing contrasts. Binary oppositions often indicate places where there is struggle among various points of view. And there is usually no single “right” answer about which of a number of binaries is the primary organizing contrast. One of the best ways to develop your analyses is to reformulate binaries, trying on different possible oppositions as the primary one. (For more on using binaries analytically, see Chapter 5, Analyzing Arguments.) Thus far we have been talking about The Method as a grid for viewing other peo- ple’s finished work. The Method also describes the processes by which writers, artists, scientists, and all manner of thinkers create those works in the
  • 136. first place. Much of the thinking that we do as we write and read happens through a process of associa- tion, which is, by its very nature, repetitive. In associative thinking, thoughts develop as words and details, which suggest other words and details that are like them. Thinking moves not just forward in a straight line, but sideways and in circles. We repeatedly make connections; we figure out what goes with what and what is opposed to what. In this sense, writing (making something out of words) and reading (arriving at an understanding of someone else’s words) operate in much the same way. 40 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods Generating Ideas with The Method: An Example See how the thinking in the following paragraph moves because the writer is noting strands and binaries. First he notes the differences in two kinds of fashion ads aimed at men. There are the high-fashion ads and the Dockers ads. In the first of these, the word beautiful repeats twice as part of a strand (including gorgeous, interesting, supermodel, demure). The writer then poses traits of the Dockers ads as an opposing strand. Instead of a beautiful face there is no face, instead of “gorgeous outfit,” the author says “it’s tough to concentrate on
  • 137. the clothes.” These oppositions cause the writer to make his interpretive leap, that the Dockers ads “weren’t primarily concerned with clothes at all” and that this was intentional. The most striking aspect of the spots is how different they are from typical fashion advertising. If you look at men’s fashion magazines, for example, at the advertisements for the suits of Ralph Lauren or Valentino or Hugo Boss, they almost always consist of a beautiful man, with something in- teresting done to his hair, wearing a gorgeous outfit. At the most, the man may be gesturing discreetly, or smiling in the demure way that a man like that might smile after, say, telling the supermodel at the next table no thanks he has to catch an early-morning flight to Milan. But that’s all. The beautiful face and the clothes tell the whole story. The Dockers ads, though, are almost exactly the opposite. There’s no face. The camera is jumping around so much that it’s tough to concentrate on the clothes. And instead of stark simplicity, the fashion image is overlaid with a constant, confusing patter. It’s almost as if the Dockers ads weren’t primarily con- cerned with clothes at all—and in fact that’s exactly what Levi’s intended. What the company had discovered, in its research, was that baby-boomer
  • 138. men felt that the chief thing missing from their lives was male friend- ship. Caught between the demands of the families that many of them had started in the eighties and career considerations that had grown more onerous, they felt they had lost touch with other men. The purpose of the ads—the chatter, the lounging around, the quick cuts—was simply to conjure up a place where men could put on one-hundred- percent-cotton khakis and reconnect with one another. In the original advertising brief, that imaginary place was dubbed Dockers World. —Malcolm Gladwell, “Listening to Khakis” Doing The Method on a Poem: Our Analysis Here is an example of how one might do The Method on a piece of text—in this case, a student poem. You might try it yourself first, using our version to check against your own. The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast 41 Brooklyn Heights, 4:00 A.M. Dana Ferrelli sipping a warm forty oz.
  • 139. Coors Light on a stoop in Brooklyn Heights. I look across the street, in the open window; Blonde bobbing heads, the smack of a jump rope, laughter of my friends breaking beer bottles. Putting out their burning filters on the #5 of a hopscotch court. We reminisce of days when we were Fat, pimple faced— look how far we’ve come. But tomorrow a little blonde girl will pick up a Marlboro Light filter, just to play. And I’ll buy another forty, because that’s how I play now. Reminiscing about how far I’ve come 1. Words that repeat exactly: forty " 2, blonde " 2, how far
  • 140. we’ve (I’ve) come " 2, light " 2, reminisce, reminiscing " 2, filter, filters " 2, Brooklyn Heights " 2 2. Strands: jump rope, laughter, play, hopscotch (connecting logic: childhood games representing the carefree worldview of childhood); Coors Light, Marlboro Light filters, beer bottles (connecting logic: drugs, adult “games,” escapism?); smack, burning, breaking (violent actions and powerful emotion: burning) 3. Binary oppositions: how far we’ve come/how far I’ve come (a move from plural to singular, from a sense of group identity to isolation, from group values to a more individual consideration) 42 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods Blonde bobbing heads/little blonde girl Burning/putting out Coors Light, Marlboro Lights/jump rope, hopscotch How far I’ve come (two meanings of far?, one positive, one not) Heights/stoop Present/past
  • 141. 4. Ranked repetitions, strands and binaries plus paragraph explaining the choice of one of these as central to understanding. Most important repetitions: forty, how far we’ve/I’ve come Most important strands: jump rope, laughter, play, hopscotch; Coors Light, Marlboro Light filters, beer bottles Most important binaries: jump rope, laugher, play, hopscotch versus Coors Light, Marlboro Light filters, beer bottles; burning/putting out Paragraph(s): This is a poem about growing up—or failing to grow up, both being subjects about which the poem expresses mixed emotions. The repetition of forty (forty-ounce beer) is interesting in this context. It signals a certain weariness—perhaps with a kind of pun on forty to suggest middle age and thus the speaker’s concern about moving toward being older in a way that seems stale and flat. The beer, after all, is warm— which is not the best state for a beer to be in, once opened, if it is to retain its taste and character. Forty ounces of beer—“supersizing”—suggest excess. This reading of forty as excess along with the possible allusion to middle age takes us to what is, in our reading of the poem, the most important (or at least most interesting) binary opposition: burning versus putting out. We are
  • 142. attracted to this binary because it seems to be part of a more intense strand in the poem, one that runs counter to the weary prospect of moving on toward a perhaps lonely (“how far I’ve come”) middle-aged feeling. Burning goes with breaking and the smack of the jump rope, and even putting out, if we visualize putting out not just as fire extinguished but in terms of putting a cigarette out by pushing the burning end of it into something (the number 5 on the hopscotch court). The poem’s language has a violent and passionate edge to it, even though the violent words are not always in a violent context (for example, the smack of the jump rope). This is a rather melancholy poem in which, perhaps, the poetic voice is mourning the passing, the “putting out” of the passion of youth (“burning”). In the poem’s more obvious binary—the opposition of childhood games to more “adult” ones—the same melancholy plays itself out, making the poem’s refrain-like repetition of “how far I’ve come” ring with unhappy irony. The little blonde girl is an image of the speaker’s own past self (because the poem talks about reminiscing), and the speaker mourns that little girl’s (her own) passing into a more uncertain and less carefree state. It is 4:00 a.m. in Brooklyn Heights—just about the end of night, the darkest point perhaps before the beginning of morning, and windows in the poem are open, so things are
  • 143. The Method: Working with Patterns of Repetition and Contrast 43 not all bad. The friends make noise together, break bottles together, revisit hopscotch square 5 together, and contemplate moving on. We couldn’t, by the way, find any significant anomalies (step 5) in the poem. That in itself suggests how highly patterned the poem is around its basic strands and binaries. Try this 3.5: Apply The Method to Something You Are Reading Try The Method on a piece of reading that you wish to understand better, perhaps a series of editorials on the same subject, an essay, one or more poems by the same author (because The Method is useful for reading across texts for common denomina- tors), a collection of stories, a political speech, and so on. You can work with as little as a few paragraphs or as much as an entire article or chapter or book. A Procedure for Finding and Querying Binaries As should be evident, working with binaries is central to using The Method. But bi- naries are so pervasive a part of analysis that we’ve given them their own place in the Toolkit, and we take them up again in an upcoming chapter (Chapter 5, Analyzing
  • 144. Arguments). In Chapter 5 we argue that writing and analyzing arguments is largely a mat- ter of unearthing, rephrasing, and reevaluating the binary oppositions (this against that, on/off, dark/light, wild/domestic) that undergird them. Working with binaries is not the same thing as either/or thinking (right/wrong, good/bad, black/white, wel- fare state/free society). Either/or thinking is a problem because it reduces things to oversimplified extremes and reduces complex situations to only two choices. Work- ing with binaries, however, is not about creating stark oppositions and weighing in heavily on one side or the other. It is about finding these oppositions and querying their accuracy. In Chapter 5 there is a fuller discussion of a four-step procedure for working with binaries. This procedure should enhance your ability to understand and confront other people’s arguments and your own. Here, in brief, are the four steps: 1. Locate a Range of Opposing Categories (Binaries) 2. Analyze and Define the Opposing Terms 3. Question the Accuracy of the Binary and Rephrase the Terms 4. Substitute “To What Extent?” for “Either/Or” Step four is the move that we are recommending now. It is a
  • 145. tool for rephrasing either/or choices—either free enterprise or government control—into qualified claims, making things a matter of degree. The operative phrase is “to what extent” or “the extent to which.” To what extent is the Supreme Court decision on allowing manufac- turers to set minimum prices for retailers an evasion of government responsibility in favor of unregulated free enterprise? Try this 3.6: Working with Binaries Write a few paragraphs in which you work with the binaries suggested by the follow- ing familiar expression: “School gets in the way of one’s education.” Keep the focus on 44 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods working through the binaries implicit in the quotation. What other terms would you substitute for “school” and “education”? Coming up with a range of synonyms for each term will clarify what is at stake in the binary. Remember to consider the accuracy of the claim. To what extent, and in what ways, is the expression both true and false? Try this 3.7: Fieldwork in Either/Or Thinking Locate some organizing contrasts in anything—something you are studying, some- thing you’ve just written, something you saw on television last
  • 146. night, something on the front page of the newspaper, something going on at your campus or workplace, and so forth. Binaries pervade the way we think; therefore, you can expect to find them everywhere. Consider, for example, the binaries suggested by current trends in contemporary music or by the representation of women in birthday cards. Having selected the binaries you want to work with, pick one and transform the either/or thinking into more qualified thinking using the extent-to-which formula. FREEWRITING We have placed freewriting last in the Toolkit because it draws on the other writing strategies discussed in this chapter, notably paraphrasing and 10 on 1. Freewriting is a method of arriving at ideas by writing continuously about a subject for a limited period of time without pausing to edit, correct, bite your pen, or stare into space. The rationale behind this activity can be understood through a well- known remark by the novelist E.M. Forster (in regard to the “tyranny” of prearranging everything): “How do I know what I think until I see what I say?” Freewriting gives you the chance to see what you’ll say. The writer Anne Lamott writes eloquently (in Bird by Bird) about the censor we all hear as a nasty voice—actually a collection of nasty voices—in our
  • 147. heads that keep us from writing. These are the internalized voices of past cr itics whose comments have become magnified to suggest that we will never get it right. Freewriting allows us to tune out these voices long enough to discover what we might think. This activity is sometimes known by the term prewriting. We prefer the terms freewriting or exploratory writing because prewriting implies something that happens before writing and that has no place in the final form. Good analytical writing, at whatever stage, has an exploratory feel. It shares its discovery process with the reader. And to a significant extent, the final draft re-creates for the reader the writer’s experi- ence of arriving at his or her key ideas. This is not to say that writers should care only about the process of discovery and not about the final product, nor are we suggesting that writers should substitute freewriting and inconclusive thinking for carefully organized finished drafts. We are claiming, however, that writers have a much easier and more productive experience revising the final or penultimate draft if they spend more time doing various kinds of exploratory writing before moving to the final draft stage. Freewriting 45
  • 148. In freewriting, you write without stopping for a predetermined period of time, usually ten to twenty minutes. There aren’t many rules to freewriting, just that it is important to keep your pen (or fingers on the keyboard) moving. Don’t reread as you go. Don’t pause to correct things. Don’t cross things out. Just keep writing. To get to good writing, you first have to tolerate some chaos. In freewriting, especially if you engage in it frequently, you often surprise yourself with the quality of your own thinking, with the ideas you didn’t really know you had and the many details you hadn’t really noticed until you started writing. Try this 3.8: Descriptions from Everyday Life Spend a week describing things that you can observe in your everyday environment— whatever interests you on a particular day, or the same kind of thing over a period of days. Get the details of what you are describing on the page. If judgments and general- izations emerge, let them come, but don’t stay on them long. Get back to the narration of detail as quickly as you can. At the end of the week, write a piece called either “What I learned in a week of looking at . . . ” or come up with your own shaping title. Passage-Based Focused Freewriting Passage-based focused freewriting is a version of freewriting particularly suited for increasing your ability to learn from what you read. It prompts
  • 149. in-depth analysis of a representative example, on the assumption that you’ll attain a better appreciation of the whole after you’ve explored how a piece of it works. Passage-based focused freewriting resembles freewriting in encouraging you to leap associatively from idea to idea as they arise, and it differs from a finished essay, in which the sentences follow logically as you unfold your central idea. The passage- based version differs from regular freewriting, however, in adding the limitation of focus on a piece of text within which this associative thinking may occur. Narrow the scope to a single passage, a brief piece of the reading (at least a sen- tence, at most a paragraph) to anchor your analysis. You might choose the passage in answer to one of the following questions: • What one passage in the reading most needs to be discussed— is most useful for understanding the material—and why? • What one passage seems puzzling, difficult to pin down, anomalous, or even just unclear—and how might this be explained? One advantage of focused freewriting is that its impromptu nature encourages you to take chances, to think out loud on the page. It invites you to notice what you notice in the moment and take some stabs at what it might mean without having to
  • 150. worry about formulating a weighty thesis statement or maintaining consistency. It allows you to worry less about what you don’t understand and instead start to work things out as you write. There is no set procedure for such writing, but here are some guidelines: 46 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods 1. Seek to understand before you judge. Focus on what the text is saying and doing and what it is inviting readers to think, not on your own agreement/ disagreement or like/dislike. Attend to the point of view it advances on the subject at hand, not to your point of view on that subject. Eventually you should arrive at your point of view about its point of view, but that generally comes later. 2. Choose a limited piece of concrete evidence to focus on. Select a passage that you find interesting, that you have questions about, perhaps one that you don’t quite understand. That way your writing will have some work to do. 3. Contextualize the evidence. Where does the passage come from in the text? Of what larger discussion is it a part? Briefly answering these questions prevents
  • 151. you from taking things out of context. 4. Make observations about the evidence. Stay close to the data you’ve quoted. Paraphrase key phrases in the passage, teasing out the possible meanings of these words. Then reflect on what you’ve come to better understand through para- phrasing. Note: to encourage attention to the words and discourage overly gen- eral leaps, it is useful to write out the passage before you begin your freewriting (especially if you are being asked to do the freewriting in class, as is often the case in college writing). The act of copying often induces you to notice more about the particular features of your chosen passage. 5. Share your reasoning about what the evidence means. As you move from ob- servation to implication, remember that you need to explain how you know the data mean what you claim they mean. 6. Address how the passage is representative. Consider how the passage you’ve selected connects to broader issues in the reading. At various points in your freewriting feel free to move from your analysis of local details to address what, given what you now understand, the work as a whole may plausibly be “saying” about this or that issue or question. It’s okay to work with the details for almost the entire time and then press yourself to an interpretive leap with the formula,
  • 152. “I’m almost out of time but my big point is . . .” Try this 3.9: Doing a Passage-Based Focused Freewrite Select a passage from any of the material that you are reading and copy it at the top of the page. Then do a twenty-minute focused freewrite on it, using the guide- lines already stated. It is often productive to take the focused freewrite and type it, revising and further freewriting until you have filled the inevitable gaps in your thinking that the time limit has created. (One colleague of ours has students do this in a different font, so both can see how the thinking is evolving.) Eventually, you can build up, through a process of accretion, the thinking for an entire paper in this way. Writers’ Notebooks Writers’ notebooks (journals) are unlike a personal diary, in which you keep track of your days’ activities and recount the feelings these occasioned; journals are for gen- erating and collecting ideas and for keeping track of your ongoing interactions with Freewriting 47 course materials. A journal can be, in effect, a collection of focused freewrites that you develop in response to the reading and lectures in a course.
  • 153. The best way to get a journal to work for you is to experiment. You might try, for example, copying and commenting on statements from your reading or class meetings that you found potentially illuminating. Use the journal to write down the ideas, reac- tions, and germs of ideas you had during a class discussion or that you found running around in your head after a late night’s reading. Use the journal to retain your first impressions of books or films or music or performances or whatever so that you can then look back at them and trace the development of your thinking. If possible, write in your journal every day. As with freewriting, the best way to get started is just to start, see what happens, and take it from there. Also as with freewrit- ing, the more you write, the more you’ll find yourself noticing, and, thus, the more you’ll have to say. Passage-Based Focused Freewriting: An Example Following is an example of a student’s exploratory writing on an essay by the twentieth-century, African-American writer Langston Hughes. The piece is a twenty- minute reflection on two excerpts. Most notable about this piece, perhaps, is the sheer number of interesting ideas. That may be because the writer continually returns to the language of the original quotes for inspiration. She is not restricted by main- taining a single and consistent thread. It is interesting, though,
  • 154. that as the freewrite progresses, a primary focus (on the second of her two quotes) seems to emerge. Passages from “The Negro Artist and the Racial Mountain” by Langston Hughes “But jazz to me is one of the inherent expressions of Negro life in America; the eternal tom-tom beating in the Negro soul—the tom-tom of revolt against weariness in a white world, a world of subway trains, and work, work, work; the tom-tom of joy and laughter, and pain swallowed in a smile. Yet the Philadelphia clubwoman is ashamed to say that her race created it and she does not like me to write about it. The old subconscious ‘white is best’ runs through her mind. . . . And now she turns up her nose at jazz and all its manifestations— likewise almost everything else distinctly racial.” “We build our temples for tomorrow, strong as we know how, and we stand on top of the mountain, free within ourselves.” Langston Hughes’s 1926 essay on the situation of the Negro artist in America sets up some interesting issues that are as relevant today as they were in Hughes’s time. Interestingly, the final sentence of the essay (“We build our temples . . .”) will be echoed some four decades later by the Civil Rights leader, Martin Luther King, but with a different spin on the idea of freedom. Hughes writes “we stand on top of the mountain, free within ourselves.” King says, “Free at last, free at last, my God almighty, we’re free at last.” King asserts an opening out into the world—a freeing
  • 155. of black people, finally, from slavery and then another century of oppression. Hughes speaks of blacks in a more isolated position— “on top of the mountain” and “within ourselves.” Although the mountain may stand for a height from which the artist can speak, it is hard to be heard from the top of mountains. It is one thing to be free. It is another to be free within oneself. What does this phrase mean? If I am free within myself I am at least less vulnerable to those who would restrict me from without. I can live with 48 Chapter 3 A Toolkit of Analytical Methods their restrictions. Mine is an inner freedom. Does inner freedom empower artists? Perhaps it does. It may allow them to say what they want and not worry about what others say or think. This is one thing that Hughes seems to be calling for. But he is also worried about lack of recognition of Negro artists, not only by whites but by blacks. His use of the repeated phrase, tom-tom, is interesting in this respect. It, like the word “mountain,” becomes a kind of refrain in the essay—announcing both a desire to rise above the world and its difficulties (mountain) and a desire to be heard (tom-tom and mountain as pulpit). The idea of revolt, outright rebellion, is present but subdued in the essay. The tom-tom is a “revolt against weariness” and also an instrument for expressing
  • 156. “joy and laughter.” The tom-tom also suggests a link with a past African and probably Native American culture—communicating by drum and music and dance. White culture in the essay stands for a joyless world of “work, work, work.” This is something I would like to think about more, as the essay seems to link the loss of soul with the middle and upper classes, both black and white. And so the essay seeks to claim another space among those he calls “the low down folks, the so-called common element.” Of these he says “ . . . they do not particularly care whether they are like white folks or anybody else. Their joy runs, bang! into ecstasy. Their religion soars to a shout. Work maybe a little today, rest a little tomorrow. Play awhile. Sing awhile. O, let’s dance!” In these lines Hughes the poet clearly appears. Does he say then that the Negro artist needs to draw from those of his own people who are the most removed from middle class American life? If I had more time, I would start thinking here about Hughes’s use of the words “race” and “racial.” . . . ASSIGNMENTS: Using the Toolkit 1. Pick a single scene from a film, a single photograph from a collection of a pho- tographer’s photographs, or some other single example that is interestingly rep- resentative of a larger subject. Do 10 on 1 with your scene or other representative example. Notice as much as you can about it. Then organize your observations using The Method: What details repeat? What is opposed to what? Use the
  • 157. results to generate a piece of writing. 2. Work with binaries to develop a short essay. You might consider, for example, some of the either/or categories that students tend to put each other in, or their teachers. Or look to current events in the world or in some more local arena, and find the binaries that seem to divide people or groups. 3. Find a subject to analyze using Notice and Focus and then The Method. Your aim here initially is not to write a formal paper but to do data- gathering on the page. After you have written the paragraph that is the final part of The Method, revise and expand your work into a short essay. Don’t worry too much at this point about form (introductory paragraph, for example) or thesis. Just write at greater length about what you noticed and what you selected as most revealing or interesting or strange or significant, and why. You might use a story, essay, or poem by a writer you like, perhaps a painting or an artistic photograph. The Method could yield interesting results applied to the architecture on your campus, the student newspaper, campus clothing styles, or the latest news about the economy. CHAPTER 4
  • 158. Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn’t, and How to Do It While Chapter 3, A Toolkit of Analytical Methods, provides a number of analytical methods (Paraphrase " 3, Notice and Focus, The Method, Working with Binaries, and Freewriting), this chapter offers only one—the interpretation-triggering question “So what?” This question, along with a variant we call Seems to Be about X . . . , takes you from observations to theories about the meaning of your data. Interpretation is the meaning-making phase of analysis. Think of the analytical tools in this book as prompts or triggers. As you saw in Chapter 3, the words interesting, strange, significant, and revealing prompt different kinds of noticing. Each causes a particular spin or orientation on the way you look at your data. Similarly, when you employ the strategy we call ranking (naming one observation as more important than others), you have already pushed yourself toward interpretation. Habitually prompting your thinking with these words and phrases can train your attention, helping you to see features of your evidence that open up its meaning. We begin this chapter with an example that demonstrates how the So what? ques- tion functions, along with revisiting the prompts interesting and strange. Then we step back from practice to theory and address the issues that
  • 159. interpretation typically raises. The chapter ends with an example that brings all the steps together, from observations to implications to conclusions. To preview the theoretical discussion: just as the analytical frame of mind has to make way against its opposite, the anti-analytical mind-set, so too does interpretation. Here is a quick take on the premises underlying the pro- interpretation mind-set followed by examples of anti-interpretation claims. Pro-Interpretation Premises • Everything means, which is to say that everything in life calls on us to interpret, even when we are unaware of doing so. • Meaning is contextual, which is to say that meaning-making always occurs inside of some social or cultural or other frame of reference. 49 50 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It Anti-Interpretation Thinking • “Sometimes a cigar is just a cigar,” which is a joke that psychoanalyst Sigmund Freud made about his own interpretive practice; that is, sometimes a thing simply is what
  • 160. it is and no more. (We’ll demonstrate that a cigar is almost never just a cigar.) • “You’re just making that up,” that is, “reading into” things and finding stuff that “isn’t there.” (This is a tenacious anti-interpretation attitude. We show that it is partially justified, but mostly not.) • “I’m entitled to my opinion.” (We spoke of this reflex in Chapter 2 in the context of overpersonalizing. Its anti-interpretive and anti-analytical power comes from the mistaken idea that meanings are entirely personal and thus that all inter- pretations are subjective and not susceptible to the rules of logic. This mind-set sounds attractively democratic—all meanings are created equal—but the fact is that some interpretations are better than others. We’ll explain why this is so.) And now, onto the chapter’s primary formula for interpretation, So what? PUSHING OBSERVATIONS TO CONCLUSIONS: ASKING SO WHAT? The prompt for making the move from observation to implication and, ultimately, interpretation is So what?, which is shorthand for such questions as: What does the observation imply? Why does this observation matter?
  • 161. Where does this observation get us? How can we begin to generalize about the subject? Asking So what?—or its milder cousin, And so?—is a calling to account, which is why, in conversation, its force is potentially rude. That is, the question intervenes rather peremptorily with a “Why does this matter?” It is thus a challenge to make meaning through a creative leap—to move beyond the patterns and emphases you’ve been ob- serving in the data to tentative conclusions on what these observations suggest. The peremptoriness of the So what? question can, we think, be liberating. Okay, take the plunge, it says. Start laying out possible interpretations. And, when you are tempted to stop thinking too soon, asking So what? will press you onward. For example, let’s say you make a number of observations about the nature of e-mail communication—it’s cheap, informal, often grammatically incorrect, full of abbreviations (“IMHO”), and ephemeral (impermanent). You rank these and decide that its ephemerality is most interesting. So what? Well, that’s why so many people use it, you speculate, because it doesn’t last. So what that its popularity follows from its ephemerality? Well, apparently we like being released from the hard-and-fast rules of formal communication; e-mail frees us. So what? Well.
  • 162. The repeated asking of this question causes people to push on from and pursue the implications of their first responses; it prompts people to reason in a chain, rather than settling prematurely for a single link. Asking So What?: An Example 51 In step 1 of this process, you describe your evidence, paraphrasing key language and looking for interesting patterns of repetition and contrast. In step 2 you begin querying your own observations by making what is implicit explicit. In the final step you push your observations and statements of implications to interpretive conclusions by again asking, So what? See Figure 4.1. ASKING SO WHAT?: AN EXAMPLE The following is the opening paragraph of a talk given by a professor of Political Sci- ence at our college, Dr. Jack Gambino, on the occasion of a gallery opening featuring the work of two contemporary photographers of urban and industrial landscapes. We have located in brackets our annotations of his turns of thought, as these pivot on “strange” and “So what?”
  • 163. If you look closely at Camilo Vergara’s photo of Fern Street, Camden, 1988, you’ll notice a sign on the side of a dilapidated building: Danger: Men Working W. Hargrove Demolition Perhaps that warning captures the ominous atmosphere of these very different kinds of photographic documents by Camilo Vergara and Edward Burtynsky: “Danger: Men Working.” Watch out— human beings are at work! But the work that is presented is not so much a building-up as it is a tearing-down—the work of demolition. [Strange: tearing down is unexpected; writer asks So what? and answers.] Of course, demolition is often necessary in order to construct anew: old buildings are leveled for new projects, whether you are building a highway or bridge in an American city or a dam in the Chinese countryside. You might call modernity itself, as so many have, a process of creative destruction, a term used variously to describe modern art, capitalism, and technological innovation. The photographs in this exhibit, however, force us to pay attention to the “destructive” side of this modern At some point the So what? question will begin to trigger a move from implications to possible conclusions.
  • 164. Observation So what? Implication(s) Implications So what? Conclusions(s) FIGURE 4.1 So What? 52 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It equation. [Strange: photos emphasize destruction and not creation; writer asks So what? and answers.] What both Burtynsky and Vergara do in their respective ways is to put up a warning sign—they ques- tion whether the reworking of our natural and social environment leads to a sustainable human future. And they wonder whether the process of creative destruction may not have spun recklessly out of control, producing places that are neither habitable nor sustainable. In fact, a common element connecting the two photographic versions is the near absence of people in the landscape. [Writer points to supporting feature of evidence, which he will further theorize.] While we see the evidence of the transforming power of human production on the physical and social environment, neither Vergara’s urban ruins nor Burtynsky’s indus-
  • 165. trial sites actually show us “men working.” [Writer continues to move by noticing strange absence of people in photographs of sites where men work.] Isolated figures peer suspiciously out back doors or pick through the rubble, but they appear out of place. [Writer asks a final So what? and arrives at a conclusion.] It is this sense of displacement—of human beings alienated from the environments they themselves have created—that provides the most haunting aspect of the work of these two photographers. The Gambino paragraph is a good example of how interpretive paragraphs are generated. Notice the pattern by which the paragraph moves: the observation of something strange, about which the writer asks and answers So what? several times until arriving at a final So what?—the point at which he decides what his observations ultimately mean. We call the final So what? in this chain of think- ing “the ultimate So what” because it moves from implications to the writer’s culminating point. The Gambino paragraph is also a good example of the way paragraphs operate as smaller units or stages on the way to a longer paper. We’ll say more in Chapter 10 about paragraph structure. For now, think of paragraphs as the
  • 166. building blocks of a piece of thinking in which movement of mind creates the structure (not the too-simple notion of topic sentence + evidence). Ideas evolve one paragraph at a time; there is no rule that says you can’t write a paper in paragraph-length chunks and later line these up in a way that best reveals the big picture. Try this 4.1: Tracking the Interpretive Process in a Student Paper The following paper offers you an opportunity to further observe how a writer moves from observation to interpretation. We’ve inserted the phrase So what? at the places in the first four paragraphs where that prompt seems to be allowing the writer to draw out the implication of an observation. We have left the last three paragraphs unmarked so that you can supply the interpretive prompts wherever you see the writer moving from observations to implications and conclusions. Also watch for—and mark—places where the writer moves forward by seeking to explain some feature of the dance that she found strange. Asking So What?: An Example 53 Hua dan: The Dance of Values in the Beijing Opera [1] Lanfang says in his autobiography that ′′The beautiful dance movements created by
  • 167. past artists are all based on gestures in real life, synthesized and accentuated to become art′′ . . . (36). In this quote Lanfang emphasizes a representation of life through ′′beautiful′′ movement. As he is a product of his culture, he is describing what his culture deems ′′beautiful.′′ The female roles in the Beijing Opera, particularly the Hua dan, convey their own set of cultural values about femininity in Chinese culture. [2] There is much posing and holding of shapes within the Hua dan role. [So what?] There is a gentle, poised focus in these moments. This allows the viewers time to take in the elegance of the shape, costumes, makeup, music, and artistry of the performer. The fruit of these efforts becomes evident and framed by the pausing. [So what?] The work the performers put in is valued in the pause. [3] All the movements are very clear in their choices between making angles and using the full extension of the limbs, particularly the arms. The angular shapes give a sharp contrast to the extension of the arms and legs. Circular formations of the arms are seamlessly round and often repeated to emphasize their distinctness. [So what?] This exactness and clarity emphasizes the importance and power of the body. By paying such attention to particulars it gives greater emphasis to the powers held in making these shapes. [4] There is much repetition and opening and closing in the
  • 168. movement. [So what?] Repetition can represent the large amount of time females spend on such activities. It can also give a sense of the time it actually takes for such actions in real life, such as sewing. The women do spend much time sewing, and this time is represented. It also takes consistency and dedication to complete such tasks multiple times, so these become valued characteristics. [5] Rhythm is also an element of the very controlled female walking consisting of small, even steps. The feet barely leave the floor and don’t extend into kicks or jumps, as do some of the male roles. Even in the Hua dan demonstration in the “Aspects of Peking Opera” video when a bounce was in the character’s step and the eyes were alive, the flow of the walk remained consistent. The smallness of the steps could represent the female’s place in so- ciety. They are petite and not flashy in their maneuvers. They complete their tasks without much fanfare. Keeping the feet low also limits the opening of the legs. Such protection and withholding represents a value in itself—the absence of overt sexual suggestion. Although the male characters may be more likely to overtly demonstrate their strength and power, it takes a great amount of control and focus for the women to execute their walks, so this convention is demonstrating the value of women keeping their struggles and work hidden. [6] Although my viewing of Peking Opera is limited, it caught my eye to see the Hua dan’s shoulders finally move in a flirtation demonstration in the
  • 169. “Aspects” video. This isola- tion and interruption of flow seemed out of character to all other demonstrated acts. All other actions were focused on creating lines and full range of motion. Breaking typically occurs only at the elbows and wrists. These shoulder shrugs break not only the lines but the flowing rhythm. Making flirtation stand out suggests that in the context of the opera, such coquettish moments are important for the audience both in terms of character and life off the stage. It also reminds the viewers that there are even more areas of the body that have not been used but are present within the character and performer. 54 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It [7] What are the recurring themes in all these observations? They lie in control, value of movement, and repetition. The “beauty” lies not only in the quality of the movement but in what it represents. The dainty representation of females, their modesty and strong work ethic, and care in their activities are of great importance, but so too is the slight pleasure in restricted flirtation. When combined, these qualities of movement create a carefully crafted portrayal of a polished female. It serves to represent not only a clear character but a beautiful and desirable female figure. IMPLICATIONS VERSUS HIDDEN MEANINGS
  • 170. Because implications (implicit meanings) are suggested by the language or details of a subject rather than explicitly stated, some people mistakenly believe that interpre- tation is a mysterious process. “Where do you get that?” they say, often suspiciously. Some people go further in their suspicion or outright rejection of interpretive think- ing. They say things like “Why can’t you just enjoy the movie?” or “Does everything have to mean something?” Two familiar phrases reveal anxiety and even hostility toward what we named in the first chapter as one of the five analytical moves: Make the Implicit Explicit. The phrases are hidden meanings and reading between the lines. We say more about these later, but first we offer an exercise demonstrating that implicit meanings are really “there,” which is to say that they are readily suggested by explicit language in the text even though they are not stated directly. Although it is true that people might not always agree on what is being implied by particular language or details, differences are usually small and can be negotiated because drawing out implications is a logical process. Taking the Pressure Off When writing about dance, the primary evidence is the dance itself and the theatrical accompaniments enhancing the work (sets, costumes, music, nar- rative, lights, etc.). Seeing and understanding how and what
  • 171. dance commu- nicates is the main task of the dance writer. Because dance is often abstract and purposely open to multiple interpretations, students are usually terrified at the prospect of finding and interpreting evidence in support of a thesis. Typical first responses to analysis include “I enjoy watching dance, but I have never looked for meaning or message.” “I don’t know enough about dance to understand it.” My responses include, “Sit back, relax, and enjoy the dance— save analy- sis for later. Start your analysis by pretending you are discussing the per- formance with a friend who did not see it. As you tell him or her about the performance, you will naturally begin to gather evidence and analyze.” —Karen Dearborn, Professor of Dance VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM Implications versus Hidden Meanings 55 Try this 4.2: Inferring Implications from Observations Each of the following statements is rich in implication. Some are quite general ob- servations; others are scientific facts, and others come to us as hypotheses from the
  • 172. social sciences. Write a list of as many plausible implications as you can think of for each of the statements. You might find it useful to do this exercise along with other people because part of its aim is to reveal the extent to which different people infer the same implications. 1. The sidewalk is disappearing as a feature of the American residential landscape. New housing developments have them only if a township requires them of the developer. (Here are a couple of implications to prime the pump: people don’t walk anywhere anymore; builders lack much sense of social responsibility; cur- rent development practices are eliminating ways of life that involve anything except the car—and there are more.) 2. New house designs are tending increasingly toward open plans in which the kitchen is not separated from the rest of the house. New house designs continue to have a room called the living room, usually a space at the front of the house near the front door, but many (not all) also have a separate space called the fam- ily room, which is usually in some part of the house farther removed from the front door and closer to the kitchen. 3. “Good fences make good neighbors.”—Robert Frost 4. In the female brain, there are more connections between the right hemisphere
  • 173. (emotions, spatial reasoning) and the left hemisphere (verbal facility). In the male brain, these two hemispheres remain more separate. 5. An increasing number of juveniles—people younger than eighteen—are being tried and convicted as adults, rather than as minors, in America, with the result that more minors are serving adult sentences for crimes they committed while still in their teens. 6. Neuroscientists tell us that the frontal cortex of the brain, the part that is respon- sible for judgment and especially for impulse control, is not fully developed in humans until roughly the age of twenty-one. What are the implications of this observation relative to observation 5? 7. Linguists have long commented on the tendency of women’s speech to use rising inflection at the end of statements as if the statements were questions. An actual command form—Be home by midnight!—thus becomes a question instead. What are we to make of the fact that in recent years younger men (under thirty) have begun to end declarative statements and command forms with rising inflections? 8. Shopping malls and grocery stores rarely have clocks. 9. All data are neutral; they’re neither good nor bad. After you have made your list of implications for each item,
  • 174. consider how you arrived at them. On the basis of this experience, how would you answer the following questions? What is the difference between an idea being “hidden” and an idea being 56 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It implied? What, in other words, is an implication? To what extent do you think most people would arrive at the same implications that you did? As Try this 4.2 illustrates, the inferring of implications does require an act of mind. But the implications are neither hidden nor fancifully invented. The charge that the meaning is hidden implies an act of conspiracy on the part of either an author, who chooses to deliberately obscure his or her meaning, or on the part of readers, who con- spire to “find” things lurking below the surface that other readers don’t know about and are unable to see. A further assumption is that people probably know what they mean most of the time but, for some perverse reason, are unwilling to come out and say so. “Reading between the lines” is a version of the hidden meaning theory in suggest- ing that we have to look for meanings elsewhere than in the lines of text themselves. At its most skeptical, reading between the lines means that an interpretation has come
  • 175. from nothing at all, from the white space between the lines, and therefore has been imposed on the material by the interpreter. Proponents of these views of analysis are, in effect, committing themselves to the position that everything in life means what it says and says what it means. This posi- tion posits another related one: that meanings are always obvious and understood in the same way by everyone, and thus don’t require interpretation (which is an example of “naturalizing our own assumptions” as discussed in Chapter 2). People who use the expressions hidden meanings and reading between the lines generally don’t recognize that these phrases imply theories of interpretation, but they do. It is probably safe to assume that most writers try to write what they mean and mean what they say. That is, they try to control the range of possible interpretations that their words could give rise to, but there is always more going on in a piece of writing (as in our everyday conversation) than can easily be pinned down and controlled. It is, in fact, an in- herent property of language that it always means more than and thus other than it says. Though we may not pause to take notice, we are continually processing what goes on around us for the indirect or suggested meanings it contains. If you observe yourself for a day, you’ll find yourself interpreting even the most direct-seeming state- ments. There’s an old cartoon about the anxiety bred by the
  • 176. continual demands of interpretation: a person saying “Good morning” causes the one addressed to respond, “What did she mean by that?” The truth to which this cartoon points is that a statement can have various mean- ings, depending on various circumstances and how it is said. The relationship between words and meaning is always complex. As Marshall McLuhan, one of the fathers of modern communication theory, noted, communication always involves determining not just what is being said, but also “what kind of message a message is.” Depending on tone and context, “Good morning” can mean a number of things. THE LIMITS ON INTERPRETATION As we said in the chapter opening, everything means, which is to say that everything in life calls on us to interpret, even when we are unaware of doing so. It is not the case, however, that things can mean whatever we want them to. There are powerful limits The Limits on Interpretation 57 on interpretation because (1) meanings are bound by rules of logic and evidence, and (2) meanings always occur within one or more particular interpretive contexts.
  • 177. To approach these claims, we need first to consider the elemental question of where meanings come from. The first thing to understand about meanings is that they are made, not ready-made in the subject matter. They are the product of a transaction between a mind and the world, between a reader and his or her materials. That is, the making of meaning is a process to which the observer and the thing observed both contribute. It is not a product of either alone. If meanings aren’t ready-made, there to be found in the subject matter, what’s to prevent people from imposing meaning with wild abandon? To pursue this question, we ask that you revisit the photograph and discussion of the painting Whistler’s Mother located at the end of Chapter 1. There we distinguished a summary—a focused description—of the painting from an interpretation that grew out of the summary. We interpreted such evidence as the figure of the mother being in profile and austerely dressed as signs that the painting is ultimately about her separateness from us, inviting us to contemplate her as an emblem of the mystery of self-sufficiency. Plausible versus Implausible Interpretations What if instead of our interpretation a person claimed that the painting is about death, with the black-clad mother mourning the death of a loved one, perhaps a per- son who lived in the house represented in the painting on the
  • 178. wall? It is true that black clothes often indicate mourning. This is a culturally accepted, recognized sign. But with only the black dress, and perhaps the sad facial expression (if it is sad) to go on, the mourning theory gets sidetracked from what is actually in the painting into story- telling. This points out one of the primary limits on the meaning-making process. • Meanings must be reasoned from sufficient evidence if they are to be judged plausible. Meanings can always be refuted by people who find fault with your reasoning or can cite conflicting evidence. Now what if another person asserted that Whistler’s mother is an alien astronaut, for example, her long black dress concealing a third leg? Obviously, this interpretation would not win wide support, and for a reason that points out another of the primary limits on the meaning-making process. • Meanings, to have value outside one’s own private realm of experience, have to make sense to other people. The assertion that Whistler’s mother is an alien as- tronaut is unlikely to be deemed acceptable by enough people to give it currency. This is to say that the relative value of interpretive meanings is socially (culturally) determined. Although people are free to say that things mean whatever they want them to mean, saying doesn’t make it so. The mourning theory has more evidence
  • 179. than the alien astronaut theory, but it still relies too heavily on what is not there, on a narrative for which there is insufficient evidence in the painting itself. Your readers’ willingness to accept an interpretation is powerfully connected to their ability to see its plausibility—that is, how it follows from both the supporting details that you have selected and the language you have used in characterizing those 58 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It details. The writer who can offer a plausible (not necessarily or obviously true, but believable) description of a subject’s key features is likely to arrive at conclusions about possible meanings that others would share. Often the best that you can hope for with analytical conclusions is not that others will say, “Yes, that is obviously right,” but “Yes, I can see where it might be possible and reasonable to think as you do.” Interpretive Contexts and Multiple Meanings There are, however, other possible interpretations that would satisfy the two criteria of sufficient evidence and broad cultural acceptance. And it is valuable to recognize that evidence usually supports more than one plausible interpretation.
  • 180. Consider, for example, a reading of Whistler’s Mother that a person might produce if he or she began with noticing the actual title, Arrangement in Grey and Black: The Artist’s Mother. From this starting point, a person might focus observation on the disposition of color exclusively and arrive at an interpretation that the painting is about painting (which might then explain why there is also a painting on the wall). The figure of the mother then would have meaning only insofar as it contained the two colors mentioned in the painting’s title, black and gray, and the painting’s representational content (the aspects of life that it shows us) would be assigned less importance. This is a promising and plausible idea for an interpretation. It makes use of different details from previous interpretations that we’ve suggested, but it would also address some of the details already targeted (the dress, the curtain) from an entirely different context, focusing on the use and arrangement of color. To generalize: two equally plausible interpretations can be made of the same thing. It is not the case that our first reading, focusing on the profile view of the mother and suggesting the painting’s concern with mysterious separateness, is right, whereas the painting-about-painting (or aesthetic) view, building from the clue in the title, is wrong. They operate within different contexts. An interpretive context is a lens. Depending on the context you
  • 181. choose—preferably a context suggested by the evidence itself—you will see different things. Regardless of how the context is arrived at, an important part of getting an interpretation accepted as plausible is to argue for the appropriateness of the interpretive context you use, not just the interpretation it takes you to. Specifying an Interpretive Context: An Example Notice how in the following analysis the student writer’s interpretation relies on his choice of a particular interpretive context, post–World War II Japan. Had he selected another context, he might have arrived at some different conclusions about the same details. Notice also how the writer perceives a pattern in the details and how he queries his own observations (So what?) to arrive at an interpretation. The series entitled “Kamaitachi” is a journal of the photographer Hosoe’s desolate childhood and wartime evacuation in the Tokyo countryside. He returns years later to the areas where he grew up, a stranger to his native land, perhaps likening himself to the legendary Kamaitachi, an invisible sickle-toothed weasel, intertwined with the soil and its unrealized fertility. “Kamaitachi #8” (1956), a platinum palladium print, stands alone to best capture Hosoe’s alienation from Intention as an Interpretive Context 59
  • 182. and troubled expectation of the future of Japan. [Here the writer chooses the photogra- pher’s life as his interpretive context.] The image is that of a tall fence of stark horizontal and vertical rough wood lashed together, looming above the barren rice fields. Straddling the fence, half- crouched and half-clinging, is a solitary male figure, gazing in profile to the horizon. Oblivious to the sky above of dark and churning thunderclouds, the figure instead focuses his attentions and concentrations elsewhere. [The writer selects and describes significant detail.] It is exactly this elsewhere that makes the image successful, for in studying the man we are to turn our attention in the direction of the figure’s gaze and away from the photograph itself. He hangs curiously between heaven and earth, suspended on a makeshift man-made structure, in a purgatorial limbo awaiting the future. He waits with anticipation—perhaps dread?—for a time that has not yet come; he is directed away from the present, and it is this sensitivity to time that sets this print apart from the others in the series. One could argue that in effect this man, clothed in common garb, has become Japan itself, indicative of the post-war uncertainty of a country once-dominant and now destroyed. What will the future (dark storm clouds) hold for this newly-humbled nation? [Here the writer notices a pattern of in-between-ness and locates it in an historical context in order to make his interpretive leap.] Remember that regardless of the subject you select for your
  • 183. analysis, you should directly address not just “What does this say?” but also, as this writer has done, “What are we invited to make of it, and in what context?” INTENTION AS AN INTERPRETIVE CONTEXT An interpretive context that frequently creates problems in analysis is intention. People relying on authorial intention as their interpretive context typically assert that the author—not the work itself—is the ultimate and correct source of interpreta- tions. This is true of what a senator says about a bill he wishes passed. It is also true of what an artist says about her work. FIGURE 4.2 The Dancers by Sarah Kersh. Pen-and-Ink Drawing, 6′′ " 13.75′′. © Th e Da nc er s, by S ar
  • 185. y P er m iss io n of S ar ah K er sh . 60 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It Look at the drawing titled The Dancers in Figure 4.2. What follows is the artist’s statement about how the drawing came about and what it came to mean to her. This piece was created completely unintentionally. I poured some ink onto paper and blew on it through a straw. The ink took the form of what looked like little people in movement. I recopied the figures I liked,
  • 186. touched up the rough edges, and ended with this gathering of fairy-like creatures. I love how in art something abstract can so suddenly become recognizable. In this case, interestingly, the artist initially had no intentions beyond ex perimenting with materials. As the work evolved, she began to arrive at her own interpretation of what the drawing might suggest. Most viewers would probably find the artist’s inter- pretation plausible, but this is not to say that the artist must have the last word and that it is somehow an infraction for others to produce alternative interpretations. Suppose the artist had stopped with her first two sentences. Even this explicit state- ment of her lack of intention would not prohibit people from interpreting the draw- ing in some of the ways that she later goes on to suggest. The artist’s initial absence of a plan doesn’t require viewers to interpret The Dancers as only ink on paper. In any case, whenever an intention is ascribed to a person, an act, or a product, this intention contributes significantly to meaning; but the intention, whatever its source, does not outrank or exclude other interpretations. It is simply another context for understanding. Why is this so? In our earlier discussion of personalizing, we suggested that people
  • 187. are not entirely free agents, immune to the effects of the culture they inhabit. It fol- lows that when people produce things, they are inevitably affected by that culture in ways of which they are both aware and unaware. The culture, in other words, speaks through them. In the early 1960s, for example, a popular domestic sitcom entitled Leave It to Beaver portrayed the mother, June Cleaver, usually impeccably dressed in heels, dress, and pearls, doing little other than dusting the mantlepiece and making tuna fish sandwiches for her sons. Is the show then intentionally oppressing June by implying that the proper role for women is that of domestic helper? Well, in the con- text of post–women’s movement thinking, the show’s representation of Mrs. Cleaver might plausibly be read this way, but not as a matter of intention. But to conclude that Leave It to Beaver promoted a particular stereotype about women does not mean that the writers got together every week and asked, “How should we oppress June this week?” It is cultural norms asserting themselves here, not authorial intent. It is interesting and useful to try to determine from something you are analyzing what its makers might have intended. But, by and large, you are best off concentrat- ing on what the thing itself communicates as opposed to what someone might have wanted it to communicate. What Is and Isn’t “Meant” to Be Analyzed
  • 188. What about analyzing things that were not intended to “mean” anything, like enter- tainment films and everyday things like blue jeans and shopping malls? Some peo- ple believe that it is wrong to bring out unintended implications. Let’s take another The Fortune Cookie School of Interpretation 61 example: Barbie dolls. These are just toys intended for young girls, people might say. Clearly, the intention of the makers of Barbie is to make money by entertaining chil- dren. Does that mean Barbie must remain outside of interpretive scrutiny for such things as her built-in earrings, high-heeled feet, and heavily marketed lifestyle? What the makers of a particular product or idea intend is only a part of what that product or idea communicates. The urge to cordon off certain subjects from analy- sis on the grounds that they weren’t meant to be analyzed unnecessarily excludes a wealth of information—and meaning—from your range of vision. It is right to be careful about the interpretive contexts we bring to our experience. It is less right—less useful—to confine our choice of context in a too literal-minded way to a single category. To some people, baseball is only a game and clothing is only there to protect us from the elements.
  • 189. What such people don’t want to admit is that things communicate meaning to oth- ers whether we wish them to or not, which is to say that the meanings of most things are socially determined. What, for example, does the choice of wearing a baseball cap to a staff meeting or to a class “say”? Note, by the way, that a communicative gesture such as the wearing of a hat need not be premeditated to communicate something to other people. The hat is still “there” and available to be “read” by others as a sign of certain attitudes and a culturally defined sense of identity—with or without intention. Baseball caps, for example, carry different associations from berets or wool caps because they come from different social contexts. Baseball caps convey a set of at- titudes associated with the piece of American culture they come from. They suggest, for example, popular rather than high culture, casual rather than formal, young— perhaps defiantly so, especially if worn backward—rather than old, and so on. The social contexts that make gestures like our choice of hats carry particular meanings are always shifting, but some such context is always present. As we asserted at the beginning of this chapter, everything means, and meaning is always contextual. We can, of course, protest that the “real” reason for turning our baseball cap back- ward is to allow more light in, making it easier to see than when
  • 190. the bill of the cap shields our faces. This practical rationale makes sense, but it does not explain away the social statement that the hat and a particular way of wearing it might make. Because meaning is, to a significant extent, socially determined, we can’t entirely control what our clothing, our manners, our language, or even our way of walking communicates to others. This is one of the reasons that analysis makes some people suspicious and uneasy. They don’t want to acknowledge that they are sending mes- sages in spite of themselves, messages they haven’t deliberately and overtly chosen. We turn now to two common problems writers encounter in interpretation. These problems are so widespread that we have fancifully labeled them “schools.” THE FORTUNE COOKIE SCHOOL OF INTERPRETATION The theory of interpretation that we call the Fortune Cookie School believes that things have a single, hidden, right meaning, and that if a person can only “crack” the thing, it will yield an extractable and self-contained message. There are several problems with this conception of the interpretive process. 62 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It
  • 191. First, the assumption that things have single hidden meanings interferes with open-minded and dispassionate observation. Adherents of the Fortune Cookie School look solely for clues pointing to the hidden message and, having found these clues, discard the rest, like the cookie in a Chinese restaurant once the fortune has been extracted. The fortune cookie approach forecloses on the possibility of multiple plausible meanings, each within its own context. When you assume that there is only one right answer, you are also assuming that there is only one proper context for understanding and, by extension, that anybody who happens to select a different starting point or context and who thus arrives at a different answer is necessarily wrong. Most of the time, practitioners of the fortune cookie approach aren’t even aware that they are assuming the correctness of a single context because they don’t realize a fundamental truth about interpretations: they are always limited by con- texts. In other words, we are suggesting that claims to universal truths are always problematic. Things don’t just mean in some simple and clear way for all people in all situations; they always mean within a network of beliefs, from a particular point of view. The person who claims to have access to some universal truth, beyond context and point of view, is either naïve (unaware) or, worse, a
  • 192. bully—insisting that his or her view of the world is obviously correct and must be accepted by everyone. THE ANYTHING GOES SCHOOL OF INTERPRETATION At the opposite extreme from the single-right-answer Fortune Cookie School lies the completely relativist Anything Goes School. The problem with the anything goes approach is that it tends to assume that all interpretations are equally viable, that meanings are simply a matter of individual choice, irrespective of evidence or plausibility. Put another way, it overextends the creative aspect of interpretation to absurdity, arriving at the position that you can see in a subject whatever you want to see. As we suggest throughout this book, it is simply not the case that meaning is entirely up to the individual. Some readings are clearly better than others: as we argued earlier, the aesthetic or separateness readings of Whistler’s Mother are bet- ter than the mourning or, especially, alien astronaut interpretations. The better interpretations have more evidence and rational explanation of how the evidence supports the interpretive claims—qualities that make these meanings more public and negotiable. In the field of logic there is a principle known as parsimony.
  • 193. This principle holds that “no more forces or causes should be assumed than are necessary to ac- count for the facts” (The Oxford English Dictionary). In other words, the explana- tion that both explains the largest amount of evidence (accounts for facts) and is the simplest (no more than necessary) is the best. There are limits to this rule as well: sometimes focusing on what appears to be an insignificant detail as a starting point can provide a revelatory perspective on a subject. But as rules go, parsimony is a useful one to keep in mind as you start sifting through your various interpre- tive leaps about a subject. SEEMS TO BE ABOUT X BUT COULD ALSO BE (IS REALLY) ABOUT Y This book’s opening chapters have focused your attention on three prerequisites to becoming a more perceptive analytical thinker: • Training yourself to observe more fully and more systematically—dwelling lon- ger with the data before leaping to generalizations, using Paraphrase " 3, Notice and Focus (ranking), The Method, and working with binaries. • Pushing yourself to make interpretive leaps by describing carefully and then querying your own observations by repeatedly asking, So what?
  • 194. • Getting beyond common misconceptions about where meanings come from— that meanings are hidden, that they are read into something but are really not there (reading between the lines), that there are single right answers or that any- thing goes, that meanings ought to be controlled by a maker’s intentions, that some things should not be analyzed because they weren’t meant to be, and so forth. A useful verbal prompt for acting on these principles is “seems to be about X but could also be (or is really) about Y.” There are several reasons why this formula works to stimulate interpretation. • The person who is doing the interpreting too often stops with the first answer that springs to mind as he or she moves from observation to implication, usu- ally landing upon a cliché. If this first response becomes the X, then he or she is prompted by the formula to come up with other, probably less commonplace interpretations as the Y. • Often a person who is interpreting will, in the data-gathering stage, collect state- ments of intention from spokespersons for the subject—what the book or ad or political speech or whatever is asking us to believe about itself. If we accept this information only as X, then the Y is a prompt that will more
  • 195. likely move us to analyze such statements more acutely. In this context we can see how “Appears to Be about X. . . ,′′ like the other prompts in this book, defamiliarizes. When we begin to interpret something, we usually find that less obvious meanings are cloaked by more obvious ones, and so we are distracted from seeing them. In most cases, the less obvious and possibly unintended meanings are more telling and more interesting than the obvious ones we have been conditioned to see. But to get to these more interesting and less obvious meanings, we need to have assimilated two key elements of the interpretive methods offered in this chapter: (1) that there are multiple plausible interpretations because different interpretive contexts cause us to value different things in the evidence and (2) that intention does not control this process of meaning-making. Seems to Be about X but Could Also Be (Is Really) about Y 63 64 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It Why, you might ask, are less obvious meanings more likely to be more significant and telling? One reason is that this shift, particularly in the context of advertising or political language, is likely to orient us toward the rhetoric of the subject. We are
  • 196. focusing then on its means of persuading an audience. In the case of analyzing a work or art or an historical event, we are more likely to move beyond conventional gener- alizations. (See the discussion of rhetorical analysis in Chapter 6.) Consider the following example: A recent highly successful television ad campaign for Nike Freestyle shoes contains 60 seconds of famous basketball players dribbling and passing and otherwise handling the ball in dexter- ous ways to the accompaniment of court noises and hip-hop music. The ad seems to be about X (basketball or shoes) but could also be about Y. Once you’ve made this assertion, a rapid-fire (brainstormed) list might follow in which you keep filling in the blanks (X and Y) with different possibilities. Alternatively, you might find that filling in the blanks (X and Y) leads to a more sustained exploration of a single point. This is your eventual goal, but doing a little brainstorm- ing first would keep you from shutting down the interpretive process too soon. Here is one version of a rapid-fire list, any item of which might be expanded: Seems to be about basketball but is really about dance. Seems to be about selling shoes but is really about artistry. Seems to be about artistry but is really about selling shoes. Seems to be about basketball but is really about race.
  • 197. Seems to be about basketball but is really about the greater acceptance of black culture in American media and society. Seems to be about the greater acceptance of black culture in American media but is really about representing black basketball players as performing seals or freaks. Seems to be about individual expertise but is really about working as a group. Here is one version of a more sustained exploration of a single seems-to-be- about-X statement. The Nike Freestyle commercial seems to be about basketball but is really about the greater ac- ceptance of black culture in American media. Of course it is a shoe commercial and so aims to sell a product, but the same could be said about any commercial. What makes the Nike commercial distinctive is its seeming embrace of African-American culture. The hip-hop sound track, for example, which coincides with the rhythmic dribbling of the basketball, places music and sport on a par, and the dexterity with which the players (actual NBA stars) move with the ball—moonwalking, doing 360s on it, balancing it on their fingers, heads, and backs—is nothing short of dance. The intrinsic cool of the commercial suggests that Nike is targeting an audience of basket-
  • 198. ball lovers, not just African-Americans. If I am right, then it is selling blackness to white as well as black audiences. Of course, the idea that blacks are cooler than whites goes back at least as far as the early days of jazz and might be seen as its own strange form of prejudice. . . . In that case, maybe there is something a little disturbing in the commercial, in the way that it relegates the athletes to the status of trained seals. I’ll have to think more about this. Note: don’t be misled by our use of the word really in this formula (“Seems to be about X, is really about Y ”) into thinking that there should be some single, hidden, right answer. Rather, the aim of the formula is to prompt you to think recursively, to come up, initially, with a range of landing sites for your interpretive leap, rather than just one. The prompt serves to get you beyond the obvious—for example, that the ad appears to be about basketball but is really about selling shoes. Try this 4.3: Apply the Formula “Seems to Be about X, but Could Also Be (Is Really) about Y” As we have been saying, this formula is useful for quickly getting past your first responses. An alternative version of this formula is “Initially I thought X about the sub- ject, but now I think Y.” Take any reading or viewing assignment you have been given for class, and write either version of the formula at the top of a
  • 199. page. Fill in the blanks several times, and then explain your final choice for X and Y in a few paragraphs. You might also try these formulae when you find yourself getting stuck while drafting a paper. Seems to Be about X . . . is a valuable revision as well as interpretive tool. PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER: INTERPRETATION OF A NEW YORKER COVER A major point of this section is that interpretive contexts are suggested by the mate- rial you are studying; they aren’t simply imposed. Explaining why you think a subject should be seen through a particular interpretive lens is an important part of making interpretations reasonable and plausible. Our discussion illustrates a writer’s decision- making process in choosing an interpretive context, and how, once that context has been selected, the writer goes about analyzing evidence to test as well as support the usefulness of that context. The example upon which we are focusing is a visual image, a cover from The New Yorker magazine (see Figure 4.3). The cover is by Ian Falconer and is entitled “The Competition”; it appeared on the October 9, 2000, issue. Producing a close description of anything you are analyzing is one of the best ways to begin because the act of describing causes you to notice more and triggers analyti- cal thinking. Here is our description of the New Yorker cover.
  • 200. Description of a New Yorker Cover, Dated October 9, 2000 The picture contains four women, visible from the waist up, standing in a row in semi-profile, staring out at some audience other than us because their eyes look off to the side. All four gaze in the same direction. Each woman is dressed in a bathing suit and wears a banner draped over one shoulder in the manner of those worn in the swimsuit competition at beauty pageants. Three of the women are virtually identical. The banners worn by these three women show the letters gia, rnia, and rida, the remainder of the letters being cut off by the other women’s shoulders, so that we have to fill in the missing letters to understand which state each woman represents. Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover 65 66 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It FIGURE 4.3 Ar tw or k b
  • 202. ica tio ns In c. The fourth woman, who stands third from the left in line, tucked in among the others who look very much alike, wears a banner reading york. This woman’s appear- ance is different in just about every respect from the other three. Whereas they are blonde with long flowing hair, she is dark with her hair up in a tight bun. Whereas their mouths are wide open, revealing a wall of very white teeth, her mouth is closed, lips drawn together. Whereas their eyes are wide open and staring, hers, like her mouth, are nearly closed, under deeply arched eyebrows. The dark woman’s lips, eyes, and hair are dark. She wears dark eye makeup and has a pronounced dark beauty mark on her cheek. Whereas the other three women’s cheeks are high and round, hers are sharply angular. The three blonde women wear one-piece bathing suits in a nondescript gray color. The dark-haired woman, whose skin stands out in stark contrast to her hair, wears a two-piece bathing suit, exposing her midriff. Like her face, the dark-haired woman’s breast, sticking out in half profile in her bathing suit,
  • 203. is pointed and angular. The other three women’s breasts are round and quietly contained in their high-necked gray bathing suits. Using The Method to Identify Patterns of Repetition and Contrast As we discussed in Chapter 3, looking for patterns of repetition and contrast (that is, The Method) is one of your best means of getting at the essential character of a sub- ject. It prevents you from generalizing, instead involving you in hands-on engagement with the details of your evidence. Our formula for looking for patterns, The Method, has five steps, which you should try to do one at a time so as not to rush to conclu- sions. You will find, however, that step 1, looking for things that repeat exactly, tends to suggest items for step 2, repetition of the same or similar kinds of words or details (strands), and that step 2 leads naturally to step 3, looking for binary oppositions and organizing contrasts. And so, in practice, noticing and listing the elements of strands tend to coincide with the discovery of binary oppositions. Here are our partial lists of exact repetitions and strands and binary oppositions in the New Yorker cover: Some details that repeat exactly: Large, wide open, round eyes (3 pairs)
  • 204. Long, blonde, face-framing hair (3) Small, straight eyebrows (3 pairs) Wide-open (smiling?) mouths with expanses of white teeth (3) (but individual teeth not indicated) Banners (4) but each with different lettering Round breasts (3) States that end in a (3) Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover 67 68 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It Some strands (groups of the same or similar kinds of details): Lots of loose and flowing blonde hair/large, fully open, round eyes/large, open, rather round (curved) mouths: Connecting logic ! open, round Skin uniformly shaded on three of the figures/minimal color and shading contrasts/ mouths full of teeth but just a mass of white without individual teeth showing: Connecting logic ! homogenous, undifferentiated, indistinct
  • 205. Binary oppositions: Blonde hair/black hair Open mouths/closed mouth Straight eyebrows/slanted (arched) eyebrows Round breasts/pointed breast Covered midriff/uncovered midriff Notice that we have tried hard to stick with “the facts” here— concrete details in the picture. If we were to try, for example, to name the expression on the three blonde women’s faces and the one on the black-haired woman (expressionless vs. knowing? vapid vs. shrewd? trusting vs. suspicious? etc.), we would move from data gathering— direct observation of detail—into interpretation. The longer you delay interpretation in favor of noticing patterns of like and unlike detail, the more thoughtful and better grounded your eventual interpretation will be. Anomalies: Miss New York Pushing Observations to Conclusions: Selecting an Interpretive Context As we argued throughout this chapter, the move from observations to conclusions
  • 206. depends on context. You would, for example, come up with different ideas about the significance of particular patterns of detail in the New Yorker cover if you were analyzing them in the context of the history of The New Yorker cover art than you might if your interpretive context was other art done by Ian Falconer, the cover’s artist. Both of these possibilities suggest themselves, the first by the fact that the title of the magazine, The New Yorker, stands above the women’s heads, and the second by the fact that the artist’s last name, Falconer, runs across two of the women. What other interpretive contexts might one plausibly and fairly choose, based on what the cover itself offers us? Consider the cover’s date— October 9, 2000. Some quick research into what was going on in the country in the early fall of 2000 might provide some clues about how to read the cover in a historical context. November 2000 was the month of a presidential election. At the time the cover was published, the long round of presidential primaries, with presidential hopefuls courting various key states for their votes, had ended, but the last month of campaigning by the presidential nominees—Al Gore and George W. Bush—was in full swing. You might wish to consider whether and how the cover speaks to the country’s po- litical climate during the Gore/Bush competition for the
  • 207. presidency. The banners, the bathing suits, and the fact that the women stand in a line staring out at some implied audience of viewers, perhaps judges, reminds us that the picture’s narrative context is a beauty pageant, a competition in which women representing each of the states compete to be chosen the most beautiful of them all. Choosing to consider the cover in the context of the presidential campaign would be reasonable; you would not have to think you were imposing a context on the picture in an arbitrary and ungrounded way. Additionally, the Table of Contents identifies the title of Falconer’s drawing as “The Competition.” Clearly, there is other information on the cover that might allow you to interpret the picture in some kind of political and or more broadly cultural context. A signifi- cant binary opposition is New York versus Georgia, California, and Florida. The three states having names ending in the same letter are represented by look-alike, virtually identical blondes. The anomalous state, New York, is represented by a woman, who, despite standing in line with the others, is about as different from them as a figure could be. So what that the woman representing New York looks so unlike the women from the other states? And why those states? If you continued to pursue this interpretive context, you might want more informa- tion. Which presidential candidate won the primary in each of
  • 208. the states pictured? How were each of these states expected to vote in the election in November? When is the Miss America pageant held? Which state won the Miss America title in the time period before the cover was published? Since timing would matter in the case of a topical interpretive context, it would also be interesting to know when the cover art was actually produced and when the magazine accepted it. If possible, you could also try to discover whether other of the cover artist’s work was in a similar vein. (He has a website.) Making the Interpretation Plausible As we have been arguing, the picture will “mean” differently, depending on whether we understand it in terms of American presidential politics in the year 2000, or in terms of American identity politics at the same point, specifically attitudes of and about New Yorkers, and The New Yorker magazine’s place among these attitudes—and influence on them. As we have already observed, analytical thinking involves interpretation, and interpretive conclusions are tentative and open to alternative possibilities. An interpretive conclusion is not a fact but a theory. Interpretive conclusions stand or fall not so much on whether they can be proved right or wrong (or some combination of the two), but on whether they are demonstrably plausible.
  • 209. What makes an interpretation plausible? Your audience might choose not to accept your interpretation for a number of reasons. They might, for example, be New Yorkers and, furthermore, inclined to think that New Yorkers are cool and that this is what the picture “says.” They might be from one of the states depicted on the cover in terms of look-alike blondes and, further, inclined to think that New Yorkers are full of themselves and forever portraying the rest of the country as shallowly conformist and uncultured. Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover 69 70 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It But none of these personal influences ultimately matters. What matters is that you share your evidence, show your reasons for believing that it means what you say it means, and do this well enough for a reader to find your interpretation rea- sonable (whether he or she actually believes it or not). Then you will have passed the plausibility test. Your interpretation will stand until another person offers an analysis with interpretive conclusions that seems more plausible than yours, point- ing to more or better evidence, and arguing for the meaning of that evidence more
  • 210. convincingly. Arriving at an Interpretive Conclusion: Making Choices Let’s try on one final interpretive context, and then see which of the various contexts (lenses) through which we have viewed the cover produces the most credible inter- pretation, the one that seems to best account for the patterns of detail in the evidence. Different interpretations will account better for some details than others—which is why it enriches our view of the world to try on different interpretations. Ultimately, you will have to decide which possible interpretation, as seen through which interpre- tive context, best accounts for what you think is most important and interesting to notice about your subject. We will try to push our own interpretive process to a choice by selecting one inter- pretive context as the most revealing: The New Yorker magazine itself. The dark-haired figure wearing the New York banner stands, in a sense, for the magazine or, at least, for a potential reader—a representative New Yorker. What, then, does the cover “say” to and about New Yorkers and to and about the magazine and its readers? Throughout this book we use the question So what? to prompt interpretive leaps. So what that the woman representing New York is dark when the other women are light, is closed (narrowed eyes, closed mouth, hair tightly
  • 211. pulled up and back) when the others are open (wide-open eyes and mouths, loosely flowing hair), is pointed and angular when the others are round, sports a bared midriff when the others are covered? As with our earlier attempt to interpret the cover in the context of the 2000 presi- dential campaign, interpreting it in the context of other New Yorker covers would require a little research. How do New Yorker covers characteristically represent New Yorkers? What might you discover by looking for patterns of repetition and contrast in a set of New Yorker covers rather than just this one? We are willing to bet that you would soon discover the magazine’s droll awareness of its own heralding of New Yorkers as sophisticated, cultured, and cosmopolitan: it at once embraces and sends up the stereotype. How does the cover read in the context, for example, of various jokes about how New Yorkers think of themselves relative to the rest of the country, such as the cover depicting the United States as two large coastlines, east and west, connected by an almost nonexistent middle? Armed with the knowledge that the covers are not only characteristically laughing at the rest of the country but also at New Yorkers themselves, you might begin to make explicit what is implicit in the cover.
  • 212. Here are some attempts at making the cover speak. Does the cover “say” that New Yorkers are shrewder, less naïve (less open), warier than other Americans, but largely because they are also more worldly and smarter? Is the cover in some way a “dumb blonde” joke in which the dark woman with the pronounced beauty mark and cal- culating gaze participates in but also sets herself apart from some kind of national “beauty” contest? Are we being invited (intentionally or not) to invert the conven- tional value hierarchy of dark and light so that the dark woman—the sort that gets represented as the evil stepmother in fairy tales such as “Snow White”—becomes “the fairest of them all,” and nobody’s fool? Let’s end this sample analysis and interpretation with two possibilities— somewhat opposed to each other, but probably both “true” of what the cover communicates, at least to certain audiences (East and West Coast Americans, and readers of The New Yorker). At its most serious, the New Yorker cover may speak to American history in which New York has been the point of entry for generations of immigrants, the “dark” (literally and figuratively) in the face of America’s blonde northern European legacy. Within the context of other New Yorker covers, however, we might find ourselves
  • 213. gravitating to a less serious and perhaps equally plausible interpretive conclusion: that the cover is a complex joke. It appears to be saying, yes, America, we do think that we’re cooler and more individual and less plastic than the rest of you, but we also know that we shouldn’t be so smug about it. ASSIGNMENTS: Write an Interpretive Essay 1. Build a paper from implications. Begin this assignment by making observations and drawing out implications for one of the topics below. Then use your list as the starting point for a longer paper. Having done the preceding exercise with inferring implications, you could now make up your own list of observations and pursue implications. Make some observations, for example, about the following, and then suggest the possible implications of your observations. • Changing trends in automobiles today • What your local newspaper chooses to put on its front page (or editorial page) over the course of a week • Shows (or advertisements) that appear on network television (as opposed to cable) during 1 hour of evening prime time • Advertisements for scotch whiskey in highbrow magazines
  • 214. 2. Analyze a magazine cover by researching an interpretive context. Choose a magazine that, like The New Yorker, has interesting covers. Write an analysis of one such cover by studying other covers from the same maga- zine. (Visit The New Yorker store website to access a wide range of covers, Putting It All Together: Interpretation of a New Yorker Cover 71 72 Chapter 4 Interpretation: What It Is, What It Isn't, and How to Do It including others by Ian Falconer.) Follow the model offered at the end of this chapter: a. Apply The Method—looking for patterns of repetition and contrast—to the cover itself so that you arrive at key repetitions, strands, and organizing con- trasts and begin to ponder a range of possible interpretive leaps to what they signify. b. Use these data to suggest plausible interpretive contexts for the cover. Re- member that interpretive contexts are not simply imposed from without; they’re suggested by the evidence. c. Then move to the other covers. Perform similar operations
  • 215. on them to arrive at an awareness of common denominators among the covers, and to analyze what those shared traits might reveal or make more evident in the particular cover you are studying. You will be trying to figure out how the magazine conceives of itself and its audience by the way that it characteristically repre- sents its “face.” It might be illuminating to survey a range of covers by a single artist, such as Ian Falconer, who created the cover we analyze in the chapter. Or try Harry Bliss, who also creates covers and cartons for The New Yorker and is a children’s illustrator. Work by both of these artists may be found on their websites. CHAPTER 5 Analyzing Arguments Our most direct advice on analyzing arguments, and thus on learning to write them more effectively, can be found in this chapter. Here we show you how to un- earth the essentially binary structure of arguments and how to uncover the unstated assumptions upon which arguments typically rest. Arguing with someone else’s argu- ment is usually as much a matter of addressing what is left unsaid—the assumptions
  • 216. underneath the argument that the arguer takes to be givens (obvious truths)—as confronting what is argued overtly. THE ROLE OF BINARIES IN ARGUMENT In human—and computerized—thinking, a binary is a pair of elements, usually in opposition to each other, as in off/on, yes/no, right/wrong, agree/disagree, and so on. Many ideas begin with a writer’s noticing some kind of opposition or tension or choice within a subject—capital punishment either does or does not deter crime; a character in a novel is either a courageous rebel or a fool; a new environmental policy is either visionary or blind. As we note in earlier chapters, a major advantage of looking for binaries is that they help you determine what issues are at stake in your subject because binaries position you among competing choices. (See discussion of The Method in Chapter 3, A Toolkit of Analytical Methods.) There is an old joke to the effect that there are two kinds of people: those who like binary thinking and those who do not. Part of the humor here lies in the recognition that we cannot help but think in binary terms. As the philosopher Herbert Marcuse says, “We understand that which is in terms of that which is not”: light is that which is not dark; masculine is that which is not feminine; civilized is that which is not primitive. Creating opposing categories is fundamental to defining things. But as these
  • 217. examples may suggest, binaries are also dangerous because they can perpetuate what is called reductive thinking, especially if applied uncritically. If you restrict yourself to thinking in binary terms, you can run into two prob- lems. First, most subjects cannot be adequately considered in terms of only two options—either this or that, with nothing in between. Second, binaries often con- ceal value judgments: the category “primitive,” as opposed to “civilized,” is not a neu- tral description but a devaluation. Civilized, for example, is that which has rejected and moved beyond the primitive. Women, in this way of thinking, are an inverse of 73 74 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments men: they are a category defined by unmanly traits. It is useful and necessary to construct binaries, but, as our examples reveal, it is dangerous to ignore the gray areas in between and the value judgments that binaries tend to conceal. Often the trouble starts with the ways binaries are phrased. Two of the most com- mon and potentially counterproductive ways of phrasing binaries are either/or and agree/disagree. In the vast majority of cases, there are more than two alternatives,
  • 218. but the either/or or agree/disagree phrasing prevents you from looking for them. And it does not acknowledge that both alternatives may have some truth to them. A new environmental policy may be both visionary and blind. And there may be more accurate categories than visionary and blind for considering the merits and demerits of the policy. Framing an issue in either/or terms can be useful for stimulating a chain of thought, but it is usually not a good way to end one. Consider the either/or binary, “Was the Civil War fought over slavery or economics?” You could begin this way, but if you’re not careful—conscious of the all-or-nothing force of binary formulations— you could easily get trapped in an overly dichotomized position; in this case, that economics caused the war and that slavery had nothing to do with it, or vice versa. You can’t analyze without binaries, but you need to be wary of putting everything into big, undifferentiated categories, labeled all black or all white, with nothing in between. A PROCEDURE FOR REFORMULATING BINARIES IN ARGUMENT We previewed this procedure in brief in our discussion of The Method in Chapter 3. Here we develop it in more detail.
  • 219. Strategy 1: Locate a Range of Opposing Categories The first step in using binaries analytically is to locate and distinguish them carefully. Consider, for example, the binaries contained in the following question: Does the model of management known as Total Quality Management (TQM) that is widely used in Japan work in the American automotive industry? The most obvious binary in this question is work versus not work. But there are also other binaries in the question— Japanese versus American, for example, and TQM versus more traditional and more traditionally American models of management. These binaries imply further binaries. Insofar as TQM is acknowledged to be a team-oriented, collaborative management model, the question requires a writer to consider the accuracy and relative suitability of particular traits commonly ascribed to Japanese versus American workers, such as communal and cooperative versus individualistic and competitive. Strategy 2: Analyze and Define the Key Terms Having located the various binaries, you should begin to analyze and define terms. What, for example, does it mean to ask whether TQM works in the American automotive industry? Does work mean “make a substantial profit”? Does work mean
  • 220. A Procedure for Reformulating Binaries in Argument 75 “produce more cars more quickly”? Does work mean “improving employee morale”? You would probably find yourself drowning in vagueness unless you carefully argued for the appropriateness of your definition of this key term. Strategy 3: Question the Accuracy of the Binary Having begun to analyze and define your terms, you would next need to determine how accurately they define the issues raised by your subject. You might consider, for example, the extent to which American management styles actually differ from the Japanese ver- sion of TQM. In the process of trying to determine if there are significant differences, you could start to locate particular traits in these management styles and in Japanese versus American culture that might help you formulate your binary more precisely. Think of the binary as a starting point—a kind of deliberate overgeneralization—that allows you to set up positions you can then test to refine. Strategy 4: Substitute “To What Extent?” for “Either/Or” The best strategy in using binaries productively is usually to locate arguments on both sides of the either/or choice that the binary poses and then choose a position some- where between the two extremes. Once you have arrived at what you consider the most accurate phrasing of the binary, you can rephrase the original either/or question
  • 221. in the more qualified terms that asking “To what extent?” allows. Making this move does not release you from the responsibility of taking a stand and arguing for it. So, in answer to a question such as “Was the Civil War fought over slavery or economics?” you would attempt to determine the extent to which each side of the bi- nary—slavery and economics—could reasonably be credited as the cause of the war. To do so, you would first rephrase the question thus: To what extent did economics, rather than slavery, cause the Civil War? Rephrasing in this way might also enable you to see problems with the original binary formulation. By analyzing the terms of the binary, you would come to question them and ul- timately arrive at a more complex and qualified position to write about. Admittedly, in reorienting your thinking from the obvious and clear-cut choices that either/or formulations provide to the murkier waters of asking “To what extent?” your decision process is made more difficult. The gain, however, is that the to-what-extent mindset, by predisposing you to assess multiple and potentially conflicting points of view, will enable you to address more fairly and accurately the issues raised by your subject. Applying these steps usually causes you to do one or more of the following: 1. Discover that you have not adequately named the binary and
  • 222. that another op- position would be more accurate. 2. Weight one side of your binary more heavily than the other, rather than seeing the issue as all or nothing. 3. Discover that the two terms of your binary are not really so separate and opposed after all but are actually parts of one complex phenomenon or issue (a move known as collapsing the binary). 76 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments Where might you end up if you approached our earlier sample topic (whether TQM works in the American automotive industry) by asking to what extent one side of the binary better suits available evidence, rather than arguing that one side is clearly the right choice and the other entirely wrong? You would still be arguing that one position on TQM in American industry is more accurate than the other, but you would inevitably arrive at more carefully qualified conclusions than the question might otherwise have led you to. You would most likely take care, for example, to sug- gest the danger of assuming that all American workers are rugged individualists and all Japanese workers are communal bees. Try this 5.1: Reformulating Binaries
  • 223. Apply the strategies for using binaries analytically to analyze the following statements (or questions), as we did with the TQM example. This does not mean that you must proceed step-by-step through the strategies, but, at the least, you should list all of the binaries you can find, isolate the key terms, and reformulate them. Even if the original formulation looks okay to you, assume that it is an overgeneralization that needs to be refined and rephrased. 1. It is important to understand why leaders act in a leadership role. What is the driving force? Is it an internal drive for the business or group to succeed, or is it an internal drive for the leader to dominate others? 2. Is nationalism good for emerging third-world countries? 3. The private lives of public figures should not matter in the way they are assessed by the public. What matters is how competently they do their jobs. 4. The Seattle sound of rock and roll known as Grunge was not original; it was just a rehash of Punk and New Wave elements. UNCOVERING ASSUMPTIONS (REASONING BACK TO PREMISES) All arguments ultimately rest on fundamental assumptions called givens—positions that you decide are not in need of argument because you assume
  • 224. the reader will “give” them to you as true. Often, however, these assumptions need first to be acknowledged and then argued, or at least tested. You cannot assume that their truth is self-evident. The failure to locate and examine unacknowledged assumptions (premises) is the downfall of many essays. The problem occurs because our categories—the mental boxes we’ve created over time—have become so fixed, so unquestioned, that we cease to be fully aware of them. Everything you read has basic assumptions that underlie it. What are assumptions in this context? They are the basic ground of beliefs from which a position springs, its start- ing points or givens, its basic operating premises. The Oxford English Dictionary defines a premise—from a Latin word meaning “to put before”—as “a previous statement or proposition from which another statement is inferred or follows as a conclusion.” All arguments or articulations of point of view have premises— that is, they are based in a given set of assumptions, which are built upon to arrive at conclusions. Uncovering Assumptions (Reasoning Back to Premises) 77 Often, though, the assumptions are not visible; they’re implicit (which is why they need to be inferred). Usually writers are not hiding from readers
  • 225. the subterranean bases of their outlooks, which might be considered unethical. Rather, many writers (especially inexperienced ones) remain unaware of the premises that underlie their points of view. Similarly, most readers don’t stop to think about the starting points of what they read, so they read only the tip of the proverbial iceberg. The ability to uncover assumptions is a powerful analytical procedure to learn—it gives you insight into the roots, the basic givens that a piece of writing (or a speaker) has assumed are true. When you locate assumptions in a text, you understand the text better—where it’s coming from and what else it believes that is more fundamen- tal than what it is overtly declaring. You also find things to write about; uncovering assumptions offers one of the best ways of developing and revising your own work. Uncovering assumptions can help you understand why you believe x, or may reveal to you that two of your givens are in conflict with each other. To uncover assumptions, you need to read “backward”—to ask what a reading must also already believe, given that it believes what it overtly claims. In other words, you need to imagine or reinvent the process of thinking by which a writer has arrived at a position. Say you read a piece that praises a television show for being realistic but faults it
  • 226. for setting a bad example for the kids who watch it. What assumptions might we infer from such a piece? • Television should attempt to depict life accurately (realistically). • Television should produce shows that set good examples. • Kids imitate or at least have their attitudes shaped by what they watch on television. • Good and bad examples are clear and easily recognizable by everyone. Note that none of these assumptions is self-evidently true; each would need to be argued for. And some of the assumptions conflict with others— for example, that shows should be both morally uplifting and realistic, given that in “real life” those who do wrong often go unpunished. These are subjects an analytical response to the piece (or a revision of it) could bring out. What’s Beneath the Question? On some occasions, students find that they have confronted an issue that cannot be resolved by the deductive method. This can be exciting for them. Will cutting marginal tax rates cause people to work more? The answer is yes or no, depending on the premises underlying the work- leisure prefer- ences incorporated into your model.
  • 227. —James Marshall, Professor of Economics VOICES FROM ACROSS THE CURRICULUM 78 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments UNCOVERING ASSUMPTIONS: A BRIEF EXAMPLE Consider the common complaint that “Tax laws benefit the wealthy.” No matter how you might develop this claim (moving it forward), you would get into trouble if you didn’t also move backward to uncover the premises embedded in this thesis about the purpose of tax laws. The wording of this claim seems to conceal an egalitarian premise: the assumption that tax laws should not benefit anyone or, at least, that they should benefit everyone equally. But what is the purpose of tax laws? Should they redress economic inequities? Should they spur the economy by rewarding those who generate capital? You might go to the U.S. Constitution and/or legal precedents to resolve such questions, but our point here is that you would need to move your thesis back to this point and test the validity of the assumptions upon which it rests. Regardless of the position you might adopt—attacking tax laws, defending them, showing how they actually benefit everyone, or whatever—you would risk arguing blindly if you failed to question what the purpose of tax law is
  • 228. in the first place. This testing of assumptions would, at the least, cause you to qualify and refine your thesis. (See Figure 5.1.) A PROCEDURE FOR UNCOVERING ASSUMPTIONS How do you actually go about uncovering assumptions? Here’s a fairly flexible proce- dure, which we apply step-by-step to the claim “Tax laws benefit the wealthy.” 1. Paraphrase the explicit claim. This activity gets you started interpreting the claim, and it may begin to suggest the claim’s underlying assumptions. We might paraphrase the claim as “The rules for paying income tax give rich people mon- etary advantages” or “The rules for paying income tax help the rich get richer.” 2. List the implicit ideas that the claim seems to assume to be true. Here are two: “Tax laws shouldn’t benefit anybody” and “Tax laws should benefit those who need the benefit, those with the least money”(which, by the way, are mutually exclusive). Working Thesis Revised Thesis ConclusionsPremises EvidenceEvidence
  • 229. FIGURE 5.1 Reasoning Back to Premises Analyzing an Argument: The Example of "Playing by the Antioch Rules" 79 3. Determine the various ways that the key terms of the claim might be defined, as well as how the writer of the claim has defined them. This process of definition helps you see the key concepts upon which the claim depends. How does the writer intend benefit? Does he or she mean that tax laws benefit only the wealthy and presumably harm those who are not wealthy? Where is the line between wealthy and not wealthy drawn? 4. Try on an oppositional stance to the claim to see if this unearths more underly- ing assumptions. Regardless of your view on the subject, suppose for the sake of argument that the writer is wrong. This step allows you to think comparatively, helping you to see the claim more clearly, to see what it apparently excludes from its fundamental beliefs. Knowing what the underlying assumption leaves out helps us see the nar- rowness upon which the claim may rest; we understand better its limits. Two positions that the claim appears to exclude are “Tax laws
  • 230. benefit the poor” and “Tax laws do not benefit the wealthy.” ANALYZING AN ARGUMENT: THE EXAMPLE OF “PLAYING BY THE ANTIOCH RULES” Because the following essay originally appeared (in 1993) as a newspaper editorial (in The New York Times), it is less expository than much academic analytical writing. We have included it because it so clearly illustrates how a writer reasons forward to conclusions by reasoning backward to premises. The essay also illustrates how the strategies of refocusing binaries and qualifying claims operate in a finished piece of writing. As we have already noted, these strategies, which are so useful for analyzing arguments, are equally useful for producing them. As you read this editorial on the controversial rules established at Antioch College (which, sadly, is closing its doors) to govern sexual conduct among its students, try to focus not only on the content of the argument, but also on its form; that is, how the writer moves from one phase of his thinking to the next. Toward this end, we have added our own summaries of what each paragraph of the editorial accomplishes. At the end of the editorial we sum up the writer’s primary developmental strategies in a form you can apply to your own writing. Playing by the Antioch Rules
  • 231. By Eric Fassin [1] A good consensus is hard to find, especially on sexual politics. But the infamous rules instituted last year by Antioch College, which require students to obtain explicit verbal consent before so much as a kiss is exchanged, have created just that. They have pro- voked indignation (this is a serious threat to individual freedom!) as well as ridicule (can this be serious?). Sexual correctness thus proves a worthy successor to political correct- ness as a target of public debate. [The writer names the issue: the complaint that Antioch’s rules threaten individual freedom.] 80 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments [2] Yet this consensus against the rules reveals shared assumptions among liberals, conserva- tives and even radicals about the nature of sex in our culture. [The writer identifies members of an unlikely consensus and focuses on a surprising similarity.] [3] The new definition of consent at Antioch is based on a “liberal” premise: it assumes that sexual partners are free agents and that they mean what they say—yes means yes, and no means no. But the initiator must now obtain prior consent, step by step, which in practice shifts the burden of clarification from the woman to the man. The question is no longer “Did she say no?” but “Did she say yes?” Silence does
  • 232. not indicate consent, and it becomes his responsibility to dispel any ambiguity. [The writer identifies assump- tion of freedom underlying the rules.] [4] The novelty of the rules, however, is not as great as it seems. Antioch will not exert more control over its students; there are no sexual police. In practice, you still do what you want—as long as your partner does not complain . . . the morning after. If this is censor- ship, it intervenes ex post facto, not a priori. [The writer questions the premise that rules will actually control individual freedom more than current norms do.] [5] In fact, the “threat” to individual freedom for most critics is not the invasion of privacy through the imposition of sexual codes, but the very existence of rules. Hence the suc- cess of polemicists like Katie Roiphe or Camille Paglia, who argue that feminism in recent years has betrayed its origins by embracing old-style regulations, paradoxically choosing the rigid 1950s over the liberating 1960s. Their advice is simply to let women manage on their own, and individuals devise their own rules. This individualist critique of feminism finds resonance with liberals, but also, strangely, with conservatives, who belatedly discover the perils of regulating sexuality. [The writer locates an antiregulatory (laissez-faire) premise beneath the freedom premise.] [6] But sexual laissez-faire, with its own implicit set of rules,
  • 233. does not seem to have worked very well recently. Since the collapse of established social codes, people play the same game with different rules. If more women are complaining of sexual violence, while more men are worrying that their words and actions might be misconstrued, who benefits from the absence of regulation? [The writer attacks the laissez- faire premise for ineffectiveness.] [7] A laissez-faire philosophy toward relationships assumes that sexuality is a game that can (and must) be played without rules, or rather that the invention of rules should be left to individual spontaneity and creativity, despite rising evidence that the rule of one’s own often leads to misunderstandings. When acted out, individual fantasy always plays within preordained social rules. These rules conflict with the assumption in this culture that sex is subject to the reign of nature, not artifice, that it is the province of the individual, not of society. [The writer uncovers an assumption beneath the laissez-faire premise: sex is natural and thus outside social rules.] [8] Those who believe that society’s constraints should have nothing to do with sex also agree that sex should not be bound by the social conventions of language. Indeed, this rebellion against the idea of social constraints probably accounts for the controversy over explicit verbal consent—from George Will, deriding “sex amidst semicolons,”
  • 234. to Camille Paglia railing, “As if sex occurs in the verbal realm.” As if sexuality were incompatible with words. As if the only language of sex were silence. For The New Yorker, Analyzing an Argument: The Example of "Playing by the Antioch Rules" 81 “the [Antioch] rules don’t get rid of the problem of unwanted sex at all; they just shift the advantage from the muscle-bound frat boy to the honey- tongued French major.” [The writer develops the linguistic implications of the natural premise and questions the assumption that sex is incompatible with language.] [9] This is not very different from the radical feminist position, which holds that verbal per- suasion is no better than physical coercion. In this view, sexuality cannot be entrusted to rhetoric. The seduction of words is inherently violent, and seduction itself is an object of suspicion. (If this is true, Marvell’s invitation “To His Coy Mistress” is indeed a form of sex- ual harassment, as some campus feminists have claimed.) [The writer develops a fur- ther implication: that the attack on rules masks a fear of language’s power to seduce—and questions the equation of seduction with harassment.] [10] What the consensus against the Antioch rules betrays is a common vision of sexuality
  • 235. which crosses the lines dividing conservatives, liberals and radicals. So many of the ar- guments start from a conventional situation, perceived and presented as natural: a heterosexual encounter with the man as the initiator, and the woman as gatekeeper— hence the focus on consent. [The writer redefines consensus as sharing the unacknowledged premise that conventional sex roles are natural.] [11] The outcry largely results from the fact that the rules undermine this traditional erotic model. Not so much by proscribing (legally), but by prescribing (socially). The new model, in which language becomes a normal form of erotic communication, underlines the conventional nature of the old one. [The writer reformulates the claim about the anti-rules consensus: rules undermine attempts to pass off traditional sex roles as natural.] [12] By encouraging women out of their “natural” reserve, these rules point to a new defini- tion of sexual roles. “Yes” could be more than a way to make explicit the absence of “no”; “yes” can also be a cry of desire. Women may express demands, and not only grant favors. If the legal “yes” opened the ground for an erotic “yes,” if the contract gave way to desire and if consent led to demand, we would indeed enter a brave new erotic world. [The writer extends the implication of the claim: rules could make sex more erotic rather than less free.]
  • 236. [13] New rules are like new shoes: they hurt a little at first, but they may fit tomorrow. The only question about the Antioch rules is not really whether we like them, but whether they improve the situation between men and women. All rules are artificial, but, in the absence of generally agreed-upon social conventions, any new prescription must feel artificial. And isn’t regulation needed precisely when there is an absence of cultural consensus? [The writer questions the standard by which we evaluate rules; the writer proposes reformulating the binary from artificial versus natu- ral to whether rules will improve gender relations.] [14] Whether we support or oppose the Antioch rules, at least they force us to acknowledge that the choice is not between regulation and freedom, but between different sets of rules, implicit or explicit. They help dispel the illusion that sexuality is a state of nature individuals must experience outside the social contract, and that eroticism cannot exist within the conventions of language. As Antioch reminds us, there is more in eroticism and sexuality than is dreamt of in this culture. [The writer culminates with his 82 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments own idea: rules are good because they force us to acknowledge as a
  • 237. harmful illusion the idea that sex operates outside social conventions.] Despite its brevity, this editorial covers a daunting amount of ground—an exami- nation of “shared assumptions among liberals, conservatives and even radicals about the nature of sex in our culture” (paragraph 2). The writer, given his audience (readers of the Sunday New York Times), allows himself more breadth in both his topic and his claims than he would if he were writing an article on the same subject in an academic setting, where he would narrow his focus to supply more analysis of issues and evidence. The aim of editorials like this one is not only to inform or persuade but also to provoke and entertain. Nevertheless, the strategies that direct the thinking in this piece are, with some minor exceptions, the same as they would be in a more extended analytical piece. They are central strategies that you can apply to many sorts of writing situations, such as analyzing arguments and as a means of finding and developing your own ideas. STRATEGIES FOR DEVELOPING AN ARGUMENT BY REASONING BACK TO PREMISES 1. Set up a claim but delay passing judgment on it. In the concluding sentence of paragraph 1, the word “target” suggests that the essay might attack Antioch’s policy. In paragraph 2, however, the writer does not go on to demonstrate what
  • 238. is threatening and potentially ridiculous about Antioch’s sexual contract, but neither does he yet offer his own conclusion on whether the views he has thus far described are right or wrong. Instead, he slows down the forward momentum toward judgment and begins to analyze what the consensus against the Antioch rules might mean—the “shared assumptions” it reveals “among liberals, con- servatives, and even radicals about the nature of sex in our culture.” In fact, the writer spends the first three-quarters of the essay trying on various answers to this question of meaning. (Note: a careful reader would recognize by tonal signals such as the exclamation mark in “serious threat to individual freedom!” that the opening paragraph has, in fact, begun to announce its position, albeit not overtly, by subtly overstating its opposite. It is not until later in the editorial, however, that we can clearly recognize that the writer is employing a common introductory strategy— defining the posi- tion you plan to argue against.) 2. Decide what is really at issue by reasoning back to premises. Rather than proceed- ing directly to a judgment on whether the Antioch rules threaten individual freedom, the writer carefully searches out the assumptions—the premises and givens—underlying the attacks on the rules. (This is a key step missing from
  • 239. most inadequately developed analyses and arguments.) He proposes, for ex- ample, that underneath the consensus’ attack on the rules and its defense of individual freedom lies a basic premise about sex and society— that sexuality should not be governed by rules because it is natural rather than cultural: “These rules conflict with the assumption in this culture that sex is subject to the reign of nature, not artifice, that it is the province of the individual, not of society.” Strategies for Developing an Argument by Reasoning Back to Premises 83 3. Be alert for terms that create false dichotomies. A false dichotomy (sometimes called a false binary) inaccurately divides possible views on a subject into two opposing camps, forcing a choice between black and white, when some shade of gray might be fairer and more accurate. When reading, or when writing an argument of your own, it is a good strategy to question any either/or dichotomy. Consider whether its opposing terms define the issue fairly and accurately before accepting an argument in favor of one side or the other. Consider, too, how you might reject both choices offered by an either/or op- position to construct an alternative approach that is truer to the issues at hand.
  • 240. This is what the writer of the editorial does. He outlines and then rejects as a false dichotomy the consensus view that sexual behavior either is a province of individual freedom or is regulated by society: False Dichotomies Freedom vs. regulation Natural vs. artificial No rules vs. rules The writer argues instead that much of what we perceive to be natural is in fact governed by social rules and conventions, such as the notion of men as sexual initiators and women as no-sayers and gatekeepers. He proposes that what is really at stake is a different dichotomy, a choice between two sets of rules, one implicit and one explicit: Reformulated Dichotomies Rules vs. other rules Implicit vs. explicit Not working vs. might work Based on “no” vs. based on “yes” The editorial concludes that we need to decide questions of sexual behavior—at
  • 241. Antioch and in the culture at large—by recognizing and evaluating the relative merits of the two sets of rules rather than by creating a false dichotomy between rules and no rules, between regulation and freedom. 4. In your conclusion, return to the position that you set out to explore and restate it in the more carefully qualified way you arrived at in the body of your essay: “The choice is not between regulation and freedom, but between different sets of rules.” Clearly, the essay’s conclusion does not simply repeat the essay’s introductory claims, but it does respond to the way in which the essay began. Notice that virtually the entire essay has consisted of reasoning back to premises as a way of arriving at new ways of thinking. Try this 5.2: Reasoning Back to Premises In the following excerpt from a student paper, the writer advances various claims based on premises that are not articulated. Analyze the excerpt using the procedure for uncovering assumptions detailed earlier. Find the places in the paragraph where 84 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments the writer’s operating assumptions—what he or she takes as givens—are left unsaid, and compile a list of these. First, try to find the premises that
  • 242. are articulated. On what premises, for example, does the writer base the argument that self-interest contributes to the health and growth of the economy as a whole? In all levels of trade, including individual, local, domestic, and interna- tional, both buyers and sellers are essentially concerned with their own welfare. This self-interest, however, actually contributes to the health and growth of the economy as a whole. Each country benefits by exporting those goods in which it has an advantage and importing goods in which it does not. Importing and exporting allow countries to focus on produc- ing those goods that they can generate most efficiently. As a result of specializing in certain products and then trading them, self- interest leads to efficient trade, which leads to consumer satisfaction. Try this 5.3: Acknowledging Competing Premises In the following paragraph the writer has made his or her premises quite clear but has not acknowledged the possible validity of competing premises. (It is this same neglect of other possible positions that Fassin makes the substance of his editorial against the detractors of the Antioch rules; use him as a model). If the writer could become more self-conscious of reasoning back to premises, he or she would be more likely to discover these competing claims and either qualify the argument
  • 243. or overtly counter these competing claims. Field hockey is a sport that can be played by either men or women. All sports should be made available for members of both sexes. As long as women are allowed to participate on male teams in sports such as football and wrestling, men should be allowed to participate on female teams in sports such as field hockey and lacrosse. If women press for and receive equal opportunity in all sports, then it is only fair that men be given the same opportunity. If women object to this type of equal opportunity, then they are promoting reverse discrimination. Examine the paragraph and lay out the writer’s premises in your own words. First (1) Find at least two key assumptions that he or she wishes us to accept. Hint: the writer assumes, for example, that fairness ought to take precedence over other possible values in the selection of athletic teams. More generally, think about how he or she is defining other of her key terms. Then (2) formulate two assumptions that an audience who disagrees with the writer’s point of view might hold. THE PROBLEMS WITH DEBATE-STYLE ARGUMENT Many of you will have been introduced to writing arguments through the debate model—writing pro or con on a given position, with the aim of
  • 244. defeating an imagined opponent and convincing your readers of the rightness of your position. But as the American College Dictionary says, “to argue implies reasoning or trying to understand; it does not necessarily imply opposition.” It is this more exploratory, tentative, and dispassionate mode of argument that this book encourages you to practice. Seeing the Trees as Well as the Forest: Toulmin and the Rules of Argument 85 To its credit, the debate model teaches writers to consider more than a single viewpoint, their opponent’s as well as their own. But, unfortunately, it can also train them, even if inadvertently, to see the other side only as the opposition and to concen- trate their energy only on winning the day. The problem with this approach is that it overemphasizes the bottom line—aggressively advancing a claim for or against some view—without first engaging in the exploratory interpretation of evidence that is so necessary to arriving at thoughtful arguments. Thus, debate-style argument produces a frame of mind in which defending posi- tions matters more than taking the necessary time to develop ideas worth defending. And, very possibly, it nourishes the mudslinging and opinionated mindset—attack first—that proliferates in editorials and television talk shows,
  • 245. not to mention the conversations you overhear in going about your life. We are not saying that peo- ple should forget about making value and policy decisions and avoid the task of persuading others. We are saying that too many of the arguments we all read, hear, and participate in every day are based on insufficient analysis. In sum, adhering to the more restrictive, debate-style definition of argument can create a number of problems for careful analytical writers: 1. By requiring writers to be oppositional, it inclines them to discount or dismiss problems in the side or position they have chosen; they cling to the same static position rather than testing it as a way of allowing it to evolve. 2. It inclines writers toward either/or thinking rather than encouraging them to formulate more qualified (carefully limited, acknowledging exceptions, etc.) positions that integrate apparently opposing viewpoints. 3. It overvalues convincing someone else at the expense of developing under- standing. Analysis is an important corrective to narrow and needlessly oppositional thinking. A writer who is skeptical of global generalizations and of unexamined value judgments may sound timid and even confused compared with the insistent pronouncements of daytime talk shows and televised political
  • 246. debates. And be- cause the argumentative habit of mind is so aggressively visible in our culture, most people never get around to experimenting with the more reflective and less combative approach that analysis embraces. But the effort you put into carefully formulating your ideas by qualifying them, checking for unstated assumptions, and acknowledg- ing rather than ignoring problems in your position will make you a stronger writer and thinker. SEEING THE TREES AS WELL AS THE FOREST: TOULMIN AND THE RULES OF ARGUMENT At this point in our discussion, it will be helpful to digress slightly to talk about the systematic examination of evidence as it is described in the field of logic. Logic as a discipline has offered us various, sometimes conflicting rules of argument—procedures for locating and using evidence in the service of a claim and for determining when that use of evidence can be judged valid. 86 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments Philosophers have long quested for forms that might lend to human argu- ment some greater clarity and certainty, more like what is possible with formulas in math. As our discussion of one particular debate within the discipline of
  • 247. ph ilosophy demonstrates, however, the examination of evidence is necessarily an untidy process. Probably the most common way of talking about logical argumentation goes back to the Greek philosopher Aristotle. At the heart of the Aristotelian model is the syl- logism, which consists of three parts: 1. Major premise: a general proposition presumed to be true 2. Minor premise: a subordinate proposition also presumed to be true 3. Conclusion: a claim that follows logically from the two premises, if the argument has been properly framed A frequently cited example of a syllogism is: All men are mortal (major premise). Socrates is a man (minor premise). Therefore, Socrates is mortal (conclusion). A premise is a proposition (assumption) upon which an argument is based and from which a conclusion is drawn. In the syllogism, if both of the premises are true and have been stated in the proper form (both containing a shared term), then theoretically the conclusion must also be true. In the example, if it is true that all men are mortal, and if it is true that Socrates is a man, then it must
  • 248. follow that Socrates is mortal. The British philosopher Steven Toulmin offered a competing model of argument in his influential book, The Uses of Argument (1958). The Toulmin model can be seen as motivated by a desire to describe the structure of argument in a way that comes closer to what actually happens in practice when we try to take a position. The Toulmin model consists of: 1. Data: the evidence appealed to in support of a claim; data respond to the ques- tion “What have you got to go on?” 2. Warrant: a general principle or reason used to connect the data with the claim; the warrant responds to the question “How did you get there?” (from the data to the claim) 3. Claim: a conclusion about the data Toulmin’s model was motivated by his belief that the philosophical tradition of formal logic, with its many rules for describing and evaluating the conduct of arguments, conflicts with the practice and idiom (ways of phrasing) of arguers. To radically simplify Toulmin’s case, it is that the syllogism does not adequately account for what really happens when thinkers try to frame and defend various claims.
  • 249. Toulmin notes that the rules governing the phrasing of syllogistic arguments are very strict, as they must be if the form of an argument alone is to disclose its validity. Seeing the Trees as Well as the Forest: Toulmin and the Rules of Argument 87 The Socrates syllogism cited above earns its validity on the basis of its form. But for Toulmin, the strictness of the rules necessary for guaranteeing formal validity leaves out the greater amount of uncertainty that is a part of reasoning about most ques- tions, issues, and problems. A syllogism is designed to reveal its soundness through the careful framing and arrangement of its terms: All men are mortal. (All x’s are y.) Socrates is a man. (Socrates is an x.) Therefore, Socrates is mortal. (Socrates is y.) But at what price, asks Toulmin, do we simplify our phrasing of complex situa- tions in the world in order to gain this appearance of truth? In how many situations, he asks, can we say that “all x’s are y”? Toulmin observes, using his own argument structure as a case in point, that as soon as an argument begins to add information in support of its
  • 250. premises, the com- plexity and inevitable tentativeness of the argument become apparent, rather than its evident truth. Here is one of Toulmin’s examples of what must happen to the form of an argument when a person begins to add this supporting information, which he calls backing: Data: Harry was born in Bermuda. Warrant: The relevant statutes provide that people born in the colonies of British parents are entitled to British citizenship. Claim: So, presumably, Harry is a British citizen. The backing for the warrant would inevitably involve mentioning “the relevant statutes”—acts of Parliament, statistical reports, and so forth— to prove its accuracy. The addition of such information, says Toulmin, would “prevent us from writing the argument so that its validity shall be manifest from its formal properties alone” (The Uses of Argument, p. 123). In other words, formal logic has evaluated an argument on the basis of a tightly structured form (such as the syllogism) that makes the argument’s validity visible (manifest). But as soon as the form of the argument is made to include the greater amount of information that supports its accuracy and truth, it is
  • 251. no longer possible to evaluate the argument solely on the basis of its adherence to the required form. On this basis, Toulmin questions the tradition of guaranteeing the soundness of argu- ments solely on rules of form. The advantage of understanding Toulmin’s critique of syllogistic logic is that his model provides an antidote to the notion that there is a ready- made system for con- necting evidence with claims that guarantees that an argument will always be right. To use an analogy, if the Aristotelian syllogism appears to offer us the promise of never mistaking the forest for the trees, Toulmin’s revision of that model is to never let us forget that the forest is in fact made up of trees. As a writer, you naturally want some guidelines and workable methods for selecting evidence and linking it to claims, and this book does what it can to 88 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments provide them. But what you can’t expect to find is a set of predetermined slots into which you can drop any evidence and find the truth. Rather, as Toulmin allows us to see, analyses and arguments cannot be separated from the complex set of details and circumstances that are part of life as we live it.
  • 252. Clearly, the rules of argument are important for clarifying and testing our think- ing. But an argument depends not only on whether its premises follow logically but on the quality of the thinking that produces those premises in the first place and painstakingly tests their accuracy. This is the job of analysis. REFINING CATEGORICAL THINKING: TWO EXAMPLES We have paused to extol Toulmin because his flexible and sensitive approach to argu- mentative context offers the way out of a problem that besets too many of the argu- ments we all encounter in our daily lives. That problem is categorical thinking, and, to be more precise, the rigidity to which categorical thinking is prone. To generalize from particular experiences, we try to put those experiences into meaningful categories. Analytical thought is quite unthinkable without categories. But these can mislead us into oversimplification when the categories are too broad or too simply connected. This is especially the case with the either/or choices to which categorical thinking is prone: approve/disapprove, real/unreal, accurate/inaccurate, believable/unbelievable. The writer who evaluates leadership in terms of its selfless- ness/selfishness, for example, needs to pause to consider why we should evaluate lead- ership in these terms in the first place.
  • 253. We will refer to the following two examples to illustrate how (1) qualifying your claims and (2) checking for the unstated assumptions upon which your claims depend can remedy the two primary problems created by categorical thinking: unqualified claims and overstated positions. Example I: I think that there are many things shown on TV that are damaging for people to see. But there is no need for censorship. No network is going to show violence without the approval of the public, obviously for financial reasons. What must be remembered is that the public ma- jority will see what it wants to see in our mass society. Example II: Some members of our society feel that [the televised cartoon series] The Simpsons promotes wrong morals and values for our society. Other members find it funny and entertaining. I feel that The Simpsons has a more positive effect than a negative one. In relation to a real-life marriage, Marge and Homer’s marriage is pretty accurate. The problems they deal with are not very large or intense. As for the family relationships, the Simpsons are very close and love each other. The main problem with example I is the writer’s failure to qualify his ideas, a problem that causes him to generalize to the point of oversimplification. Note the writer’s habit of stating his claims absolutely (we have italicized the words that make these claims unqualified): “there is no need for censorship”
  • 254. “no network is going to show violence without” Refining Categorical Thinking: Two Examples 89 “obviously for financial reasons” “what must be remembered” “the majority will see” Such broad, pronouncement-like claims cannot be supported. The solution is to more carefully limit the claims, especially the key premise about public approval. The assertion that a commercial television industry will, for finan- cial reasons, give the public “what it wants” is true to an extent (our key phrase for reformulating either/ors)—but it is not true as globally as the writer wishes us to believe. Couldn’t it also be argued, for example, that given the power of television to shape people’s tastes and opinions, the public sees not just what it wants but what it has been taught to want? This complication of the writer’s argument about public approval undermines the credibility of his global assertion that “there is no need for censorship.” Example II would appear to be more qualified than example I
  • 255. because it acknowledges the existence of more than one point of view. Rather than broadly asserting that the show is positive and accurate, she tempers these claims (as italics show): “I feel that The Simpsons has a more positive effect than a negative one”; “Marge and Homer’s marriage is pretty accurate.” These qualifications, however, are superficial. Before she could convince us to approve of The Simpsons for its accuracy in depicting marriage, she would have to convince us that accuracy is a reasonable criterion for evaluating TV shows (especially cartoons) rather than assuming the unquestioned value of accuracy. Would an accurate depiction of the life of a serial killer, for example, necessarily make for a “positive” show? Similarly, if a fantasy show has no interest in accuracy, is it necessarily “negative” and without moral value? When writers present a debatable premise as if it were self- evidently true, the conclusions built upon it cannot stand. At the least, the writer of example II needs to recognize her debatable premise, articulate it, and make an argument in support of it. She might also precede her judgment about the show with more analysis. Before deciding that the show is “more positive than negative” and thus does not promote “wrong morals and values for our society,” she could analyze
  • 256. what the show says about marriage and how it goes about saying it. Likewise, if the writer of example I had further examined his own claims before rushing to argue an absolute position on censorship, he would have noticed how much of the thinking that underlies them remains unarticulated and thus unexamined. It would also allow him to sort out the logical contradiction with his opening claim that “there are many things shown on TV that are da maging for people to see.” If television networks will only broadcast what the public approves of, then apparently the public must approve of being damaged or fail to notice that it is being damaged. If the public either fails to notice it is being damaged or approves of it, aren’t these credible arguments for rather than against censorship? 90 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments A BRIEF GLOSSARY OF COMMON LOGICAL ERRORS This last section of the chapter returns briefly to the field of logic, which provides terms to shorthand certain common thinking errors. We mention six errors, all of which involve the root problem of oversimplification. 1. Simple cause/complex effect. The fallacy of simple cause/complex effect involves
  • 257. assigning a single cause to a complex phenomenon that cannot be so easily explained. A widespread version of this fallacy is seen in arguments that blame individual figures for broad historical events, for example, “Eisenhower caused America to be involved in the Vietnam War.” Such a claim ignores the Cold War ethos, the long history of colonialism in Southeast Asia, and a multitude of other factors. When you reduce a complex sequence of events to a simple and single cause—or assign a simple effect to a complex cause—you will virtually always be wrong. 2. False cause. Another common cause/effect thinking error, false cause is produced by assuming that two events are causally connected when they aren’t necessarily. One of the most common forms of this fallacy—known as post hoc, ergo propter hoc (Latin for “after this, therefore because of this”)—assumes that because A precedes B in time, A causes B. For example, it was once thought that the sun shining on a pile of garbage caused the garbage to conceive flies. This error is the stuff that superstition is made of. “I walked under a ladder, and then I got hit by a car” becomes “Because I walked under a ladder, I got hit by a car.” Because one action precedes a second one in time, the first action is assumed to be the cause of the second. A more dangerous form
  • 258. of this error goes like this: Evidence: A new neighbor moved in downstairs on Saturday. My television dis- appeared on Sunday. Conclusion: The new neighbor stole my TV. As this example also illustrates, typically in false cause some significant alterna- tive has not been considered, such as the presence of flies’ eggs in the garbage. Similarly, it does not follow that if a person watches television and then commits a crime, television watching necessarily causes crime; there are other causes to be considered. 3. Analogy and false analogy. An analogy is a means of understanding some- thing relatively foreign in terms of something more familiar. When you argue by analogy you are saying that what is true for one thing will necessarily be true for something else that it in some way resembles. The famous poetic line “my love is like a red, red rose,” is actually an argument by analogy. At first glance, this rather clichéd comparison seems too far-fetched to be reasonable. But is it a false analogy or a potentially enabling one? Past users of this analogy have thought the thorns, the early fading, the beauty, and so on, sufficient to validate the analogy between roses and women. Analogies, in
  • 259. short, are not bad A Brief Glossary of Common Logical Errors 91 or illogical in themselves. In fact, they can be incredibly useful, depending on how you handle them. The danger that arguing analogically can pose is that an inaccurate compari- son, usually one that oversimplifies, prevents you from looking at the evidence. Flying to the moon is like flying a kite? Well, it’s a little bit like that, but . . . in most ways that matter, sending a rocket to the moon does not resemble send- ing a kite into the air. Another way that an analogy can become false is when it becomes over- extended: there is a point of resemblance at one juncture, but the writer then goes on to assume that the two items compared will necessarily resemble each other in most other respects. To what extent is balancing your checkbook really like juggling? On the other hand, an analogy that first appears overextended may not be: how far, for example, could you reasonably go in comparing a presiden- tial election to a sales campaign, or an enclosed shopping mall to a village main street?
  • 260. When you find yourself reasoning by analogy, ask yourself two questions: (1) are the basic similarities greater and more significant than the obvious dif- ferences? and (2) am I overrelying on surface similarities and ignoring more essential differences? 4. Equivocation. Equivocation confuses an argument by slipping between two meanings for a single word or phrase. For example: “Only man is capable of religious faith. No woman is a man. Therefore, no woman is capable of religious faith.” Here the first use of man is generic, intended to be gender neutral, while the second use is decidedly masculine. One specialized form of equivocation results in what are sometimes called weasel words. A weasel word is one that has been used so much and so loosely that it ceases to have much meaning (the term derives from the weasel’s reputed practice of sucking the contents from an egg without destroying the shell). The word natural, for example, can mean good, pure, and unsullied, but it can also refer to the ways of nature (flora and fauna). Such terms (love, reality, and experience are others) invite equivocation because they mean so many different things to different people. 5. Begging the question. To beg the question is to argue in a circle by asking read- ers to accept without argument a point that is actually at stake. This kind of
  • 261. fallacious argument hides its conclusion among its assumptions. For example, “Huckleberry Finn should be banned from school libraries as obscene because it uses obscene language” begs the question by presenting as obviously true issues that are actually in question: the definition of obscenity and the assumption that the obscene should be banned because it is obscene. 6. Overgeneralization. An overgeneralization is an inadequately qualified claim. It may be true that some heavy drinkers are alcoholics, but it would be not fair to claim that all heavy drinking is or leads to alcoholism. As a rule, be wary of “totalizing” or global pronouncements; the bigger the generalization, the more likely it admits exceptions. 92 Chapter 5 Analyzing Arguments ASSIGNMENTS: Analyze or Produce an Argument 1. Locate the binaries in an editorial or other position piece and explore the extent to which these are adequate and inadequate ways of defining the subject. Once you have arrived at the essential claims of the piece, analyze these using the tools offered in this chapter. In particular, you should use the strategies for reformu- lating binaries in A Procedure for Reformulating Binaries in Argument and for
  • 262. unearthing premises in the A Procedure for Uncovering Assumptions sections. Remember to share your thinking, not just to present your conclusions, as you write your analysis. 2. Write an essay in which you reason back to the premises that underlie some idea or attitude of your own, preferably one that has undergone some kind of change in recent years (for example, your attitude toward the world of work, marriage, family life, community, religion, etc.). Take care not to substitute unanalyzed narrative for analysis. Even though you are working from your own experience, stay focused on analysis of your assumptions and binaries (which you can use the two procedures cited in the previous assignment option to produce). 3. Compose an argument of your own (it can be an editorial), using the chapter’s Strategies for Developing an Argument by Reasoning Back to Premises. As you have seen, the editorial on the Antioch Rules is both a critique of the thinking in another argument and an argument in its own right. And so if you wish you may use an analysis of an existing argument to prompt your own. CHAPTER 6
  • 263. Topics and Modes of Analysis The first unit of this book, The Analytical Frame of Mind, has sought to persuade you that analysis is worth the challenge—that you can unlearn less productive ways of thinking and take on fresh habits that will make you smarter. In this final chapter of Unit I, we offer concrete advice about how to succeed in creating writing that fulfills some of the most common basic writing tasks that you will be asked to produce at the undergraduate level and beyond. A unifying element of the chapters in this unit is their focus on the stage of the composing process that rhetoricians call invention. This chapter takes up several of classical rhetoric’s topics of invention, which are places (from the Greek topoi) from which a writer or orator might discover the things he or she needs to say. These top- ics include comparison/contrast and definition, to which we have added summary, reaction papers, and agree/disagree topics because these are such common forms in college and other writing settings. The chapter offers you strategies for making the best use of these topics as analytical tools. The chapter opens by focusing on rhetorical analysis: an approach that we have been featuring from the opening pages, without labeling it as such. Rhetorical analysis is a concern for analytical thinkers because it focuses on how and why our responses
  • 264. are triggered and shaped by things in the world, from a sign we read on the subway to the language of a presidential speech. Like analysis in general, rhetorical analysis asks what things mean, why they are as they are and do what they do. But rhetorical analysis asks these questions with one primary question always foregrounded: how does the thing achieve its effects on an audience? Rhetorical analysis asks not just what do I think, but what am I being invited to think (and feel) and by what means? RHETORICAL ANALYSIS To analyze the rhetoric of something is to determine how that something persuades and positions its readers or viewers or listeners. Rhetorical analysis is an essential skill because it reveals how particular pieces of communication seek to enlist our support and shape our behavior. Only then can we decide whether we should be persuaded to respond as we have been invited to respond. 93 94 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis Everything has a rhetoric: classrooms, churches, speeches, supermarkets, department store windows, Starbucks, photographs, magazine covers, your bedroom, this book. In-
  • 265. tention, by the way, is not the issue. It doesn’t matter whether the effect of a place or a piece of writing on its viewers (or readers) is deliberate and planned or not. What mat- ters is that you can notice how the details of the thing itself encourage or discourage certain kinds of responses in the consumers of whatever it is you are studying. What, for example, does the high ceiling of a Gothic cathedral invite in the way of response from people who enter it? What do the raised platform at the front of a classroom and the tidy rows of desks secured to the floor say to the students who enter there? If you are reading this book in a first-year college writing course, you may be asked to write a rhetorical analysis, often of a visual image of some kind, early in the semester. What follows is an exercise in rhetorical analysis that will help you better understand the aims and methods of this kind of analysis. We think it is easiest to start with analysis of visual rhetoric—the rhetoric, for example, of a typical classroom. Rhetorical Analysis of a Place: A Brief Example To get you started on a rhetorical analysis of a place, here is the beginning of one on the layout of our college campus. It was written as a freewrite and could serve as the basis for further observation. The campus is laid out in several rows and quadrangles. It is interesting to observe where the differ-
  • 266. ent academic buildings are, relative to the academic departments they house. It is also interesting to see how the campus positions student housing. In a way, the campus is set up as a series of quadrangles—areas of space with four sides. One of the dormitories, for example, forms a quad- rangle. Quadrangles invite people to look in—rather than out. They are enclosed spaces, the center of which is a kind of blank. The center serves as a shared space, a safely walled-off area for the de- velopment of a separate community. The academic buildings also form a quadrangle of sorts, with an open green space in the center. On one side of the quadrangle are the buildings that house the natu- ral and social sciences. Opposite these—on the other side of a street that runs through the center of campus—are the modern brick and glass structures that house the arts and the humanities . . . If you push these observations by asking “So what?,” here are some of the rhetori- cal implications at which you might arrive: • That the campus is inward-looking and self-enclosed • That it invites its members to feel separate and safe • That it announces the division of the sciences and the social sciences from the arts and humanities, so the campus layout arguably creates the sense of a divided community. Rhetorical Analysis of an Advertisement: A Student Paper This example is excerpted from a student’s rhetorical analysis of a perfume advertise-
  • 267. ment that appeared in a magazine aimed at young women. The analysis was written in a course called Introduction to Communication. The writer’s aim is not only to tell Rhetorical Analysis 95 her readers what the advertisement “says” but to locate it in a social context. The stu- dent also uses secondary sources to provide an interpretive context (a lens) through which to see the rhetoric of the ad—its means of persuasion. The visual imagery of advertisements offers instructive opportunities for rhetori- cal analysis because advertising is a form of persuasion. Advertisers attend to rhetoric by carefully targeting their audiences. This means advertisements are well suited to the questions that rhetorical analysis typically asks: how is the audience being invited to respond and by what means (in what context)? You’ll notice that in the rhetorical analysis of the magazine ad, the writer occasionally extends her analysis to evaluative conclusions about the aims and possible effects (on American culture) of the adver- tisement. We’ve included the first five paragraphs of the essay along with a piece of its conclusion. Marketing the Girl Next Door: A Declaration of Independence? [1] Found in Seventeen magazine, the advertisement for “tommy girl,” the perfume manu-
  • 268. factured by Tommy Hilfiger, sells the most basic American ideal of independence. Various visual images and text suggest that purchasing tommy girl buys freedom and liberation for the mind and body. This image appeals to young women striving to establish them- selves as unbound individuals. Ironically, the advertisement uses traditional American icons as vehicles for marketing to the modern woman. Overall, the message is simple: American individualism can be found in a spray or nonspray bottle. [2] Easily, the young woman dominates the advertisement. She has the look of the all- American “girl next door.” Her appeal is a natural one, as she does not rely on makeup or a runway model’s cheekbones for her beauty. Freckles frame her eyes that ambitiously gaze skyward; there are no limits restricting women in capitalist America. Her flowing brown hair freely rides a stirring breeze. Unconcerned with the order of a particular hairstyle, she smiles and enjoys the looseness of her spirit. The ad tells us how wearing this perfume allows women to achieve the look of self-assured and liberated indifference without appearing vain. [3] The second most prevalent image in the advertisement is the American flag, which neatly matches the size of the young woman’s head. The placement and size of the flag suggest that if anything is on her cloudless mind, it is fundamental American beliefs
  • 269. that allow for such self-determination. The half-concealed flag is seemingly continued in the young woman’s hair. According to the ad, American ideals reside well within the girl as well as the perfume. [4] It is also noticeable that there is a relative absence of land surrounding the young woman. We can see glimpses of “fruited plains” flanking the girl’s shoulders. This young woman is barely bound to earth, as free as the clouds that float beneath her head. It is this liberated image Americans proudly carry that is being sold in the product. [5] The final image promoting patriotism can be found in the young woman’s clothing. The young woman is draped in the blue jean jacket, a classic symbol of American ruggedness and originality. As far as we can see, the jacket is spread open, supporting the earlier claim of the young women’s free and independent spirit. These are the very same 96 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis ideals that embody American pride and patriotism. The ad clearly employs the association principle in linking the tommy girl fragrance with emotionally compelling yet essentially unrelated images of American nationalism and patriotism. [. . .] [10] Yet in reality, this marketing of liberation is paradoxical;
  • 270. although this freeing message promotes rebellion and nonconformity, it actually supports the market economy and feeds into capitalism and conformity. When advertisers employ political protest messages to be associated with products, they imply that buying the product is a form of political action. We now move to strategies for making your response to some traditional topics more analytical. Like the other thinking tools in this unit, each of these topics can aid in the invention stage of your writing. SUMMARY Summary and analysis go hand in hand; the primary goal for both is to understand rather than evaluate. Summary is a necessary early step in analysis because it provides perspective on the subject as a whole by explaining the meaning and function of each of that subject’s parts. Within larger analyses—papers or reports—summary performs the essential function of contextualizing a subject accurately. It creates a fair picture of what’s there. Summarizing isn’t simply the unanalytical reporting of information; it’s more than just shrinking someone else’s words. To write an accurate summary, you have to ask analytical questions, such as the following: • Which of the ideas in the reading are most significant? Why? • How do these ideas fit together?
  • 271. • What do the key passages in the reading mean? Summarizing is, then, like paraphrasing, a tool of understanding and not just a mechanical task. When summaries go wrong, they are just lists, a simple “this and then this” sequence. Often lists are random, as in a shopping list compiled from the first thing you thought of to the last. Sometimes they are organized in broad categories: fruit and vegetables here, dried goods there. At best, they do very little logical connecting among the parts beyond “next.” Summaries that are just lists tend to dollop out the information monotonously. They omit the thinking that the piece is doing—the ways it is connecting the informa- tion, the contexts it establishes, and the implicit slant or point of view. Writing analytical summaries can teach you how to read for the connections, the lines that connect the dots. And when you’re operating at that level, you are much more likely to have ideas about what you are summarizing. Strategies for Making Summaries More Analytical Strategy 1: Look for the Underlying Structure Use The Method to find patterns of repetition and contrast. (See Chapter 3.) If you apply it to a few key para- graphs, you will find the terms that are repeated, and these will suggest strands,
  • 272. Summary 97 which in turn make up organizing contrasts. This process works to categorize and then further organize information and, in so doing, to bring out its underly- ing structure. Strategy 2: Select the Information That You Wish to Discuss on Some Principle Other Than General Coverage Use the Notice and Focus strategy to rank items of information in some order of importance. (See Chapter 3.) Let’s say that you are writ- ing a paper on major changes in the tax law or on recent developments in U.S. policy toward the Middle East. Rather than simply collecting the information, try to arrange it into hierarchies. What are the least or most significant changes or developments, and why? Which are most overlooked or most overrated or most controversial or most practical, and why? All of these terms—significant, overlooked, and so forth—have the effect of focusing the summary, guiding your decisions about what to include and exclude. Strategy 3: Reduce Scope and Say More about Less Both The Method and Notice and Focus involve some loss of breadth; you won’t be able to cover everything. But this is usually a trade-off worth making. Your ability to rank parts of your subject or choose
  • 273. a revealing feature or pattern to focus on gives you surer control of the material than if you just reproduce what is in the text. You can still begin with a brief survey of major points to provide context, before narrowing the focus. Reducing scope is an especially efficient and productive strategy when you are trying to understand a reading you find difficult or perplexing. It moves you beyond passive summarizing and toward having ideas about the reading. If, for example, you are reading Chaucer’s Canterbury Tales and start cataloging what makes it funny, you are likely to end up with unanalyzed plot summary— a list that arranges its elements in no particular order. But narrowing the question to “How does Chaucer’s use of religious commentary contribute to the humor of ‘The Wife of Bath’s Tale’?” reduces the scope to a single tale and the humor to a single aspect of humor. Describe those as accurately as you can, and you will begin to notice things. Strategy 4: Get Some Detachment: Shift Your Focus from What? to How? and Why? Most readers tend to get too single-minded about absorbing the information. That is, they attend only to the what: what the reading is saying or is about. They take it all in passively. But you can deliberately shift your focus to how it says what it says, and why.
  • 274. If, for example, you were asked to discuss the major discoveries that Darwin made on The Beagle, you could avoid simply listing his conclusions by redirecting your attention to how he proceeds. You could choose to focus, for example, on Darwin’s use of the scientific method, examining how he builds and, in some cases, discards hypotheses. Or you might select several passages that illustrate how Darwin proceeded from evidence to conclusion and then rank them in order of importance to the over- all theory. Notice that in shifting the emphasis to Darwin’s thinking—the how and why—you would not be excluding the what (the information component) from your discussion. 98 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis PERSONAL RESPONSE: THE REACTION PAPER The biggest advantage of reaction papers is that they give you the freedom to explore where and how to engage your subject. They bring to the surface your emotional or intui- tive response, allowing you to experiment with placing the subject in various contexts. Another advantage of personal response questions is that they allow you to get some distance on your first impressions. If, as you reexamine your first reactions, you look for ways that they might not be accurate, you will often find places
  • 275. where you now disagree with yourself, in effect, stimulating you to think in new ways about the subject. Personal response becomes a problem, however, when it distracts you from ana- lyzing the subject. In most cases, when you are invited to respond personally, you are being asked for more than your endorsement or critique of the subject. If you find yourself constructing a virtual list—I agree with this point or I disagree with that point—you are probably doing little more than matching your opinions with the points of view encountered in a reading. In most cases, you misinterpret the intent of a personal response topic if you view it as an invitation to: 1. Assert your personal opinions unreflectively. 2. Substitute narratives of your own experience for careful consideration of the subject. In an academic setting, an opinion is more than simply an expression of your beliefs; it’s a conclusion that you earn the rights to through a careful examination of evidence. Strategies for Making Personal Responses More Analytical Strategy 1: Trace Your Responses Back to Their Causes As we noted in Chapter 2, tracing your impressions back to their causes is the key to making personal response analytical—because you focus on the details that gave you the response rather than
  • 276. on the response alone. Let’s say, for example, that you are responding to an article on ways of increasing the numbers of registered voters in urban precincts. You find the article irritating; your personal experience working with political campaigns has taught you that get- ting out the vote is not as easy as this writer makes it seem. From that starting point, you might analyze one (to you) overly enthusiastic passage, concentrating on how the writer has not only overestimated what campaign workers can actually do but also condescends to those who don’t register—assuming, perhaps, that they are ignorant rather than indifferent or disillusioned. Tracing your response back to its cause may help to defuse your emotional response and open the door to further investigation of the other writer’s rationale. You might, for example, discover that the writer has in mind a much more long-term effect or that urban models differ significantly from the suburban ones of your experience. Strategy 2: Assume That You May Have Missed the Point It’s difficult to see the logic of someone else’s position if you are too preoccupied with your own. Similarly, it is difficult to see the logic, or illogic, of your own position if you already assume it to be true. Personal Response: The Reaction Paper 99
  • 277. Although an evaluative response (approve/disapprove) can sometimes spur analy- sis, it can also lead you to prejudge the case. If, however, you habitually question the validity of your own point of view, you will sometimes recognize the possibility of an alternative point of view, as was the case in the voter registration example. (See Figure 6.1.) Assuming that you have missed the point is a good strategy in all kinds of analytical writing. It causes you to notice details of your subject that you might not otherwise have registered. Strategy 3: Locate Your Response within a Limiting Context Suppose you are asked in a religion course to write your religious beliefs. Although this topic would naturally lead you to think about your own experiences and beliefs, you would probably do best to approach it in some more limiting context. The reading in the course could provide this limit. Let’s say that thus far you have read two modern religious thinkers, Martin Buber and Paul Tillich. Using these as your context, “What do I believe?” could become “How does my response to Buber and Tillich illuminate my own assumptions about the nature of religious faith?” An advantage of this move, beyond making your analysis less general, is that it would help you to get perspective on your own position. Another way of limiting your context is to consider how one
  • 278. author or recognizable point of view that you have encountered in the course might respond to a single statement from another author or point of view. If you used this strategy to respond to the topic “Does God exist?” you might arrive at a formulation such as “How would Martin Buber critique Paul Tillich’s definition of God?” Although this topic appears to exclude personal response entirely, it in fact does not. Your opinion would necessarily enter because you would be actively formulating something that is not already evident in the reading (how Buber might respond to Tillich). Evaluative Personal Response: “The article was irritating.” This response is too broad and dismissively judgmental. Make it more analytical by tracing the response back to the evidence that triggered it. A More Analytical Evaluative Response: “The author of the article oversimplifies the problem by assuming the cause of low voter registration to be voters’ ignorance rather than voters’ indifference.” Although still primarily an evaluative response, this observation is more analytical. It takes the writer’s initial response (”irritating”) to a specific cause. A Nonevaluative Analytical Response: “The author’s emphasis on increased cover- age of city politics in local/neighborhood forums such as the
  • 279. churches suggests that the author is interested in long-term effects of voter registration drives and not just in immediate increases.” Rather than simply reacting (”irritating”) or leaping to evaluation (”oversimplifies the problem”), the writer here formulates a possible explanation for the difference between his or her point of view on voter registration drives and the article’s. FIGURE 6.1 Making Personal Response More Analytical 100 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis AGREE/DISAGREE We offer here only a brief recap of this kind of topic because it is discussed at length in earlier chapters. Topics are frequently worded as agree/disagree, especially on essay exams, but the wording is potentially misleading because you are rarely being asked for as unqualified an opinion as agree or disagree. In most cases, your best strategy in dealing with agree/disagree questions is to choose neither side. Instead, question the terms of the binary so as to arrive at a more complex and qualified position to write about. In place of choosing one side or the other, decide to what extent you agree and to what extent you disagree. You are still responsible for coming down more on one side than the other,
  • 280. but this need not mean that you have to locate yourself in a starkly either/or position. The code phrase for accomplishing this shift, as we’ve suggested in Chapter 5, is “the extent to which”: “To what extent do you agree (or disagree)?” COMPARISON/CONTRAST Although comparison/contrast is meant to invite analysis, it is too often treated as an end in itself. The fundamental reason for comparing and contrasting is that you can usually discover ideas about a subject much more easily when you are not viewing it in isolation. When executed mechanically, however, without the writer pressing to understand the significance of a similarity or difference, comparison/contrast can suffer from pointlessness. Comparison/contrast topics produce pointless essays if you allow them to turn into matching exercises—that is, if you match common features of two subjects but don’t get beyond the equation stage (a, b, c = x, y, z). Writers fall into this trap when they have no larger question or issue to explore and perhaps resolve by making the comparison. If, for example, you were to pursue the comparison of the representa- tions of the Boston Tea Party in British and American history textbooks, you would begin by identifying similarities and differences. But simply presenting these and concluding that the two versions resemble and differ from each
  • 281. other in some ways would be pointless. You would need to press your comparisons with the So what? question (see Chapter 4) to give them some interpretive weight. Strategies for Making Comparison/Contrast More Analytical Strategy 1: Argue for the Significance of a Key Comparison Rather than simply cov- ering a range of comparisons, focus on a key comparison. Although narrowing the focus might seem to eliminate other important areas of consideration, in fact it usu- ally allows you to incorporate at least some of these other areas in a more tightly con- nected, less list-like fashion. So, for example, a comparison of the burial rites of two cultures probably reveals more about them than a much broader but more superficial list of cultural similarities and differences. In the majority of cases, covering less is covering more. Comparison/Contrast 101 You can determine which comparison is key by ranking. You are ranking whenever you designate one part of your topic as especially important or reveal- ing. Suppose you are asked to compare General Norman Schwarzkopf ’s strat- egy in the first Persian Gulf War with General Douglas MacArthur’s strategy in World War II. As a first move, you could limit the comparison
  • 282. to some reveal- ing parallel, such as the way each man dealt with the media, and then argue for its significance above other similarities or differences. You might, for instance, claim that in their treatment of the media we get an especially clear or telling vantage point on the two generals’ strategies. At this point you are on your way to an analytical point—for example, that because MacArthur was more effectively shielded from the media at a time when the media was a virtual instrument of propaganda, he could make choices that Schwarzkopf might have wanted to make but couldn’t. Strategy 2: Use One Side of the Comparison to Illuminate the Other Usually it is not necessary to treat each part of the comparison equally. It’s a common misconception that each side must be given equal space. In fact, the purpose of your comparison governs the amount of space you’ll need to give to each part. Often, you will be using one side of the comparison primarily to illuminate the other. For example, in a course on contemporary military policy, the ratio between the two parts would probably be roughly seventy percent on Schwarzkopf to thirty percent on MacArthur rather than fifty percent on each. Strategy 3: Imagine How One Side of Your Comparison Might Respond to the Other This strategy, a variant of the preceding one, is a
  • 283. particularly useful way of helping you to respond to comparison/contrast topics more purposefully. This strategy can be adapted to a wide variety of subjects. If you were asked to compare Sigmund Freud with one of his most important follow- ers, Jacques Lacan, you would probably be better off focusing the broad ques- tion of how Lacan revises Freud by considering how and why he might critique Freud’s interpretation of a particular dream in The Interpretation of Dreams. Similarly, in the case of the Persian Gulf War example, you could ask yourself how MacArthur might have handled some key decision in the Persian Gulf War and why. Or you might consider how he would have critiqued Schwarzkopf ’s handling of that decision and why. Strategy 4: Focus on Difference within Similarity (or Similarity within Difference) The typical move when you are asked to compare two subjects is to collect a number of parallel examples and show how they are parallel, which can lead to bland tallying of similarities without much analytical edge. In the case of obvious similarities, you should move quickly to significant differences within the similarity and the implica- tions of these differences. In this way, you better define your subject, and you are more likely to offer your readers something that is not already clear to them. For example, the Carolingian and Burgundian Renaissances share an emphasis
  • 284. on education, but if 102 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis you were asked to compare them, you could reveal the character of these two histori- cal periods more effectively by concentrating on the different purposes and origins of this emphasis on education. A corollary of the difference within similarity formula is that you can focus on unexpected similarity rather than obvious difference. It is no surprise that President Bill Clinton’s economic package differed from President Ronald Reagan’s, but much could be written about the way that Clinton “out-Reaganed Bush” (as one politi- cal commentator put it) by appealing to voters with Reagan’s brand of populist optimism—a provocative similarity within difference. DEFINITION Definition becomes meaningful when it serves some larger purpose. You define “rhythm and blues” because it is essential to any further discussion of the evolution of rock-and-roll music, or because you need that definition to discuss the British Invasion spearheaded by groups such as the Beatles, the Rolling Stones, and the Yard- birds in the late 1960s, or because you cannot classify John Lennon, Mick Jagger, or
  • 285. Eric Clapton without it. Like comparison/contrast, definition can produce pointless essays if the writer gets no further than assembling information. Moreover, when you construct a sum- mary of existing definitions with no clear sense of purpose, you tend to list definitions indiscriminately. As a result, you are likely to overlook conflicts among the various definitions and overemphasize their surface similarities. Definition is in fact a site at which there is some contesting of authorities—different voices who seek to make their definition triumph. Strategies for Making Definition More Analytical Strategy 1: Test the Definition against Evidence One common form of definition asks you to apply a definition to a body of information. It is rare to find a perfect fit. Therefore, you should, as a general rule, use the data to assess the accuracy and the limitations of the definition, rather than simply imposing it on your data and ignoring or playing down the ways in which it does not fit. Testing the definition against evidence makes your definition evolve. The definition, in turn, serves as a lens to better focus your thinking about the evidence. Suppose you were asked to define capitalism in the context of third-world
  • 286. economies. You might profitably begin by matching some standard definition of capitalism with specific examples from one or two third-world economies, with the express purpose of detecting where the definition does and does not apply. In other words, you would respond to the definition topic by assaying the extent to which (that phrase again!) the definition provides a tool for making sense of the subject. Definition 103 Strategy 2: Use a Definition from One Source to Critique and Illuminate Another As a general rule, you should attempt to identify the points of view of the sources from which you take your definitions, rather than accepting them as uncontextualized answers. It is essential to identify the particular slant because otherwise you will tend to overlook the conflicting elements among various definitions of a key term. A paper on alcoholism, for example, will lose focus if you use all of the defini- tions available. If, instead, you convert the definition into a comparison and contrast of competing definitions, you can more easily generate a point and purpose for your definition. By querying, for example, whether a given source’s definition of alcohol-
  • 287. ism is moral or physiological or psychological, you can more easily resolve the issue of definition. Strategy 3: Problematize as Well as Synthesize the Definition To explore competing definitions of the same term requires you to attend to the difficul- ties of definition. In general, analysis achieves direction and purpose by locating and then exploring a problem. You can productively make a problem out of defining. This strategy is known as problematizing, which locates and then explores the significance of uncertainties and conflicts. It is always a smart move to problematize definitions to reveal complexity that less careful thinkers might miss. The definition of capitalism that you might take from Karl Marx, for example, differs in its emphases from Adam Smith’s. In this case, you would not only isolate the most important of these differences but also try to account for the fact that Marx’s villain is Smith’s hero. Such an accounting would probably lead you to consider how the definition has been shaped by each of these writers’ political philosophies or by the culture in which each theory was composed. Strategy 4: Shift from What? to How? and Why? Questions It is no accident that
  • 288. we earlier offered the same strategy for making summary more analytical: analytical topics that require definition also depend on “why?” or “how?” questions, not “what?” questions (which tend simply to call for information). If, for example, you sought to define the meaning of darkness in Joseph Conrad’s Heart of Darkness and any two other modern British novels, you would do better to ask why the writers find darkness such a fertile term than simply to accumulate various examples of the term in the three novels. You might start by isolating the single best example from each of the works, preferably ones that reveal important differences as well as similarities. Then, in analyzing how each writer uses the term, you could work toward some larger point that would unify the essay. You might show how the conflicts of definition within Conrad’s meta- phor evolve historically, get reshaped by female novelists, change after World War I, and so forth. 104 Chapter 6 Topics and Modes of Analysis ASSIGNMENTS: Using the Topics and Modes of Analysis 1. Locate any magazine ad that you find interesting. Ask yourself, what is this a picture of ? Use the student paper on the perfume ad as a kind of model for
  • 289. ways of thinking about the ad’s rhetorical agenda. If you find yourself getting stuck, rephrase the question as, “What is this ad really about, and why did the advertiser choose this particular image or set of images? Strategies in this unit that might work well with this assignment are Seems to Be about X . . . (in Chapter 4) and Make the Implicit Explicit (see Chapters 1 and 4). 2. Analyze a New Yorker cover in more than one interpretive context. The cover we recommend is by Harry Bliss, dated August 1, 2005, and is entitled “King Kong.” It depicts a large gorilla near the Empire State Building in New York squirting a crowd of overheated New Yorkers with a large green squirt gun. You can see this cover either on the artist’s website or at The New Yorker store website (click on Browse by Artist; choose Harry Bliss.) One obvious context for the cover is the movie King Kong, which was about to come out in the latest Peter Jackson version. Another context is international terrorism in general, and probably 9/11 in particular, given that the gorilla (gue- rilla?) is perched near a prominent NYC architectural icon. Also, just before the cover was published, a bombing had occurred in the London underground. In your paper you should focus on how the cartoonist is negotiating both his
  • 290. contexts and his audience. How, in other words, does the rhetoric of the cover work in the context of current fears about international terrorism? Which details of the cover “speak” most interestingly in this regard—and what do they say? 3. Write two summaries of the same article or book chapter. Make the first one consecutive (the so-called “coverage” model)—that is, try to cover the piece by essentially listing the key points as they appear. Limit yourself to a typed page. Then rewrite the summary, doing the following: • Rank the items in order of importance according to some principle that you designate, explaining your rationale; • Eliminate the last few items on the list, or at most, give each a single sentence; and • Use the space you have saved to include more detail about the most important item or two. The second half of this assignment will probably require closer to two pages. 4. Write a paper in which you explore significant differences and similarities, using any item from the following list. List as many similarities and differences as you can: go for coverage. Then
  • 291. review your list and select the two or three most revealing similarities and the two or three most revealing differences. At this point, you are ready to write a few paragraphs in which you argue for the significance of a key difference or similarity. In so doing, you may find it interesting to focus on an unexpected Definition 105 similarity or difference—one that others might not initially notice. (We recom- mend trying the “unexpected” gambit.) a. Accounts of the same event from two different newspapers or magazines or textbooks b. Two CDs (or even songs) by the same artist or group c. Two ads for the same kind of product d. Graffiti in men’s bathrooms versus graffiti in women’s bathrooms e. The political campaigns of two opponents running for the same or similar office f. Courtship behavior as practiced by men and by women g. Two breeds of dog
  • 292. h. Two clothing styles as emblematic of socioeconomic class or a subgroup in your school, town, or workplace i. Two versions of the same song by different artists 5. Write a comparative definition in which you seek out different and potentially competing definitions of the same term or terms. Begin with a dictionary such as the Oxford English Dictionary (popularly known as the OED, available in most library reference rooms or online) that contains both historically based definitions tracking the term’s evolution over time and etymological definitions that identify the linguistic origins of the term (its sources in older languages). Be sure to locate both the etymology and the historical evolution of the term or terms. Then look up the term in one or preferably several specialized dictionaries. We offer a list of some of these in Chapter 16, Finding, Citing, and Integrating Sources, but you can also ask your reference librarian for pertinent titles. Gener- ally speaking, different disciplines generate their own specialized dictionaries. Summarize key differences and similarities among the ways the dictionaries have defined your term or terms. Then write a comparative essay in which you argue for the significance of a key similarity or difference, or
  • 293. an unexpected one. Here is the list of words: hysteria, ecstasy, enthusiasm, witchcraft, leisure, gos- sip, bachelor, spinster, romantic, instinct, punk, thug, pundit, dream, alcoholism, aristocracy, atom, ego, pornography, conservative, liberal, entropy, election, tariff. Some of these words are interesting to look at together, such as ecstasy/ enthusiasm or liberal/ conservative or bachelor/spinster. Feel free to write on a pair instead of a single word. This page intentionally left blank UNIT II Writing the Analytical Essay CHAPTER 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works CHAPTER 8 Using Evidence to Build a Paper: 10 on 1 versus 1 on 10 CHAPTER 9 Making a Thesis Evolve CHAPTER 10 Structuring the Paper: Forms and Formats
  • 294. CHAPTER 11 Introductions and Conclusions CHAPTER 12 Recognizing and Fixing Weak Thesis Statements This page intentionally left blank CHAPTER 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works Most of what goes wrong in using a thesis is the result of a writer leaping too quickly to a generalization that would do as a thesis, and then treating evidence only as something to be mustered in support of that idea. This chapter is about evidence—what it is, what it is meant to do, and how to recognize when you are using it well. The chapter’s overall argument is that you should use evidence to test, refine, and develop your ideas, rather than just to prove that they are correct. The chapter begins by analyzing two common problems: claims without evidence (unsubstantiated claims) and evidence without claims (pointless evidence). A claim is an assertion that you make about your evidence—an
  • 295. idea that you be- lieve the evidence supports. The governing claim in a paper is the thesis. In analytical writing, the thesis is a theory that explains what some feature or features of a subject mean. When the material of your subject, your data, is used to demonstrate the truth or falsity of a particular claim, that material becomes evidence. This chapter opens Unit II, which is about writing the thesis- driven essay. Unit I demonstrates how to make observations about data and reason to implications and conclusions, but it does not take this process to the point at which a writer settles on a formal claim (a thesis) and uses it to govern the development of an entire essay. In this unit we demonstrate how to employ the analytical methods (tools) offered in Unit I—especially Notice and Focus, The Method, the So what? question, and Dif- ference within Similarity—to find, formulate, and evolve a thesis. This unit’s approach to essay organization and the thesis may differ from what you’re used to. Writing Analytically is most unlike other writing texts in its treatment of the thesis. We argue that the problem with much writing of the sort that people are taught to do in school is that it arrives prematurely at an idea that the writer then “proves” by attaching it to a number of examples—a pattern we call 1 on 10 (see Chapter 8). Textbooks about writing tend to present thesis
  • 296. statements as the finished products of an act of thinking—as inert statements that writers should march through their papers from beginning to end. As we show in Chapters 8 and 9, the relationship between thesis and evidence is far more fluid and dynamic. In most good writing, the thesis grows and changes in response to evidence, even in final drafts. 109 For now, though, we delay further discussion of the thesis to focus first on evidence—the stuff that generates thesis statements and responds to them. THE FUNCTION OF EVIDENCE A common assumption about evidence is that it is “the stuff that proves I’m right.” Although this way of thinking about evidence is not wrong, it is much too limited. Corroboration (proving the validity of a claim) is one of the functions of evidence, but not the only one. It helps to remember that the word prove actually comes from a Latin verb mean- ing “to test.” The noun form of prove, proof, has two meanings: (1) evidence sufficient to establish a thing as true or believable and (2) the act of testing for truth or believ- ability. When you operate on the first definition of proof alone,
  • 297. you are far more likely to seek out evidence that supports only your point of view, ignoring or dismissing other evidence that could lead to a different and possibly better idea. You might also assume that you can’t begin writing until you have arrived at an idea you’re convinced is right because only then could you decide which evidence to include. Both of these practices close down your thinking instead of leading you to a more open process of formulating and testing ideas. The advantage to following the second definition of the word proof—in the sense of testing—is that you are better able to negotiate among competing points of view. Doing so predisposes your readers to consider what you have to say because you are offering them not the thoughts a person has had, but rather a person in the act of thinking. Writing well means sharing your thought process with your readers, telling them why you believe the evidence means what you say it does. THE MISSING CONNECTION: LINKING EVIDENCE AND CLAIMS Evidence rarely, if ever, can be left to speak for itself. The word evident comes from a Latin verb meaning “to see.” To say that the truth of a statement is self-evident means that it does not need to be proved because its truth can be plainly seen by all. When a writer leaves evidence to speak for itself, he or she is assuming that it
  • 298. can be interpreted in only one way, and that readers necessarily will think as the writer does. But the relationship between evidence and claims is rarely self- evident: that relationship virtually always needs to be explained. One of the five analytical moves discussed in Chapter 1 was making the implicit explicit. This move is critical for working with evidence. The thought connections that have occurred to you about what the evidence means will not automatically occur to others. (See Figure 7.1.) Persuasive writing always makes the connections between evidence and claim overt. Writers who think that evidence speaks for itself often do very little with their evidence except put it next to their claims: “The party was terrible: there was no alcohol”—or, alternatively, “The party was great: there was no alcohol.” Just juxtapos- ing the evidence with the claim leaves out the thinking that connects them, thereby 110 Chapter 7 What Evidence Is and How It Works Distinguishing Evidence from Claims 111 implying that the logic of the connection is obvious. But even for readers prone to agreeing with a given claim, simply pointing to the evidence is
  • 299. not enough. Of course, before you can attend to the relationship between evidence and claims, you first have to make sure to include both of them. Let’s pause to take a look at how to remedy the problems posed by leaving one out: unsubstantiated claims and pointless evidence. “BECAUSE I SAY SO”: UNSUBSTANTIATED CLAIMS Problem: Making claims that lack supporting evidence. Solution : Learn to recognize and support unsubstantiated assertions. Unsubstantiated claims occur when a writer concentrates only on conclusions, omit- ting the evidence that led to them. At the opposite extreme, pointless evidence results when a writer offers a mass of detail attached to an overly general claim. Both of these problems can be solved by offering readers the evidence that led to the claim and explain- ing how the evidence led there. The word unsubstantiated means “without substance.” An
  • 300. unsubstantiated claim is not necessarily false; it just offers none of the concrete “stuff” upon which the claim is based. When a writer makes an unsubstantiated claim, he or she has assumed that readers will believe it just because the writer put it out there. Perhaps more important, unsubstantiated claims deprive you of details. If you lack some actual “stuff” to analyze, you can easily get stuck in a set of abstractions, which tend to overstate your position and leave your readers wondering exactly what you mean. The further away your language is from the concrete, from references to physical detail—things that you can see, hear, count, taste, smell, and touch—the more abstract it becomes. DISTINGUISHING EVIDENCE FROM CLAIMS To check your drafts for unsubstantiated assertions, you first have to know how to recognize them. It is sometimes difficult to separate facts from judgments, data from
  • 301. interpretations of the data. Writers who aren’t practiced in this skill can believe that they are offering evidence when they are really offering only unsubstantiated claims. In your own reading and writing, pause once in a while to label the sentences of a paragraph as either evidence (E) or claims (C). What happens if we try to categorize the sentences of the following paragraph in this way? Evidence Claim Crucial site of connection FIGURE 7.1 Linking Evidence and Claims The owners are ruining baseball in America. Although they claim they are losing money, they are really just being greedy. A few years ago, they even fired the commissioner, Fay Vincent, be- cause he took the players’ side. Baseball is a sport, not a business, and it is a sad fact that it is
  • 302. being threatened by greedy businessmen. The first and last sentences of the paragraph are claims. They draw conclusions about as yet unstated evidence that the writer needs to provide. The middle two sen- tences are harder to classify. If particular owners have said publicly that they are losing money, the existence of the owners’ statements is a fact. But the writer moves from evi- dence to unsubstantiated claims when he suggests that the owners are lying about their financial situation and are doing so because of their greed. Similarly, it is a fact that commissioner Fay Vincent was fired, but it is only an assertion that he was fired “be- cause he took the players’ side,” an unsubstantiated claim. Although many of us might be inclined to accept some version of this claim as true, we should not be asked to accept his opinion as self-evident truth. What is the evidence in support of the claim? What are the reasons for believing that the evidence means what he says it does?
  • 303. GIVING EVIDENCE A POINT: MAKING DETAILS SPEAK Problem: Presenting a mass of evidence without explaining how it relates to the claims.